Skip to main content

Full text of "The Heimskringla"

See other formats 


This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project 
to make the world's books discoverable online. 

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject 
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books 
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover. 

Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the 
publisher to a library and finally to you. 

Usage guidelines 

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the 
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to 
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. 

We also ask that you: 

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for 
personal, non-commercial purposes. 

+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine 
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the 
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. 

+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find 
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. 

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just 
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other 
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of 
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner 
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe. 

About Google Book Search 

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers 
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web 



at |http : //books . google . com/ 



m''¥. 




'iti i ' liu a^mm^i^UMm^imi 



r 



THE HEIMSKRINGLA; 



OB, 



CHRONICLE 




THE KINGS OF NORWAY. 



TRANSLATED 



I 



FROM THE ICELANDIC OF SNORK)J STURLESON, 



WLiib H ^elfminarB iDiddettBtioitt 



BY 



SAMUEL LAING, ESQ. 

AUTHOR or " A BESIDKMCE IN NOBWAT," " A TOUB IK SWEDEN," 
" NOTES OF A TBAVELLEB,** ETC. 



IN THBEE VOLUMES. 

VOL. n. 



LONDON: 



PRINTED FOB, 



LONGMAN, BROWN, GREEN, AND LONGMANS, 

PATEBN08TEB-B0W. 

1844. ^?^^* - ; ■ / '^; ^'^ 



* » 
• • • 



Lovoon: 
Printed by A. Spottiswoodk, 
. .Newr Street- Square. 



CONTENTS 



THE SECOND VOLUME. 



SAGA vn. 
Saga of King Olaf HaraJdsson the Saint 

SAGA vm. 

Saga of Magnus the Good - 



- SS9 



THE 

HEIMSKRINGLA; 

OB, 

CHRONICLE OF THE KINGS OF NORWAY. 



^ VII. 

SAGA OF KING OLAF HARALDSSON THE SAINT .♦ sagavii. 

Olap, Harald Graenske's son, was brought up by his Chaptkr 
stepfather Sigurd Syr and his mother Aasta. Rane of saint 
the Far-travelled lived in the house of Aasta, and ^^*f^ 
fostered this Olaf Haraldsson. Olaf came early to up. 
manhood, was handsome in countenance, middle- 
sized in growth, and was even when very young of 
good understanding and ready speech. Sigurd his 
stepfather was a careful householder, who kept his 
people closely to their work, and often went about 
himself to inspect his corn-rigs and meadow-land, the 
cattle, and also the smith-work, or whatsoever his 
people had on hand to do. 

It happened one day this King Sigurd wanted to Chapter 
ride from home, but there was nobody about the ofoiaf 
house; so he told his step-son Olaf to saddle his s'igu^^s^r 
horse. Olaf went to the goats' pen, took out the he- 

♦ King Olaf the Saint reigned from about the year 1015 to 1030. 
The death of King Olaf Tryggvesson was in the year 1000; and Earl 
Eric held the goyernment for the Danish and Swedish kings about fif- 
teen years. 

VOL. II. B 

r 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VII. 



Chaftkr 
III. 
Of King 
Olaf *s ac- 
complish- 
ments. 



Chaffer 
IV. 
Beginning 
of King 
Olaf *« war 
expedi- 
tions. 



goat that was the largest, led him forth, and put the 
king's saddle on him, and then went in and told King 
Sigurd he had saddled his riding horse. Now when 
King Sigurd came out and saw what Olaf had done, 
he said, " It is easy to see that thou wilt little regard 
my orders ; and thy mother will think it right that I 
order thee to do nothing that is against thy own in- 
clination. I see well enough that we are of diflferent 
dispositions, and that thou art far more proud than I 
am." Olaf answered little, but went his way laughing. 

When Olaf Haraldsson grew up he was not tall, 
but middle-sized in height, although very thick, and 
of good strength. He had light brown hair, and a 
broad face which was white and red. He had parti- 
cularly fine eyes which were beautiful and piercing, 
so that one was afraid to look him in the face when 
he was angry. Olaf was very expert in all bodUy 
exercises, understood well to handle his bow, and 
was distinguishsd particularly in throwing his spear 
by hand : he was a great swimmer, and very handy, 
and very exact and knowing in all kinds of smith- 
work, whether he himself or others made the thing. 
He was distinct and acute in conversation, and was 
soon perfect in understanding and strength. He was 
beloved by his friends and acquaintances, eager in his 
amusements, and one who always liked to be the first, 
as it was suitable he should be from his birth and 
dignity. He was. called Olaf the Thick. 

Olaf Haraldsson was twelve years old when he, 
for the first time, went on board a ship of war. His 
mother Aasta got Rane, who was called the foster- 
father of kings, to command a ship of war and take 
Olaf under his charge ; for Rane had often been on 
war expeditions. When Olaf in this way got a ship 
and men, the crew gave him the title of king ; for it 
was the custom that those commanders of troops 
who were of kingly descent, on going out upon a 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 6 

viking cruise, received the title of king immediately, saga va 
although they had no land or kingdom. Kane sat at 
the helm ; and some say that Olaf himself was but a 
common rower, although he was king of the men-at- 
arms. They steered east along the land, and came 
first to Denmark. So says Ottar Swarte, in his lay 
which he made about King Olaf: — 

'^ Young was the king when from his home 
He first hegan in ships to roam^ 

His ocean-steed to ride 

To Denmark o'er the tide. 
Well exercised art thou in truth — 
In manhood's earnest work^ hrave youth ! 

Out from the distant north 

Mighty hast thou come forth." 

Towards autumn he sailed eastward to the Swedish 
dominions, and there harried and burnt all the 
country round ; for he thought he had good cause of 
hostility against the Swedes, as they killed his father 
Harald. Ottar Swarte says distinctly that he came 
from the east, out by way of Denmark : — 

" Thy ship from shore to shore. 
With many a well-plied oar. 
Across the Baltic foam is dancing, — 
Shields, and spears, and helms glancing! 
Hoist high the swelling sail 
To catch the freshening gale ! 
There's food for the raven-flight 
'Where thy sail-winged ship shall light : 
Thy landing-tread 
The people dread ; 
And the wolf howls for a feast 
On the shore-side in the east." 

The same autumn Olaf had his first battle at Chapter 
Sotholm, which lies in the Swedish skerry circle.* He oiafs'first 
fought there with some vikings, whose leader was ^*"^®' 

♦ The coast of Sweden and Norway is surrounded hy a helt of rocks 
and islets, within which there is a smooth-water passage generally 
along the coast. This circle or belt is called the Skiergard — the 
skerry-guard, — being a protection of rocks or skerries against the force 
of the ocean. 

B 2 



4 CHRONICLE OF THE 

9AOA VJL Soto. Olaf had much fewer men, but his ships were 
larger, and he laid his ships between some blind 
rocks, which made it difficult for the vikings to get 
alongside; and Olaf's men threw grappling irons 
into the ships which came nearest, drew them up to 
their own vessels, and cleared them of men. The 
vikings took to flight after losing many men. Sig- 
vat the scald tells of this fight in the lay in which 
he reckons up King Olaf 's battles : — 

*' They launch his ship where waves are foaming — ► 

To the sea shore 

Bore mast and oar, 
And sent him o'er the seas a-roaming. 
Where did the sea-king first draw hlood? 

In the hattle shock 

At Soto's rock: 
The wolves howl over their fresh food." 



Ch AFTER 

VI. 
Foray in 
Sweden. 



King Olaf steered thereafter eastwards to Sweden, 
and into the Log (the Maelare lake), and ravaged the 
land on both sides. He sailed all the way up to Sigtun, 
and laid his ships close to the old Sigtun. The Swedes 
say the stone-li^aps are still to be seen which Olaf had 
laid under the ends of the gangways from the shore to 
the ships. When autumn was advanced, Olaf Ha- 
raldsson heard that Olaf the Swedish king was assem- 
bling an army, and also that he had laid iron chains 
across Stokkesund (the channel between the Maelare 
lake and the sea), and had laid troops there; for the 
Swedish king thought that Olaf Haraldsson would be 
kept in there till frost came, and he thought httle of 
Olaf 's force, knowing he had but few people. Now 
when King Olaf Haraldsson came to Stokkesund he 
could not get through, as there was a castle west of 
the sound, and men-at-arms lay on the south; and 
he heard that the Swedish king was come there with 
a great army and many ships. He therefore dug a 
canal across the flat land Agnafet out to the sea. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 

Over all Swithiod* all the running waters fall into saga vit. 
the Malaere lake; but the only outlet of it to the seals 
so small that many rivers are wider, and when much 
rain or snow falls the water rushes in a great cata- 
ract out by Stokkesund, and the lake rises high and 
floods the land. It fell heavy rain just at this time ; 
and as the canal was dug out to the sea, the water 
and stream rushed into it. Then Olaf had all the 
rudders unshipped, and hoisted all sail aloft. It was 
blowing a strong breeze astern, and they steered 
with their oars, and the ships came in a rush over all 
the shallows, and got into the sea without any damage. 
Now went the Swedes to their king, Olaf, and told 
him that Olaf the Thick had slipped out to sea ; on 
which the king was enraged against those who should 
have watched that Olaf did not get away. This pas- 
sage has since been called King's Sound ; but large 
vessels cannot pass through it, unless the waters are 
very high. Some relate that the Swedes were aware 
that Olaf had cut across the tongue of land, and that 
the water was falling out that way; and they flocked 
to it with the intention to hinder Olaf from getting 
away, but the water undermined the banks on each 
side so that they fell in with the people, and many 
were drowned : but the Swedes contradict this a5 a 
false report, and deny the loss of people. The king 
sailed to Gotland in harvest, and prepared to plunder ; 
but the Gotlanders assembled, and sent men to the 
king, offering him a scatt. The king found this 
would suit him, and he received the scatt, and re- 
mained there all winter. So says Ottar Swarte: — 

'^ Thou seaman-prince ! thy men are paid : 
The scatt on Gotlanders is laid ; 



* Swithiod^ the country about Upsal, was Sweden Proper, and distinct 
from Gotland and other earldoms subject to Sweden. Scania belonged 
to Denmark. 

B 3 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA Vll' 



Young man or old 

To our seamen bold 
Must pay^ to save his head : 

The Yngling princes fled, 

Eysyssel people bled : 
Who can't defend the wealth they have 
Must die, or share with the rover brave.'* 



Chapter It is related here that King Olaf, when spring set 



VII. 



battle. 



The second ^7 Sailed east to Eysyssel, and landed and plundered : 
theEsyssel men came down to the strand and gave him 
battle. King Olaf gained the victory, pursued those 
who fled, and laid waste the land with fire and sword. 
It is told that when King Olaf first came to Eysyssel 
they oflFered him scatt, and when the scatt was to be 
brought down to the strand the king came to meet it 
with an armed force, and that was not what the 
bonders there expected; for they had brought no 
scatt, but only their weapons with which they fought 
against the king, as before related. So says Sigvat 
the scald : — 

'^ With much deceit and bustle 
To the heath of Eysyssel 
The bonders brought the king. 
To get scatt at their weapon-thing. 
But Olaf was too wise 
To be taken by surprise: 
Their legs scarce bore them off 
O'er the common fast enough." 

After this they sailed to Finland and plundered 
there, and went up the country. All the people fled 
to the forest, and they had emptied their houses of all 
household goods. The king went far up the country, 
and through some woods, and came to some dwellings 
in a valley called Herdal, — where, however, they made 
but small booty, and saw no people ; and as it was 
getting late in the day, the king turned back to his 
ships. Now when they came into the woods again 
people rushed upon them from all quarters, and made 
a severe attack. The king told his men to cover 
themselves with their shields, but before they got 



Chapter 

VIII. 
The third 
battle. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 7 

out of the woods he lost many people, and many were saga vii. 
wounded ; but at last, late in the evening, he got to 
the ships. The Finlanders conjured up in the night, 
by their witchcraft, a dreadftil storm and bad wea- 
ther on the sea ; but the king ordered the anchors to 
be weighed and sail hoisted, and beat off all night to 
the 'outside of the land. The king's luck prevailed 
more than the Finlanders' witchcraft ; for he had the 
luck to beat round the Balagard's-side* in the night, 
and so got out to sea. So says Sigvat : — 

** The third fight was at Herdal, where 
The men of Finland met in war 
The hero of the royal race. 
With ringing sword-hlades face to face. 
Off Balagarda's shore the waves 
Ran hollow ; hut the sea-king saves 
His hard-pressed ship, and gains the lee 
Of the east coast through the wild sea.'* 

King Olaf sailed from thence to Denmark, where Chapt«» 
he met Thorkel the Tall, brother of Earl Sigvald, and The founh 
went into partnership with him; for he was just ^*^^^,^^ 
ready to set out on a cruise. They sailed south- 
wards to the Jutland coast, to a place called Su- 
durvikf, where they overcame many viking ships. 
The vikings, who usually have many people to com- 
mand, give themselves the title of kings, although 
they have no lands to rule over. King Olaf went 
into battle with them, and it was severe ; but King 
Olaf gained the victory, and a great booty. So says 
Sigvat : — 

'^Hark! hark! The war-shout 
Through Sudurvik rings. 
And the vikings hrings out 
To fight the two kings. 



* BalagardVside is supposed to have heen the coast between Abo and 
Helsingfors; and Herdal some valley in that neighbourhood. 

f Sudurvik is no doubt Syndervik in the isle Holmland, in Rlngkio- 
bing fiord in North Jutland. 

B 4 



8 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



Chapter 
X. 

The fifth 
battle in 
Friesland. 



SAGA viT. Great honour^ I'm told, 

Won these vikings so bold: 
But their bold fight was vain, 
For the two brave kings gain." 

King Olaf sailed from thence south to Friesland, 
and lay under the strand of Kinlimma * in dreadful 
weather. The king landed with his men; but the 
people of the country rode down to the strand against 
them, and he fought them. So says Sigvat : — 

<' Under Kinlimma's cliff, 
This battle is the fifth. 
The brave sea-rovers stand 
AU on the glittering sand; 
And down the horsemen ride 
To the edge of the rippling tide : 
But Olaf taught the peasant band 
To know the weight of a viking's hand." 

Chapter The king Sailed from thence westward to England. 
The death It was then the case that the Danish king, Swend 
sJ^ld^ Forked Beard, was at that time in England with a 
Tweskag. Danish army, and had been fixed there for some time, 
and had seized upon King Ethelred's kingdom. The 
Danes had spread themselves so widely over England, 
that it was come so far that King Ethelred had de- 
parted from the country, and had gone south to 
Valland.f The same autumn that King Olaf came 
to England, it happened that King Swend died sud- 
denly in the night in his bed J ; and it is said by 
Englishmen that Edmund the Saint killed him, in 
the same way that the holy Mercurius had killed the 
the apostate Julian. When Ethelred, the king of 
the English, heard this in Flanders, he returned di- 
rectly to England ; and no sooner was he come back, 

* Kinlimma-side is a part of the coast of Old Friesland^ now North 
Holland, supposed to have been the original seat of the Cimbri. The 
name appears to be preserved in Kinnimer-land, partly reckoned in 
North Holland and partly in South Holland. 

t Valland. See note. Chapter XXIV. of Harald Haarfager's Saga. 

i King Swein died, according to the Saxon Chronicle, at Candlemas, 
1014. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 9 

than he sent an invitation to all the men who would saga vn. 
enter into his pay, to join him in recovering the coun- 
try. Then many people flocked to him ; and among 
others, came King Olaf with a great troop of North- 
men to his aid. They steered first to London, and 
sailed into the Thames with their fleet; but the 
Danes had a castle within. On the other side of the 
river is a great trading place, which is called Sudr- 
viki.* There the Danes had raised a great work, 
dug large ditches, and within had built a bulwark 
of stone, timber, and turf, where they had stationed 
a strong army. King Ethelred ordered a great as- 
sault; but the Danes defended themselves bravely, 
and King Ethelred could make nothing of it. ' Be- 
tween the castle f and Southwark there was a bridge, 
so broad that two waggons could pass each other 
upon it. On the bridge were raised barricades, both 
towers and wooden parapets, in the direction of the 
river J, which were nearly breast high; and under 
the bridge were piles driven into the bottom of the 
river. Now when the attack was made the troops 
stood on the bridge every where, and defended them- 
selves. King Ethelred was very anxious to get pos- 
session of the bridge, and he called together all the 
chiefs to consult how they should get the bridge broken 
down. Then said King Olaf he would attempt to lay 
his fleet alongside of it, if the other ships would do 
the same. It was then determined in this council that 
they should lay their war forces under the bridge; 
and each made himself ready with ships and men. 

King Olaf ordered great platforms of floating wood Chapter 
to be tied together with hazel bands, and for this he The sixth 
took down old houses ; and with these, as a roof, he ^^^^ 
covered over his ships so widely, that it reached over 

* Sudrviki — Southwark. 

f On the site, probably, of the Tower of London. 

J That is, across the bridge. 



10 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA vij. the ships' sides. Under this screen he set pillars so 
high and stout, that there both was room for swing- 
ing their swords, and the roofs were strong enough 
to withstand the stones cast down upon them. Now 
when the fleet and men were ready, they rowed up 
along the river; but when they came near the bridge, 
there were cast down upon them so many stones and 
missile weapons, such as arrows and spears, that 
neither helmet nor shield could hold out against it ; 
and the ships themselves were so greatly damaged, 
that many retreated out of it. But King Olaf, and 
the Northmen's fleet with him, rowed quite up under 
the bridge, laid their cables around the piles which 
supported it, and then rowed off with all the ships as 
hard as they could down the stream. The piles were 
thus shaken in the bottom, and were loosened under 
the bridge. Now as the armed troops stood thick 
of men upon the bridge, and there were likewise 
many heaps of stones and other weapons upon it, and 
the piles under it being loosened and broken, the 
bridge gave way; and a great part of the men upon 
it fell into the river, and all the others fled, some 
into the castle, some into Southwark. Thereafter 
Southwark was stormed and taken. Now when the 
people in the castle saw that the river Thames was 
mastered, and that they could not hinder the passage 
of ships up into the country, they became afraid, 
surrendered the tower, and took Ethelred to be their 
king. So says Ottar Swarte : — 

'^ London Bridge is broken down, — 
Gold is won, and bright renown. 

Shields resounding, 

War-horns sounding, 
Hildur shouting in the din! 

Arrows singing, 

Mail-coats ringing — 
Odin makes our Olaf win ! ** 

And he also composed these : — 



KINGS OF NORWAY, 11 

^^ King Ethelred has found a friend : saga vii. 

Brave Olaf will his throne defend — ""^ 

In bloody fight 

Maintain his right, 

Win back his land 

With blood-red hand. 
And Edmund's son upon his throne replace— 
Edmund, the star of every royal race!'* 

Sigvat also relates as follows : — 

" At London Bridge stout Olaf gave 
Odin's law to his war-men brave — 
' To win or die ! ' 
And their foemen fly. 
Some by the dyke-side refuge gain— 
Some in their tents on Southwark plain ! 
This sixth attack 
Brought victory back." 

Bang Olaf passed all the winter with King Ethelred, Chapter 
and had a great battle at Hringmara Heath* in Ulf- The 
kel's land, the domain which Ulf kel Snelling at that ^^^ 
time held; and here again the king was victorious. 
So Says Sigvald the scald : — 

« To Ulfkel's land came Olaf bold, 
A seventh sword-thing he would hold. 
The race of Ella filled the plain — 
Few of them slept at home again ! 

Hringmara heath 

Was a bed of death : 

Haarfager*s heir 

Dealt slaughter there." 

And Ottar sings of this battle thus : — 

" From Hringmar field 

The chime of war, 
Sword striking shield. 

Rings from afar. 
The living fly ; 

The dead piled high 
The moor enrich: • 

Red runs the ditch." 

* This is an unknown place, Hringmaraheidi ; but must be in East 
Angeln, as it is called Ulf kel Snelling*s land, and he appears to have 
been chief of the part of England called East Angeln occupied by the 
Danes. Ashdown in Kent, and Assington in Essex, have each been 
taken by antiquaries for this battle-field. 



12 CHKONICLE OF THE 

sAGAvii. The country far around was then brought in sub- 
jection to King Ethelred; but the Thingmen* and the 
Danes held many castles, besides a great part of the 
country. 
Chaptkb King Olaf was commander of all the forces when 
Eighth ind they went against Canterbury; and they fought there 
tCof oui ^^*^^ *^^y *^^^ *^^ town, killing many people and 
burning the castle. So says Ottar Swarte : — 

'' All in the grey of morn 

Broad Canterbury's forced. 
Black smoke from house-roofs borne 

Hides fire that does its worst; 
And many a man laid low 
By the battle-axe's blow. 
Waked by the Norsemen's cries, 
Scarce had time to rub his eyes." 

Sigvald reckons this King Olaf 's eighth battle : — 

" Of this eighth battle I can tell 
How it was fought, and what befell. 

The castle tower . 

With all his power 

He could not take. 

Nor would forsake. 

The Perthmenf fought. 

Nor quarter sought ; 

By death or flight 

They left the fight. 
Olaf could not this earl stout 
From Canterbury quite drive out." 

At this time King Olaf was entrusted with the 
whole land defence of England, and he sailed round 

♦ Thing-men were hired men-at-arms ; called Thing-men probably 
from being men above the class of thralls or unfree men, and entitled 
to appear at Things, as being udal-born to land at home. They appear 
to have hired themselves out as hird-men ; that is, court-men, or the 
body-guard of the kings. The Varingers at the court of Constanti- 
nople were of this description. The victories of King Swein and of 
Caimte the Great have been ascribed to the superiority of these men, 
who formed bodies of standing troops, over levies of peasantry. 
^ j* Perthshire men, as hired men-at-arms, are alluded to here by 
Sigvald; and allusions to hired men from odier countries fighting with 
King Nokve at the battle of Hafursfiord, against Harald Haarfager, is 
made by the scald Hornklofe. 



KINGS OF NOI^WAY. 13 

the land with his ships of war. He laid his ships at saga vil 
land at Nyamode*, where the trogps of the Thing- 
men were, and gave them battle and gained the vic- 
tory. So says Sigvald the scald : — 

'^ The youthful king stained red the hair 
Of Angeln men, and dyed his spear 
At Newport in their hearts' dark hlood; 
And where the Danes the thickest stood — 
Where the shrill storm round Olaf 's head 
Of spear and arrow thickest fled. 
There thickest lay the Thingmen dead ! 
Nine hattles now of Olaf hold. 
Battle hy hatde, I have told." 

King Olaf then scoured all over the country, taking 
scatt of the people, and plundering where it was re- 
fused. So says Ottar: — 

^^ The English race could not resist thee. 
With money thou madest them assist thee 
Unsparingly thou madest them pay 
A scatt to diee in every way : 
Money, if money could be got — 
Goods, cattle, household gear, if not. 
Thy gathered spoil, borne to the strand. 
Was the best wealth of English land." 

Olaf remained here for three years. 

The third year King Ethelred died, and his sons Chamer 
Edmund and Edward took the government. Then xhi^Tnth 
Olaf sailed southwards out to sea, and had a battle ^"^*- 
at Ringsfiord t, and took a castle situated upon a hill 
where vikings resorted, and burnt the castle. So 
says Sigvalt the scald : — 

" Of the tenth battle now I tell, 
Where it was fought, and what befell. 



* Nyamode is supposed to be Newport in the Isle of Wight; more 
likely New Romney, the river-mouth of the Rother in Kent. 

f Ringsfiordr, GrislopoUa, Fetlafidrdr, Selliopolla, Gunvalldsborg^ are 
localities in Valland, — that is, on the west coast of France, between the 
Seine and the Garonne, — but which antiquaries do not pretend to fix. 
The *^ castle on the heights occupied by vikings " may be Mont St 
Michel, and the Karlsar of Chapter XVII. may be the Garonne; but 
these are mere conjectures of antiquaries on the context. 



14 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. Up on the hill in Ringfiord fair 

A robber nest hung in the air: 

The people followed our brave chief, 
And razed the tower of the viking thief. 
Such rock and tower, such roosting place^ 
Was ne'er since held by the roving race.*' 

^xvi"* Then King Olaf proceeded westwards to Grislopol*, 

Eleventh, and fought there with vikings at WiUiamsby; and 

thirteenth there also King Olaf gained the victory. So says Sig- 

b*"J«^ vat: — 

•' The eleventh battle now I tell, 
Where it was fought, and what befell. 
At Grislopol our young fir's name 
O'ertopped the forest trees in fame : 
Brave Olaf's name — nought else was heard 
But Olaf 's name, and arm, and sword. 
Of three great earls, I have heard say. 
His sword crushed helm and head that day." 

Next he fought westward on Fetlafiord, as Sigvat 
tells : — 

'' The twelfth fight was at Fetlafiord, 
Where Olaf *s honour-seeking sword 
Gave the wild wolf's devouring teeth 
A feast of warriors doomed to death." 

From thence King Olaf sailed southwards to Salio- 
pol, where he had a battle. He took there a castle 
called Gunvaldsburg, which was very large and old. 
He also made prisoner the earl who ruled over the 
castle, and who was calle4 Geirfidar. After a con- 
ference with the men of the castle, he laid a scatt 
upon the town and earl, as ransom, of twelve thou- 
sand gold shillings ; which was also paid by those on 
whom it was imposed. So says Sigvat : — 

*' The thirteenth battle now I tell. 
Where it was fought, and what befell. 
In Saliopol was fought the fray^ 
And many did not survive the day. 
The king went early to the shore. 
To Gunvaldsburg's old castle-tower; 
And a rich earl was taken there. 
Whose name, I hear, was Geirfidar.*' 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 15 

Thereafter King Olaf steered with his fleet west- saoajth. 
ward to Karlsa*, and tarried there and had a fight. Chapter 
And whUe King Olaf was lying in Karlsa river wait- FourJLnth 
ing a wind, and intending to sail up to Norvasundf, battle, and 
and then on to the land of Jerusalem, he dreamt a re- ours 
markable dream — that there came to him a great and ^'®*™- 
important man, but of a terrible appearance withal, 
who spoke to him, and told him to give up his pur- 
pose of proceeding to that land. " Return back to 
thy udal, for thou shalt be king over Norway for 
ever." He interpreted this dream to mean that he 
should be king over the country, and his posterity 
after him, for a long time. 

After this appearance to him he turned about, and Chaptkr 
came to PoitouJ, where he plundered and burnt Fifteenth 
a merchant town called Varrande. Of this Ottar *^"'®' 
speaks: — 

" Our young king^ blythe and gay. 
Is foremost in the fray: 
Poitou he plunders, Tu8kland§ burns,— 
He fights and wins where'er he turns." 

And also Sigvald says : — 

" The Norseman's king is on his cruise. 

His blue steel staining. 

Rich booty gaining. 
And all men trembling at the news. 
The Norseman's king is up the Loire : 

Rich Parthenay 

In ashes lay ; 
Far inland reached the Norseman's spear." 

King Olaf had been two summers and one winter Chapter 
in the west in Valland on this cruise; and thirteen ofthe ' 
years had now passed since the fall of King Olaf ^\^^ 
Tryggvesson. During this time earls had ruled over 

* Karlsa, or Karlsriow, is not known; supposed to be the Garonne, 
t Norvasund is the Straits of Gibraltar. 

^ Peitoland is Poitou. Varrande is supposed to be the town Par- 
theny, 

§ Tuskaland is the land of Tours on the Loire. 



16 CHRONICLE OF THE 

sAGAvn. Norway; first Hakon's sons Eric and Swend, and 
afterwards Eric's sons Hakon and Swend. Hakon 
was a sister's son of King Canute, the son of Swend. 
During this time there were two earls in Valland*, 
William and Robert ; their father was Richard earl of 
Rouen. They ruled over Normandy, f Their sister 
was Queen Emma, whom the English king Ethelred 
had married ; and their sons were Edmund, Ed- 
ward the Good, Edwy, and Edgar. Richard the 
earl of Rouen was a son of Richard the son of 
William Long Spear who was the son of Gange 
Rolfe, the earl who first conquered Normandy ; and 
he again was a son of Rognvald the Mighty, earl 
of More, as before related. From Gange Rolf are 
descended the earls of Rouen, who have long 
reckoned themselves of kin to the chiefs in Norway, 
and hold them in such respect that they always were 
the greatest friends of the Northmen; and every 
Northman found a friendly country in Normandy, if 
he required it. To Normandy King Olaf came in 
autumn, and remained all winter in the river Seine J 
in good peace and quiet. 
Chawer After Olaf Tryggvesson's faU, Earl Eric gave 
ofEinar pcacc to Eiuar Tambarskelver, the son of Eindred 
^Xen' Styrkarsson ; and Einar went north with the earl to 
Norway. It is said that Einar was the strongest 
man and the best archer that ever was in Norway. 
His shooting was sharp beyond all others ; for with a 
blunt arrow he shot through a raw, soft ox-hide, 

* Valland^ as before noticed, means the whole west coast of France. 

t Normandy was that part of Valland formerly called Neustria ; 
which^ about the year 912, was ceded by Charles ibe Simple to Rolf 
Ganger^ who gave it the name of Normandy, from its being occupied 
by the Northmen. The chief town was Ruda or Rudaburg, now 
Rouen; from which the earls of Normandy were called Ruda-jarlar — 
the Rouen earls, not earls of Normandy. The tide appears to have 
been personal, at least among the Northmen, not attached to land pos- 
sessing peculiar rights or burdens as an earldom. 

I Signa is evidently the river Seine. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 17 

hanging over a beam. He was better than any man saga vil 
at running in snow-shoes, was a great man at all 
exercises, was of high family, and rich. The earls 
Eric and Swend married their sister Bergliot to 
Einar. Their son was named Eindred. The earls 
gave Einar great fiefs in Orkedal, so that he was one 
of the most powerful and able men in Drontheim 
country, and was also a great Mend of the earls, and 
a great support and aid to them. 

When Olaf Tryggvesson ruled over Norway, he ^x^* 
gave his brother-in-law Erling half of the land scatt, OfErUng 
and royal revenues between the Naze and Sogn. ^^**^s^°- 
His other sister he married to the Earl Rongvald 
Ulfsson, who long ruled over West Gotland. Rogn- 
vald's father, Ulf, was a brother of Sigrid the 
Haughty, the mother of Olaf the Swedish king. 
Earl Eric was ill pleased that Erling Skialgsaon had 
so large a dominion, and he took to himself all the 
king's estates, which King Olaf had given to Erling. 
But Erling levied, as before, all the land scatt in Ro- 
galand; and thus the inhabitants had often to pay 
him the land scatt, otherwise he laid waste their 
land. The earl made little of the business, for no 
bailiff of his could live there, and the earl could only 
come there in guest-quarters, when he had a great 
many people with him. So says Sigvat : — 

'^ Olaf the king 
Thought the bonder Erling 
A man who would grace 
His own royal race. 
One sister the king 
Gave the bonder Erling; 
And one to an earl, 
And she saved him in peril." 

Earl Eric did not venture to fight with Erling, be- 
cause he had very powerful and very many friends, 
and was himself rich and popular, and kept always 
as many retainers about him as if he held a king's 

VOL. II. c 



18 CHRONICLE OP THE 

SAGA viL court. Erling was often out in summer on plunder- 
ing expeditions, and procured for himself means of 
living; for he continued his usual way of high and 
splendid living, although now he had fewer and less 
convenient fiefs than in the time of his brother-in- 
law King Olaf Tryggvesson. Erling was one of the 
handsomest, largest, and strongest men ; a better war- 
rior than any other ; and in all exercises he was like 
King Olaf himself. He was, besides, a man of un- 
derstanding, zealous in every thing he undertook, and 
a deadly man at arms. Sigvat talks thus of him : — 

'< No earl or baron^ young or old. 
Match ifvith this bonder brave can hold. 
Mild was brave Erling, all men say. 
When not engaged in bloody fray ; 
His courage he kept hid until 
The fight began, then foremost still 
Erling was seen in war's wild game. 
And famous still is £rling's name.*' 

It was a common saying among the people, that 
Erling had been the most valiant who ever held lands 
under a king in Norway. Erling's and Astrid's chil- 
dren were these — Aslak, Skialg, Sigurd, Lodin, Thorer, 
and Ragnhild, who was married to Thorberg Arneson. 
Erling had always with him 90 free-bom men or 
more; and both winter and summer it was the cus- 
tom in his house to drink at the mid-day meal accord- 
ing to a measure*, but at the night meal there was 
no measure in drinking. When the earl was in the 
neighbourhood he had 300 men or more. He never 
went to sea with less than a fully-manned ship of 20 
benches of rowers. Erling had also a ship of 32 
benches of rowers, which was besides very large for 
that size, and which he used in viking cruises, or on an 

* There were silver studs in a row from the rim to the bottom of the 
drinking horn or cup; and as it went round each drank till the stud 
appeared above the liquor. This was drinking by measure. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 19 

expedition ; and in it there were 200 men at the very saga vil 
least. 

Erling had always at home on his farm 30 slaves. Chapter 
besides other serving-people. He gave his slaves a or the 
certain day's work ; but after it he gave them leisure, ^^^ 
and leave that each should work in the twilight and skiaigsson. 
at night for himself, and as he pleased. He gave 
them arable land to sow com in, and let them apply 
their crops to their own use. He laid upon each a 
certaiQ quantity of labour to work themselves free by 
doing it; and there were many who bought their 
freedom in this way in one year, or in the second 
year, and aU who had any luck could make them- 
selves free within three years. With this money he 
bought other slaves ; and to some of his freed people 
he showed how to work in the herring fishery; to 
others he showed some useful handicraft ; and some 
cleared his outfields, and set up houses. He helped 
all to prosperity. 

When Earl Eric had ruled over Norway for twelve Chaweh 
years, there came a message to him from his brother- bf air"" 
in-law King Canute, the Danish king, that he should ^"*^ 
go with him on an expedition westward to England ; 
for Eric was very celebrated for his campaigns, as he 
had gained the victory in the two hardest engage- 
ments which had ever been fought in the north coun- 
tries. The one was that in which the earls Hakon and 
Eric fought with the Jomsburg vikings ; the other 
that in which Earl Eric fought with King Olaf Tryg- 
gvesson. Thord Kolbeinsson speaks of this : — 

^^ A 8ong of praise 
Again I raise. 
To the earl bold 
The word is told^ 
That Knut the Brave 
His ^d would crave: 
The earl, I knew. 
To friend stands true." 

c 2 



20 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA vit 



Chapter 
XXIV. 
The mur- 
der of 
Edmund. 



The earl would not sleep upon the message of the 
king, but sailed immediately out of the country, 
leaving behind his son Earl Hakon to take care of 
Norway ; and, as he was but seventeen years of age, 
Einar Tambarskelver was to be at his hand to rule 
the country for him. 

Eric met King Canute in England, and was with 
him when he took the castle of London. Earl Eric 
had a battle also to the westward of the castle of 
London, and killed Ulfkel Snelling. So says Thord 
Kolbeinsson : — 

'* West of London town we passed^ 
And our ocean-steeds made fast^ 
And a bloody fight begin, 
England's lands to lose or win. 
Blue sword and shining spear 
Laid Ulf kel's dead corpse there. 
Our Thingmen hear the war-shower sounding 
Of grey arrows from their shields rebounding." 

Earl Eric was a winter in England, and had many 
battles there. The following autumn he intended to 
make a pilgrimage to Rome, but he died in England 
of a bloody flux.* 

King Canute came to England the summer that 
King Ethelred died, and had many battles with 
Ethelred's sons, in which the victory was sometimes 
on one side, sometimes on the other. Then King 
Canute took Queen Emma in marriage; and their 
children were Harald, Hardacanute, and Gunhild. 
King Canute then made an agreement with King 

* King £thelred died 1014; Edmund Ironside^ according to the 
Saxon Chronicle^ in 1016^ at the feast of Saint Andrew. Canute mar- 
ried Emma^ the widow of Ethelred, in 1017. The murder of Edmund 
by Henry Strion is not mentioned in the Saxon Chronicle; but in a 
manuscript in the Cotton Library, quoted by Turner, it is said, " Nocte 
siquidem sequentis diei festivitatis Sancti Andreae Lundonise perimitur 
insidiis Edrici Strioni." This manuscript is stated to be written within 
fifty years of the event. It gives a strong corroboration of the accu- 
racy, as to events, of the saga accounts. Edmund was not the son of 
Emma, but of a former marriage of King Ethelred. Emma was mar- 
ried, in 1002 to Ethelred. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 21 

Edmund, that each of them should have a half of saga vii. 
England. In the same month Henry Strion mur- 
dered King Edmund. King Canute then drove all 
Ethelred's sons out of England. So says Sigvat : — 

'^ Now all the sons of £thelred 
Were either fallen^ or had fled : 
Some slain by Canute, — some, they say. 
To save their lives had run away." 

King Ethelred's sons came to Rouen in Valland Chapter 

XXV 

from England, to their mother's brother, the same ofoiaf' 
summer that King Olaf Haraldsson came from the *"f. ^*^®^- 

, , ,^ , , red s sons. 

west from his viking cruise, and they were all during 
the winter in Normandy together. They made an 
agreement with each other that King Olaf should 
have Northumberland, if they could succeed in 
taking England from the Danes. Therefore, about 
harvest, Olaf sent his foster-father Rane to England 
to collect men-at-arms ; and Ethelred's sons sent to- 
kens to their friends and relations with him. King 
Olaf, besides, gave him much money with him to at- 
tract people to them. Rane was all winter in Eng- 
land, and got promises from many powerful men of 
fidelity, as the people of the country would rather 
have native kings over them ; but the Danish power 
had become so great in England, that all the people 
were brought under their dominion. 

In spring King Olaf and King Ethelred's sons set Chapter 
out together to the west, and came to a place in B^Ueof 
England called Jungofurda*, where they landed with ^^ o^- 
their army, and moved forward against the castle. 
Many men were there who had promised them their 
aid. They took the castle ; and killed many people. 
Now when King Canute's men heard of this they 
assembled an army, and were soon in such force that 
Ethelred's sons could not stand against it ; and they 
saw no other way left but to return to Rouen. Then 

* Jungofurda must he some place on the south coast of England. 

c 3 



22 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VII. 



Chaftea 
XXVII. 
King 
Olars ex- 
pedition to 
Norway. 



King Olaf separated from them, and would not go 
back to Valland, but sailed northwards along Eng- 
land, all the way to Northumberland, where he put 
into a haven at a place called Furovald *; and in a 
battle there with the townspeople and merchants he 
gained the victory, and a great booty. 

King Olaf left his long- ships f there behind, but 
made ready two ships of burden ; and had with him 
220 men in them, well armed and chosen people. 
He sailed out to sea northwards in harvest, but en- 
countered a tremendous storm, and they were in 
danger of being lost ; but as they had a chosen crew, 
and the king's luck with them, all went on well. So 
says Ottar : — 

" Olaf, great stem of kings^ is brave — 
Bold in the fight^ bold on the wave. 

No thought of fear 

Thy heart comes near. 
Undaunted^ midst the roaring flood. 
Firm at his post each shipman stood; 

And thy two ships stout 

The gale stood out." 

And farther he says : — 

" Thou able chief! with thy fearless crew 
Thou meetest, with skill and courage true. 

The wild sea's wrath 

On thy ocean path. 
Though waves mast-high were breaking round. 
Thou findest the middle of Norway's ground. 

With helm in hand 

On S«16's strand." 



* Furovald must be some place on the coast of Northumberland — 
that is, north of the Humber. But it is to be observed that the ships 
of that age, even the largest, were worked with oars, and coasted close 
to the shore, and at night lay at, or even on, the beach ; so that har- 
bours with anchorage were of less importance than flat shores to haul 
up their vessels on, and the localities cannot be determined by our har- 
bours. 

f There is a distinction evidently here between the class of vessels 
called long-ships and the large sea-going vessels. The long-ship has 
been, like the Crane and the Long Serpent, a vessel intended for row- 
ing up rivers and along the coast, but not for sea voyages, and in au- 
tumn not thought suitable for crossing the North Sea. 



KINGS OP NOBWAY. 



23 



It is related here that King Olaf came from sea \o 
the very middle of Norway; and the isle is called 
Saelo where they landed, and is outside of Stad. King 
Olaf said he thought it must be a lucky day for 
them, since they had landed at Saelo* in Norway; and 
observed it was a good omen that it so happened. 
As they were going up in the isle, the king slipped 
with one foot in a place where there was clay, but 
supported himself with the other foot. Then said 
he, " The king faUs." " Nay," replies Rane, " thou 
didst not fall, king, but set fast foot in the soil." 
The king laughed thereat, and said, " It may be so if 
God will." They went down again thereafter to 
their ships, and sailed to Ulfasund, where they heard 
that Earl Hakon was south in Sogn, and was ex- 
pected north as soon as wind allowed with a single 
ship. 

King Olaf steered his ships within the ordinary 
ships' course when he came abreast of Fialar dis- 
trict, and ran into Sandunga sound. There he laid 
his two vessels one on each side of the sound, with a 
thick cable between them. At the same moment 
Hakon, Earl Eric's son, came rowing into the sound 
with a manned ship ; and as they thought these were 
but two merchant vessels that were lying in the 
sound, they rowed between them. Then Olaf and 
his men draw the cable up right under Hakon's 
ship's keel, and wind it up with the capstan.f As 
soon as the vessel's course was stopped her stem was 
lifted up, and her bow plunged down; so that the 
water came in at her fore-end and over both sides, 



SAGA VIL 



Chapter 
XXVIII. 
Earl Ha. 
kon taken 
prisoner in 
Sandun- 
gasund by 
Olaf. 



* Sffil means lucky. Sselo is the lucky isle : hence the King's pun. 

I Vindasom — windlass, capstan, winch — ^was a machine consequently 
in common use in their vessels. From the size of the ships, and the 
lowering and raisir^ their masts, the practical use of the pulley and of 
the lever, as applied to sea husiness, has been understood probably hy 
the Northmen. 

c 4 



24 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. and she upset. King Olaf 's people took Earl Hakon 
and all his men whom they could get hold of out of 
the water, and made them prisoners ; but some they 
killed with stones and other weapons, and some were 
drowned. So says Ottar : — 

'^ The black ravens wade 
In the blood from thy blade. 
Young Hakon so gay^ 
With his ship, is thy prey: 
His ship^ with its gear^ 
Thou hast ta'en; and art here^ 
Thy forefathers' land 
From the earl to demand.'* 

Earl Hakon was led up to the king's ship. He 
was the handsomest man that could be seen. He had 
long hair, as fine as silk, bound about his head with a 
gold ornament. 

When he sat down in the fore-hold, the king said 
to him, " It is not false what is said of your family, 
that ye are handsome people to look at ; but now 
your luck has deserted you." 

Hakon the earl replied, " It has always been the 
case that success is changeable ; and there is no luck 
in the matter. It has gone with your family as 
with mine, to have by turns the better lot. I am lit- 
tle beyond childhood in years ; and at any rate we 
could not have defended ourselves, as we did not ex- 
pect any attack on the way. It may turn out better 
with us another time." 

Then said King Olaf, " Dost thou not apprehend 
that thou art in that condition that, hereafter, there 
can be neither victory nor defeat for thee?" 

The earl replies, " That is what thou only canst 
determine, king, according to thy pleasure." 

Olaf says, " What wilt thou give me, earl, if for 
this time I let thee go, whole and unhurt ? " 

The earl asks what he would take. * 

" Nothing," says the king, " except that thou shalt 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 25 

leave the country, give up thy kingdom, and take an saga vii. 
oath that thou shalt never go into battle against me." 
The earl answered, that he would do so. And 
now Earl Hakon took the oath that he would never 
fight against Olaf, or seek to defend Norway against 
him, or attack him; and King Olaf thereupon gave 
him and all his men life and peace. The earl got 
back the ship which had brought him there, and he 
and his men rowed their way. Thus says Sigvat of 
him: — 

^' In old Sandunga sound 
The king Earl Hakon founds 
Who little thought that there 
A foeman was so near. 
The best and fairest youth 
Earl Hakon was in truth, 
That speaks the Danish tongue. 
And of the race of great Hakon." 

After this the earl made ready as fast as possible Chapter 
to leave the country and sail over to England. He Eari Ha- 
met King Canute, his mother's brother, there, and "^^'^^g®' 
told him all that had taken place between him and from Nor. 
King Olaf. King Canute received him remarkably ^*^' 
well, placed him in his court in his own house, and 
gave him great power in his kingdom. Earl Hakon 
dwelt a long time with King Canute. During the 
time Swend and Hakon ruled over Norway, a recon- 
ciliation with Erling Skialgsson was effected, and Se- 
cured by Aslak, Erling's son, marrying Gunhild, Earl 
Swend's daughter; and the father and son, Erling 
and Aslak, retained all the fiefs which King Olaf 
Tryggvesson had given to Erling. Thus Erling be- 
came a firm friend of the earFs, and their mutual 
friendship was confirmed by oath. 

Eing Olaf went now eastward along the land, hold- ^xxx* 
iDg Things with the bonders all over the country. Aasta'spre- 
Many went willingly with him ; but some, who were \^!^^het 
Earl Swend's friends or relations, spoke against him. ^^ ^^^' 



26 CHRONICLE OF THE 

sAGAvii. Therefore King Olaf sailed in all haste eastward to 
Viken ; went in there with his ships ; set them on the 
land ; and proceeded up the country, in order to meet 
his stepfiather, Sigurd Syr. When he came to West- 
fold he was received in a friendly way by many who 
had been his father's friends or acquaintances; and 
abo there and in Folden were many of his family. 
In autumn he proceeded up the country to his step- 
father King Sigurd's, and came there one day very 
early. As Olaf was coming near to the house, some 
of the servants ran beforehand to the house, and into 
the room. Olaf 's mother, Aasta, was sitting in the 
room, and around her some of her girls. When the 
servants told her of King Olaf 's approach, and that 
he might soon be expected, Aasta stood up directly, 
and ordered the men and girls to put every thing 
in the best order. She ordered four girls to bring 
out all that belonged to the decoration of the room, 
and put it in order with hangings and benches. 
Two fellows brought straw for the floor, two brought 
forward four-cornered tables and the drinking jugs, 
two bore out victuals and placed the meat on the 
table, two she sent away from the house to procure in 
the greatest haste all that was needed, and two car- 
ried in the ale; and all the other serving men and 
and girls went outside of the house. Messengers 
went to seek King Sigurd wherever he might be, and 
brought to him his dress-clothes, and his horse with 
gilt saddle, and his bridle which was gilt and set with 
precious stones. Four men she sent off to the four 
quarters of the country to invite all the great people 
to a feast, which she prepared as a rejoicing for her 
son's return. All who were before in the house she 
made to dress themselves with the best they had, and 
lent clothes to those who had none suitable. 
XXXI? King Sigurd Syr was standing in his corn-field 
a"Sds ^^^^ *^6 messengers came to him and brought him 

dress. 



KINGS OF NOBWAY. 27 

the news, and also told him all that Aasta was doing saga vil 
at home in the house. He had many people on his 
farm. Some were then shearing com, some b oundit 
together, some drove it to the building, some un- 
loaded it and put it in stack or bam ; but the king, 
and two men with him, went sometimes into the 
field, sometimes to the place where the com was put 
into the bam. His dress, it is told, was this : — he had 
a blue kirtle and blue hose ; shoes which were laced 
about the legs; a grey cloak, and a grey wide-brimmed 
hat; a veil* before his face ; a staff in his hand with a 
^t-silver head on it, and a silver ring aroimd it. Of 
Sigurd's living and disposition it is related that he 
was a very gain-making man, who attended carefully 
to his cattle and husbandry, and managed his house- 
keeping himself. He was nowise given to pomp, 
and was rather taciturn. But he was a man of the 
best understanding in Norway, and also excessively 
wealthy in moveable property. Peacefiil he was, and 
nowise haughty. His wife Aasta was generous and 
high-minded. Their children were, Guttorm, the el- 
dest ; then Gunhild ; the next Halfdan, Ingrid, and 
Harald. The messengers said to Sigurd, "Aasta told 
us to bring thee word, how much it lay at her heart 
that thou shouldst on this occasion comport thyself 
in the fashion of great men, and show a disposition 
more akin to Harald Haarfager's race than to thy 
mother's father's, Rane Thin-nose, or Earl Nereid the 
Old, although they too were very wise men." The 
king replies, " The news ye bring me is weighty, and 
ye bring it forward in great heat. Already before 
now Aasta has been taken up much with people who 
were not so near to her ; and I see she is still of the 
same disposition. She takes this up with great 

* Often used by men in Bummer to protect the face from tbe stings 
of moschetoes. 



28 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VII. 



Chapter 
XXXII. 

Of the 
feast. 



warmth ; but can she lead her son out of the business 
with the same splendour she is leading him into it? 
If it is to proceed so, methinks they who mix them- 
selves up in it regard little property or life. For this 
man, King Olaf, goes against a great superiority of 
power; and the wrath of the Danish and Swedish 
kings lies at the foot of his determination, if he ven- 
tures to go against them." 

When the king had said this he sat down, and 
made them take off his shoes, and put corduvan* 
boots on, to which he bound his gold spurs. Then 
he put off his cloak and coat, and dressed himself in 
his finest clothes, with a scarlet cloak over all ; girded 
on his sword, set a gilded helmet upon his head, and 
mounted his horse. He sent his labouring people 
out to the neighbourhood, and gathered to him thirty 
well-clothed men, and rode home with them. As 
they rode up to the house, and were near the room, 
they saw on the other side of the house the banners 
of Olaf coming waving; and there was he himself, 
with about 100 men all well equipt. People were 
gathered over all upon the house-tops. King Sigurd 
immediately saluted his stepson from horseback in a 
friendly way, and invited him and his men to come 
in and drink a cup with him. Aasta, on the con- 
trary, went up and kissed her son, and invited him 
to stay with her ; and land, and people, and all the good 
she could do for him, stood at his service. King 
Olaf thanked her kindly for her invitation. Then 
she took him by the hand, and led him into the room 
to the high seat. King Sigurd got men to take 
charge of their clothes, and give their horses com ; 
and then he himself went to his high seat, and the 
feast was made with the greatest splendour. 



* Corduvan was tanned leather. The untanned skin probably had 
been the ordinary wear of the king. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 29 

Bang Olaf had not been long here before he one day saga vii. 

called his step-father King Sigurd, his mother Aasta, Chamkr 

and his foster-father Rane, to a conference and con- ^nv^xJi.^' 

sultation. Olaf began thus: " It has so happened" ?;».'* ®^^, ^ 

. T 1 ., . It 1 , 1 T I *^ King Olaf 

said he, " as is well known to you, that I have re- and King 
turned to this country after a very long sojourn in ^*8"'^" 
foreign parts, during all which time I and my men 
have had nothing for our support but what we cap- 
tured in war, for which we have often hazarded 
both life and soul ; for many an innocent man have 
we deprived of his property, and some of their lives : 
and foreigners are now sitting in the possessions 
which my father, his father, and their forefathers, for 
a long series of generations owned, and to which I 
have udal right. They have not been content with 
this, but have taken to themselves also the properties 
of all our relations who are descended from Harald 
Haarfager. To some they have left little, to others 
nothing at all. Now I wiU disclose to you what I 
have long concealed in my own mind, that I intend 
to take the heritage of my forefathers ; but I will not 
wait upon the Danish or Swedish king to supplicate 
the least thing from them, although they for the time 
call that their property which was Harald Haar- 
fager's heritage. To say the truth, I intend rather 
to seek my patrimony with battle-axe and sword, 
and that with the help of all my friends and rela- 
tions, and of those who in this business will take my 
side. And in this matter I will so lay hand to the 
work that one of two things shall happen, — either 
I shall lay all this kingdom under my rule which 
they got into their hands by the slaughter of my kins- 
man Olaf Tryggvesson, or I shall fall here upon my 
inheritance in the land of my fathers. Now I ex- 
pect of thee, Sigurd, my stepfather, as well as other 
men here in the country who have udal right of 
succession to the kingdom, according to the law 



30 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. made by King Harald Haarfager, that nothing shall 
be of such importance to you as to prevent you from 
throwing off the disgrace from our family of being 
slow at supporting the man who comes forward to 
raise up again our race. But whether ye show any 
manhood in this affair or not, I know the inclination 
of the people weU, — that all want to be free from the 
slavery of foreign masters, and will give aid and 
strength to the attempt. I have not proposed this 
matter to any before thee, because I know thou art 
a man of understanding, and can best judge how 
this my purpose shall be brought forward in the be- 
ginning, and whether we shall, in aU quietness, talk 
about it to a few persons, or instantly declare it to 
the people at large. I have already showed my teeth 
by taking prisoner the Earl Hakon, who has now left the 
country, and given me, under oath, the part of the 
kingdom which he had before ; and I think it wiU be 
easier to have Earl Swend alone to deal with, than if 
both were defending the country against us." 

King Sigurd answers, " It is no small affair, King 
Olaf, thou hast in thy mind ; and thy purpose comes 
more, methinks, from hasty pride than from pru- 
dence. But it may be there is a wide difference be- 
tween my humble ways and the high thoughts thou 
hast ; for whilst yet in thy childhood thou wast full 
always of ambition and desire of command, and now 
thou art experienced in battles, and hast formed thy- 
self upon the manner of foreign chiefs. I know 
therefore well, that as thou hast taken this into thy 
head, it is useless to dissuade thee from it ; and also 
it is not to be denied that it goes to the heart of all 
who have courage in them, that the whole Haarfager 
race and kingdom should go to the ground. But I will 
not bind myself by any promise, before I know the 
views and intentions of other Upland kings ; but thou 
hast done well in letting me know thy purpose, be* 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 31 

fore dedaring it publicly to the people. I will promise saga vn.' 
thee, however, my interest with the kings, and other 
chiefs, and country people ; and also, King Olaf, all 
my property stands to thy aid, and to strengthen thee. 
But we will only produce the matter to the community 
so soon as we see some progress, and expect some 
strength to this undertaking ; for thou canst easily 
perceive that it is a daring measure to enter into 
strife with Olaf the Swedish king, and Canute, who 
is king both of Denmark and England ; and thou re- 
quirest great support under thee, if it is to suc- 
ceed. It is not unlikely, in my opinion, that thou 
wilt get good support from the people, as the com- 
monalty always loves what is new ; and it went so 
before, when Olaf Tryggvesson came here to the 
country, that aU rejoiced at it, although he did not 
long enjoy the kingdom." 

When the consultation had proceeded so far, Aasta 
took up the word. " For my part, my son, I am re- 
joiced at thy arrival, but much more at thy ad- 
vancing thy honour. I will spare nothing for that 
purpose that stands in my power, although it be but 
little help that can be expected from me. But if a 
choice could be made, I would rather that thou 
shouldst be the supreme king of Norway, even if 
thou shouldst not sit longer in thy kingdom than Olaf 
Tryggvesson did, than that thou shouldst not be a 
greater king than Sigurd Syr is, and die the death of 
old age." With this the conference closed. King 
Olaf remained here a while with all his men. King Si- 
gurd entertained them, day about, the one day with 
j&sh and milk, the other day with flesh-meat and ale.* 

At that time there were many kinffs in the Up- Chafper 

XXXIV 

lands who had districts to rule over, and the most of of the 
them were descended from Harald Haarfager. In ^^"6**" 

* This is a common way of living in Norway to this day among the 
peasants and middle class. 



32 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. Hedemark two brothers ruled — Raereck and Ring; 
the"u^and ui Gudbrandsdal, Gudrod : and there was also a king 
Norwa^''^ in Raumarike ; and one had Hadeland and Thoten ; 
and in Valders also there was a king. With these 
district-kings Sigurd had a meeting up in Hadeland, 
and Olaf Haraldsson also met with them. To these 
district-kings whom Sigurd had assembled he set 
forth his stepson Olaf s purpose, and asked their aid, 
both of men and in counsel and consent ; and repre- 
sented to them how necessary it was to cast off the 
yoke which the Danes and Swedes had laid upon 
them. He said that there was now a man before 
them who could head such an enterprise ; and he re- 
counted the many brave actions which Olaf had 
achieved upon his war-expeditions. 

Then King Raereck says, " True it is that Harald 
Haarfager's kingdom has gone to decay, none of his 
race being supreme king over Norway. But the 
people here in the country have experienced many 
things. When King Hakon, Athelstan's foster-son, 
was king, all were content ; but when Gunhild's sons 
ruled over the country, all were so weary of their 
tyranny and injustice that they would rather have 
foreign men as kings, and be themselves more their 
own rulers*; for the foreign kings were usually 
abroad, and cared little about the customs of the 
people if the scatt they laid on the country was paid. 
When enmity arose between the Danish king Harald 
and Earl Hakon, the Jomsburg vikings made an 
expedition against Norway; then the whole people 
arose, and threw the hostilities from themselves ; and 
thereafter the people encouraged Earl Hakon to keep 
the country, and defend it with sword and spear 

* This was very much the social condition of the people of Norway 
during the 400 years they were annexed to Denmark previous to 1814. 
They enjoyed no political liberty, but had all their old civil liberty and 
customs. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 33 

against the Danish king. But when he had set him- saga va 
self fast in the kingdom with the help of the people, 
he became so hard and overbearing towards the 
country-folks, that they would no longer sujffer him. 
The Drontheim people killed him, and raised to the 
kingly power Olaf Tryggvesson, who was of the udal 
succession to the kingdom, and in all respects weU 
fitted to be a chief. The whole country's desire was 
to make him supreme king, and raise again the king- 
dom which Harald Haarfager had made for himself. 
But when King Olaf thought himself quite firmly 
seated in his kingdom, no man could rule his own 
concerns for him. With us small kings he was so 
unreasonable, as to take to himself not only all the 
scatt and duties which Harald Haarfager had levied 
from us, but a great deal more. The people at last 
had so little freedom under him, that it was not allowed 
to every man to believe in what God he pleased. 
Now since he has been taken away we have kept 
friendly with the Danish king ; have received great 
help from him when we have had any occasion for it ; 
and have been allowed to rule ourselves, and live in 
peace and quiet in the inland country, and without 
any overburden. I am therefore content that things 
be as they are, for I do not see what better rights I 
am to enjoy by one of my relations ruling over the 
country ; and if I am to be no better off, I will take 
no part in the affair." 

Then said King Ring, his brother, " I will also de- 
clare my opinion that it is better for me, if I hold the 
same power and property as now, that my relative is 
king over Norway, rather than a foreign chief, so that 
our family may again raise its head in the land. It 
is, besides, my opinion about this man Olaf, that his 
fate and luck must determine whether he is to obtain 
the kingdom or not; and if he succeed in making 
himself supreme king, then he will be the best off 

VOL. IT. D 



34 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. who has best deserved his friendship. At present he 
has in no respect greater power than any of us ; nay, 
indeed, he has less ; as we have lands and kingdoms 
to rule over, and he has nothing, and we are equally 
entitled by the udal right to the kingdom as he is 
himself. Now, if we will be his men, give him our 
aid, allow him to take the highest dignity in the 
country, and stand by him with our strength, how 
should he not reward us well, and hold it in remem- 
brance to our great advantage, if he be the honour- 
able man I believe him to be, and all say he is ? 
Therefore let us join the adventure, say I, and bind 
ourselves in friendship with him." 

Then the others, one after the other, stood up and 
spoke; and the conclusion was, that the most of 
them determined to enter into a league with King 
Olaf. He promised them his perfect friendship, and 
that he would hold by and improve the country's 
laws and rights, if he became supreme king of Nor- 
way. This league was confirmed by oath. 
Chapter Thereafter the kings summoned a Thing*, and 
Olaf gets' there King Olaf set forth this determination to all the 
kin^from*^ people, and his demand on the kingly power. He 
the Thing, desires that the bonders should receive him as king ; 
and promises, on the other hand, to allow them to 
retain their ancient laws, and to defend the land 
from foreign masters and chiefs. On this point he 
spoke well, and long ; and he got great praise for his 
speech. Then the kings rose and spoke, the one after 
the other, and supported his cause, and this message 
to the people. At last it came to this, that King 
Olaf was proclaimed king over the whole country, 
and the kingdom adjudged to him according to law 
in the Uplands. 

* The reference to a Thing appears to have heen indispensahle^ not- 
withstanding the concurrence of the small kings. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 35 

King Olaf began immediately his progress through saga viu 
the country, appointing feasts before him wherever chapter 
there were royal farms. First he travelled round iq Ki^'^oaif 
Hadeland, and then he proceeded north to Gud- travels in 
brandsdal. And now it went as King Sigurd Syr la^ds.^ 
had foretold, that people streamed to him from all 
quarters ; and he did not appear to have need for half 
of them, for he had nearly 300 men. But the enter- 
tainments bespoken did not half serve; for it had 
been the custom that kings went about in guest- 
quarters in the Uplands with 60 or 70 men only, and 
never with more than 100 men. The king therefore 
hastened over the country, only stopping one night 
at the same place. When he came north to Dovre- 
field, he arranged his journey so that he came over 
the Fielde and down upon the north side of it, and 
then came to Opdal, where he remained all night. 
Afterwards he proceeded through Opdal forest, and 
came out at Medaldal, where he proclaimed a Thing, 
and summoned the bonders to meet him at it. The 
king made a speech to the Thing, and asked the 
bonders to accept him as king ; and promised, on his 
part, the laws and rights which King Olaf Tryg- 
gvesson had offered them. The bonders had no 
strength to make opposition to the king ; so the re- 
sult was that they received him as king, and con- 
firmed it by oath: but they sent word to Orkedal 
and Skogn of all that they knew concerning Olaf 's 
proceedings. 

Einar Tambarskelver had a farm and house in ^^xxvTr 
Skogn ; and now when he got news of Olaf 's proceed- a levy 
ings, he immediately split up a war-arrow, and sent ^nn the 
it out as a token to the four quarters — north, south, prontheim 
east, west, — to call together all free and unfree men 
in full equipment of war : therewith the message, that 
they were to defend the land against King Olaf. The 

D 2 



36 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. message-stick went to Orkedal, and thence to Gula- 

dal, where the whole war-force was to assemble. 
Chaptjer King Olaf proceeded with his men down into Orke- 
King Olaf s dal, and advanced in peace and with all gentleness ; 
progress in ^)^t whcH hc camc to Griotar he met the assembled 

Drontneim. . ^ mr\r\ rT\i 

bonders, amountmg to more than 700 men. Ihen 
the king arrayed his army, for he thought the bon- 
ders were to give battle. When the bonders saw 
this, they also began to put their men in order ; but 
it went on very slowly, for they had not agreed 
beforehand who among them should be commander. 
Now when King Olaf saw there was confusion among 
the bonders, he sent to them Thorer Gudsbrandson ; 
and when he came he told them King Olaf did not 
want to fight them, but named twelve of the ablest 
men in their flock of people, who were desired to 
come to King Olaf. The bonders agreed to this ; and 
the twelve men went over a rising ground which is 
there, and came to the place where the king's army 
stood in array. The king said to them, " Ye bonders 
have done well to give me an opportunity to speak 
with you, for now I will explain to you my errand 
here to the Drontheim country. First I must tell 
you, what ye already must have heard, that Earl 
Hakon and I met in summer; and the issue of our 
meeting was, that he gave me the whole kingdom he 
possessed in the Drontheim countiy, which, as ye 
know, consists of Orkedal, Guledal, Strind district, 
and Strind. As a proof of this, I have here with me 
the very men who were present, and saw the earl's 
and my own hands given upon it, and heard the 
word and oath, and witnessed the agreement the earl 
made with me. Now I oflfer you peace and law, the 
same as King Olaf Tryggvesson ofifered before me." 
The king spoke well, and long ; and ended by proposing 
to the bonders two conditions — either to go into his 
service and be subject to him, or to fight him. There- 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 37 

upon the twelve bonders went back to their people, saga vn. 
and told the issue of their errand, and considered with 
the people what they should resolve upon. Although 
they discussed the matter backwards and forwards 
for a while, they preferred at last to submit to the 
king ; and it was confirmed by the oath of the bon- 
ders. The king now proceeded on his journey, and 
the bonders made feasts for him. The king then 
proceeded to the sea-coast, and got ships ; and among 
others he got a long-ship of twenty benches of rowers 
from Gunnar, of Gelmin ; another ship of twenty 
benches he got from Lodin of Viggia; and three ships 
of twenty benches from the farm of Aungrar in the 
Ness, which farm Earl Hakon had possessed, but a 
steward managed it for him, by name Bard White. 
The king had besides four or five boats; and with 
these vessels he went in all haste into the fiord of 
Drontheim. 

Earl Swend was at that time far up in the Dron- Chaftkr 
theim fiord at Steenkiar*, which at that time was a of Eari ' 
merchant town, and was there preparing for the Yule Swend's 

■m-m- i- A cj proceed" 

festival. When Einar Tambarskelver heard that the ings. 
Orkedal people had submitted to King Olaf, he sent 
men to Earl Swend to bring him the tidings. They 
went first to Nidaros, and took a rowing-boat which 
belonged to Einar, with which they went out into the 
fiord, and came one day late in the evening to Steen- 
kiar, where they brought to the earl the news about 
all King Olaf 's proceedings. The earl owned a long- 
ship, which was lying afloat and rigged just outside 
the town ; and immediately, in the evening, he ordered 
all his moveable goods, his people's clothes, and also 
meat and drink, as much as the vessel could carry, 
to be put on board, rowed immediately out in the 

* Steenkiar is still a village at the bottom of the Drontheim fiord^ 
at the mouth of the large river running into it from the great lake the 
Snaasen Vand. No remains of the old town are to be seen. 

D 3 



38 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. night-time, and came with daybreak to Skamsund.* 

There he saw King Olaf rowing in with his fleet into 

the fiord. The earl turned towards the land within 

Masarvigf, where there was a thick wood, and lay 

so near the rocks that the leaves and branches hung 

over the vessel. They cut down some large trees 

which they laid over the quarter on the sea-side, so 

that the ship could not be seen for leaves, especially 

as it was scarcely clear daylight when the king came 

rowing past them. The weather was calm, and the 

king rowed in among the islands; a^id when the 

king's fleet was out of sight the earl rowed out of the 

fiord, and on to Frosta, where his kingdom lay, and 

there he landed. 

CHArrER Earl Swend sent men out to Guladal to his brother- 

Earf ^* in-law, Einar Tambarskelver ; and when Einar came 

Swend's tiie earl told him how it had been with him and King 

consult- Olaf, and that now he would assemble men to go out 

against King Olaf, and fight him. 

Einar answers, " We should go to work cautiously, 
and find out what King Olaf intends doing ; and not 
let him hear any thing concerning us but that we 
are quiet. It may happen that if he hears nothing 
about our assembling people, he may sit quietly where 
he is in Steenkiar all the Yule ; for there is plenty pre- 
pared for him for the Yule feast : but if he hears we 
are assembling men, he will set right out of the fiord 
with his vessels, and we shall not get hold of him." 
Einar's advice was taken ; and the earl went to 
Stordal, into guest-quarters among the bonders. 

When King Olaf came to Steenkiar he collected all 
the meat prepared for the Yule feast, and made it 
be put on board, procured some transport vessels, 

* This is the sound between Inderoen and the west side of the 
land at the head of Drontheim fiord, dividing the Drontheim gulph 
into two parts, that above this sound being called Britstad fiord. 

f Now Mosvig. 



ations. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 



39 



SAGA VII. 



took meat and drink with him, and got ready to sail 
as fast as possible, and went out all the way to 
Mdaros. Here King Olaf Tryggvesson had laid the 
foundation of a merchant town, and had built a king's 
house; but before that Nidaros* was only a single 
house, as before related. When Earl Eric came to the 
country, he applied all his attention to his house of 
Ladef , where his father had had his main residence, 
and he neglected the houses which Olaf had erected 
at the Nid ; so that some were fallen down, and those 
which stood were scarcely habitable. King Olaf went 
now with his ships up the Nid, made all the houses to 
be put in order directly that were stiU standing, and 
built anew those that had fallen down, and employed 
in this work a great many people. Then he had all 
the meat and drink brought on shore to the houses, 
and prepared to hold Yule there : so Earl Swend and 
Einar had to fall upon some other plan. 

There was an Iceland man called Thord Sigvalda- 
scald, who had been long with Earl Sigvald, and or si^vit 
afterwards with the earl's brother, Thorkel the Tall ; the scald, 
but after the earl's death Thord had become a mer- 
chant. He met King Olaf on his viking cruise in the 
west, and entered into his service, and followed him 
afterwards. He was with the king when the inci- 
dents above related took place. Thord had a son 
called Sigvat fostered in the house of Thorkel at 
Apavatn, in Iceland. When he was nearly a grown 
man he went out of the country with some mer- 
chants; and the ship came in autumn to the Dron- 
theim country, and the crew lodged in the Hered 
district. The same winter King Olaf came to Dron- 
theim, as just now related by us. Now when Sigvat 



Chapter 



* The present city of Drontheiro, of about 18,000 inhabitants. 
Nidaros is the mouth of the Nid^ — the river mouth at which it is 
situated. 

f Lade is a farm near Drontheim, on the opposite side of the bay. 

D 4 



40 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. heard that his father Thord was with the king, he 
went to him, and staid awhile with him. Sigvat was 
a good scald at an early age. He made a lay in 
honour of King Olaf, and asked the king to listen to 
it. The king said he did not want poems composed 
about him, and said he did not understand the 
iscald's craft. Then Sigvat sang: — 

" Rider of dark-blue ocean's steeds ! 
Allow one scald to sing thy deeds; 
And listen to tbe song of one 
Who can sing well, if any can. 
For should the king despise all others^ 
And show no favour to my brothers, 
Yet I may all men's favour claim^ 
Who sing still of our great king's fame." 

King Olaf gave Sigvat as a reward for his verse* a 
gold ring that weighed half a mark, and Sigvat was 
made one of King Olaf 's court-men. Then Sigvat 
sang : — 

'' I willingly receive this sword — 
By land or sea^ on shore^ on board, 
I trust that I shall ever be 
Worthy the sword received from thee. 
A faithful follower thou hast bound — 
A generous master I have found ; 
Master and servant both have made 
Just what best suits them by this trade." 

Earl Swend had, according to custom, taken one 
half of the harbour-dues from the Iceland ship-traders 
about autumn; for the earls Eric and Hakon had 
always taken one half of these and all other revenues 
in the Drontheim country. Now when King Olaf 
came there, he sent his men to demand that half of 
the tax from the Iceland traders ; and they went up 
to the king's house, and asked Sigvat to help them. 
He went to the king, and sang: — 

* The reward of a scald was called Bragar-laun — the pay of Braga; 
who, according to the Edda^ was one of the Asa gods, and presided over 
poetry. Our English word brag seems derived from this origin, the 
meaning corresponding to the character of Braga. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 41 

" My prayer^ I trusty will not be vain — ^ saga vil 

No gold by it have I to gain ; 

All that the king himself here wins 
Is not red gold, but a few skins.* 
It is not right that these poor men 
Their harbour-dues should pay again. 
That they paid once I know is true; 
Remit, great king, what scarce is due." 

Earl Swend and Einar Tambarskelver gathered a Chafpjir 
large armed force, with which they came by the ofEarr 
upper road into Ganlardal, and so down to Nidaros, ^®°^' 
with nearly 2000 men. King Olaf 's men were out 
upon the Gaular ridge, and had a guard on horseback. 
They became aware that a force was coming down 
the Gaulardal, and they brought word of it to the 
king about midnight. The king got up immediately, 
ordered the people to be wakened, and they went on 
board of the ships, bearing all their clothes and arms 
on board, and aU that they could take with them, and 
then rowed out of the river. Then came the earl's 
men to the town at the same moment, took all the 
Christmas provision, and set fire to the houses. King 
Olaf went out of the fiord down to Orkedal, and there 
landed the men from their ships. From Orkedal 
they went up to the Fielde, and over the Fielde east- 
wards into Gudbrandsdal. In the lines composed 
about KlaBng Brusason, it is said that Earl Eric 
burned the town of Nidaros : — 

" The king's half-finished hall. 
Rafters, roof, and all. 
Is hurned down hy the river's side; 
The flame spreads o'er the city wide." 

King Olaf went southwards through Gudbrands- Chapter 

XT III 

dal, and thence out to Hedemark. In the depth of or King' 
winter he went about in guest-quarters ; but when ^^*^- 
spring returned he collected men, and went to 
Viken. He had with him many people from Hede- 

• The harhour or anchorage dues were paid in skins, or other pro- 
ducts of Iceland. 



42 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



Chafteb, 
XLIV. 
Of Earl 
Swend's 
forces. 



SAGA viL mait, whom the kings had given him ; and also many 
powerful people from among the bonders joined him, 
among whom Ketil Kalf from Ringness. He had 
also people from Raumarike. His stepfather, Si- 
gurd Syr, gave him the help also of a great body of 
men. They went down from thence to the coast, 
and made ready to put to sea from Yiken. The fleet, 
which was manned with many fine fellows, went out 
then to Tunsberg. 

After Yule, Earl Swend gathers all the men of the 
Drontheim country, proclaims a . levy for an expedi- 
tion, and fits out ships. At that time there were in 
the Drontheim country a great number of lendermen ; 
and many of them were so powerful and well-bom, 
that they were descended from earls, or even from 
the royal race, which in a short course of generations 
reckoned to Harald Haarfager, and they were also 
very rich. These lendermen * were of great help to 
the kings or earls who ruled the land ; for it was as if 
the lenderman had the bonder-people of each district 
in his power. Earl Swend being a good friend of 
the lendermen, it was easy for him to collect peo- 
ple. His brother-in-law, Einar Tambarskelver, was 
on his side, and with him * many other lendermen ; 
and among them many, both lendermen and bon- 
ders, who the winter before had taken the oath of 
fidelity to King Olaf. When they were ready for 
sea they went directly out of the fiord, steering south 
along the land, and drawing men from every district. 
When they came farther south, abreast of Rogaland, 

• The lendermen appear to have been sheriffs for collecting the 
scatt and other revenues of the kings^ and to have held the function in 
feu^ paying for it to the king a proportion of the income of the district. 
The fines due to the king for misdemeanors, murders, &c. must have 
come through them into the royal coffers; for we find the appointment 
of new lendermen for every district the first act of every king on 
acquiring a part of the country. It is literally men having a lend; and 
the name includes those who held in lehn (or loan) the land, land-tax, 
or other revenues from the king, for a certain fixed payment. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 43 

came Erling Skialgsson to meet them, with many saga vn. 
people and many lendermen with hbn. Now they 
steered eastward with their whole fleet to Viken, and 
Earl Swend ran in there towards the end of Easter. 
The earl steered his fleet to Grenmore, and ran into 
Nessie. 

King Olaf steered his fleet out from Viken, until the ^^lv *" 
two fleets were not far from each other, and they got King 
news of each other the Saturday before Palm Sunday. ^^^ 
Ejng Olaf himself had a ship called the Carl's Head*, 
on the bow of which a king's head was carved out, and 
he himself had carved it. This head was used long 
after in Norway on ships which kings steered them- 
selves. 

As soon as day dawned on Sunday morning, King Chapter 
Olaf got up, put on his clothes, went to the land, K^^g^^* 
and ordered to sound the signal for the whole army to ^^*^? 
come on shore. Then he made a speech to the troops, 
and told the whole assembly that he had heard there 
was but a short distance between them and Earl 
Swend. " Now," said he, ^' we shall make ready ; for 
it can be but a short time until we meet. Let the peo- 
ple arm, and every man be at the post that has been 
appointed him, so that aU may be ready when I 
order the signal to §ound for casting oif from the 
land.f Then let us row ofi* at once ; and so that none 
go on before the rest of the ships, and none lag be- 

* The head probably of Charlemagne^ whose name was held in great 
veneration. King Olaf 's son Magnus was called after Charlemagne. 

•j" Signals by call of trumpet, or war-horn, or lure, appear to have 
been well understood by all. We read of the trurapet-cdl to arm, to 
attack, to advance, to retreat, to land; and also to a Court Thing, a 
House Thing, a General Thing. The instrument now in use in Nor- 
way among the peasants for calling across valleys or rivers, or to their 
comrades or servants, in situations, so common in mountain-districts, in 
which the distance through the air is small, yet the labour of going be- 
tween great, is the bark of the birch tree rolled off, and the pieces bound 
together so as to form a tube of six or eight feet in length. But the 
Northmen appear to have had instruments of metal> and regular trum- 
peters. 



u 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VIL 



Chapter 
XL VII. 
Of the 
battle at 
Nessie. 



hind, when I row out of the harbour : for we cannot 
tell if we shall find the earl where he was lying, or 
if he has come out to meet us. When we do meet, 
and the battle begins, let people be alert to bring 
all our ships in close order, and ready to bind them 
together. Let us spare ourselves in the beginning, 
and take care of our weapons, that we do not cast 
them into the sea, or shoot them away in the air to no 
purpose. But when the fight becomes hot, and the 
ships are bound together, then let each man show 
what is in him of manly spirit." 

King Olaf had in his ship 100 men armed in coats 
of ring-mail, and in foreign helmets. The most of 
his men had white shields, on which the holy cross 
was gilt; but some had painted it in blue or red. He 
had also had the cross painted in front on all the 
helmets, in a pale colour. He had a white banner, on 
which was a serpent figured. He ordered a mass to 
be read before him, went on board ship, and ordered 
his people to refresh themselves with meat and drink. 
He then ordered the war-horns to sound to battle, to 
leave the harbour, and row oif to seek the earl. Now 
when they came to the harbour where the earl had 
lain, the earl's men were armed, and beginning to 
row out of the harbour ; but when they saw the 
king's fleet coming they began to bind the ships 
together, to set up their banners, and to make ready 
for the fight. When King Olaf saw this he hastened 
the rowing, laid his ship alongside the earl's, and the 
battle began. So says Sigvat the scald : — 

" Boldly the king did then pursue 
Earl Swend, nor let him out of view. 
The blood ran down the reindeer's flank* 
Of each sea-king — his vessel's plank. 
Nor did the earl's stout warriors spare 
In battle-brunt the sword and spear. 



* The ships are called the reindeer of the sea-kings by the scalds. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 45 

Earl Swend his ships of war pnshed on, saga vii. 

And lashed their stout stems one to one," 

It is said that King Olaf brought his ships into 
battle while Swend was stiU lying in the harbour. 
Sigvat the scald was himself in the fight; and in 
summer, just after the battle, he composed a lay, which 
is called the Nessic Song, in which he teUs particu- 
larly the circumstances : — 

** In the fierce fight 'tis known how near 
The scorner of the ice-cold spear 
Laid the Charles' head* the earl on hoard. 
All eastward of the Agder fiord." 

Then was the conflict exceedingly sharp, and it 
was long before it could be seen how it was to go in 
the end. Many fell on both sides, and many were 
the wounded. So says Sigvat : — 

*' No urging did the earl require. 
Midst spear and sword — the battle's fire; 
No urging did the brave king need 
The ravens in this shield-storm to feed. 
Of limb- lopping enough was there. 
And ghastly wounds of sword and spear. 
Never, I think, was rougher play 
Than both the armies had that day." 

The earl had most men, but the king had a chosen 
crew in his ship, who had followed him in aU his 
wars ; and besides they were so excellently equipt, as 
before related, that each man had a coat of ring- 
mail f, so that he could not be wounded. So says 
Sigvat : — 

" Our lads, broad-shouldered, tall, and hale. 
Drew on their cold shirts of ring-malL 
Soon sword on sword was shrilly ringing. 
And in the air the spears were singing. 

* The king's ship had a head of Charlemagne. 

t Ring-mail was a kind of network of metal rings sewed upon a 
leathern or woollen shirt, like a frock or blouse; or it consisted also of 
rings of metal linked together. It did not impede the movement of 
the limbs so much as plate-armour, and seems to have been less costly 
or less esteemed by the great, than plate-armour. 



46 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VII. 



Chapter 
XLVIII. 

Earl 

Swend's 

flight. 



Under our helms we hid our hair, 
For thick iJew arrows through the air. 
Right glad was I our gallant crew^ 
Steel-clad from head to foot, to view." 

When the men began to fall on board the earl's 
ships, and many appeared wounded, so that the sides 
of the vessels were but thinly beset with men, the 
crew of King Olaf prepared to board. Their banner 
was brought up to the ship that was nearest the 
earl's, and the king himself followed the banner. So 
says Sigvat : — 

" 'On with the king!' his banner's waving: 
'On with the king!' the spears he's braving I 
' On, steel-clad men ! and storm the deck. 
Slippery with blood and strewed with wreck. 
A diflferent work ye have to share. 
His banner in war-storm to bear. 
From your fair girl's, who round the hall \ 

Brings the full mead-bowl to us all.' " 

Now was the severest fighting. Many of Swend's 
men feU, and some sprang overboard. So says Sig- 
vat: — 

'* Into the ship our brave lads spring, — 
On shield and helm their red blades ring; 
The air resounds with stroke on stroke, — 
The shields are cleft, the helms are broke. 
The wounded bonder o'er the side 
Falls shrieking in the blood-stained tide — 
The deck is cleared with wild uproar — 
The dead crew float about the shore " 

And also these lines : — 

" The shields we brought from home were white. 
Now they are red-stained in the fight: 
This work was fit for those who wore 
Ringed coats of mail their breasts before. 
Where the foe blunted the best sword 
I saw our young king climb on board. 
He stormed the first; we followed him — 
The war-birds now in blood may swim." 

Now defeat began to come down upon the earl's men. 
The king's men pressed upon the earl's ship, and 
entered it; but when the earl saw how it was going, 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 47 

he called out to his forecastle-men to cut the cables «agavil 
and cast the ship loose, which they did. Then the 
king's men threw grapplings over the timber heads of 
the ship, and so held her fast to their own ; but the 
earl ordered the timber heads to be cut away, which 
was done. So says Sigvat : — 

'* The earl^ his noble ship to save^ 
To cut the posts loud order gave. 
The ship escaped : our greedy eyes 
Had looked on her as a clear prize. 
The earl escaped; hut ere he fled 
We feasted Odin's fowls with dead ; — 
With many a goodly corpse that floated 
Round our ship's stem his birds were bloated." 

Einar Tambarskelver had laid his ship right along- 
side the earl's. They threw an anchor over the bows 
of the earl's ship, and thus towed her away, and they 
slipped out of the fiord together. Thereafter the 
whole of the earl's fleet took to flight, and rowed out 
of the fiord. The scald Berse Torfeson was on the 
forecastle of the earl's ship; and as it was gliding 
past the king's fleet, King Olaf called out to him — 
for he knew Berse, who was distinguished as a 
remarkably handsome man, always well equipt in 
clothes and arms — " Farewell, Berse ! " He replied, 
" Farewell, king ! " So says Berse himself, in a poem 
he composed when he fell into King Olaf 's power, 
and was laid in prison and in fetters on board a 
ship : — 

" Olaf the Brave 

A * farewell ' gave^ 
(No time was there to parley long^) 
To me who knows the art of song. 

The scald was fain 

* Farewell ' again 
In the same terms hack to send — 
The rule in arms to foe or friend. 

Earl Sweud's distress 

I well can guess^ 
When flight he was compelled to take: 
His fortunes I will ne'er forsake. 



48 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. Though I lie here 

In chains a year. 

In thy great vessel all forlorn. 
To crouch to thee I still will scorn: 
I still will say^ 
No milder sway 
Than from thy foe this land e'er knew : 
To him, my early friend, I'm true." 

Chaftkr Now some of the earl's men fled up the country, 
Ewi^^^ some surrendered at discretion; but Swend and his 
swend followers rowed out of the fiord, and the chiefs laid 
cTJ^ry!^ their vessels together to talk with each other, for the 
earl wanted counsel from his lendermen. Erling 
Skialgsson advised that they should sail north, collect 
people, and fight King Olaf again ; but as they had 
lost many people, the most were of opinion that the 
earl should leave the country, and repair to his bro- 
ther-in-law the Swedish king, and strengthen himself 
there with men. Einar Tambarskelver approved also 
of that advice, as they had no power to hold battle 
against Olaf. So they discharged their fleet. The 
earl sailed across Folden*, and with him Einar Tam- 
barskelver. Erling Skialgsson again, and likewise 
many other lendermen who would not abandon their 
udal possessions, went north to their homes; and 
Erling had many people that summer about him. 
Chapter When King Olaf and his men saw that the earl had 
King * gathered his ships together, Sigurd Syr was in haste 
Sigurd's"^ for pursuing the earl, and letting steel decide their 
consult- cause. But King Olaf replies, that he would first see 
what the earl intended doing, — whether he would keep 
his force together or discharge his fleet. Sigurd Syr 
said, " It is for thee, king, to command ; but," he 
adds, " I fear from thy disposition and wilfulness that 
thou wilt some day be betrayed by trusting to those 
great people, for they are accustomed of old to bid 
defiance to their sovereigns." There was no attack 

♦ Christiania fiord is called Folden, or Folden fiord. 



ation. 



KINGS OP NORWAY. 49 

made, for it was soon seen that the earl's fleet was saga vu 
dispersing. Then King Olaf ransacked the slain, and 
remained there some days . to divide the booty. At 
that time Sigvat made these verses : — 

"The tale I tell is true: 
To their homes returned but few 
Of Swend's men, who came to meet 
King Olaf *s gallant fleet. 
From the North these warmen came 
To try the bloody game, — 
On the waves their corpses borne 
Show the game that Sunday morn. 
The Drontheim girls so fair 
Their jeers, I think, will spare. 
For the king's force was but small 
That emptied Drontheim 's hall. 
But if they will have their jeer. 
They may ask their sweethearts dear. 
Why they have returned shorn 
Who went to shear that Sunday morn." 

And also these : — 

" Now will the king's power rise. 

For the Upland men still prize 

The king who o'er the sea 

Steers to bloody victory. 
, Earl Swend! thou now wilt know 

That our lads can make blood flow — 

That the Hedemarkers hale 

Can do more than tap good ale." 

King Olaf gave his stepfather King Sigurd Syr, 
and the other chiefs who had assisted him, handsome 
presents at parting. He gave Ketil of Ringaness a 
yacht of fifteen benches of rowers, which Ketil brought 
up the Glommen river and into the Myosen lake. 

King Olaf sent spies out to trace the earl's doings ; Chapter 
and when he found that the earl had left the country or kI^'t 
he sailed out west, and to Viken, where many people ^^*^- 
came to him. At the Thing there he was taken as 
king, and so he proceeded all the way to the Naze ; 
and when he heard that Erling Skialgsson had ga- 
thered a large force, he did not tarry in North Agder, 
but sailed with a steady fair wind to Drontheim 

VOL. n. E 



50 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. country ; for there it appeared to him was the greatest 
strength of the land, if he could subdue it for himself 
while the earl was abroad. When Olaf came to Dron- 
theim there was no opposition, and he was elected 
there to be king. In harvest he took his seat in the 
town of Nidaros, and collected the needful winter 
provision. He built a king's house, and raised Cle- 
ment's church on the spot on which it now stands. 
He parcelled out building ground, which he gave to 
bonders, merchants, or others who he thought would 
build. There he sat down, with many men-at-arms 
around him; for he put no great confidence in the 
Drontheim people, if the earl should return to the 
country. The people of the interior of the Drontheim 
country showed this clearly, for he got no land-scatt 
from them. 
Chaftcr Earl Swend went first to Sweden, to his brother- 
pianof in-law Olaf the Swedish king, told him all that had 
i^*d\hr^"^ happened between him and Olaf the Thick, and asked 
Swedish his advice about what he should now undertake. The 
king said that the earl should stay with him if he 
liked, and get such a portion of his kingdom to rule 
over as should seem to him sufficient; " or otherwise," 
says he, " I will give thee help of forces to conquer 
the country again from Olaf." The earl chose the 
latter; for all those among his men who had great 
possessions in Norway, which was the case with many 
who were with him, were anxious to get back ; and 
in the council they held about this, it was resolved 
that in winter they should take the land-way over 
Helsingialand and Jemteland, and so down into the 
Drontheim land; for the earl reckoned most upon 
the faithful help and strength of the Drontheim peo- 
ple of the interior as soon as he should appear there. 
In the mean time, however, it was determined to 
take a cruise in summer in the Baltic to gather pro- 
perty. 



king. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 61 

Earl Swend went westward with his forces to saga vn. 
Russia, and passed the summer in marauding there ; Cbaptir 
but on the approach of autumn returned with his j^i^^' 
ships to Sweden. There he fell into a sickness, which Swend»s 
proved fatal. After the earl's death some of the 
people who had followed him remained in Sweden ; 
others went to Helsingialand, thence to Jemteland, 
and so from the east over the dividing ridge of the 
country to the Drontheim district, where they told 
aU that had happened upon their journey : and thus 
the truth of Earl Swend's death was known. 

Einar Tambarskelver, and the people who had fol- ^""t"** 
lowed him, went in winter to the Swedish king, and of the * 
were received in a friendly manner. There were also ^p"*^®'"* 
among them many who had followed the earl. The 
Swedish king took it much amiss that Olaf the Thick 
had set himself down in his scatt-lands, and driven 
the earl out of them, and therefore he threatened the 
king with his heaviest vengeance when opportunity 
offered. He said that Olaf ought not to have had the 
presumption to take the dominions which the earl had 
held of him ; and all the Swedish king's men agreed 
with him. But the Drontheim people, when they 
heard for certain that the earl was dead, and could 
not be expected back to Norway, turned all to obe- 
dience to King Olaf. Many came from the interior 
of the Drontheim country, and became King Olaf 's 
men ; others sent word and tokens that they would 
serve him. Then, in autunm, he went into the inte^ 
rior of Drontheim, and held Things with the bonders, 
and was received as king in each district. He re- 
turned to Nidaros, and brought there all the king's 
scatt and revenue, and had his winter seat provided 
there. 

King Olaf built a king's house in Nidaros, and in Chawer 
it was a large room for his court, with doors at both of King 
ends. The king's high seat was in the middle of the ^j*^^^ij 

E 2 



52 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. room ; and within sat his court-bishop, Grimkel, and 
next him his other priests; without them sat his 
councUlors ; and in the other high seat opposite to 
the king sat his marshal, Biom, and next to him his 
pursuivants.* When people of importance came to 
him, they also had a seat of honour. The ale was 
drunk by the fire-light. He divided the service 
among his men after the fashion of other kings. He 
had in his house sixty court-men and thirty pur- 
suivants ; and to them he gave pay and certain regu- 
lations. He had also thirty house-servants to do the 
needful work about the house, and procure what was 
required. He had besides many slaves. At the house 
were many outbuildings, in which the court-men 
slept. There was also a large room, in which the 
king held his court-meetings. 

Chapter It was King Olaf 's custom to rise betimes in the 
Of King morning, put on his clothes, wash his hands, and then 
go to the church and hear the matins and morning 
mass. Thereafter he went to the Thing-meeting, to 
bring people to agreement with each other, or to 
talk of one or the other matter that appeared to 
him necessary. He invited to him great and small 
who were known to be men of understanding. He 
often made them recite to him the laws which Hakon 
Athelstan's foster-son had made for Drontheim ; and 
after considering them with those men of understand- 
ing, he ordered laws adding to or taking from those 
established before. But Christian privileges he settled 
according to the advice of Bishop Grimkel and other 
learned priests ; and bent his whole mind to uprooting 
heathenism, and old customs which he thought con- 
trary to Christianity. And he succeeded so far that 

* Gisestr appear to have been inferior in rank to the court-men, 
thing-men, or men-at-arms of the king's guard; and to have been em- 
ployed in civil affkirs, as gathering penalties, inflicting punishments, 
and collecting provisions. 



Olaf's 
habits 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 53 

the bonders accepted of the laws which the king pro- saga vh. 
posed. So says Sigvat: — 

" The king, who at the helm guides 
His warlike ship through clashing tides, 
Now gives one law for all the land — 
A heavenly law, which long will stand." 

King Olaf was a good and very gentle man, of 
little speech, and open-handed although greedy of 
money. Sigvat the scald, as before related, was in 
King Olaf 's house, and several Iceland men. The 
king asked particularly how Christianity was observed 
in Iceland, and it appeared to him to be very far from 
what it ought to be; for as to observing Christian 
practices, it was told the king that it was permitted 
there to eat horse-flesh, to expose infants as heathens 
do, besides many other things contrary to Chris- 
tianity. They also told the king about many prin- 
cipal men who were then in Iceland. Skopte Tho- 
raddsson was then the lagman of the country. He 
inquired also of those who were best acquainted 
with it about the state of people in other distant 
countries; and his inquiries turned principally on 
how Christianity was observed in the Orkney, Shet- 
land, and Faroe Islands : and, as far as he could learn, 
it was far from being as he could have wished. Such 
conversation was usually carried on by him ; or else 
he spoke about the laws and rights of the country. 

The same winter came messengers from the Swed- Chapter 
ish king, Olaf the Swede, out of Sweden; and their of^hl^^* 
leaders were two brothers, Thorgaut Skarde, and Swedish 
Asgaut the bailiff; and they had twenty-four men oiTrsmes- 
with them. When they came from the eastward, ^l^ 
over the ridge of- the country down into Vaerdal, they bailiff 
summoned a Thing of the bonders, talked to them, dd^h" ^ 
and demanded of them scatt and duties upon account 
of the king of Sweden. But the bonders, after con- 
sulting with each other, determined only to pay the 

E 3 



54 CHRONICLE OF THE 

RAOAjiL scatt which the Swedish king required in so far as 
King Olaf required none upon his account, but re- 
fused to pay scatt to both. The messengers pro- 
ceeded farther down the valley; but received at every 
Thing they held the same answer, and no money* 
They went forward to Skogn, held a Thing there, 
and demanded scatt; but it went there as before. 
Then they came to Stordal, and summoned a Thing, 
but the bonders would not come to it. Now the 
messengers saw that their business was a failure ; and 
Thorgaut proposed that they should turn about, and 
go eastward again. " I do not think," says Asgaut, 
" that we have performed the king's errand unless we 
go to King Olaf the Thick, since the bonders refer 
the matter to him." He was their commander; so 
they proceeded to the town (Nidaros), and took lodg- 
ing there. The day after they presented themselves 
to the king, just as he was seated at table ; saluted 
Wm; and said they came with a message of the 
Swedish king. The king told them to come to him 
next day. Next day the king, having heard mass, 
went to his Thing-house, ordered the messengers of 
the Swedish king to be called, and told them to pro- 
duce their message. Then Thorgaut spoke, and told 
first what his errand was, and next how the Dron- 
theim people of the interior had replied to it ; and 
asked the king's decision on the business, that they 
might know what result their errand there was to 
have. The king answers, "While the earls ruled 
over the country, it was not to be wondered at if the 
country people thought themselves bound to obey 
them, as they were at least of the royal race of the 
kingdom. But it would have been more just if those 
earls had given assistance and service to the kings 
who had a right to the country, rather than to 
foreign kings, or to stir up opposition to their lawful 
kings, depriving them of their land and kingdom. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 5^ 

With regard to Olaf the Swede, who calls himself en- sagavii. 
titled to the kingdom of Norway, I, who in fact am 
80 entitled, can see no ground for his claim ; but well 
remember the skaith and damage we have suffered 
from him and his relations." 

Then says Asgaut, " It is not wonderful that thou 
art called Olaf the Thick, seeing thou answerest so 
haughtily to such a prince's message, and canst not 
see clearly how heavy the king's wrath will be for 
thee to support, as many have experienced who had 
greater strength than thou appearest to have. But 
if thou wishest to keep hold of thy kingdom, it will 
be best for thee to come to the king, and be his man; 
and we shall beg him to give thee this kingdom in 
fief under him." 

The king replies with all gentleness, " I will give 
thee an advice, Asgaut, in return. Go back to the 
east again to thy king, and tell him that early in 
spring I will make myself ready, and will proceed 
eastward to the ancient frontier that divided for- 
merly the kingdom gf the kings of Norway from 
Sweden. There he may come if he likes, that we 
may conclude a peace with each other; and each of 
us wiU retain the kingdom to which he is bom." 

Now the messengers turned back to their lodging, 
and prepared for their departure, and the king went to 
table. The messengers came back soon after to the 
king's house; but the door-keepers saw it, and re- 
ported it to the king, who told them not to let the 
messengers in. " I will not speak with them," said 
he. Then the messengers went off, and Thorgaut 
said he would now return home with his men ; but 
Asgaut insisted stUl that he would go forward with 
the king's errand : so they separated. Thorgaut pro- 
ceeded accordingly through Strind ; but Asgaut went 
into Gaulardal and Orkedal, and intended proceeding 
southwards to More, to ddiver his king's message. 

£ 4 



56 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAQA VII. When King Olaf came to the knowledge of this he 
sent out his pursuivants after them, who found them 
at the Ness in Stein, bound their hands behind their 
backs, and led them down to the point called Gaula- 
ras, where they raised a gallows, and hanged them so 
that they could be seen by those who travelled the 
usual sea-way out of the fiord. Thorgaut heard this 
news before he had travelled far on his way home 
through the Drontheim country ; and he hastened on 
his journey until he came to the Swedish king, and 
told him how it had gone with them. The king was 
highly enraged when he heard the account of it ; and 
he had no lack of high words. Sigvat tells of it thus : — 

" Twelve Swedish men, I've heard it said. 
Were here in Norway prisoners made; 
Olaf would mercy show to none, 
But had them hanged up every one. 
'Tis not the first time I have known 
Those who the Swedish monarch own 
On Sigur's horse ride in the sky, 
Their souls in hell, their heads hung high." 

The spring thereafter King Olaf Haraldsson calls 
out an army from the Drontheim land, and makes 
ready to proceed eastward. Some of the Iceland 
traders were then ready to sail from Norway. With 
them King Olaf sent word and token to Hialte Skeg- 
geson, and summoned him to come to him ; and at 
the same time sent a verbal message to Skopte the 
lagman, and other men who principally took part 
in the lawgiving of Iceland, to take out of the law 
whatever appeared contrary to Christianity. He sent 
besides a message of friendship to the people in gene- 
ral. The king then proceeded southwards himself 
along the coast, stopping at every district, and hold- 
ing Things with the bonders ; and in each Thing he 
ordered the Christian law to be read, together with 
the message of salvation thereunto belonging, and with 
which many ill customs and much heathenism were 



Chapter 

LVIII. 

King Olaf 

and Erling 



reconciled 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 57 

swept away at once among the common people: for saga vn. 
the earls had kept well the old laws and rights of the 
country ; but with respect to keeping Christianity, 
they had allowed every man to do as he liked. It 
was thus come so far that the people were baptized 
in the most places on the sea coast, but the most of 
them were ignorant of Christian law. In the upper 
ends of the valleys, and in the habitations among the 
Fielde, the greater part of the people were heathen ; 
for when the common man is left to himself, the faith 
be has been taught in his childhood is that which has 
the strongest hold over his inclination. But the king 
threatened the most violent proceedings against great 
or small, who, after the king's message, would not 
adopt Christianity. In the mean time Olaf was pro- 
claimed king in every Law Thing in the country, and 
no man spoke against him. While he lay in Kormt- 
sound messengers went between him and Erling 
Skialgsson, who endeavoured to make peace between 
them; and the meeting was appointed in Whitings 
Isle. When they met they spoke with each other 
about agreement together; but Erling found some- 
thing else than he expected in the conversation : for 
when he insisted on having all the fiefs which Olaf 
Tryggvesson, and afterwards the earls Swend and 
Hakon had given him, and on that condition would be 
his man and dutiful friend, the king answered, " It 
appears to me, Erling, that it would be no bad bargain 
for thee to get as great fiefs from me for thy aid and 
friendship as thou hadst from Earl Eric, a man who 
had done thee the greatest injury by the bloodshed 
of thy men ; but even if I let thee remain the greatest 
lenderman in Norway, I will bestow my fiefs according 
to my own will, and not act as if ye lendermen had 
udal right to my ancestors' heritage, and I was obliged 
to buy your services with manifold rewards." Erling 
had no disposition to sue for even the smallest thing; 



58 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. and he saw that the king was not easily dealt with. 
He saw also that he had only two conations before 
him: the one was to make no agreement with the 
king, and stand by the consequences; the other, to 
leave it entirely to the king's pleasure. Although it 
was much against his inclination, he chose the latter, 
and merely said to the king, " The service will be 
the most useful to thee which I give with a free 
will." And thus their conference ended. Erling's 
relations and friends came to him afterwards, and 
advised him to give way, and proceed with more pru- 
dence and less pride. " Thou wilt still," they said, 
" be the most important and most respected lender- 
man in Norway, both on account of thy own and 
thy relations' abilities and great wealth." Erling 
found that this was prudent advice, and that they 
who gave it did so with a good intention, and he 
followed it accordingly. Erling went into the king's 
service on such conditions as the king himself should 
determine and please. Thereafter they separated in 
some shape reconciled, and Olaf went his way east- 
ward along the coast. 

Chaptir As soon as it was reported that Olaf had come to 

T TV ■•■ 

EiUf of' Viken, the Danes who had offices under the Danish 
king set off for Denmark, without waiting for King 
Olaf. But King Olaf saQed in along Viken, holding 
Things with the bonders. All the people of the 
country submitted to him, and thereafter he took all 
the king's taxes, and remained the sunamer in Viken. 
He then sailed east from Tunsberg across the fiord, 
and all the way east to Swinesund. There the 
Swedish king's dominions begin, and he had set 
officers over this country; namely, Eilif Gautske over 
the north part, and Hroa Skialge over the east part, 
all the way to the Gotha river. Hroa had family 
friends on both sides of the river, and also great farms 
on Hising Island, and was besides a mighty and very 



Gotland's 
murder. 



KINGS OF NOEWAY. 59 

rich man. Eilif was also of great family, and very s^oa vn. 
wealthy. Now when King Olaf came to Ranrige he 
summoned the people to a Thing, and all who 
dwelt on the sea-coast, or in the out-islands, came 
to him. Now when the Thing was seated the 
king's marshal, Biom, held a speech to them, in 
which he told the bonders to receive Olaf as their 
king, in the same way as had been done in all other 
parts of Norway. Then stood up a bold bonder, by 
name Bryniulf tJlfalde, and said, " We bonders know 
where the division-boundaries between the Norway 
and Danish and Swedish kings' lands have stood by 
rights in old times ; namely, that the Gotha river di- 
vided their lands between the Venner lake and the sea ; 
but towards the north the forests untU Eida forest, 
and from thence the ridge of the country all north 
to Finmark. We know, also, that by turns they 
have made inroads upon each other's territories, 
and that the Swedes have long had power all the way 
to Swinesund. But, sooth to say, I know that it is 
the inclination of many rather to serve the king of 
Norway, but they dare not ; for the Swedish king's 
dominions surround us, both eastward, southward, 
and also up the country ; and besides, it may be ex- 
pected that the king of Norway must soon go to the 
north, where the strength of his kingdom hes, and 
then we have no power to withstand the Gotlanders. 
Now it is for the king to give us good counsel, for 
we have great desire to be his men." After the 
Thing, in the evening, Bryniulf was in the king's 
tent, and the day after likewise, and they had much 
private conversation together. Then the king pro- 
ceeded eastwards along Viken. Now when EiUf 
heard of his arrival, he sent out spies to discover 
what he was about ; but he himself, with thirty men, 
kept himself high up in the hslbitations among the 
hills, where he had gathered together bonders. Many 



60 CHEONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. of the bonders came to King Olaf, but some sent 
friendly messages to him. People went between 
King Olaf and Eilif, and they entreated each se- 
parately to hold a Thing-meeting between them- 
selves, and make peace in one way or another. They 
told Eilif that they might expect violent treatment 
from King Olaf if they opposed his orders ; but pro- 
mised Eilif , he should not want men. It was deter- 
mined that they should come down from the high 
country, and hold a Thing with the bonders and the 
king. King Olaf thereupon sent the chief of his pur- 
suivants, Thorer Lange, with six men, to Bryniulf. 
They were equipt with their coats of mail under 
their cloaks, and their hats over their helmets. The 
following day the bonders came in crowds down with 
Eilif; and in his suite was Brjmiulf, and with him 
Thorer. The king laid his ships close to a rocky 
knoll that stuck out into the sea, and upon it the king 
went with his people, and sat down. Below was a 
flat field, on which the bonders' force was ; but Eilif 's 
men were drawn up, forming a shield-fence before 
him. Biom the marshal spoke long and cleverly 
upon the king's account, and when he sat down Eilif 
arose to speak; but at the same moment Thorer 
Lange rose, drew his sword, and struck Eilif on the 
neck, so that his head flew off. Then the whole 
bonder-force started up; but the Gotland men set 
off in full flight, and Thorer with his people killed 
several of them. Now when the crowd was settled 
again, and the noise over, the king stood up, 
and told the bonders to seat themselves. They 
did so, and then much was spoken. The end of 
it was that they submitted to the king, and pro- 
mised fidelity to him ; and he, on the other hand, 
promised not to desert them, but to remain at 
hand until the discord between him and the Swedish 
Olaf was settled in one way or other. ' King Olaf 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 61 

then brought the whole northern district under his saga vn. 
power, and went in summer eastward as far as the 
Gotha river, and got all the king's scatt among the 
islands. But when summer was drawing towards an 
end he returned north to Viken, and sailed up the 
Glommen to a waterfall called Sarpon. On the 
north side of the fall, a point of land juts out into the 
river. There the king ordered a rampart to be built 
right across the ness, of stone, turf, and wood, and a 
ditch to be dug in front of it ; so that it was a large 
earthen fort or burgh, which he made a merchant town 
of. He had a king's house put up, and ordered the 
building of Mary church. He also laid out plans for 
other houses, and got people to build on them. In 
harvest he let every thing be gathered there that 
was useful for his winter residence, and sat there 
with a great many people, and the rest he quartered 
in the neighbouring districts. The king prohibited 
all exports from Viken to Gotland of herrings and 
salt, which the Gotland people could ill do without. 
This year the king held a great Yule feast, to which 
he invited many great bonders. 

There was a man called Eyvind Urarhorn, who Chapter 
was a great man, of high birth, who had his descent Here be- 
from Easter Agder country. Every summer he went gJ"tor^^of 
out on a viking cruise, sometimes to the West sea, Eyvind 
sometimes to the Baltic, sometimes south to Flanders, ^^ '°'"' 
and had a well-armed cutter (snaekke) of twenty 
benches of rowers. He had been also at Nesie, and 
given his aid to the king; and when they separated 
the king promised him his favour, and Eyvind again 
promised to come to the king's aid whenever he was 
required. This winter Eyvind was at the Yule feast 
of the king, and received goodly gifts from him. 
Bryniulf Ulfalde was also with the king, and he re- 
ceived a Yule present from the king of a gold-mounted 
sword, and also a farm called Vettaland, which is a 



62 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



Chafrk 

LXI. 
Thrand 
White's 
murder. 



sAOAviL very large head-farm of the district. Bryniulf composed 
a song about these gifts, of which the refrain was — 

" The Bong-famed hero to my hand 
Gave a good sword, and Vettaland." 

The king afterwards gave him the title of Lender- 
man, and Bryniulf was ever after the king's greatest 
friend. 

This winter Thrand White from Drontheim went 
east to Jemteland, to take up scatt upon account of 
King Olaf. But when he had collected the scatt he 
was surprised by men of the Swedish king, who killed 
him and his men, twelve in all, and brought the scatt 
to the Swedish king. Bang Olaf was very ill pleased 
when he heard this news. 

King Olaf made Christian law to be proclaimed in 
Viken, in the same way as in the North country. It 
succeeded well, because the people of Viken were 
better acquainted with the Christian customs than 
the people in the north ; for, both winter and summer, 
there were many merchants in Viken, both Danish and 
Saxon. The people of Viken, also, had much trading 
intercourse with England, and Saxony, and Flan- 
ders, and Denmark; and som^ had been on viking ex- 
peditions, and had had their winter abode in Christian 
lands. 

About spring time King Olaf sent a message that 
Eyvind Urarhom should come to him; and they 
spake together in private for a long time. Thereafter 
Eyvind made himself ready for a viking cruise. 
He sailed south towards Viken, and brought up at 
the Eker Isles without Hising Isle. There he heard 
that Hroa Skialge had gone northwards towards the 
island Ordost, and had there made a levy of men and 
goods on account of the Swedish king, and was ex- 
pected from the north. Eyvind rowed in by Hauge 
sound, and Hroa came rowing from the north, and 



Chafra 
LXII. 
Christian- 
ity pro- 
claimed in 
Viken. 



Cmafteii 

LXllI. 

Hroa*8 fall. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 63 

they met in the sound and fought. Hroa fell there, sagavil 
with nearly thirty men; and Eyvind took all the 
goods Hroa had with him. Eyvind then proceeded to 
the Baltic, and was all summer on a viking cruise. 

There was a man called Gudleif Gerske*, who came Chapter 
originally from Agder. He was a great merchant, pdi^f^' 
who went far and wide by sea, was very rich, and ^^f^ 
drove a trade with various countries. He often went xhorgaut 
east to Garderidge (Russia), and therefore was called ®'^^®- 
Gudleif Gerske (the Russian). This spring Gudleif 
fitted out his ship, and intended to go east in summer 
to Russia. King Olaf sent a message to him that he 
wanted to speak to him ; and when Gudleif came to 
the king he told him he would go in partnership with 
him, and told him to purchase some costly articles 
whicli were difficult to be had in this country. Gud- 
leif said that it should be according to the king's 
desire. The king ordered as much money to be deli- 
vered to Gudleif as he thought sufficient, and then 
Gudleif set out for the Baltic. They lay in a sound 
in Gotland ; and there it happened, as it often does, 
that people cannot keep their own secrets, and the 
people of the country came to know that in this ship 
was Olaf the Thick's partner. Gudleif went in sum- 
mer eastwards to Novogorod, where he bought fine 
and costly clothes, which he intended for the king as 
a state dress; and also precious fiirs, and remarkably 
splendid table utensUs. In autumn, as Gudleif was re- 
turning from the east, he met a contrary wind, and 
lay for a long time at the island Oland. There came 
Thorgaut Skarde, who in autumn had heard of Gud- 
leif's course, in a long-ship against him, and gave 
him battle. They fought long, and Gudleif and his 
people defended themselves for a long time ; but the 
numbers against them were great, and Gudleif and 

« * Gerske — viz. from Garderidge — the Russian. 



64 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA yii. many of his ship's crew fell, and a great many. of 
them were wounded. Thorgaut took all their goods, 
and King Olaf's, and he and his comrades divided the 
booty among them equally ; but he said the Swedish 
king ought to have the precious articles of King Olaf, 
as these, he said, should be considered as part of the 
scatt due to him from Norway. Thereafter Thorgaut 
proceeded east to Sweden. These tidings were soon 
known ; and as Eyvind Urarhom came soon after to 
Oland, he heard the news, and sailed east after Thor- 
gaut and his troop, and overtook them among the 
Swedish isles on the coast, and gave battle. There 
Thorgaut and the most of his men were killed, and 
the rest sprang overboard. Eyvind took all the goods, 
and all the costly articles of King Olaf which they 
had captured from Gudleif, and went with these back 
to Norway in autumn, and delivered to King Olaf his 
precious wares. The king thanked him in the most 
friendly way for his proceeding, and promised him 
anew his favour and friendship. At this time Olaf 
had been three years king over Norway. 

CiiAPTER The same summer King Olaf ordered a levy, and 

LXV 

Meeting of wcut out castwards to the Gotha river, where he lay 
^d Emi*^ great part of the summer. Messages were passing 
iiognvaid. between King Olaf, Earl Rognvald, and the earl's 
wife, Ingeborg, the daughter of Tryggve. She was 
very zealous about giving King Olaf of Norway every 
kind of help, and made it a matter of her deepest 
interest. For this there were two causes. She had 
a great friendship for King Olaf ; and also she could 
never forget that the Swedish king had been one at 
the death of her brother, Olaf Tryggvesson ; and also 
that he, on that account only, had any pretence to rule 
over Norway. The earl, by her persuasion, turned 
much towards friendship with King Olaf; and it pro- 
ceeded so far that the earl and the king appointed a 
meeting, and met at the Gotha river. They talked 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 65 

together of many things, but especially of the Nor- saga vil 
wegian and Swedish kings' relations with each other ; 
both agreeing, as was the truth also, that it was the 
greatest loss, both to the people of Viken and of Got- 
land, that there was no peace for trade between the 
two countries; and at last both agreed upon a peace, 
and still -stand of arms between them until next sum- 
mer: and they parted with mutual gifts and friendly 
speeches. 

The king thereupon returned north to Viken, and Chapter 
had all the royal revenues up to the Gotha river ; and K^g ouf 
all the people of the country there had submitted to ^^^ ^j^^^^' 
him. King Olaf the Swede had so great a hatred of to King ^ 
Olaf Haraldsson, that no man dared to call him by Sdl^n!' 
his right name in the king's hearing. They called 
him the thick man; and never named him without 
some hard by-name. 

The bonders in Viken spoke with each other about Chapter 
there being nothing for it but that the kings should B^^n^ng 
make peace and a league with each other, and in- o^theiw- 
sisted upon it that they were badly used by the kings their recon- 
going to war ; but nobody was so bold as to bring *'*'***'^"- 
these murmurs before the king. At last they begged 
Biom the marshal to bring this matter before the 
the king, and entreat him to send messengers to the 
Swedish king to oflfer peace on his side. Biorn was 
disinclined to do this, and put it off from himself with 
excuses ; but on the entreaties of many of his friends, 
he promised at last to speak of it to the king ; but 
declared, at the same time, that he knew it would 
be taken very ill by the king to propose that he 
should give way in any thing to the Swedish king. 
The same summer Hialte Skeggeson came over to 
Norway from Iceland, according to the message sent 
him by King Olaf, and went directly to the king. 
He was well received by the king, who told him to 
lodge in his house, and gave him a seat beside Biorn 

VOL. n. F 



66 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. the marshal, and Hialte became his comrade at 
table. There was good fellowship immediately be- 
tween them. 

Once, when King Olaf had assembled the people 
and bonders to consult upon the good of the country, 
Biorn the marshal said, "What think you, king, of 
the strife that is between the Swedish king and you ? 
Many people have fallen on both sides, without its 
being at all more determined than before what each 
. of you shall have of the kingdom. You have now 
been sitting in Viken one winter and two summers, 
and the whole country to the north is lying behind 
your back unseen ; and the men who have property 
or udal rights in the north are weary of sitting here. 
Now it is the wish of the lendermen, of your other 
people, and of the bonders, that this should come to 
an end. There is now a truce, agreement, and peace 
with the earl, and the West Gotland people who are 
nearest to us ; and it appears to the people it would 
be best that you sent messengers to the Swedish king 
to offer a reconciliation on your side ; and, without 
doubt, many who are about the Swedish king will 
support the proposal, for it is a common gain for 
those who dwell in both countries, both here and 
there." This speech of Biorn's received great ap- 
plause. 

Then the king said, "It is fair, Biorn, that the 
advice thou hast given should be carried out by thy- 
self. Thou shalt undertake this embassy thyself, and 
enjoy the good of it, if thou hast advised well ; and if 
it involve any man in danger, thou hast involved thy- 
self in it. Moreover, it belongs to thy office to 
declare to the multitude what I wish to have told." 
Then the king stood up, went to the church, and had 
high mass sung before him ; and thereafter went to 
table. 

The following day Hialte said to Biorn, " Why art 



KINGS OF NOEWAY. 67 

thou SO melancholy, man ? Art thou sick, or art thou saga vn. 
angry at anyone?" Biom tells Hialte his conver- 
sation with the king, and says it is a very danger- 
ous errand. 

Hialte says, " It is their lot who follow kings that 
they enjoy high honours, and are more respected than 
other men, but stand often in danger of their hves : 
and they must understand how to bear both parts of 
their lot. The king's luck is great ; and much ho- 
nour will be gained by this business, if it succeed." 

Biom answered, " Since thou makest so light of 
this business in thy speech, wilt thou go with me? 
The king has promised that I shall have companions 
with me on the journey." 

"Certainly," says Hialte; "I wiU foUow thee, if 
thou wilt : for never again shall I fall in with such a 
comrade if we part." 

A few days afterwards, when the kinff was at a Chaptm 

T "VVTTT 

Thing-meeting, Biom came with eleven others. He ThejouF- 
says to the king that they were now ready to pro- "*iy ^^ 
ceed on their mission, and that their horses stood marshal, 
saddled at the door. " And now," says he, " I would 
know with what errand I am to go, or what orders 
thou givest us." 

The king rephes, " Ye shall carry these my words 
to the Swedish king — that I will establish peace be- 
tween our countries up to the frontier which Olaf 
Tryggvesson had before me; and each shall bind 
himself faithfully not to trespass over it. But with 
regard to the loss of people, no man must mention it 
if peace there is to be ; for the Swedish king cannot 
with money pay for the men the Swedes have deprived 
us of." Thereupon the king rose, and went out with 
Biom and his followers ; and he took a gold-mounted 
sword and a gold ring, and said, in handing over the 
sword to Biorn, " This I give thee : it was given to me 
in summer by Earl Rognvald. To him ye shall go ; and 

F 2 



68 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. bring him word from me to advance your errand with 
his counsel and strength. This thy errand I will 
think well fulfilled if thou hearest the Swedish king's 
own words, be they yea or nay : and this gold ring 
thou shalt give Earl Eognvald. These are tokens* 
he must know well." 

Hialte went up to the king, saluted him, and said, 
" We need much, king, that thy luck attend us ;" and 
wished that they might meet again in good health. 

The king asked where Hialte was going. 

" With Biorn," said he. 

The king said, "It will assist much to the good 
success of the journey that thou goest too, for thy 
good fortune has often been proved ; and be assured 
that I shall wish that all my luck, if that be of any 
weight, may attend thee and thy company." 

Biorn and his followers rode their way, and came 
to Earl Rognvald's court. Biorn was a celebrated 
and generally known man, — known by sight and 
speech to all who had ever seen King Olaf; for, at 
every Thing, Biorn stood up and told the king's mes- 
sage. Ingeborg, the earl's wife, went up to Hialte 
and kissed him. She knew him, for she was living 
with her brother Olaf Tryggvesson when Hialte was 
there: and she knew how to reckon up the relation- 
ship between King Olaf and Vilborg, the wife of 

* Before writing was a common accomplishment in courts, the only 
way of accrediting a special messenger between kings and great men 
was by giving the messenger a token; that is, some article well known 
by the person receiving the message to be the property of and valued 
by the person sending it. The exchange of tokens of friendship, and 
of presents of rings and jewels, was not merely an expression of the 
sentiments of friendship, but the means of confidential communications 
in business — the credentials of the persons, sent with them as being 
messengers to be confided in, and having a real message to convey. 
Others, as well as the translator, may remember when, in remote pa- 
rishes of .the north of Scotland, it was no unusual circumstance to give a 
beggar the key of the girnal to carry to the house, as a token to the 
housewife that he was to get half a stone of meal by order of the gude- 
man. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 69 

Hialte; for Eric Biodaskalla father of Astrid, King sagajii. 
Olaf Tryggvesson's mother, and Bodvar father of 
Olafa, mother of Gissur White the father of Vilborg, 
were brother's sons of the lenderman Viking-Kare of 
Vors. 

They enjoyed here good entertainment. One day 
Biom entered into conversation with the earl and 
Ingeborg, in which he set forth his errand, and pro- 
duced to the earl his tokens. 

The earl rephes, "What hast thou done, Biorn, 
that the king wishes thy death ? For, so far from thy 
errand having any success, I do not think a man can 
be found who could speak these words to the Swedish 
king without incurring wrath and punishment. King 
Olaf, king of Sweden, is too proud for any man to 
speak to him on any thing he is angry at." 

Then Biom says, "Nothing has happened to me 
that King Olaf is offended at j but many of his dispo- 
sition act, both for themselves and others, in a way 
that only men who are daring can succeed in. But 
as yet all his plans have had good success, and I 
think this will turn out well too ; so I assure you^ 
earl, that I will really travel to the Swedish king, 
and not turn back before I have brought to his ears 
every word that Ejng Olaf told me to say to him, 
unless death prevent me, or that I am in bonds, and 
cannot perform my errand ; and this I must do, whe- 
ther you give any aid or no aid to me in fulfilling the 
king's wishes." 

Then said Ingeborg, " I will soon declare my opi- 
nion. I think, earl, thou must turn all thy attention 
to supporting King Olaf the king of Norway's desire 
that this message be laid before the Swedish king, in 
whatever way he may answer it. Although the 
Swedish king's anger should be incurred, and our 
power and property be at stake, yet will I rather run 
the risk, than that it should be said the message of 

F 3 



70 CHJiONICLE OF THE 

SACA VII. King Olaf was neglected from fear of the Swedish 
king. Thou hast that birth, strength of relations, 
and other means, that here in the Swedish land it is 
free to thee to tell thy mind, if it be right and worthy 
of being heard, whether it be listened to by few or 
many, great or little people, or by the king himiself." 
The earl replies, "It is known to every one how 
thou urgest me : it may be, according to thy coun- 
sel, that I should promise the king's men to follow 
them, so that they may get their errand laid before 
the Swedish king, whether he take it ill or take it well. 
But I wiU have my own counsel followed, and will 
not run hastily into Biom's or any other man's mea- 
sures, in such a highly important matter. It is my 
will that ye aU remain here with me, so long as I think 
it necessary for the purpose of rightly forwarding this 
mission." Now as the earl had thus given them to 
understand that he would support them in the busi- 
ness, Biorn thanked him most kindly, and with the 
assurance that his advice should rule them altogether. 
Thereafter Biorn and his fellow-travellers remained 
very long in the earl's house. 
CHAPrEn Ingeborg was particularly kind to them; and 
Of the^on- ^^^^^ often spoke with her about the matter, and was 
versation of ill at case that their journey was so long delayed. 
fngeborgf Hialtc aud the others often spoke together also about 
Tryggve's the matter ; and Hialte said, " I mil go to the king 
if ye like ; for I am not a man of Norway, and the 
Swedes cau have nothing to say to me. I have heard 
that there are Iceland men in the king's house who 
are my acquaintances, and are well treated ; namely, 
the scalds Gissur Black and Ottar Black. From them 
I shall get out what I can about the Swedish king ; 
and if the business will really be so difficult as it now 
appears, or if there be any other way of promoting it, 
I can easily devise some errand that may appear suit- 
able for me." 



KINGS OF NORWAY- 71 

This counsel appeared to Biom and Ingeborg to be saga vil 
the wisest, and they resolved upon it among them- 
selves. Ingeborg put Hialte in a position to travel ; 
gave him two Gotland men with him, and ordered 
them to follow him, and assist him with their ser- 
vice, and also to go wherever he might have occa- 
sion to send them. Besides, Ingeborg gave him 
twenty marks of weighed silver money for travelling 
expenses, and sent word and token by him to the 
Swedish king Olaf's daughter, Ingigerd, that she 
should give all her assistance to Hialte's business, 
whenever he should find himself under the the neces- 
sity of craving her help. Hialte set off as soon as he 
was ready. When he came to Ejng Olaf he soon found 
the scalds Gissur and Ottar, and they were very glad 
at his coming. Without delay they went to the king, 
and told him that a man was come who was their 
countryman, and one of the most considerable in their 
native land, and requested the king to receive him 
well. The king told them to take Hialte and his 
fellow-travellers into their company and quarters. 
Now when Hialte had resided there a short time, and 
got acquainted with people, he was much respected 
by every body. The scalds were often in the king's 
house, for they were well-spoken men ; and often in 
the daytime they sat in front of the king's high seat, 
and Hialte, to whom they paid the highest respect in 
all things, by their side. He became thus known to 
the king, who willingly entered into conversation with 
him, and heard from him news about Iceland. 

It happened that before Biorn set out from home Chapter 
he asked Sigvat the scald, who at that time was with of sigvat 
King Olaf, to accompany him on his journey. It 
was a journey for which people had no great inclin- 
ation. There was, however, great friendship between 
Biorn and Sigvat. Then Sigvat sang : — 

F 4 



the scald. 



72 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. " With the king's marshals all have I^ 
In days gone by. 

Lived joyously, — 
With all who on the king attend. 
And knee before him humbly bend. 
Biorn, thou oft hast ta'en my part — 

Pleaded with art. 

And touched the heart. 
Biom ! brave stainer of the sword. 
Thou art my friend — I trust thy word." 

While they were riding up to Gotland Sigvat made 
these verses : — 

'^ Down the Fiord sweep wind and rain. 
Our stout ship's sails and tackle strain ; 

Wet to the skin. 

We're sound within. 
And gaily o'er the waves are dancing. 
Our sea-steed o'er the waves high prancing! 

Through Lister sea 

Flying all free ; 
Off from the wind with swelling sail. 
We merrily scud before the gale, 

And reach the sound 

Where we were bound. 
And now our ship, so gay and grand. 
Glides past the green and lovely land. 

And at the isle 

Moors for a while. 
Our horse-hoofs now leave hasty print; 
We ride — of ease there's scanty stint — 

In heat and haste 

O er Grotland's waste: 
Though in a hurry to be married, 
The king can't say that we have tarried." 

One evening late they were riding through Got- 
land, and Sigvat made these verses : — 

" The weary horse will at nightfall 
Gallop right well to reach his stall; 
When night meets day, with hasty hoof 
He plies the road to reach a roof. 
Far from the Danes, we now may ride 
Safely by stream or mountain side; 
But, in this twilight, in some ditch 
The horse and rider both may pitch." 



was in 
Sweden. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 73 

They rode through the merchant town of Skara *, sagavh 
and down the street to the earl's house. He sang:— 

*' The shy sweet girls, from window high^ 
In wonder peep at the sparks that fly 
From our horses' heels^ as down the street 
Of the earl's town we ride so fleet. 
Spur on ! — that every pretty lass 
May hear our horse- hoofs as we pass 
Clatter upon the stones so hard^ 
And echo round the paved court-yard." 

One day Hialte, and the scalds with him, went be- Chapter 
fore the king, and he began thus: — "It has so ofHkite 
happened, king, as is known to you, that I have come ^^f^?**** 
here after a long and difficult journey ; but when I had 
once crossed the ocean and heard of your greatness, 
it appeared to me unwise to go back without having 
seen you in your splendour and glory. Now it is a 
law between Iceland and Norway, that Iceland men 
pay landing dues when they come into Norway, but 
while I was coming across the sea I took myself aU 
the landing dues from my ship's people ; but knowing 
that you have the greatest right to all the power in 
Norway, I hastened hither to deliver to you the 
landing dues." With this he showed the silver to the 
king, and laid ten marks of silver in Gissur Black's 
lap. 

The king replies, " Few have brought us any 
such dues from Norway for some time; and now, 
Hialte, I will return you my warmest thanks for 
having given yourself so much trouble to bring us 
the landing dues, rather than pay them to our ene- 
mies. But I will that thou shouldst take this money 
from me as a gift, and with it my friendship." 

Hialte thanked the king with many words, and 
from that day set himself in great favour with the 

♦ At Skoram is the present town Skara, in Skaning harony, formerly 
the chief town and the oldest in West Gotland, and the seat of the 
earls in former times. 



74 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. king, and often spoke with him ; for the king thought, 
what was true, that he was a man of much under- 
standing and eloquence. Now Hialte told Gissur 
and Ottar that he was sent with tokens to the king's 
daughter Ingigerd, to obtain her protection and 
friendship; and he begged of them to procure him 
some opportunity to speak with her. They answered, 
that this was an easy thing to do; and went one day 
to her house, where she sat at the drinking table 
with many men. She received the scalds in a 
friendly manner, for they were known to her. Hialte 
brought her a salutation from the earl's wife, Inge- 
borg; and said she had sent him here to obtain 
friendly help and succour from her, and in proof 
whereof produced his tokens. The king's daughter 
received him also kindly, and said he should be wel- 
come to her friendship. They sat there till late in 
the day drinking. The king's daughter made Hialte 
tell her much news, and invited him to come often 
and converse with her. He did so : came there often, 
and spoke with the king's daughter ; and at last en- 
trusted her with the Jiurpose of Biorn's and his com- 
rades' journey, and asked her how she thought the 
Swedish king would receive the proposal that there 
should be a reconciliation between the kings. The 
king's daughter replied, that, in her opinion, it would 
be a useless attempt to propose to the king any recon- 
ciliation with Olaf the Thick; for the king was so 
enraged against him, that he would not suffer his 
name to be mentioned before him. It happened one 
day that Hialte was sitting with the king and talking 
to him, and the king was very merry and drunk. 
Then Hialte said, " Manifold splendour and grandeur 
have I seen here ; and I have now witnessed with my 
eyes what I have often heard of, that no monarch in 
the north is so magnificent : but it is very vexatious, 
that we who come so far to visit it have a road so 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 75 

long and troublesome, both on account of the great saga vii. 
ocean, but more especially because it is not safe to 
travel through Norway for those who are coming 
here in a friendly disposition. But why is there no 
one to bring proposals for a peace between you and 
King Olaf the Thick? I heard much in Norway, and 
in West Gotland, of the general desire that this peace 
should have taken place ; and it has been told me for 
truth, as the Norway king's words, that he earnestly 
desires to be reconciled to you; and the reason I 
know is, that he feels how much less his power is 
than yours. It is even said that he intends to pay 
his court to your daughter Ingigerd ; and that would 
lead to a useful peace, for I have heard from people 
of credit that he is a remarkably distinguished man.*' 
The king answers, "Thou must not speak thus, 
Hialte ; but for this time I will not take it amiss of 
thee, as thou dost not know what people have to 
avoid here. That fat fellow shaU not be called king 
in my court, and there is by no means the stuff in 
him that people talk of: and thou must see thyself 
that such a connection is not suitable ; for I am the 
tenth king in Upsal who, relation after relation, has 
been sole monarch over the Swedish, and many other 
great lands, and all have been the superior kings over 
other kings in the northern countries. But Norway 
is little inhabited, and the inhabitants are scattered. 
There have only been smaU kings there ; and although 
Harald Haarfager was the greatest king in that coun- 
try, and strove against the smaU kings, and subdued 
them, yet he knew so weU his position that he did 
not covet the Swedish dominions, and therefore the 
Swedish kings let him sit in peace, especially as there 
was relationship between them. Thereafter, while 
Hakon Athelstan's foster-son was in Norway he sat 
in peace, until he began to maraud in Gotland and 
Denmark; on which a war-force came upon him, and 



76 CHBONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. took from him both life and land. Gunhild's sons 
also were cut off when they became disobedient to 
the Danish kings ; and Harald Gormson joined Nor- 
way to his own dominions, and made it subject to 
scatt to him. And we reckon Harald Gormson to be 
of less power and consideration than the Upsal kings, 
for our relation Styrbiorn subdued him, and Harald 
became his man ; and yet Eric the Victorious, my 
father, rose over Styrbiom's head when it came to 
a trial between them. When Olaf Tryggvesson came 
to Norway and proclaimed himself king, we would 
not permit it, but we went with King Swend, and 
cut him off ; and thus we have appropriated Norway, 
as thou hast now heard, and with no less right than 
if I had gained it in battle, and by conquering the 
kings who ruled it before. Now thou canst well sup- 
pose, as a man of sense, that I wiU not let slip the 
kingdom of Norway for this thick fellow. It is 
wonderful he does not remember how narrowly he 
made his escape, when we had penned him in in the 
Maelare lake. Although he slipped away with life 
from thence, he ought, methinks, to have something 
else in his mind than to hold out against us Swedes. 
Now, Hialte, thou must never again open thy mouth 
in my presence on such a subject." 

Hialte saw sufficiently that there was no hope of 
the king's listening to any proposal of a peace, and 
desisted from speaking of it, and turned the conver- 
sation to something else. When Hialte, afterwards, 
came into discourse with the king's daughter Ingi- 
gerd, he tells her his conversation with the king. 
She told him she expected such an answer from the 
king. Hialte begged of her to say a good word to 
the king about the matter, but she thought the 
king would listen as little to what she said: "But 
speak about it I will, if thou requirest it." Hialte 
assured her he would be thankful for the attempt. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 77 

One day the king's daughter Ingigerd had a con- sagavii. 
versation with her father Olaf ; and as she found her 
father was in a particularly good humour, she said, 
"What is now thy intention with regard to the strife 
with Olaf the Thick ? There are many who complain 
about it, having lost their property by it; others have 
lost their relations by the Northmen, and all their 
peace and quiet; so that none of your men see any 
harm that can be done to Norway. It would be a 
bad counsel if thou sought the dominion over Nor- 
way ; for it is a poor country, difficult to come at, and 
the people dangerous : for the men there will rather 
have any other for their king than thee. If I might 
advise, thou wouldst let go all thoughts about Nor- 
way, and not desire Olaf 's heritage ; and rather turn 
thyself to the kingdoms in the East country, which 
thy forefathers the former Swedish kings had, and 
which our relation Styrbiom lately subdued, and let 
the thick Olaf possess the heritage of his forefathers, 
and make peace with him." 

The king replies in a rage, " It is thy counsel, In- 
gigerd, that I should let slip the kingdom of Norway, 
and give thee in marriage to this thick Olaf." — No," 
says he, " something else shall first take place. Ra- 
ther than that, I shall, at the Upsal Thing in winter, 
issue a proclamation to all Swedes, that the whole 
people shall assemble for an expedition, and go to 
their ships before the ice is off the waters ; and I will 
proceed to Norway, and lay waste the land with fire 
and sword, and burn every thing, to punish them for 
their want of fidelity." 

The king was so mad with rage that nobody ven- 
tured to say a word, and she went away. Hialte, 
who was watching for her, immediately went to her, 
and asked how her errand to the king had turned out. 
She answered, it turned out as she had expected; 
that none could venture to put in a word with the 



78 . CHEONICLE OF THE 

SAGA vn. king ; but, on the contrary, he had used threats ; and 
she begged Hialte never to speak of the matter again 
before the king. As Hialte and Ingigerd spoke 
together often, Olaf the Thick was often the subject, 
and he told her about him and his manners; and 
Hialte praised the king of Norway what he could, 
but said no more than was the truth, and she could 
well perceive it. Once, in a conversation, Hialte said 
to her, " May I be permitted, daughter of the king, 
to tell thee what lies in my mind?" 

" Speak freely," says she; " but so that I alone can 
hear it." 

" Then," said Hialte, " what would be thy answer, 
if the Norway king Olaf sent messengers to thee 
with the errand to propose marriage to thee?" 

She blushed, and answered slowly but gently, " I 
have not made up my mind to answer to that ; but 
if Olaf be in all respects so perfect as thou tellest me, I 
could wish for no other husband ; unless, indeed, thou 
hast gilded him over with thy praise more than 
sufficiently." 

Hialte replied, that he had in no respect spoken 
better of the king than was true. They often spoke 
together on the same subject. Ingigerd begged 
Hialte to be cautious not to mention it to any other 
person, for the king would be enraged against him if 
it came to his knowledge. Hialte only spoke of it 
to the scalds Gissur and Ottar, who thought it was 
the most happy plan, if it could but be carried into 
effect. Ottar, who was a man of great power of 
conversation, and much beloved in the court, soon 
brought up the subject before the king's daughter, 
and recounted to her, as Hialte had done, all King 
Olaf's excellent qualities. Often spoke Hialte and 
the others about him ; and now that Hialte knew the 
result of his mission, he sent those Gotland men 
away who had accompanied him, and let them re- 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 79 

turn to the earl with letters* which the king's daugh- sagavii. 
ter Ingigerd sent to the earl and Ingeborg. Hialte 
also let them give a hint to the earl about the con- 
versation he had had with Ingigerd, and her answer 
thereto ; and the messengers came with it to the earl 
a little before Yule. 

When King Olaf had despatched Biorn and his Chapter 
followers to Gotland, he sent other people also to the ours jour- 
Uplands, with the errand that they should have u^ilndi*^ 
guest-quarters prepared for him, as he intended that 
winter to live as guest in the Uplands ; for it had 
been the custom of former kings to make a progress 
in guest-quarters every third year in the Uplands. 
In autumn he began his progress from Sarpsborg, 
and went first to Vingulmark. He ordered his pro- 
gress so that he came first to lodge in the neigbour- 
hood of the forest habitations, and summoned to him 
all the men of the habitations who dwelt at the 
greatest distance from the head-habitations of the dis- 
trict ; and he inquired particularly how it stood with 
their Christianity, and, where improvement was need- 
ful, he taught them the right customs. If any there 
were who would not renounce heathen ways, he took 
the matter so zealously that he drove some out of the 
country, mutilated others of hands or feet, or stung 
their eyes out; hung up some, cut down some with 
the sword; but let none go unpunished who would 
not serve God. He went thus through the whole 
district, sparing neither great nor small. He gave 
them teachers, and placed these as thickly in the 
country as he saw needful. In this manner he went 
about in that district, and had 300 deadly men-at- 
arms with him ; and then proceeded to Raumarige. 
He soon perceived that Christianity was thriving less 



* This seems the first notice we have in the sagas of written letters 
being sent instead of tokens and verbal messages. 



80 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. the farther he proceeded into the interior of the 
country. He went forward every where in the same 
way, converting all the people to the right faith, and 
severely punishing all who would not listen to his 
word. 
Chapter jfow whcu the king who at that time ruled in 
Thetreach- Raumarigc heard of this, he thought it was a very 
u^Und*"^ bad affair; for every day came men to him, both 
kings. great and small, who told him what was doing. There- 
fore this king resolved to go up to Hedemark, and 
consult King Raerek, who was the most eminent for 
understanding of the kings who at that time were in 
the country* Now when these kings spoke with each 
other, they agreed to send a message to Gudrod, the 
valley-king north in the Gudbransdal, and likewise to 
the king who was in Hadeland, and bid them to come 
to Hedemark, to meet Raerek and the other kings 
there. They did not spare their travelling ; for five 
kings met in Hedemark, at a place called Ringsager. 
Ring, King Raerek's brother, was the fifth of these 
kings. The kings had first a private conference 
together, in which he who came from Raumarige 
first took up the word, and told of King Olaf 's pro- 
ceedings, and of the disturbance he was causing both 
by killing and mutilating people. Some he drove out 
of the country, some he deprived of their offices or 
property if they spoke any thing against him ; and, 
besides, he was travelling over the country with a 
great army, not with the number of people fixed by 
law for a royal progress in guest-quarters. He 
added, that he had fled hither upon account of this 
disturbance, and many powerful people with him had 
fled from their udal properties in Raumarige. "But 
although as yet the evil is nearest to us, it will be 
but a short time before ye will also be exposed to it ; 
therefore it is best that we all consider together what 
resolution we shall take." When he had ended his 



KINGS OF NOBWAY. 81 

speech, Raerek was desired to speak ; and he said, saga vn. 

" Now is the day come that I foretold when we had 

our meeting at Hadeland, and ye were all so eager to 

raise Olaf over our heads ; namely, that as soon as he 

was the supreme master of the country we would 

find it hard to hold him by the horns. We have but 

two things now to do : the one is to go all of us to 

him, and let him do with us as he likes, which I think 

is the best thing we can do ; or the other is, to rise 

against him before he has gone farther through the 

country. Although he has 300 or 400 men, that is 

not too great a force for us to meet, if we are only all 

in movement together : but, in general, there is less 

success and advantage to be gained when several of 

equal strength are joined together, than when one 

alone stands at the head of his own force ; therefore 

it is my advice, that we do not venture to try our 

luck against Olaf Haraldsson." 

Thereafter each of the kings spoke according to his 
own mind, some dissuading from going out against 
King Olaf, others urging it ; and no determination 
was come to, as each had his own reasons to produce. 

Then Gudrod, the valley-king, took up the word, 
and spoke : — "It appears wonderful to me, that ye 
make such a long roundabout in coming to a resolu- 
tion ; and probably ye are frightened for him. We 
are here five kings, and none of less high birth than 
Olaf. We gave him the strength to fight with Earl 
Swend, and with our forces he has brought the coun- 
try under his power. But if he grudges each of us 
the little kingdom he had before, and threatens us 
with tortures, or gives us ill words, then, say I for 
myself, that I will withdraw myself from the king's 
slavery ; and I do not call him a man among you who 
is afraid to cut him ofi^, if he come into our hands 
here up in Hedemark. And this I can tell you, that 
we shall never bear our heads in safety while Olaf is 

VOL. II. G 



82 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. in life." After this encouragement they all agreed to 
his determination. 

Then said Raerek, " With regard to this determin- 
ation, it appears to me necessary to make our agree- 
ment so strong that no one shall fail in his promise 
to the other. Therefore, if ye determine upon at- 
tacking Olaf at a fixed time, when he comes here to 
Hedemark, I will not trust much to you if some are 
north in the valleys, others up in Hedemark; but if 
our resolution is to come to any thing, we must 
remain here assembled together day and night." 

This the kings agreed to, and kept themselves 
there all assembled, ordering a feast to be provided 
for them there at Ringsager, and drank there a cup 
to success; sending out spies to Raumarige, and 
when one set came in sending out others, so that day 
and night they had intelligence of Olaf 's proceed- 
ings, and of the numbers of his men. King Olaf 
went about in Raumarige in guest-quarters, and 
altogether in the way before related ; but as the pro- 
vision of the guest-quarter was not always sufficient, 
upon account of his numerous followers, he laid it 
upon the bonders to give additional contributions 
wherever he found it necessary to stay. In some 
places he staid longer, in others shorter than was 
fixed ; and his journey down to the lake Myosen was 
shorter than had been fixed on. The kings, after 
taking their resolution, sent out message-tokens, and 
summoned all the lendermen and powerful bonders 
from all the districts thereabout ; and when they had 
assembled the kings had a private meeting with 
them, and made their determination known, setting a 
day for gathering together and carrying it into 
effect ; and it was settled among them that each of 
the kings should have 300 men. Then they sent 
away the lendermen to gather the people, and meet 
all at the appointed place. The most approved of 



KINGS OF NOBWAY. 83 

the measure ; but it happened here, as it usually does, saga vh. 
that every one has some friend even among his ene- 
mies. 

Ketil of Ringaness was at this meeting. Now Chapter 
when he came home in the evening he took his sup- The muti- 
per, put on his clothes, and went down with his Jhe"u^Ld 
house-servants to the lake ; took a light vessel which kings. 
he had, the same that King Olaf had made him a 
present of, and launched it on the water. They 
found in the boat-house every thing ready to their 
hands; betook themselves to their oars, and rowed 
out into the lake.* Ketil had forty well-armed men 
with him, and came early in the morning to the end 
of the lake. He set off immediately with twenty men, 
leaving the other twenty to look after the ship. King 
Olaf was at that time at Eid, in the upper end of 
Raumarige. Thither KetU arrived just as the king 
was coming from matins. The king received Ketil 
kindly. He said he must speak with the king in all 
haste; and they had a private conference together. 
There Ketil tells the king the resolution which the 
kings had taken, and their agreement, which he had 
come to the certain knowledge of. When the king 
learnt this he called his people together, and sent 
some out to collect riding horses in the country; 
others he sent down to the lake to take all the row- 
ing-vessels they could lay hold of, and keep them for 
his use. Thereafter he went to the church, had mass 
sung before him, and then sat down to table. After 
his meal he got ready, and hastened down to the 
lake, where the vessels were coming to meet him. 
He himself went on board the light vessel, and as 
many men with him as it could stow, and all the rest 
of his followers took such boats as they could get 
hold of; and when it was getting late in the evening 

* The Myosen is a lake of 60 or 70 miles in length. 
G 2 



84 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. they set out from the land, in still and calm weather. 
He rowed up the water with 400 men, and came with 
them to Ringsager before day dawned; and the 
watchmen were not aware of the army before they 
were come into the very court. Ketil knew well in 
what houses the kings slept, and the king had all 
these houses surrounded and guarded, so that nobody 
could get out ; and so they stood tiU day light. The 
kings had not people enough to make resistance, but 
were all taken prisoners, and led before the king. 
Easrek was an able but obstinate man, whose fidelity 
the king could not trust to if he made peace with 
him ; therefore he ordered both his eyes to be punched 
out, and took him in that condition about with him. 
He ordered Gudrod's tongue to be cut out ; but Ring 
and two others he banished from Norway, under 
oath never to return. Of the lendermen and bonders 
who had actually taken part in the traitorous design, 
some he drove out of the country, some he mutilated, 
and with others he made peace. Ottar Black tells of 
this: — 

^^ The giver of rings of gold, 
The army leader bold, 

In vengeance springs 

On the Hedemark kings. 
Olaf, the bold and great. 
Repays their foul deceit — 

In full repays 

Their treacherous ways. 
He drives with steel-clad hand 
The small kings from the land, — 

Greater by far 

In deed of war. 
The king who dwelt most north 
Tongueless must wander forth: 

All fly away 

In great dismay. 
King Olaf now rules o'er 
What five kings ruled before — 

To Eida's bound 

Extends his ground. 



KINGS OF NOEWAY. 85 

No king in days of yore saga vii. 

E'er won so much before: 

That this is so 

All Norsemen know." 

King Olaf took possession of the land these five 
kings had possessed, and took hostages from the 
lendermen and bonders in it. He took money in- 
stead of guest-quarters from the country north of the 
valley district, and from Hedemark; and then re- 
turned to Raumarige, and so west to Hadeland. 
This winter his stepfather Sigurd Syr died; and 
King Olaf went to Ringarike, where his mother Aasta 
made a great feast for him. Olaf alone bore the 
title of king now in Norway. 

It is told that when King Olaf was on his visit Chapter 
to his mother Aasta, she brought out her children, qif Ki^J' 
and showed them to him. The king took his brother ^^^'^ *»*^*'- 
Guttorm on the one knee, and his brother Halfdan on 
the other. The king looked at Guttorm, made a wry 
face, and pretended to be angry at them ; at which 
the boys were afraid. Then Aasta brought her 
youngest son, called Harald, who was three years old, 
to him. The king made a wry face at him also ; but 
he looked the king in the face without regarding it. 
The king took the boy by the hair, and plucked it ; 
but the boy seized the king's whiskers, and gave them 
a tug. " Then," said the king, " thou wilt be re- 
vengeful, my friend, some day." The following day 
the king was walking with his mother about the 
farm, and they came to a play-ground, where Aasta's 
sons, Guttorm and Halfdan, were amusing themselves. 
They were building great houses and barns in their 
play, and were supposing them full of cattle and 
sheep ; and close beside them, in a clay pool, Harald 
was busy with chips of wood, sailing them in his 
sport along the edge. The king asked him what 
these were ; and he answered, these were his ships of 

G 3 



86 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



sAGAvii. ^ar. The king laughed, and said, " The time may 
come, friend, when thou wilt conmiand ships." 

Then the king called to him Halfdan and Guttorm; 
and first he asked Guttorm, "What wouldst thou 
like best to have?" 

" Corn land," replied he. 

" And how great wouldst thou like thy com land 
to be?" 

" I would have the whole ness that goes out into 
the lake sown with com every summer." On that 
ness there are ten farms. 

The king replies, " There would be a great deal of 
corn there." And, turning to Halfdan, he asked, 
" And what wouldst thou like best to have? " 

" Cows," he replied. 

" How many wouldst thou like to have? " 

" When they went to the lake to be watered I 
would have so many, that they stood as tight round 
the lake as they could stand." 

" That would be a great housekeeping," said the 
king; " and therein ye take after your father." 

Then the king says to Harald, " And what wouldst 
thou like best to have ? " 

" House-servants." 

" And how many wouldst thou have?" 

" ! so many I would like to have as would eat 
up my brother Halfdan's cows at a single meal." 

The king laughed, and said to Aasta, " Here, 
mother, thou art bringing up a king." And more is 
not related of them on this occasion. 

In Sweden it was the old custom, as long as 
heathenism prevailed, that the chief sacrifice took 
place in Goe month* at Upsal. Then sacrifice was 
offered for peace, and victory to the king ; and thither 
came people from all parts of Sweden. All the Things 
of the Swedes, also, were held there, and markets, and 

* Goe month included part of February and of March. 



Chapter 
LXXVI. 
Of the di. 
"vision of 
the country, 
and of the 
laws in 
Sweden. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 87 

meetings for buying, which continued for a week: sagavil 
and after Christianity was introduced into Sweden, 
the Things and fairs were held there as before. 
After Christianity had taken root in Sweden, and the 
kings would no longer dwell in Upsal, the market- 
time was moved to Candlemas, and it has since con- 
tinued so, and it lasts only three days. There is 
then the Swedish Thmg also, and people from all 
quarters come there. Sweden is divided into many 
parts. One part is West Gotland, Vermeland, and 
the Marks, with what belongs to them ; and this part 
of the kingdom is so large, that the bishop who is set 
over it has 1100 churches under him. The other 
part is East Gotland, where there is also a bishop's 
seat, to which the islands of Gotland and Oland be- 
long ; and forming aU together a stiU greater bishop- 
ric. In Sweden itself (Swithiod) there is a part of 
the country called Sudermanland, where there is also 
a bishopric. Then comes Westmanland, or Fiathrynda- 
land, which is also a bishopric. The third portion of 
Sweden proper, or Swithiod, is called Tiundaland ; the 
fourth Aattundaland ; the fifth Sioland, and what 
belongs to it lies eastward along the coast. Tiunda- 
land is the best and most inhabited part of Swithiod, 
or Sweden proper, under which the other kingdoms 
stand. There Upsal is situated, the seat of the king 
and archbishop ; and from it Upsala- Audur, or the 
domain of the Swedish kings, takes its name. Each 
of these divisions of the country has its Lag-thing, 
and its own laws in many parts. Over each is a 
lagman, who rules principally in afiairs of the bon- 
ders ; for that becomes law which he, by his speech, 
determines them to make law : and if king, earl, or 
bishop goes through the country, and holds a Thing 
with the bonders, the lagmen reply on account of the 
bonders, and they all follow their lagmen; so that 
even the most powerful men scarcely dare to come to 

G 4 



88 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. their Al-thing without regarding the bonders' and 
lagmen's law. And in all matters in which the laws 
differ from each other, Upsal-law is the directing 
law; and the other lagmen are under the lagman who 
dwells in Tiundaland. 
LxxvTi ^^ Tiundaland there was a lagman who was called 
Of the Thorgnyr, whose father was called Thorgnyr Thor- 
ThoI^n°r. gnyrson. His forefathers had for a long course of 
years, and during many kings' times, been lagmen of 
Tiundaland. At this time Thorgnyr was old, and 
had a great court about him. He was considered one 
of the wisest men in Sweden, and was Earl Rognvald's 
relation and foster-father. 
iSLvm ^^^ ^® must go back in our story to the time 
Meeting of whcu the mcH whom the king's daughter Ingigerd 
^!d wiT"*" ^^d Hialte had sent from the east came to Earl Rogn- 
the king's vald. They relate their errand to the earl and his 
ingfgerd. wifc Ingcborg, and tell how the king's daughter had 
oft spoken to the Swedish king about a peace between 
him and King Olaf the Thick, and that she was a great 
friend of King Olaf; but that the Swedish king flew 
into a passion every time she named Olaf, so that she 
had no hopes of any peace. The earl told Biom the 
news he had received from the east ; but Biom gave 
the same reply, that he would not turn back until he 
had met the Swedish king, and said the earl had pro- 
mised to go with him. Now the winter was passing 
fast, and immediately after Yule the earl made himsefi" 
ready to travel with sixty men, among whom were 
the marshal Biom and his companions. The earl 
proceeded eastward all the way to Swithiod; but 
when he came a little way into the country he sent 
his men before him to Upsal, with a message to In- 
gigerd the king's daughter to come out to meet him 
at UUarager, where she had a large farm. When the 
king's daughter got the earl's message she made her- 
self ready immediately to travel with a large attend- 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 89 

ance, and Hialte accompanied her. But before he sagavii. 
took his departure he went to King Olaf, and said, 
" Continue always to be the most fortunate of mo- 
narchs ! Such splendour as I have seen about thee I 
have in truth never witnessed elsewhere, and where- 
soever I come it shall not be concealed. Now, king, 
may I entreat thy favour and friendship in time to 
come ?" 

The king replies, " Why art thou in so great a 
haste, and where art thou going ?" 

Hialte replies, " I am to ride out to Ullarager with 
Ingigerd thy daughter." 

The king says, " Farewell then : a man thou art of 
understanding and politeness, and well suited to live 
with people of rank." 

Thereupon Hialte withdrew. 

The king's daughter Ingigerd rode to her farm in 
Ullarager, and ordered a great feast to be prepared 
for the earl. When the earl arrived he was welcomed 
with gladness, and he remained there several days. 
The earl and the king's daughter talked much, and 
of many things, but most about the Swedish and 
Norwegian kings ; and she told the earl that in her 
opinion there was no hope of peace between them. 

Then said the earl, " How wouldst thou like it, my 
cousin, if Olaf king of Norway were to pay his ad- 
dresses to thee ? It appears to us that it would con- 
tribute most towards a settled peace if there was 
relationship established between the kings; but I 
would not support such a matter if it were against 
thy inclination." 

She replies, " My father disposes of my hand ; but 
among all my other relations thou art he whose advice 
I would rather follow in weighty affairs. Dost thou 
think it would be advisable ?" The earl recommended 
it to her strongly, and reckoned up many excellent 
achievements of King Olaf 's. He told her, in particu- 



90 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA vu lar, about what had lately been done; that King Olaf 
in an hour's time one morning had taken five kings 
prisoners, deprived them all of their governments, 
and laid their kingdoms and properties under his own 
power. Much they talked about the business, and in 
all their conversations they perfectly agreed with each 
other. When the earl was ready he took leave, and 
proceeded on his way, taking Hialte with him. 
Lxxix -^^^^ Rognvald came towards evening one day to 
Of Earl the house of Lagman Thorgnyr. It was a great and 
andfthe*^^ Stately mansiou, and many people stood outside who 
L^man reccivcd the earl kindly, and took care of the horses 
'^^^^' and baggage. The earl went into the room, where 
there was a number of people. In the high seat sat 
an old man ; and never had Biom or his companions 
seen a man so stout. His beard was so long that it 
lay upon his knee, and was spread over his whole 
breast; and the man moreover was gay and lively. 
The earl went forward and saluted him. Thorgnyr 
received him joyfully and kindly, and bade him go to 
the seat he was accustomed to take. The earl seated 
himself on the other side, opposite to Thorgnyr. They 
remained there some days before the earl disclosed 
his errand, and then he asked Thorgnyr to go with 
him into the conversing room. Biom and his fol- 
lowers went there with the earl. Then the earl 
began, and told how Olaf king of Norway had sent 
these men hither to conclude a peaceful agreement. 
He showed at great length what injury it was of to 
the West Gotland people, that there was hostility 
between their country and Norway. He further re- 
lated that Olaf the king of Norway had sent embas- 
sadors, who were here present, and to whom he had 
promised he would attend them to the Swedish king ; 
but he added, " The Swedish king takes the matter 
so grievously, that he has uttered menaces against 
those who entertain it. Now so it is, my foster- 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 91 

father, that I do not trust to myself in this matter ; saga vil 
but am come on a visit to thee to get good counsel " 
and help from thee in the matter." 

Now when the earl had done speaking Thorgnyr 
sat silent for a while, and then took up the word. 
" Ye have curious dispositions who are so ambitious 
of honour and renown, and yet have no prudence or 
coimsel in you when you get into any mischief. Why 
did you not consider, before you gave your promise to 
this adventure, that you had no power to stand 
against King Olaf ? In my opinion it is not a less 
honourable condition to be in the number of bonders, 
and have one's words free, and be able to say what 
one will, even if the king be present. But I must go 
to the Upsal Thing, and give thee such help that 
without fear thou canst speak before the king what 
thou findest good." 

The earl thanked him for the promise, remained 
with Thorgnyr, and rode with him to the Upsal Thing. 
There was a great assemblage of people at the Thing, 
and King Olaf was there with his court. 

The first day the Thing sat. King Olaf was seated Chawkr 
on a stool, and his court stood in a circle around him. of the 
Right opposite to him sat Earl Rognvald and Thorgnyr ^p.^^ 
in the Thing upon one stool, and before them the 
earl's court and Thorgnyr's house-people. Behind 
their stool stood the bonder community, all in a circle 
around them. Some stood upon hillocks and heights, 
in order to hear the better. Now when the king's 
messages, which are usually handled in the Things, 
were produced and settled, the marshal Biom rose 
beside the earl's stool, and said aloud, " King Olaf 
sends me here with the message that he will ofifer to 
the Swedish king peace, and the frontiers that in old 
times were fixed between Norway and Sweden." He 
spoke so loud that the Swedish king could distinctly 
hear him ; but at first, when he heard King Olaf 's 



92 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. name spoken, he thought the speaker had some mes- 
sage or business of his own to execute ; but when lie 
heard of peace, and the frontiers between Norway 
and Sweden, he saw from what root it came, and 
sprang up, and called out that the man should be 
silent, for that such speeches were useless. There- 
upon Biorn sat down ; and when the noise had ceased 
Earl Rognvald stood up and made a speech. 

He spoke of Olaf the Thick's message, and proposal 
of peace to Olaf the Swedish king; and that all the 
West Gotland people sent their entreaty to Olaf that 
he would make peace with the king of Norway. He 
recounted all the evils the West Gotlanders were suf- 
fering under; that they must go without all the things 
from Norway which were necessary in their house- 
holds ; and, on the other hand, were exposed to attack 
and hostility whenever the king of Norway gathered 
an army and made an inroad on , them. The earl 
added, that Olaf the Norway king had sent men hither 
with the intent to obtain Ingigerd the king's daughter 
in marriage. 

When the earl had done speaking Olaf the Swedish 
king stood up and replied, and was altogether against 
listening to any proposals of peace, and made many 
and heavy reproaches against the earl for his impu- 
dence in entering into a peaceful truce with the thick 
fellow, and making up a peaceful friendship with him, 
and which in truth he considered treason against him- 
self. He added, that it would be well deserved if 
Earl Rognvald were driven out of the kingdom. The 
earl had, in his opinion, the influence of his wife Inge- 
borg to thank for what might happen ; and it was the 
most imprudent fancy he could have fallen upon to 
take up with such a wife. The king spoke long and 
bitterly, turning his speech always against Olaf the 
Thick. When he sat down not a sound was to be 
heard at first. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 93 

Then Thorgnyr stood up ; and when he arose all saga vil 
the bonders stood up who had before been sitting, chapter 
and rushed together from all parts to listen to what xhorgJ^J's 
Lagman Thorgnyr would say. At first there was a speech, 
great din of people and weapons ; but when the noise 
was settled into silent listening, Thorgnyr made his 
speech. " The disposition of Swedish kings is difierent 
now from what it has been formerly. My grand- 
father Thorgnyr could well remember the Upsal king 
Eric Eymundsson, and used to say of him that 
when he was in his best years he went out every 
summer on expeditions to difierent countries, and 
conquered for himself Finland, Leifiand, Courland, 
Esthonia, and the eastern countries all around ; and 
at the present day the earth-bulwarks, ramparts, and 
other great works which he made are to be seen. 
And, moreover, he was not so proud that he would 
not listen to people who had any thing to say to him. 
My father, again, was a long time with King Biom, 
and was well acquainted with his ways and manners. 
In Biom's lifetime his kingdom stood in great power, 
and no kind of want was felt, and he was gay and 
sociable with his friends. I also remember King Eric 
the Victorious, and was with him on many a war- 
expedition. He enlarged the Swedish dominion, and 
defended it manfully ; and it was also easy and agree- 
able to communicate our opinions to him. But the 
king we have now got allows no man to presume to 
talk with him, unless it be what he desires to hear. 
On this alone he applies all his power, while he allows 
his scatt-lands in other countries to go from him 
through laziness and weakness. He wants to have 
the Norway kingdom laid under him, which no Swedish 
king before him ever desired, and therewith brings • 
war and distress on many a man. Now it is our 
will, we bonders, that thou King Olaf make peace 
with the Norway king, Olaf the Thick, and marry 



94 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. thy daughter Ingigerd to him. Wilt thou, however, 
reconquer the kingdoms in the east countries which 
thy relations and forefathers had there, we will all for 
that purpose follow thee to the war. But if thou wilt 
not do as we desire, we wiU now attack thee, and put 
thee to death ; for we will no longer suffer law and 
peace to be disturbed. So our forefathers went to 
work when they drowned five kings in a morass at 
the Mule-thing, and they were filled with the same 
insupportable pride thou hast shown towards us. 
Now tell us, in all haste, what resolution thou wilt 
take." Then the whole public approved, with clash 
of arms and shouts, the lagman's speech. 

The king stands up and says he will let things go 
according to the desire of the bonders. " All Swedish 
kings," he said, " have done so, and have allowed the 
bonders to rule in all according to their will." The 
murmur among the bonders then came to an end; 
and the chiefs, the king, the earl, and Thorgnyr 
talked together, aiid concluded a truce and reconcilia- 
tion, on the part of the Swedish king, according to the 
terms which the king of Norway had proposed by his 
embassadors ; and it was resolved at the Thing that 
Ingigerd, the king'^s daughter, should be married to 
Olaf Haraldsson. The king left it to the earl to 
make the contract feast, and gave him full powers to 
conclude this marriage affair; and after this was 
settled at the Thing, they separated. When the earl 
returned homewards, he and the king's daughter 
Ingigerd had a meeting, at which they talked be- 
tween themselves over this matter. She sent Olaf a 
long cloak of fine linen richly embroidered with gold, 
and with silk points.* The earl returned to Gotland, 
andBiorn with him ; and after staying with him a short 



♦ Silki-rsemor appear to have been silk tassels or ties on the cloak of 
fine linen (pelli), which was embroidered with gold. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 95 

time, Biom and his company returned to Norway, sagavil 
When he came to King Olaf he told him the result of 
his errand, and the king returned him many thanks 
for his conduct, and said Biom had had great success 
in bringing his errand to so favourable a conclusion 
against such animosity. 

On the approach of spring King Olaf went down Chapter 
to the coast, had his ships rigged out, summoned of^Ki^"' 
troops to him, and proceeded in spring out from Viken R«rek's 
to the Naze, and so north to Hordaland. He then ^^"^ ^'^' 
sent messages to all the lendermen, selected the most 
considerable men in each district, and made the most 
splendid preparations to meet his bride. The wed- 
ding feast was to be in autumn, at the Gotha river, 
on the frontiers of the two countries. King Olaf had 
with him the blind king Raerek. When his wound 
was healed, the king gave him two men to serve him, 
let him sit in the high seat by his side, and kept h\vn 
in meat and clothes in no respect worse than he had 
kept himself before. Rasrek was taciturn, and answered 
short and cross when any one spoke to him. It was 
his custom to make his foot-boy, when he went out in 
the daytime, lead him away from people, and then to 
beat the lad until he ran away. He would then com- 
plain to King Olaf that the lad would not serve him. 
The King changed his servants, but it was as before ; 
no servant would hold it out with King Raerek. Then 
the king appointed a man called Swend to wait upon 
and serve King Raerek. He was Raerek's relation, 
and had formerly been in his service. Raerek con- 
tinued with his habits of moroseness, abd of soli- 
tary walks; but when he and Swend were alone 
together, he was merry and talkative. He used to 
bring up many things which had happened in former 
days when he was king. He alluded, too, to the 
man who had, in his former days, torn him from his 
kingdom and happiness, and made him live on alms. 



96 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA viL " It is hardest of all," says he, " that thou and my 
other relations, who ought to be men of bravery, art 
so degenerated that thou wilt not avenge the shame 
and disgrace brought upon our race." Such dis- 
course he often brought out. Swend said, they had 
too great a power to deal with, while they themselves 
had but little means. RaBrek said, " Why should we 
live longer as mutilated men with disgrace? I, a 
blind man, may conquer them as weU as they con- 
quered me when I was asleep. Come then, let us 
kill this thick Olaf. He is not afraid for himself at 
present. I will lay the plan, and would not spare my 
hands if I could use them, but that I cannot by rea- 
son of my blindness ; therefore thou must use the 
weapons against him, and as soon as Olaf is kiUed I 
can see well enough that his power must come into 
the hands of his enemies, and it may weU be that I 
shall be king, and thou shalt be my earl." So much 
persuasion he used that Swend at last agreed to join 
in the deed. The plan was so laid that when the 
king was ready to go to vespers, Swend stood on the 
threshold with a drawn dagger under his cloak. Now 
when the king came out of the room, it so happened 
that he walked quicker than Swend expected; and 
when he looked the king in the face he grew pale, 
and then white as a corpse, and his hand sunk down. 
The king observed his terror, and said, " What is 
this, Swend ? Wilt thou betray me ?" Swend threw 
down his cloak and dagger, and fell at the king's feet, 
saying, " All is in God's hands and thine, king ! " The 
king ordered his men to seize Swend, and he was put 
in irons. The king ordered Rasrek's seat to be moved 
to another bench. He gave Swend his life, and he 
left the country. The king appointed a diflferent 
lodging for RaBrek to sleep in from that in which he 
slept himself, and in which many of his court-people 
slept. He set two of his court-men, who had been 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 97 

long with him, and whose fidelity he had proof of, to saga vii. 
attend Raerek day and night ; but it is not said whe^ 
ther they were people of high birth or not. King 
RsBrek's mood was very different at different times. 
Sometimes he would sit sUent for days together, so 
that no man could get a word out of him ; and some- 
times he was so merry and gay, that people found a 
joke in every word he said. Sometimes his words 
were very bitter. He was sometimes m a mood that 
he would drink them all under the benches, and made 
all his neighbours drunk; but in general he drank 
but little. King Olaf gave him plenty of pocket- 
money. When he went to his lodgings he would 
often, before going to bed, have some stoups of mead 
brought in, which he gave to 9.II the men in the house 
to drink, so that he was much liked. 

There was a man from the Uplands called Finn the Chapter 
Little, and some said of him that he was of Finnish* of LUtie ' 
race. He was a remarkably little man, but so swift ^'""• 
of foot that no horse could overtake him. He was a 
particularly well exercised runner with snow shoes, 
and shooter with the bow. He had long been in the 
service of King Raerek, and often employed in errands 
of trust. He knew the roads in all the Upland hUls, 
and was well known to all the great people. Now 
when King Raerek was set under guards on the journey 
Finn would often slip in among the men of the guard, 
and followed, in general, with the lads and serving- 
men ; but as often as he could he waited upon Raerek, 
and entered into conversation with him. The king, 
however, only spoke a word or two with him at a time, 
to prevent suspicion. In spring, when they came a 
little way beyond Viken, Finn disappeared from the 
army for some days, but came back, and staid with 
them a while. This happened often, without any one 

* The Laplanders are called Finns in Norway and Sweden. 
VOL. n. H 



court- 
men. 



S8 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. observing it particularly ; for there were many sucH 

hangers-on with the army. 
Chapter Kinff OM Came to Tunsbcrff before Easter, and 
Of the ' remained there late in spring. Many merchant ves- 
murder of g^jg camc to the towTi, both from Saxon-land and 

some of ' 

Kingoiars Denmark, and from Viken, and from the north parts 
of the country. There was a great assemblage of 
people ; and as the times were good, there was many 
a drinking meeting. It happened one evening that 
King Raerek came rather late to his lodging ; and as 
he had drunk a great deal, he was remarkably merry. 
Little Finn came to him with a stoup of mead with 
herbs in it, and very strong. The king made every 
one in the house drunk, until they fell asleep each in 
his berth. Finn had gone away, and a hght was 
burning in the lodging. Raerek waked the men who 
usually followed him, and told them he wanted to go 
out into the yard. They had a lantern with them, 
for outside it was pitch dark. Out in the yard there 
was a large privy standing upon pillars, and a stair 
to go up to it. WhUe Raerek and his guards were in 
the yard they heard a man say, " Cut down that 
devil;" and presently a crash, as if somebody fell. 
RaBrek said, " These fellows must be dead drunk to 
be fighting with each other so: run and separate 
them." They rushed out ; but when they came out 
upon the steps both of them were killed: the man 
who went out the last was the first killed. There 
were twelve of Raerek's men there, and among them 
Sigurd Hit, who had been his banner-man, and also 
little Finn. They drew the dead bodies up between 
the houses, took the king with them, ran out to a 
boat they had in readiness, and rowed away. Sigvat 
the scald slept in King Olafs lodgings. He got up 
in. the night, and his footboy with him, and went to 
the privy. But as they were returning, on going 
down the stairs Sigvat's foot slipped, and he fell on 
his knee ; and when he put out his hands he felt the 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 99 

stairs wet. " I think," said he, laughing, " the king saga vn. 
must have given many of us tottering legs to-night." 
When they came into the house in which light was 
burning the footboy said, " Have you hurt yourself 
that you are all over so bloody?" He replied, "I 
am not wounded, but something must have happened 
here." Thereupon he wakened Thord Folason, who 
was standard-bearer, and his bedfellow. They went 
out with a light, and soon found the blood. They 
traced it, and found the corpses, and knew them. 
They saw also a great stump of a tree in which clearly 
a gash had been cut, which, as was afterwards known, 
had been done as a stratagem to entice those out who 
had been killed. Sigvat and Thord spoke together, 
and agreed it was highly necessary to let the king 
know of this without delay. They immediately sent 
a lad to the lodging where Raerek had been. AU the 
men in it were asleep ; but the king was gone. He 
wakened the men who were in the house, and told 
them what had happened. The men arose, and ran 
out to the yard where the bodies were ; but, however 
needful it appeared to be that the king should know 
it, nobody dared to waken him. 

Then said Sigvat to Thord, " What wilt thou rather 
do, comrade, — waken the king, or tell him the 
tidings?" 

Thord replies, " I do not dare to waken him, and I 
would rather tell him the news-" 

Then said Sigvat, " There is much of the night stiU 
to pass, and before morning RaBrek may get himself 
concealed in such a way that it may be difficult to 
find him ; but as yet he cannot be very far oflF, for 
the bodies are stiU warm. We must never let the 
disgrace rest upon us of concealing this treason from 
the king. Go thou, Thord, up to the lodging, and 
wait for me there." 

Sigvat then went to the church, and told the bell- 

H 2 



100 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA vii« rixiger to toll for the souls of the king^s court-men, 
naming the men who were killed. The bell-ringer 
did as he was told. The king awoke at the ringing, 
sat up in his bed, and asked if it was already the hour 
of matins. 

Thord replies, " It is worse than that, for there has 
occurred a very important affair. Baerek is fled, and 
two of the court-men are killed." 

The king asked how this had taken place, and 
Thord told him all he knew. The king got up imme- 
diately, ordered to sound the call for a meeting of the 
court, and when the people were assembled he named 
men to go out to every quarter from the town, by 
sea and land, to search for Raerek. Thorer Lange 
took a boat, and set off with thirty men ; and when 
day dawned they saw two small boats before them in 
the channel, and when they saw each other both par- 
ties rowed as hard as they could. King Raerek was 
there with thirty men. When they came quite close 
to each other Raerek and his men turned towards the 
land, and all sprang on shore except the king, who 
sat on the aft seat. He bade them farewell, and 
mshed they might meet each other again in better 
luck. At the same moment Thorer with his com- 
pany rowed to the land. Finn the Little shot off an 
arrow, which hit Thorer in the middle of the body, 
and was his death ; and Sigurd, with his men, ran up 
into the forest. Thorer's men took his body, and 
transported it, together with Raerek, to Tunsberg. 
King Olaf undertook himself thereafter to look after 
King Raerek, made him be carefully guarded, and 
took good care of his treason, for which reason he had 
a watch over him night and day. King Raerek there- 
after was very gay, and nobody could observe but 
that he was in every way well satisfied. 
Chapter It happened on Ascension-day that King Olaf went 

ofRarek's to high mass, and the bishop went in procession 

assault. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 101 

around the church, and conducted the king ; and saga vil 
when they came back to the church the bishop led 
the king to his seat on the north side of the choir. 
There Raerek sat next to the king, and concealed his 
countenance in his upper cloak. When Olaf had 
seated himself Raerek laid his hand on the king's 
shoulder, and felt it." 

" Thou hast fine clothes on, cousin, to-day," says 
he. 

King Olaf replies, " It is a festival to-day, in re- 
membrance that Jesus Christ ascended to heaven from 
earth." 

King Raerek says, " I understand nothing about it, 
so as to hold in niy mind what ye tell me about 
Christ. Much of what ye tell me appears to me in- 
credible, although many wonderful things may have 
come to pass in old times." 

When the mass was finished Olaf stood up, held 
his hands up over his head, and bowed down before 
the altar, so that his cloak hung down behind his 
shoulders. Then King Raerek started up hastily and 
sharply, and struck at the king with a long knife of 
the kind called ryting ; but the blow was received in 
the upper cloak at the shoulder, because the king was 
bending himself forwards. The clothes were much 
cut, but the king was not wounded. When the king 
perceived the attack he sprang upon the floor ; and 
Raerek struck at him again with the knife, but did 
not reach him, and said, " Art thou flying, Olaf, from 
me, a blind man?" The king ordered his men to 
seize him, and lead him out of the church, which was 
done. After this attempt many hastened to King 
Olaf, and advised that King Raerek should be killed. 
" It is," said they, " tempting your luck in the highest 
degree, king, to keep him with you, and protect him, 
whatever mischief he may undertake ; for night and 
day he thinks upon taking your life. And if you send 

H 3 



102 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA vir. him away, we know no one who can watch him so that 
he will not in all probability escape ; and if once he 
gets loose he will assemble a great multitude, and do 
much evil." 

The king replies, " Ye say truly that many a one 
has suffered death for less offence than Raerek's ; but 
willingly I would not darken the victory I gained 
over the Upland kings, when in one morning hour I 
took five kings prisoners, and got all their kingdoms : 
but yet, as they were my relations, I should not be 
their murderer but upon need. As yet I can scarcely 
see whether Ra^rek puts me in the necessity of killing 
him or not/' 

It was to feel if King Olaf had armour on or not, 

that Ra^rek had laid his hand on the king's shoulder. 

Chapter There was au Iceland man, by name Thorarin 

khig^^^' Nefiolfsson, who had his relations in the north of the 

Raerek's couutrv. Hc was uot of hiffh birth, but particularly 

journey to <-} ' t. t/ 

Iceland. prudcut, cloqucnt, and agreeable in conversation with 
people of distinction. He was also a far-traveUed 
man, who had been long in foreign parts. Thorarin 
was a remarkably ugly man, principally because he 
had very ungainly limbs. He had great ugly hands, 
and his feet were still uglier. Thorarin was in Tuns- 
berg when this event happened which has just been 
related, and he was known to King Olaf by their 
having had conversations together. Thorarin was 
just then done with rigging out a merchant vessel 
which he owned, and with which he intended to go 
to Iceland in summer. King Olaf had Thorarin with 
him as a guest for some days, and conversed much 
with him; and Thorarin even slept in the king's 
lodgings. One morning early the king awoke while 
the others were still sleeping. The sun had newly 
risen in the sky, and there was much light within. 
The king saw that Thorarin had stretched out one of 
his feet from under the bed-clothes, and he looked at 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 103 

the foot a while. In the mean time the others in the saga vh. 
lodging awoke; and the king said to Thorarin, " I have 
been awake for a while, and have seen a sight which 
was worth seeing; and that is a man's foot so ugly 
that I do not think an uglier can be found in this 
merchant town." Thereupon he told the others to 
look at it, and see if it was not so ; and all agreed 
with the king. When Thorarin observed what they 
were talking about, he said, " There are few things 
for which you cannot find a match, and that may be 
the case here." 

The king says, " I would rather say that such 
another ugly foot cannot be found in the town, and 
I would lay any wager upon it." 

Then said Thorarin, " I am willing to bet that I shall 
find an uglier foot still in the town." 

The king — " Then he who wins shall have the 
right to get any demand from the other he chooses 
to make." 

" Be it so," said Thorarin. Thereupon he stretches 
out his other foot from under the bed-clothes, and it 
was in no way handsomer than the other, and more- 
over wanted the little toe* " There," said Thorarin, 
" see now, king, my other foot, which is so much 
uglier ; and, besides, has no little toe. Now I have 
won." 

The king replies, " That other foot was so much 
uglier than this one by having five ugly toes upon it, 
and this has only four; and now I have won the 
choice of asking something from thee." 

" The sovereign's decision must be right," says 
Thorarin ; " but what does the king require of me?" 

" To take Raerek," said the king, " to Greenland, 
and deliver him to Leif Ericsson." 

Thorarin replies, " I have never been at Green^ 
land." 

The king — " Thou, who art a far-travelled man, 

H 4 



104 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. y^i j^Qyf iiave an opportunity of seeing Greenland, if 
thou hast never been there before." 

At first Thorarin did not say much about it ; but 
as the king insisted on his wish he did not entirely 
decline, but said, '^ I will let you hear, king, what my 
desire would have been had I gained the wager. It 
would have been to be received into your body of 
court-men ; and if you will grant me that, I will be 
the more zealous now in fulfilling your pleasure." 
The king gave his consent, and Thorarin was made 
one of the court-men. Then Thorarin rigged out his 
vessel, and when he was ready he took on board King 
Raerek. When Thorarin took leave of King Olaf, he 
said, " Should it now turn out, king, as is not impro- 
bable, and often happens, that we cannot eflfect the 
voyage to Greenland, but must run for Iceland or 
other countries, how shall I get rid of this king in a 
way that will be satisfactory to you?" 

The king — " If thou comest to Iceland, deliver 
him into the hands of Gudmund Eyolfsson, or of 
Skopte the lagman, or of some other chief who will 
receive my tokens and message of friendship. But if 
jthou comest to other countries nearer to this, do so with 
him that thou canst know with certainty that King 
RaBrek never again shall appear in Norway; but do 
so only when thou seest no other way of doing what- 
soever." 

When Thorarin was ready for sea, and got a wind, 
he sailed outside of all the rocks and islands, and 
when he was to the north of the Naze set right out 
into the ocean. He did not immediately get a good 
wind, but he avoided coming near the land. He 
sailed until he made land which he knew, in the 
south part of Iceland, and sailed west around the land 
out into the Greenland ocean. There he encountered 
heavy storms, and drove long about upon the ocean ; 
but when summer was coming to an end he landed 



KINGS OF NORWAY* 105 

again in Iceland in Breida fiord, Thorgils Arason saga vh. 
was the first man of any consequence who came to 
him. Thorarin brings him the king's salutation, 
message, and tokens, with which was the desire about 
King Bserek's reception. Thorgils received these in 
a friendly way, and invited King RaBrek to his house, 
where he staid all winter. But he did not like being 
there, and begged that Thorgils would let him go to 
Gudmund; sajdng he had heard some time or other 
that there, in Gudmund's house, was the most sump- 
tuous way of living in Iceland, and that it was in- 
tended, he should be in Gudmund's hands. Thorgils 
let him have his desire, and conducted him with some 
men to Gudmund at Modrovold. Gudmund received 
Raerek kindly on account of the king's message, and 
he staid there the next winter. He did not hke being 
there either; and then Gudmund gave him a habita- 
tion upon a small farm called Kalfskind, where there 
were but few neighbours. There Raerek passed the 
third winter, and said that since he had laid down his 
kingdom he thought himself most comfortably situated 
here ; for here he was most respected by all. The 
summer after RaBrek fell sick, and died ; and it is said 
he is the only king whose bones rest in Iceland. 
Thorarin Nefiolfsson was afterwards for a long time 
upon voyages ; but sometimes he was with King Olaf. 

The summer that Thorarin went with RaBrek to CHAPXEa 
Iceland, Hialte Skeggeson went also to Iceland, and B^ttk^il^'' 
King Olaf gave him many friendly gifts with him uifreks- 
when they parted. The same summer Eyvind Urar- 
hom went on an expedition to the West sea, and came 
in autumn to Ireland, to the Irish king Konofoger. 
In autumn Einar earl of Orkney and this Irish king 
met in Ulfreks-fiord*, and there was a great battle, in 

* Ulfreks-fiord must, according to the Orkneyinga Saga, be in Ire- 
land^ and is supposed by antiquaries to be either Dundalk bay or 
Strangford bay# 



fiord. 



106 dHKONICLE OF THE 

SA GA V II. which Konofoger gained the victory, "having many 
more people. The earl fled with a single ship, and 
came back about autumn to Orkney, after losing most 
of his men and all the booty they had made. The 
earl was much displeased with his expedition, and 
threw the blame upon the Northmen, who had been 
in the battle on the side of the Irish king, for making 
him lose the victory. 
Chapter j^qw wc bcgiu agBin our story where we let it 
King oiaf' slip — at King Olaf 's travelling to his bridal, to receive 
prepares ^As bctrothcd lugigcrd the king's daughter. The 
bridal king had a great body of men with him, and so 
journey. (jj^Qg^j^ g^ body that all the great people he could lay 
hold of followed him ; and every man of consequence 
had a chosen band of men :with him distinguished by 
birth or other 'qualifications. The whole were well 
appointed, and equipt in ships, weapons, and clothes. 
They steered the fleet eastwards to Konghelle; but 
when they arrived there they heard nothing of the 
Swedish king, and none of his men had come there. 
King Olaf remained a long time in summer at Kon- 
ghelle, and endeavoured carefully to make out what 
people said of the Swedish king's movements, or what 
were his designs ; but no person could tell him any 
thing for certain about it. Then he sent men up to 
Gotland to Earl Rognvald, to ask him if he knew 
how it came to pass that the Swedish king did not 
come to the meeting agreed on. The earl replies, 
that he did not know. " But as soon," said he, " as I 
. hear, I shall send some of my men to King Olaf, to 
let him know if there be any other cause for the de- 
lay than the multitude of affairs; as it often hap- 
pens that the Swedish king's movements are delayed 
by this more than he could have expected." 
CiiAPTEa This Swedish king;, Olaf Ericsson, had first a con- 

I XXXIX. 

Of the cubine who was called Edle, a daughter of an earl of 
Swedish Yendland, who had been captured in war, and there- 



children. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 107 

fore was called the king's slave-girl. Their children saga vh. 
were Eymund, Astrid, and Holmfrid. He had, be- king's 
sides, a son by his queen, who was bom the day 
before St. Jacob's-day. When the boy was to be 
christened the bishop called him Jacob, which the 
Swedes did not like, as there never had been a Swe- 
dish king called Jacob. All King Olaf 's children 
were handsome in appearance, and clever from child- 
hood. The queen was proud, and did not behave 
well towards her stepchildren; therefore the king 
sent his son Eymund to Vendland, to be fostered by 
his mother's relations, where he for a long time 
neglected his Christianity. The king's daughter, 
Astrid, was brought up in West Gotland, in the 
house of a worthy man called Egil. She was a very- 
lovely girl : her words came well into her conversa- 
tion ; she was merry, but modest, and very generous. 
When she was grown up she was often in her father's 
house, and every man thought well of her. King 
Olaf was haughty and harsh in his speech. He took 
very ill the uproar and clamour the country people 
had raised against him at the Upsal Thing, as they 
had threatened him with violence, for which he laid 
the chief blame on Earl Rognvald. He made no 
preparation for the bridal, according to the agreement 
to marry his daughter Ingigerd to Olaf the king of 
Norway, and to meet him on the borders for that 
purpose. As the summer advanced many of his 
men were anxious to know what the king's intentions 
were ; whether to keep to the agreement with King 
Olaf, or break his word, and with it the peace of the 
country. But no one was so bold as to ask the king, 
although they complained of it to Ingigerd, and be- 
sought her to find out what the king intended. She 
replied, " I have no inclination to speak to the king 
again about the matters between him and King Olaf; 
for he answered me ill enough once before when I 



108 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. brought forward Olaf 's name." In the mean time 
Ingigerd, the king's daughter, took it to heart, be- 
came melancholy and sorrowful, and yet very cu- 
rious to know what the king intended. She had much, 
suspicion that he would not keep his word and pro- 
mise to King Olaf ; for he appeared quite enraged 
whenever Olaf the Thick's name was in any way men- 
tioned. 
Chapter Qhc momiug carly the king rode out with his dogs 
Of the and falcons, and his men around him. When they let 
Kingours ^^P ^^^ falcons the king's falcon killed two black-cocks 
hunting, in one flight, and three in another. The dogs ran 
and brought the birds when they had fallen to the 
ground. The king ran after them, took the game 
from them himself, was delighted with his sport, and 
said, " It will be long before the most of you have such 
success." They agreed in this ; adding, that in their 
opinion no king had such luck in hunting as he had. 
Then the king rode home with his followers in high 
spirits. Ingigerd, the king's daughter, was just going 
out of her lodging when the king came riding into 
the yard, and she turned round and saluted him. 
He saluted her in return, laughing; produced the 
birds, and told her the success of his chase. 

"Dost thou know of any king," said he, "who 
made so great a capture in so short a time ?" 

" It is indeed," replied she, " a good morning's 
hunting, to have got five black-cocks ; but it was a 
still better when, in one morning, the king of Norway, 
Olaf, took five kings, and subdued all their king- 
doms." 

When the king heard this he sprang from his horse, 
turned to Ingigerd, and said, "Thou shalt know, Ingi- 
gerd, that however great thy love may be for this 
man, thou shalt never get him, nor he get thee. I 
will marry thee to some chief with whom I can be in 
friendship; but never can I be a friend of the man who 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 109 

has robbed me of my kingdom, and done me great saga vii. 
mischief by marauding and killing through the land." 
With that their conversation broke oflF, and each went 
away. 

Ingigerd, the king's daughter, had now full cer- Chapter 
tainty of king Olaf 's intention, and immediately sent of^^if 
men to West Gotland to Earl Rognvald, and let him the Norway 
know how it stood with the Swedish king, and that counLis. 
the agreement made with the king of Norway was 
broken ; and advising the earl and people of West 
Gotland to be upon their guard, as no peace from the 
people of Norway was to be expected. When the 
earl got this news he sent a message through all his 
kingdom, and told the people to be cautious, and pre- 
pared in case of war or pillage from the side of Nor- 
way. He also sent men to King Olaf the Thick, and 
let him know the message he had received, and like- 
wise that he wished for himself to hold peace and 
friendship with King Olaf; and therefore he begged 
him not to pillage in his kingdom. When this message 
came to King Olaf it made him both angry and sorry ; 
and for some days nobody got a word from him. He 
then held a House- Thing with his men, and in it 
Biom arose, and first took the word. He began his 
speech by telling that he had proceeded eastward last 
winter to establish a peace, and he told how kindly 
Earl Rognvald had received him ; and, on the other 
hand, how crossly and heavily the Swedish king had 
accepted the proposal. " And the agreement," said he, 
" which was made, was made more by means of the 
strength of the people, the power of Thorgnyr, and the 
aid of the earl, than by the king's good will. Now, on 
these grounds, we know for certain that it is the king 
who has caused the breach of the agreement ; therefore 
we ought by no means to make the earl suffer, for it is 
proved that he is King Olaf's firm friend." The king 
wished now to hear from the chiefs and other leaders 



110 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



3AGA Vil. 



Chaytkr 

xcn. 

Sigvat the 
scald^s 
journey 
eastwards. 



of troops what course he should adopt. " Whether 
shall we go against Gotland, and maraud there with 
such men as we have got; or is there any other course 
that appears to you more advisable?" He spoke both 
long and well. 

Thereafter many powerful men spoke, and all were 
at last agreed in dissuading from hostilities. They 
argued thus : " Although we are a numerous body of 
men who are assembled here, yet they are all only 
people of weight and power; but, for a war expe- 
dition, young men who are in quest of property and 
consideration are more suitable. It is also the custom 
of people of weight and power, when they go into 
battle or strife, to have many people with them whom 
they can send out before them for their defence ; for 
the men do not fight worse who have little property, 
but even better than those who are brought up in the 
midst of wealth." After these considerations the 
king resolved to dismiss this army from any expe- 
dition, and to give every man leave to return home ; 
but proclaimed, at the same time, that next summer 
the people over the whole country would be called out 
in a general levy, to march inmiediately against the 
Swedish king, and punish him for his want of faith. 
All thought well of this plan. Then the king re- 
turned northwards to Viken, and took his abode at 
Sarpsburg in autumn, and ordered all things necessary 
for winter provision to be collected there ; and he re- 
mained there all winter with a great retinue. 

People talked variously about Earl Rognvald ; some 
said he was King Olaf 's sincere friend; others did not 
think this likely, and thought it stood in his power to 
warn the Swedish king to keep his word, and the agree- 
ment concluded on between him and King Olaf. Sig- 
vat the poet often expressed himself in conversation 
as Earl Rognvald's great friend, and often spoke of 
him to King Olaf; and he offered to the king to travel 



KINGS OF NORWAY. Ill 

to Earl Rognvald's, and spy after the Swedish king's saga vu. 
doings, and to attempt, if possible, to get the settle- 
ment of the agreement. The king thought well of 
this plan ; for he oft, and with pleasure, spoke to his 
confidential friends about Ingigerd, the king's daugh- 
ter. Early in winter Sigvat the scald, with two 
companions, left Sarpsburg, and proceeded eastwards 
over the moors to Gotland. Before Sigvat and King 
Olaf parted he composed these verses : — 

" Sit happy in thy hall, O king! 
Till 1 come hack, and good news hring: 
The scald will hid thee now farewell. 
Till he hrings news well worth to tell. 
He wishes to the helmed hero 
Health, and long life, and a full flow 
Of honour, riches, and success — 
And, parting, ends his song with this. 
The farewell word is spoken now — 
The word that to the heart lies nearest • 
And yet, O king! before I go. 
One word on what 1 hold the dearest. 
I fain would say ' O ! may God save 
To thee, the bravest of the hrave. 
The land which is thy right by birth! * — 
This is my dearest wish on earth." 

Then they proceeded eastwards towards Eida, and 
had difficulty in crossing the river in a little cobble ; 
but they escaped, though with danger: and Sigvat 
sang — 

" On shore the crazy boat I drew. 
Wet to the skin, and frightened too; 
For truly there was danger then: 
The mocking hill-elves laughed again. 
To see us in this cobble sailing. 
And all our sea-skill unavailing. 
But better did it end, you see. 
Than any of us could foresee." 

Then they went through the Eida forest, and Sigvat 
sang — 

'' A hundred miles through Eida wood, 
And devil an alehouse, bad or good, — 
A hundred miles, and tree and sky 
'Were all that met the weary eye. 



112 CHRONica:.E of the 

SAGA VII. With many a grumble, many a groan, 

A hundred miles we trudged right on ; 

And every king*8 man of us bore 
On each foot-sole a bleeding sore.*' 

They came then through Gotland, and in the even- 
ing reached a farm-house called Hof. The door was 
bolted so that they could not come in ; and the ser- 
vants told them it was a fast-day, and they could not 
get admittance. Sigvat sang — 

*' Now up to Hof in haste I hie. 
And round the house and yard I pry. 
Doors are fast locked — but yet within, 
Methinks, I hear some stir and din. 
I peep, with nose close to the ground. 
Below the door, but small cheer found. 
My trouble with few words was paid— 
* 'Tis holy time,' the house-folks said. 
Heathens! to shove me thus away! 
I' the foul fiend's claws may you all lay." 

Then they came to another farm, where the good 
wife was standing at the door, and told them not to 
come in, for they were busy with a sacrifice to the 
Asa-gods. Sigvat sang of it thus : — 

" ' My poor lad, enter not, I pray ! * 
Thus to me did the old wife say ; 
^ For all of us are heathens here. 
And I for Odin's wrath do fear.* 
The ugly witch drove me away. 
Like scared wolf sneaking from his prey. 
When she told me that there within 
Was sacrifice to foul Odin." 

Another evening they came to three bonders', all of 
them of the name of Olver, who drove them away. 
Sigvat sang — 

'' Three of one name. 
To their great shame. 
The traveller late 
Drove from their gate I 
Travellers may come 
From our viking-home, 
Unbidden guests 
At these 01 vers' feasts." 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 113 

They went on farther that evening, and came to a saga vil 
fourth bonder, who was considered the most hos- 
pitable man in the country ; but he drove them away 
also. Then Sigvat sang — 

'* Then on I went to seek night's rest 
From one who was said to be the best. 
The kindest host in the hmd around^ 
And there I hoped to have quarters found. 
But, faith, 'twas little use to try ; 
For not so much as raise an eye 
Would this huge wielder of the spade: 
If he's the best^ it must be said 
Bad is the best^ and the scald's praise 
Cannot be given to churls like these. 
1 almost wished that Aasta's son 
In the Eyda forest had been one^ 
MHien we, his men, were even put 
Lodging to crave in a heathen's hut. 
I knew not where the earl to find: 
Four times driven off by men unkind, 
I wandered now the whole night o'er, 
Priven like a dog from door to door." 

Now when they came to Earl Rognvald's the earl 
said they must have had a severe journey. Then 
Sigvat sang — 

" The message-bearers of the king 
From Norway came his words to bring; 
And truly for their master they 
Hard work have done before to-day. 
We did not loiter on the road. 
But on we pushed for thy abode: 
Thy folk, in sooth, were not so kind 
That we cared much to lag behind. 
But Eida forest safe we found. 
From robbers free to the eastern bound : 
This praise to thee, great earl, is due — 
The scald says only what is true." 

Earl Rognvald gave Sigvat a gold arm-ring, and a 
woman said " he had not made the journey with his 
black eyes for nothing." Sigvat sang — 

'^ My coal-black eyes 
Dost thou despise ? 
They have lighted me 
Across the sea 
To gain this golden prize: 

VOL. II. I 



114 CHRONICLE OP THE 

SAGA VII. They haye lighted me, 

Thy eyes to see. 

O'er Iceland's main. 

O'er hill and plain: 

Where Nanna's lad would fear to be 

They have lighted me." 

When Sigvat came home to King Olaf he went into 
the hall, and, looking around on the walls, he sang — 

" When our men their arms are taking 
The raven's wings with greed are shaking; 
When they come back to drink in hall 
Brave spoil they bring to deck the wall — 
Shields, helms, and panzers*, all in row. 
Stripped in the field from lifeless foe. 
In truth no royal hall comes near 
Thy splendid haU in precious gear." 

Afterwards Sigvat told of his journey, and sang 
these verses: — 

" The king's court-guards desire to hear 
About our journey and our cheer. 
Our ships in autumn reach the sound, 
But long the way to Swedish ground. 
With joyless weather, wind and rain. 
And pinching cold, and feet in pain — 
With sleep, fatigue, and want oppressed. 
No songs had we — we scarce had rest.'* 

And when he came into conversation with the king 
he sang — 

" When first I met the earl 1 told 
How our king loved a friend so bold ; 
How in his heart he loved a man 
With hand to do, and head to plan. 
Thou generous king! with zeal and care 
I sought to advance thy great affair; 
For messengers from Russian land 
Had come to ask Ingigerd*s hand. 
The earl, thy friend, bids thee, who art 
So mild and generous of heart. 
His servants all who here may come 
To cherish in thy royal home ; 



# 



Pantzer — a complete suit of plate-armour— is a word we want 
in the English, but is used in the cognate German and Northern lan- 
guages. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 116 

And thine who may come to the east saga vii 

In Rognyald's hall shall find a feast — 

In Rognvald*B house shall find a home — 

At Rognvald's court he still welcome. 

Wlien first I came the people's mind 

Incensed hy Eric's son 1 find; 

And he refused thy wish to meet, 

Alleging treachery and deceit. 

But I explained how it was here. 

For earl and king, advantage clear ' 

With thee to hold the strictest peace. 

And make all force and foray cease. 

The earl is wise, and understands 

The need of peace for hoth the lands; 

And he entreats thee not to break 

The present peace for vengeance' sake!" 

It was early in winter that Sigvat the scald, with 
two companions, left Sarpsburg, and proceeded east- 
ward over the moors to Gotland ; but they often met 
with poor reception on their journey. One evening 
he came to three peasants, who drove them all out 
of their houses; and Sigvat the scald composed his 
song " The Travellers to the East " on this expedi- 
tion. At last Sigvat arrives at Earl Rognvald's, and 
was long entertained kindly and well in his house. 
The earl heard by letters sent by Ingigerd, the king's 
daughter, that embassadors from King Jarisleif were 
come from Russia to King Olaf of Sweden to ask his 
daughter Ingigerd in marriage, and that King Olaf 
had given them hopes he would agree to it. About 
the same time King Olaf 's daughter Astrid came to 
Earl Rognvald's court, and a great feast was made 
for her. Sigvat soon became acquainted by conver- 
sation with the king's daughter, and she knew him 
by name and family; for Ottar the scald, Sigvat's 
sister's son, had long had intimate acquaintance with 
King Olaf the Swedish king. Among other things 
talked of. Earl Rognvald asked Sigvat if the king of 
Norway would not marry the king's daughter Astrid. 
" If he will do that," said he, " I think we need not 
ask the Swedish king for his consent." Astrid, the 

I 2 



116 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



sAGAviL king's daughter, said exactly the same. Soon after 
Sigvat returns home, and comes to King Olaf at 
Sarpsburg a little before Yule. He immediately tells 
King Olaf the news he had heard ; and at first the 
king was much cast down when he heard of King 
Jarisleif 's suit, and he said he expected nothing but 
evil from King Olaf; but wished he might be able to 
return it in such a way as Olaf should remember. 
A while afterwards the king asks Sigvat about various 
news from Gotland. Sigvat spoke a great deal about 
Astrid, the king's daughter ; how beautiful she was, 
how agreeable in her conversation ; and that all de- 
clared she was in no respect behind her sister Ingi- 
gerd. The king listened with pleasure to this. Then 
Sigvat told him the conversation he and Astrid had 
had between themselves, and the king was delighted 
at the idea. "The Swedish king," said he, "will scarcely 
think that I will dare to marry a daughter of his 
without his consent." But this speech of his was not 
known generally. King Olaf and Sigvat the scald 
often spoke about it. The king inquired particularly 
of Sigvat what he knew about Earl Rognvald, and 
"if he be truly our friend," said the king. Sigvat 
said that the earl was King Olaf 's best friend, and 
sang these verses : — 

" The mighty Olaf should not cease 
With him to hold good terms and peace; 
For this good earl unwearied shows 
He is thy friend where all are foes. 
Of all who dwell hy the East Sea 
So friendly no man is as he : 
At all their Things he takes thy part^ 
And is thy firm friend^ hand and heart" 

After Yule, Thord SkotakoU, a sister's son of 
Sigvat, attended by one of Sigvat's footboys, who had 
been with Sigvat the autumn before at Gotland, went 
quite secretly from the court, and proceeded to Got- 
land. When they came to Earl Rognvald's court, 



Chafteb. 

XCIII. 
Earl Rogn- 
vald and 
Astrid*s 
journey to 
Norway. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 117 

they produced the tokens which Olaf himself had saga vn. 
sent to the earl, that he might place confidence in 
Thord. Without delay the earl made himself ready 
for a journey, as did Astrid, the king's daughter; 
and the earl took with him 100 men, who were chosen 
both from among his court-men and the sons of great 
bonders, and who were carefully equipt in all things, 
clothes, weapons, and horses. Then they rode north- 
wards to Sarpsburg, and came there at Candlemas. 

King Olaf had put all things in order in the best Chapt»» 
style. There were all sorts of liquors of the best that ofKing' 
could be got, and all other preparations of the same ^^*^> 
quality. Many people of consequence were sum- ^^' 
moned in from their residences. When the earl ar- 
rived with his retinue the king received him particu- 
larly well ; and the earl was shown to a large, good, 
and remarkably well-furnished house for his lodging ; 
and serving-men and others were appointed to wait 
on him ; and nothing was wanting, in any respect, 
that could grace a feast. Now when the entertain- 
ment had lasted some days, the king, the earl, and 
Astrid had a conference together ; and the result of it 
was, that Earl Rognvald contracted Astrid, daughter 
of the Swedish king Olaf, to Olaf king of Norway, 
with the same dowry which had before been settled 
that her sister Ingigerd should have from home. 
King Olaf, on his part, should give Astrid the same 
bride-gift that had been intended for her sister Ingi- 
gerd. Thereupon an eke was made to the feast, and 
King Olaf and Queen Astrid's wedding was drunk in 
great festivity. Earl Rognvald then returned to 
Gotland, and the king gave the earl many great and 
good gifts at parting ; and they parted the dearest of 
friends, which they continued to be while they lived. 

The sprinff thereafter came embassadors from Kinff Chapter 

xcv 
Jarisleif in Novogorod to Sweden, to treat more par- The agree- 

ticularly about the promise given by King Olaf the [^^"^^7*'*^^ 

I 3 ^ *"^° 



118 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. preceding summer to marry his daughter Ingigerd to 
Norway King Jarisleif. King Olaf talked about the business 
ouf^f *'^ with Ingigerd, and told her it was his pleasure that 
Sweden, g^e should many King Jarisleif. She replied, " If 
I marry King Jarisleif, I must have as my bride-gift 
the tovm and earldom of Ladoga/' The Russian em- 
bassadors agreed to this, on the part of their sove- 
reign. Then said Ingigerd, " If I go east to Russia, 
I must choose the man in Sweden whom I think 
most suitable to accompany me ; and I must stipulate 
that he shall not have any less title, or in any respect 
less dignity, privilege, and consideration there, than 
he has here." This the king and the embassadors 
agreed to, and gave their hands upon it in confirm- 
ation of the condition. 

" And who," asked the king, " is the man thou wilt 
take with thee as thy attendant?" 

" That man," she replied, " is my relation Earl 
Rognvald." 

The king replies, " I have resolved to reward Earl 
Rognvald in a different manner for his treason against 
his master in going to Norway with my daughter, 
and giving her as a concubine to that fellow, who he 
knew was my greatest enemy. I shaU hang him up 
this summer." 

Then Ingigerd begged her father to be true to the 
promise he had made her, and had confirmed by giv- 
ing his hand upon it. By her entreaties it was at 
last agreed that the king should promise to let Earl 
Rognvald go in peace from Sweden, but that he should 
never again appear in the king's presence, or come 
back to Sweden while Olaf reigned. Ingigerd then 
sent messengers to the earl to bring him these tidings, 
and to appoint a place of meeting. The earl imme- 
diately prepared for his journey; rode up to East Got- 
land ; procured there a vessel, and, with his retinue, 
joined Ingigerd, and they proceeded together eastward 



Emund. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 119 

to Russia. There Ingigerd was married to King Jaris- saga vii. 
leif ; and their children were Valdeniar, Visivald, and 
Halte the Bold. Queen Ingigerd gave Earl Rognvald 
the town of Ladoga, and earldom belonging to it. 
Earl Rognvald was there a long time, and was a cele- 
brated man. His sons and Ingeborg's were Earl Ulf 
and Earl Eyliff. 

There was a man called Emund of Skara, who was Chaptk* 
lagman of West Gotland, and was a man of great HUto^^of 
understanding and eloquence, and of high birth, theiagman 
great connection, and very wealthy ; but was con- 
sidered deceitful, and not to be trusted. He was the 
most powerful man in West Gotland after the earl 
was gone. The same spring that Earl Rognvald left 
Gotland the Gotland people held a Thing among 
themselves, and often expressed their anxiety to each 
other about what the Swedish king might do. They 
heard he was incensed because they had rather held 
in friendship with the king of Norway than striven 
against him ; and he was also enraged against those 
who had attended his daughter Astrid to Norway. 
Some proposed to seek help and support from the 
king of Norway, and to offer him their services ; 
others dissuaded from this measure, as West Gotland 
had no strength to oppose to the Swedes. "And the king 
of Norway," said they, " is far from us, the chief 
strength of his country very distant ; and therefore 
let us first send men to the Swedish king to attempt 
to come to some reconciliation with him. If that 
fail, we can stiU turn to the king of Norway." Then 
the bonders asked Emund to undertake this mission, 
to which he agreed ; and he proceeded with thirty 
men to East Gotland, where there were many of his 
relations and friends, who received him hospitably. 
He conversed there with the most prudent men about 
this difficult business ; and they were aU unanimous 
on one point, — that the king's treatment of them 

I 4 



120 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. was against law and reason. From thence Emund 
went into Sweden*, and conversed with many men 
of consequence, who all expressed themselves in the 
same way. Emund continued his journey thus, until 
one day, towards evening, he arrived at tlpsal, where 
he and his retinue took a good lodging, and staid 
there all night. The next day Emund waited upon 
the king, who was just then sitting in the Thing sur- 
rounded by many people. Emund went before him, 
bent his Imee, and saluted him. The king looked 
at him, saluted him, and asked him what news he 
brought. 

Emund replies, " There is little news among us 
Gotlanders ; but it appears to us a piece, of remark- 
able news that the proud, stupid Atle, in Yermeland, 
whom we look upon as a great sportsman, went up 
to the forest in winter with his snow-shoes and his 
bow. After he had got as many furs in the Fielde 
as filled his hand-sledge* so fuU that he could scarcely 
drag it, he returned home from the woods. But on 
the way he saw a squirrel in the trees, and shot at it, 
but did not hit ; at which he was so angry, that he 
left the sledge to run after the squirrel : but still the 
squirrel sprang where the wood was thickest, some- 
times among the roots of the trees, sometimes in the 
branches, sometimes among the arms that stretch 
from tree to tree. When Atle shot at it the arrows 
flew too high or too low, and the squirrel never 
jumped so that Atle could get a fair aim at him. 
He was so eager upon this chase that he ran the 
whole day after the squirrel, and yet could not get 
hold of it. It was now getting dark ; so he threw 
himself down upon the snow, as he was wont, and lay 
there all night in a heavy snow-storm. Next day 

♦ Swithiod was only a part of what is now called Sweden, 
t A small sledge which people travelling on snow-skates drag after 
them with their provisions or clothes. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 121 

Atle got up to look after his sledge, but never did he saga vn. 
find it again ; and so he returned home. And this is 
the only news, king, I have to teU." 

The king says, " This is news of but little impor- 
tance, if it be all thou hast to tell." 

Emund replies, " Lately something happened which 
may well be called news. Gaute Tafason went with 
five war-ships out of the Gotha river, and when he 
was lying at Eker Island there came five large 
Danish merchant-ships there. Gaute and his men 
immediately took four of the great vessels, and made 
a great booty without the loss of a man; but the 
fifth vessel slipped out to sea, and sailed away. 
Gaute gave chase with one ship, and at first came 
nearer to them ; but as the wind increased, the Danes 
got away. Then Gaute wanted to turn back ; but a 
storm came on so that he lost his ship at Leso, with 
all the goods, and the greater part of his crew. In 
the mean time his people were waiting for him at Eker ; 
but the Danes came over in fifteen merchant- ships, 
killed them all, and took all the booty they had made. 
So but little luck had they with their greed of plunder." 

The king replied, " That is great news, and worth 
being told ; but what now is thy errand here?" 

Emund replies, " I travel, sire, to obtain your 
judgment in a difficult case, in which our law and 
the Upsal law do not agree." 

The king asks, '' What is thy appeal case? " 

Emund replies, " There were two noble-born men 
of equal birth, but unequal in property and disposi- 
tion. They quarrelled about some land, and did each 
other much damage ; but most was done to him who 
was the more powerful of the two. This quarrel, 
however, was settled, and judged of at a General 
Thing; and the judgment was, that the most power- 
ful should pay a compensation. But at the first pay- 
ment, instead of paying a goose, he paid a gosling ; 



122 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA vn. for an old swine he paid a sucking pig ; and for a 
mark of stamped gold only a half mark, and for 
the other half mark nothing but clay and dirt ; and 
moreover threatened, in the most violent way, the 
people whom he forced to receive such goods in pay- 
ment. Now, sire, what is your judgment ? " 

The king replies, " He shall pay the ftdl equivalent 
whom the judgment ordered to do so, and that 
faithfully ; and further, three-fold to his king : and if 
pajonent be not made within a year and a day, he 
shall be cut off from all his property, his goods con- 
fiscated, and half go to the king's house, and half to 
the other party." 

Emund took witnesses to this judgment* among 
the most considerable of the men who were present, 
according to the laws which were held in the Upsal 
Thing. He then saluted the king, and went his way ; 
and other men brought their cases before the king, 
and he sat late in the day upon the cases of the peo- 
ple. Now when the king came to table, he asked 
where Lagman Emund was. It was answered, he 
was home at his lodgings. " Then," said the king, 
" go after him, and tell him to be my guest to-day." 
Thereafter the dishes were borne in ; then came the 
musicians with harps, fiddles, and musical instru- 
ments; and lastly, the cup-bearers. The king was 
particularly merry, and had many great people at 
table with him, so that he thought Uttle of Emund. 
The king drank the whole day, and slept all the night 
after ; but in the morning the king awoke, and recol- 
lected what Emund had said the day before: and 
when he had put on his clothes, he let his wise men 
be summoned to him; for he had always twelve of 
the wisest men who sat in judgment with him, and 

* Is the ceremony of taking witness by a token^ or some solemn act, 
as of delivery of a piece of money (still used in Scotland), of feudal or 
of udal origin ? 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 123 

treated the more difficult cases; and that was no easy saga vn. 
business, for the king was ill pleased if the judgment 
was not according to justice, and yet it was of no 
use to contradict him. In this meeting the king 
ordered Lagman Emund to be called before them. 
The messenger returned, and said, "Sire, Lagman 
Emund rode away yesterday, as soon as he had 
dined." '* Then," said the king, " teU me, ye good 
chiefs, what may have been the meaning of that law 
case which Emund laid before us yesterday? " 

They replied, " You must have considered it your- 
self, if you think there was any other meaning under 
it than what he said." 

The king rephed, "By the two noble-bom men 
whom he spoke of, who were at variance, and of whom 
one was more powerful than the other, and who did 
each other damage, he must have meant us and Olaf 
the Thick." 

They answered, " It is, sire, as you say." 

The king — "Our case was judged at the Upsal 
Thing. But what was his meaning when he said 
that bad payment was made; namely, a gosling for a 
goose, a pig for a swine, and clay and dirt for half 
of the money instead of gold ?" 

Amvid the Blind replied, " Sire, red gold and clay 
are things very unlike ; but the difference is still 
greater between king and slave. You promised Olaf 
the Thick your daughter Ingigerd, who, in all 
branches of her descent, is bom of kings, and of the 
Upland Swedish race of kings, which is the most 
noble in the North ; for it is traced up to the gods 
themselves. But now Olaf has got Astrid; and 
although she is a king's child, her mother was but a 
slave-woman, and besides of Vendish race. Great 
difference, indeed, must there be between these kings, 
when the one takes thankfully such a match; and 
now it is evident, as might be expected, that no North- 



124 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. man is to be placed by the side of the Upsal kings. 
Let us all give thanks that it has so turned out ; for 
the gods have long protected their descendants, al- 
though many now neglect this faith." 

There were three brothers : — Arnvid the Blind, who 
had a great understanding, but was so weak-sighted 
that he was scarcely fit for war ; the second was 
Thorvid the Stammerer, who could not utter two 
words together at one time, but was remarkably bold 
and courageous ; the third was Freyvid the Deaf, 
who was hard of hearing. All these brothers were 
rich and powerful men, of noble birth, great wisdom, 
and all very dear to the king. 

Then said King Olaf, " What means that which 
Emund said about Atle the Proud ?" 

None made any reply, but the one looked at the other. 

" Speak freely," said the king. 

Then said Thorvid the Stammerer, " Atle, covetous, 
greedy, insatiable, insufferable, proud." 

Then said the king, " To whom are these words of 
reproach and mockery applied?" 

Freyvid the Deaf replied, " We will speak more 
clearly if we have your permission." 

The king — " Speak freely, Freyvid, what you wiU." 

Freyrid took up the word, and spoke. " My brother 
Thorvid, who is considered to be the wisest of us 
brothers, holds the words ' covetous, greedy, insatiable, 
proud,' to be one and the same thing; for it applies to 
him who is weary of peace, longs for small things 
without attaining them, while he lets great and usefiil 
things pass away as they came. I am deaf; yet so 
loud have many spoken out, that I can perceive that 
all men, both great and small, take it ill that you have 
not kept your promise to the king of Norway ; and, 
worse than that, that you broke the decision of the 
community as it was delivered at TJpsal Thing. You 
need not fear either the king of Norway, or the king 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 125 

of Denmark, or any other, so long as the Swedish saga vh. 
army will follow you ; but if the people of the country 
unanimously turn against you, we, your friends, see 
no counsel that can be of advantage to you." 

The king asks, "Who is the chief who dares to 
betray the country and me ? " 

Freyvid replies, " All Swedes desire to have the 
ancient laws, and their full rights. Look but here, 
sire, how many chiefs are sitting in council with you. 
I think, in truth, we are but six whom you call your 
councillors: all the others, so far as I know, have 
ridden forth through the districts to hold Things with 
the people ; and we will not conceal it from you, that 
the message-token has gone forth to assemble a Retri- 
bution-thing.* All of us brothers have been invited 
to take part in the decisions of this council, but none of 
us will bear the name of traitor to the sovereign ; for 
that our father never was." 

Then the king said, "What counsel shall we take in 
this dangerous affair that is on our hands ? Good 
chiefs, give me counsel, that I may keep my kingdom, 
and the heritage of my forefathers; for I cannot enter 
into strife against the whole Swedish force." 

Amvid the Blind replies, " Sire, it is my advice 
that you ride down to Aaros f with such men as will 
follow you; take your ship there, and go out into the 
Maelare lake ; summon all people to meet you ; proceed 
no longer with haughtiness, but promise every man 
the law and rights of old established in the coun- 
try ; keep back in this way the message-token, for 
it cannot as yet, in so short a time, have travelled 
far through the land. Send, then, those of your men 
in whom you have the most confidence to those who 

* Refse Thing — a Thing for punishment by penalty or death for 
crimes and misdemeanors. 

f Aaros — the river-mouth ; probably Westeraas, on the Mcelare 
lake. 



126 CHBONICLE OF THE 

sAOAvii. have this business on hand, and try if this uproar can 
be appeased." 

The king says that he will adopt this advice. 
" I will," says he, " that ye brothers undertake this 
business ; for I trust to you the most among my men." 

Thorvid the Stammerer said, "I remain behind. 
Let Jacob your son go with them, for that is necessary." 

Then saidFreyvid, " Let us do as Thorvid says: he 
will not leave you, and I and Amvid must travel." 

This counsel was followed, Olaf went to his ships, 
and set out into the Mselare lake, and many people 
came to him. The brothers Axnvid and Freyvid 
rode out to Ullaraker, and had with them the king's 
son Jacob; but they kept it a secret that he was 
there. The brothers observed that there was a great 
concourse and war-gathering, for the bonders held 
the Thing night and day. When Amvid and Freyvid 
met their relations and friends, they said they would 
join with the people ; and many agreed to leave the 
management of the business in the hands of the 
brothers. But all, as one man, declared they would 
no longer have King Olaf over them, and no longer 
suffer his unlawful proceedings, and overweening 
pride which would not listen to any man's renaon- 
strances, even when the great chiefs spoke the truth 
to him. When Freyvid observed the heat of the 
people, he saw in what a bad situation the king's 
cause was. He summoned the chiefs of the land to a 
meeting with him, and addressed them thus: — " It 
appears to me, that if we are to depose Olaf Ericsson 
from his kingdom, we Swedes of the Uplands should 
be the leading men in it ; for so it has always been, 
that the counsel which the Upland chiefs have re- 
solved upon among themselves has always been fol- 
lowed by the men of the rest of the country. Our 
forefathers did not need to take advice from the West 
Gk)tlanders about the government of the Swedes. Now 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 127 

we will not be so degenerate as to need Emund to sagavii, 
give us counsel; but let us, friends and relations, 
unite ourselves for the purpose of coming to a deter- 
mination." All agreed to this, and thought it was 
well said. Thereafter the people joined this union 
which the Upland chiefs made among themselves, and 
Freyvid and Amvid were chiefs of the whole assem- 
blage. When Emund heard this he suspected how 
the matter would end, and went to both the brothers 
to have a conversation with them. Then Freyvid 
asked Emund, "Who, in your opinion, should we take 
for king, in case Olaf Ericsson's days are at an end ?'' 

Emund — "He whom we think best suited to it, 
whether he be of the race of chiefs or not." 

Freyvid answers, " We XJplanders will not, in our 
time, have the kingdom go out of the old race of our 
ancestors, which has given us kings for a long course 
of generations, so long as we have so good a choice as 
now. King Olaf has two sons ; one of whom we will 
choose for king, although there is a great difference 
between them. The one is noble- bom, and of Swedish 
race on both sides; the other is a slave-woman's son, 
and of Vendiah race on the mother's side." 

This decision was received with loud applause, and 
all would have Jacob for king. 

Then said Emund, " Ye Upland Swedes have the 
power this time to determine the matter ; but I wiU 
tell you what will happen : — some of those who now 
will listen to nothing but that the kingdom remain in 
the old race, will live to see the day when they will 
wish the kingdom in another race, as being of more 
advantage." 

Thereupon the brothers Freyvid and Amvid led 
the king's son Jacob into the Thing, and saluted him 
with the title of king ; and the Swedes gave him the 
name of Onund, which he afterwards retained as long 
as he lived. He was then ten or twelve years old. 



128 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. Thereafter King Onund took a court, and chose 
chiefs to be around him ; and they had as many 
attendants in their suite as were thought necessary, 
so that he gave the whole assemblage of bonders leave 
to return home. After that embassadors went be- 
tween the two kings ; and at last they had a meeting, 
and came to an agreement. Olaf was to remain king 
over the country as long as he lived ; but should hold 
peace and be reconciled with Elng Olaf of Norway, 
and also with all who had taken part in this business. 
Onund should also be king, and have a part of the 
land, such as the father and son should agree upon ; 
but should be bound to support the bonders in case 
King Olaf did any thing which the bonders would not 
suffer. 
Chapter Thereafter embassadors were sent to Norway to 
uJ^ng' King Olaf, with the errand that he should come 
^m^n' ^^^ ^^^ retinue to a meeting at Konghelle with the 
between Swcdish kiugs, and that the Swedish kings would 
MdVhetf' there confirm their reconciliation. When King Olaf 
game at heard this message, he was willing, now as formerly, 
to enter into the agreement, and proceeded to the 
appointed place. There the Swedish kings also came; 
and the relations, when they met, bound themselves 
mutually to peace and agreement. Olaf the Swedish 
king was then remarkably mild in manner, and agree- 
able to talk with. Thorstein Frode relates of this 
meeting, that there was a farm in Hissing which had 
sometimes belonged to Norway, and sometimes to 
Gotland. The kings came to the agreement between 
themselves that they would cast lots by the dice to de- 
termine who should have this property, and that he who 
threw the highest should have the farm. The Swedish 
king threw two sixes, and said King Olaf need scarcely 
throw. He replied, while shaking the dice in his 
hand, " Although there be two sixes on the dice, it 
would be easy, sire, for God Almighty to let them 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 129 

turn up in my favour." Then he threw, and had sixes saga vn. 
also. Now the Swedish king threw again, and had 
again two sixes. Olaf king of Norway then threw, 
and had six upon one dice, and the other spUt in two, 
so as to make seven eyes in aU upon it ; and the farm 
was adjudged to the king of Norway. We have 
heard nothing else of any interest that took place at 
this meeting ; and the Idngs separated the dearest of 
fiiends with each other. 

After the events now related Olaf returned with his Chapter 
people to Viken. He went first to Tunsberg, and of oiaf^ * 
remained there a short time, and then proceeded to ^^"^*^ 
the north of the country. In harvest time he sailed after the 
north to Drontheim, and had winter provision laid in ™^^^"s- 
there, and remained there all winter. Olaf Haralds- 
son was now sole and supreme king of Norway, and 
the whole of that sovereignty, as Harald Haarfager 
had possessed it, and had the advantage over that 
monarch of being the only king in the land. By a 
peaceful agreement he had also recovered that part of 
the country which Olaf the Swedish king had before 
occupied; and that part of the country which the 
Danish king had got he retook by force, and ruled 
over it as elsewhere in the country. The Danish 
king Canute ruled at that time both over Denmark 
and England ; but he himself was in England for the 
most part, and set chiefs over the country in Den- 
mark, without at that time making any claim upon 
Norway. 

It is related that in the days of Harald Haarfager Chapter 

• XCIX 

the king of Norway the islands of Orkney, which History of 
before had been only a resort for vikings, were settled, q^j^^*'^*" ^^ 
The first earl in the Orkney Islands was called Sigurd, 
who was a son of Eystein Glumra, and brother of 
Rognvald earl of More. After Sigiird his son Gut- 
torm was earl for one year. After him Torf Einar, 
a son of Rognvald, took the earldom, and was long 

VOL. II. K 



130 CHBONICUB OF THE 

8AGA viL earl^ and was a man of great power. Halfdan Haaleg, 
a son of Harald Haarfeger, assaulted Torf Einar, and 
drove him from the Orkney Islands ; but Einar came 
back and killed Halfdan in the island Ronaldsha. 
Thereafter King Harald came with an army to the 
Orkney Islands. Einar fled to Scotland, and King 
Harald made the people of the Orkney Islands give 
up their udal properties, and hold them under oath 
firom him. Thereafter the king and earl were recon- 
ciled, so that the earl became the king's man, and 
took the country as a fief from him ; but that it should 
pay no scatt or feu duty, as it was at that time much 
plundered by vikings. The earl paid the king sixty 
marks of gold; and then King Harald went to plunder 
in Scotland, as related in the " Glim Drapa." After 
Torf Einar, his sons Amkel, Erlend, and Thorfinn 
Hausaklyfur* ruled over these lands. In their days 
came Eric Bloodyaxe from Norway, and subdued 
these earls. Amkel and Erlend fell in a war expe- 
dition; but Thorfinn ruled the country long, and 
became an old man. His sons were Amfinn, Haavard, 
Lodver, Liot, and Skule. Their mother was Grelaud, 
a daughter of Earl Dungad of Caithness. Her mo- 
ther was Groa, a daughter of Thorstein Raude. In 
the latter days of Earl Thorfinn came Eric Bloodyaxe's 
sons, who had fled from Earl Hakon out of Norway, 
and committed great excesses in Orkney. Earl Thor- 
finn died on a bed of sickness, and his sons after him 
ruled over the country, and there are many stories 
concerning them. Lodver lived the longest of them, 
and ruled alone over this country. His son was 
Sigurd the Thick, who took the earldom after him, 
and became a powerful man and a great warrior. In 
his days came Olaf Tryggvesson from his viking 
expedition in the Western ocean, with his troops, 

* Hausakliufr — the splitter of sculls. 



KINGS OP NORWAY. 131 

landed in Orkney, and took Earl Sigurd prisoner in saga vu 
South Ronaldsha, where he lay with one ship. King 
Olaf allowed the earl to ransom his life by letting 
himself be baptized, adopting the true faith, becoming 
his man, and introducing Christianity into aU the 
Orkney Islands. As a hostage. King Olaf took his 
son, who was called Hund, or the Whelp. Then Olaf 
went to Norway, and became king ; and Hund was 
several years with King Olaf in Norway, and died 
there. After his death Earl Sigurd showed no obe- 
dience or fealty to King Olaf. He married a daughter 
of the Scottish king Malcolm, and their son was called 
Thorfinn. Earl Sigurd had besides older sons ; namely, 
Sumarlid, Br use, and Einar Rangmud.* Four or five 
years after Olaf Tryggvesson's fall Earl Sigurd went 
to Ireland, leaving his eldest sons to rule the country, 
and sending Thorfinn to his mother's father the Scot- 
tish king. On this expedition Earl Sigurd fell in 
Brian's battle.f When the news was received in 
Orkney the brothers Sumarlid, Bruse, and Einar 
were chosen earls, and the country was divided into 
three parts among them. Thorfinn Sigurdsson was 
five years old when Earl Sigurd fell. When the Scot- 
tish king heard of the earl's death he gave his relation 
Thorfinn Caithness and Sutherland, with the title of 
earl, and appointed good men to rule the land for 
him. Earl Thorfinn was ripe in all ways as soon as 
he was grown up : he was stout and strong, but ugly ; 
and as soon as he was a grown man it was easy to see 
that he was a severe and cruel, but a very clever man. 
So says Amor, the earl's scald: — 

* Rangmudr — wry-mouth. 

f Brian's battle is supposed to have taken place on the 23d April, 
1014, at Clontarf, near Dublin; and is known in Irish history as the 
battle of Clontarf, and was one of the bloodiest of the age. It was 
fought between a viking called Sigtryg and Brian king of Munster 
who gained the victory, but lost his life. 

K 2 



132 CHRONICLE OF THE 

• 
SAGA VII. " Under the rim of heaven no other. 

So young in years as Einar's hrother. 

In hattle had a braver hand. 

Or stouter, to defend the land." 

Chafteii The brothers Einar and Bruse were very unlike 
Of the* in disposition. Bruse was a soft-minded, peaceable 
Md^Bras" J^an, — sociable, eloquent, and of good understanding. 
Einar was obstinate, taciturn, and dull; but ambitious, 
greedy of money, and withal a great warrior. Su- 
marlid, the eldest of the brothers, was in disposition 
like Bruse, and lived not long, but died in his bed. 
After his death Thorfinn claimed his share of the 
Orkney Islands. Einar replied, that Thorfinn had the 
dominions which their father Sigurd had possessed, 
namely, Caithness and Sutherland, which he insisted 
were much larger than a third part of Orkney ; there- 
fore he would not consent to Thorfinn's having any 
share. Bruse, on the other hand, was willing, he 
said, to divide with him. " I do not desire," he said, 
" more than the third part of the land, and which of 
right belongs to me." Then Einar took possession 
of two parts of the country, by which he became a 
powerful man,^urrounded by many followers. He was 
often in summer out on marauding expeditions, and 
called out great numbers of the people to join him ; 
but it went always unpleasantly with the division of 
the booty made on his viking cruises. Then the 
bonders grew weary of all these burdens ; but Earl 
Einar held fast by them with severity, calling in all 
services laid upon the people, and allowing no opposi- 
tion from any man ; for he was excessively proud and 
overbearing. And now there came dearth and scarcity 
in his lands, in consequence of the services and money 
outlay exacted from the bonders; while in the part of 
the country belonging to Bruse there were peace and 
plenty, and therefore he was the best beloved by the 
bonders. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 133 

There was a rich and powerful man who was called saga vn. 
Aamund, who dwelt in Hrossay * at Sandwik, in Lau- Chapter 
pandanes. His son, called Thorkel, was one of the ofniw- 
ablest men in the islands. Aamund was a man of ^^«i ^a- 
the best understanding, and most respected in Orkney. ^ ' 

One spring Earl Einar proclaimed a levy for an ex- 
pedition, as usual. The bonders murmured greatly 
against it, and applied to Aamund, with the entreaty 
that he would intercede with the earl for them. He 
replied, that the earl was not a man who would hsten 
to other people, and insisted that it was of no use to 
make any entreaty to the earl about it. " As things 
now stand, there is a good understanding between me 
and the earl; but, in my opinion, there would be 
much danger of our quarrelling, on account of our dif- 
ferent dispositions and views on both sides ; therefore 
I will have nothing to do with it." They then applied 
to Thorkel, who was also very loath to interfere ; but 
promised at last to do so, in consequence of the great 
entreaty of the people. Aamund thought he had 
given his promise too hastily. Now when the earl 
held a Thing, Thorkel spoke on account of the people, 
and entreated the earl to spare the people from such 
heavy burdens, recounting their necessitous condition. 
The earl replies favourably, saying that he would take 
Thorkel's advice. " I had intended to go out from 
the country with six ships, but now I will only take 
three with me ; but thou must not come again, Thor- 
kel, with any such request." The bonders thanked 
Thorkel for his assistance, and the earl set out on a 
viking cruise, and came back in autumn. The spring 
after the earl made the same levy as usual, and held 

* Krossay, or Hrossay, is Pomona, or the Mainland (Meginland) — 
the principal island of the Orkneys ; and Hlaupandanes is apparently the 
western part of the island, in which the farm of Sandwick and parish 
of the same name are situated. Sandwick was undoubtedly the resi- 
dence of Aamund, and is now known by the same name — Sandwick. 

K 3 



134 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VII. a Thing with the bonders. Then Thorkel again made 
a speech, in which he entreated the earl to spare the 
people. The earl now was angry, and said the lot of 
the bonders should be made worse in consequence of 
his intercession ; and worked himself up into such a 
rage, that he vowed they should not both come next 
spring to the Thing in a whole skin. Then the Thing 
was closed. When Aamund heard what the earl 
and Thorkel had said at the Thing, he told Thorkel 
to leave the country, and he went over to Caithness 
to Earl Thorfinn. Thorkel was afterwards a long 
time there, and brought up the earl in his youth, and 
was on that account called Thorkel the Fosterer ; and 
he became a very celebrated man. 
Chapter There wcrc many powerful men who fled from then* 
Thel^. udal properties in Orkney on account of Earl Einar's 
xnent of violencc, and the most fled over to Caithness to Earl 
Thorfinn ; but some fled from the Orkney Islands to 
Norway, and some to other countries. When Earl 
Thorfinn was grown up he sent a message to his bro- 
ther Einar, and demanded the part of the dominion 
which he thought belonged to him in Orkney ; namely, 
a third of the islands. Einar was nowise inclined to 
diminish his possessions. When Thorfinn found this 
he collected a war-force in Caithness, and proceeded 
to the islands. As soon as Earl Einar heard of this 
he collected people, and resolved to defend his country. 
Earl Bruse also collected men, and went out to meet 
them, and bring about some agreement between them. 
An agreement was at last concluded, that Thorfinn 
should have a third part of the islands as of right 
belongmg to him, but that Bruse and Einar should 
lay their two parts together, and Einar alone should 
rule over them ; but, if the one died before the other, 
the longest liver should inherit the whole. This 
agreement seemed reasonable, as Bruse had a son 
called Rognvald, but Einar had no son. Earl Thor- 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 135 

finn set men to rule over his land in Orkney, but he »aga vn. 
himself was generally in Caithness. Earl Einar was 
generally on viking expeditions to Ireland, Scotland, 
and Bretland. 

One summer that Earl Einar marauded in Ireland, Chapter 
he fought in Ulfreks-fiord * with the Irish king Eyvin"* 
Konofoger, as has been related before, and suffered ^'^^'i'^™ * 
there a great defeat. The summer after this Eyvind 
Urarhom was coming from the west from Ireland, 
intending to go to Norway; but the weather was 
boisterous, and the current against him, so he ran 
into OsmundwaUf , and lay there wind-bound for some 
time. When Earl Einar heard of this, he hastened 
thitber with many people, took Eyvind prisoner, and 
ordered him to be put to death; but spared the 
lives of most of his people. In autumn they pro- 
ceeded to Norway to King Olaf, and told him Eyvind 
was killed. The king said little about it, but one could 
see that he considered it a great and vexatious loss ; 
for h^ did not usually say much if any thing turned 
out contrary to his wishes. Earl Thorfinn sent Thor- 
kel Fosterer to the islands to gather in his scatt. 
Now as Einar gave Thorkel the greatest blame for 
the dispute in which Thorfinn had made claim to the 
islands, Thorkel came suddenly back to Caithness 
from Orkney, and told Earl Thorfinn that he had 
learnt that Earl Einar would have murdered him if 
his friends and relations had not given him notice 
to escape. " Now," says he, " it is come so far be- 
tween the earl and me, that either something decisive 
between us must take place if we meet, or I must re- 
move to such a distance that his power will not reach 
me." The earl encouraged Thorkel much to go east 
to Norway to King Olaf. " Thou wilt be highly 

* Dundalk bay. 

I Asmundarvagr is Osmundwall^ in the island of Wallis; called 
Vagaland in the Orkneyinga Saga. 

K 4 



136 CHBONICLE OF THE 

SA GA v iL respected," says he, " wherever thou comest among 
honourable men ; and I know so well thy disposition 
and the earl's, that it will not be long before ye comfi 
to extremities." Thereupon Thorkel made himself 
ready, and proceeded in autumn to Norway, and then 
to King Olaf, with whom he staid the whole winter, 
and was in high favour. The king often entered into 
conversation with him, and he thought, what was true, 
that Thorkel was a high-minded man of good under- 
standing. In his conversations with Thorkel, the king 
found a great diflference in his description of the two 
earls ; for Thorkel was a great friend of Earl Thorfinn, 
but had much to say against Einar. Early in spring 
the king sent a ship west over the sea to Earl Thorfinn, 
with the invitation to come east and visit him in 
Norway. The earl did not decline the invitation, for 
it was accompanied by assurances of friendship. 
CHAma Earl Thorfinn went east to Norway, and came to 
Earl ' King Olaf, from whom he received a kind reception, 
m^CT. ^^^ staid till late in the smnmer. When he was pre- 
paring to return westwards again. King Olaf made 
him a present of a large and fully-rigged long-ship. 
Thorkel the Fosterer joined company with the earl, 
who gave him the ship which he brought with him 
from the West. The king and the earl took leave of 
each other tenderly. In autumn Earl Thorfinn came 
to Orkney, and when Earl Einar heard of it he went 
on board his ships with a numerous band of men. 
Earl Bruse came up to his two brothers, and endea- 
voured to mediate between them, and a peace was 
concluded and confirmed by oath. Thorkel Fosterer 
was to be in peace and friendship with Earl Einar; 
and it was agreed that each of them should give a 
feast to the other, and that the earl should first be 
ThorkeFs guest at Sandwick. When the earl came 
to the feast he was entertained in the best manner ; 
but the earl was not cheerful. There was a great 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 137 

room, in which there were doors at each end. The saga vn. 
day the earl should depart Thorkel was to accompany 
him to the other feast ; and Thorkel sent men before, 
who should examine the road they had to travel that 
day. The spies came back, and said to Thorkel they 
had discovered three ambushes. " And we think," said 
they, " there is deceit on foot." When Thorkel heard 
this he lengthened out his preparations for the jour- 
ney, and gathered people about him. The earl told 
him to get ready, as it was time to be on horseback. 
Thorkel answered, that he had many things to put in 
order first, and went out and in frequently. There 
was a fire upon the floor. At last he went in at one 
door, followed by an Iceland man from Eastfiord, 
called Halvard, who locked the door after him. 
Thorkel went in between the fire and the place where 
the earl was sitting. The earl asked, "Art thou 
ready at last, Thorkel?" 

Thorkel answers, " Now I am ready; " and struck 
the earl upon the head so that he fell upon the floor. 

Then said the Icelander, " I never saw people so 
foolish as not to drag the earl out of the fire ; " and 
took a stick, which he set under the earl's neck, and 
put him upright on the bench. Thorkel and his two 
comrades then went in all haste out of the other 
door opposite to that by which they went in, and 
Thorkel's men were standing without fully armed. 
The earl's men now went in, and took hold of the earl. 
He was already dead, so nobody thought of avenging 
him : and also the whole was done so quickly ; for no- 
body expected such a deed from Thorkel, and all 
supposed that there really was, as before related, a 
friendship fixed between the earl and Thorkel. The 
most who were within were unarmed, and they were 
partly Thorkel's good friends ; and to this may be 
added, that fate had decreed a longer life to Thorkel. 
When Thorkel came out, he had not fewer men with 



138 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA viL him that the earl's troop. Thorkel went to his ship, 
and the earl's men went their way. The same day 
Thorkel sailed out eastwards into the sea. This hap- 
pened after winter ; but he came safely to Norway, 
went as fast as he could to Olaf, and was well received 
by him. The king expressed his satisfaction at this 
deed, and Thorkel was with him all winter. 
Chaftkr After Earl Einar's faU Bruse took the part of the 
Agr^ent couutry which he had possessed ; for it was known to 
^ween many men on what conditions Einar and Bruse had 
and Earl entered into a partnership. Although Thorfinn 
Bruse. thought it would be more just that each of them had 
half of the islands, Bruse retained the two thirds of 
the country that winter. In spring, however, Thor- 
finn produced his claim, and demanded the half of the 
country ; but Bruse would not consent. They held 
Things and meetings about the business; and al- 
though their friends endeavoured to settle it, Thorfinn 
would not be content with less than the half of the 
islands, and insisted that Bruse, with his disposition, 
would have enough even with a third part. Bruse 
replies, " When I took my heritage after my father I 
was well satisfied with a third part of the country, 
and there was nobody to dispute it with me ; and now 
I have succeeded to another third in heritage after 
my brother, according to a lawftd agreement between 
us ; and although I am not powerful enough to main- 
tain a feud against thee, my brother, I will seek some 
other way, rather than willingly renounce my pro- 
perty." With this their meeting ended. But Bruse saw 
that he had no strength to contend against Thorfinn, 
because Thorfinn had both a greater dominion, and 
also could have aid from his mother's brother, the 
Scottish king. He resolved, therefore, to go out of 
the country ; and he went eastward to King Olaf, and 
had with him his son Rongvald, then ten years old. 
When the earl came to the king he was well received. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 139 

The earl now declared his errand, and told the king sagaj^ii. 
the circumstances of the whole dispute between him 
and his brother, and asked help to defend his king- 
dom of Orkney; promising, in return, the fullest 
friendship towards King Olaf. In his answer, the 
king began with showing how Harald Haarfager had 
appropriated to himself all udal rights in Orkney, 
and that the earls, since that time, have constantly 
held the country as a fief, not as their udal property. 
" As a sufficient proof of which," said he, " when Eric 
Bloodyaxe and his sons were in Orkney the earls 
were subject to them; and also when my relation 
Olaf Tryggvesson came there thy father. Earl Sigurd, 
became his man. Now I have taken heritage after 
King Olaf, and I will give thee the condition to be- 
come my man, and then I will give thee the islands as 
a fief; and we shall try if I cannot give thee aid that 
will be more to the purpose than Thorfinn can get 
from the Scottish king. If thou wilt not accept of 
these terms, then will I win back my udal property 
there in the West, as our forefathers and relations 
of old possessed it." 

The earl carefully considered this speech, laid it 
before his friends, and demanded their advice if he 
should agree to it, and enter into such terms with 
King Olaf and become his vassal. " But I do not see 
what my lot will be at my departure if I say no ; for 
the king has clearly enough declared his claim upon 
Orkney ; and from his great power, and our being in 
his hands, it is easy for him to make our destiny 
what he pleases." 

Although the earl saw that there was much to be 
considered for and against it, he chose the condition 
to deliver himself and his dominion into the king's 
power. Thereupon the king took the earl's power, 
and the government over all the earVs lands, and the 
earl became his vassal under oath of fealty. 



140 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VII. 

Chapter 
CVI. 
The earls* 
agreement 
to the 
king's 
terms. 



Thorfinn the earl heard that his brother Bruse had 
gone east to King Olaf to seek support from him ; but 
as Thorfinn had been on a visit to King Olaf before, 
and had concluded a friendship with him, he thought 
his case would stand well with the king, and that 
many would support it ; but he believed that many 
more would do so if he went there himself. Earl 
Thorfinn resolved, therefore, to go east himself with- 
out delay ; and he thought there would be so little 
difference between the time of his arrival and Bruse's, 
that Bruse's errand could not be accomplished before 
he came to King Olaf. But it went otherwise than 
Earl Thorfinn had expected ; for when he came to the 
king the agreement between the king and Bruse was 
already concluded and settled, and Earl Thorfinn did 
not know a word about Bruse's having surrendered 
his udal domains until he came to King Olaf. As 
soon as Earl Thorfinn and King Olaf met, the king 
made the same demand upon the kingdom of Orkney 
that he had done to Earl Bruse, and required that 
Thorfinn should voluntarily deliver over to the king 
that part of the country which he had possessed 
hitherto. The earl answered in a friendly and re- 
spectful way, that the king's friendship lay near to 
his heart : " And if you think, sire, that my help 
against other chiefs can be of use, you have already 
every claim to it; but I cannot be your vassal for 
service, as I am an earl of the Scottish king, and owe 
fealty to him." 

As the king found that the earl, by his answer, 
declined fulfilling the demand he had made, he said, 
" Earl, if thou wilt not become my vassal, there is 
another condition ; namely, that I will place over the 
Orkney Islands the man I please, and require thy 
oath that thou wilt make no claim upon these lands, 
but allow whoever I place over them to sit in peace. 
If thou wilt not accept of either of these conditions, 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 141 

he who is to rule over these lands may expect hostility saga vn. 
from thee, and thou must not think it strange if like 
meet like in this business." 

The earl begged of the king some time to consider 
the matter. The king did so, and gave the earl time 
to take the counsel of his friends on the choosing one 
or other of these conditions. Then the earl requested 
a delay until next summer, that he might go over the 
sea to the West, for his proper counsellors were all at 
home, and he himself was but a child in respect of 
age ; but the king required that he should now make 
his election of one or other of the conditions. Thorkel 
Fosterer was then with the king, and he privately sent 
a person to Earl Thorfinn, and told him, whatever his 
intentions might be, not to think of leaving Olaf with- 
out being reconciled with him, as he stood entirely in 
Olaf 's power. From such hints the earl saw there 
was no other way than to let the king have his own 
wiU. It was no doubt a hard condition to have no 
hope of ever regaining his paternal heritage, and 
moreover to bind himself by oath to allow those to 
enjoy in peace his domain who had no hereditary 
right to it ; but seeing it was uncertain how he could 
get away, he resolved to submit to the king and 
become his vassal, as Bruse had done. The king ob- 
served that Thorfinn was more high-minded, and 
less disposed to suffer subjection than Bruse, and 
therefore he trusted less to Thorfinn than to Bruse ; 
and he considered also that Thorfinn would trust 
to the aid of the Scottish king, if he broke the 
agreement. The king also had discernment enough 
to perceive that Bruse, although slow to enter into an 
agreement, would promise nothing but what he in- 
tended to keep; but as to Thorfinn, when he had 
once made up his mind he went readily into every 
proposal, and made no attempt to obtain any alteration 
of the king's first conditions : therefore the king had 



142 CHRONICLE OP THE 

SAGA VII. his suspicions that the earl would infringe the agree- 
ment. 

Chaptkh When the kinff had carefiilly considered the whole 
Earl Tiior- matter by himself, he ordered the signal to sound for 
finn'sde. ^ General Thinsf, to which he called in the earls. 

part tire, P' 

and recon- ThcH Said thc king, " I will now make known to the 
cihation public our agreement with the Orkney earls. They 
Thorkei. haye now acknowledged my right of property to 
Orkney and Shetland, and have both become my 
vassals, all which they have confirmed by oath ; and 
now I will invest them with these lands as a fief: 
namely, Bruse with one third part, and Thorfinn 
with one third, as they formerly enjoyed them ; but 
the other third, which Einar Rangmud had, I adjudge 
as fallen to my domain, because he killed Eyvind 
Urarhorn, my court-man, partner, and dear friend; 
and that part of the land I will manage as I think 
proper. I have also, my earls, to teU you, it is my 
pleasure that ye enter into an agreement with Thorkei 
Aamundsson for the murder of your brother Einar ; 
for I will take that business, if ye agree thereto, 
within my own jurisdiction." The earls agreed to 
this, as to every thing else that the king proposed. 
Thorkei came forward, and surrendered to the king's 
judgment of the case, and the Thing concluded. 
King Olaf awarded as great a penalty for Earl Einar's 
murder as for three lendermen ; but as Einar himself 
was the cause of the act, one third of the mulct fell 
to the ground. Thereafter Earl Thorfinn asked the 
king's leave to depart, and as soon as he obtained 
it made ready for sea with all speed. It happened 
one day, when all was ready for the voyage, the earl 
sat in his ship drinking; and Thorkei Aamundsson 
came unexpectedly to him, laid his head upon the 
earl's knee, and bade him do with him what he pleased. 
The earl asked why he did so. " We are, you know, 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 143 

reconciled men, according to the king's decision ; so saga vn. 
stand up, Thorkel." 

Thorkel replied, " The agreement which the king 
made as between me and Bruse stands good; but 
what regards the agreement with thee thou alone 
must determine. Although the king made conditions 
for my property and safe residence in Orkney, yet I 
know so well thy disposition that there is no going to 
the islands for me, unless I go there in peace with 
thee, Earl Thorfinn ; and therefore I, am willing to 
promise never to return to Orkney, whatever the king 
may desire." 

The earl remained silent; and first, after a long 
pause, he said, " If thou wilt rather, Thorkel, that I 
shall judge between us than trust to the king's judg- 
ment, then let the beginning of our reconciliation be, 
that you go with me to the Orkney Islands, live with 
me, and never leave me but with my will, and be 
bouod to defend my land, and execute all that I want 
done, as long as we both are in life." 

Thorkel replies, " This shall be entirely at thy 
pleasure, earl, as well as every thing else in my 
power." Then Thorkel went on, and solemnly rati- 
fied this agreement. The earl said he would talk 
afterwards about the mulct of money, but took Thor- 
kel's oath upon the conditions. Thorkel immediately 
made ready to accompany the earl on his voyage. 
The earl set off as soon as all was ready, and never 
again were King Olaf and Thorfinn together. 

Earl Bruse remained behind, and took his time to Chapter 
get ready. Before his departure the king sent for em7'^^' 
him, and said, " It appears to me, earl, that in thee Bruse's 
I have a man on the west side of the sea on whose ^^ 
fidelity I can depend ; therefore I intend to give thee 
the two parts of the country which thou formerly 
hadst to rule over ; for I will not that thou shouldst 
be a less powerful man after entering into my service 



144 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VII. than before : but I will secure thy fidelity by keeping 
thy son Rognvald with me. I see well enough that 
with two parts of the country and my help, thou wilt 
be able to defend what is thy own against thy brother 
Thorfinn." Bruse was thankful for getting two thirds 
instead of one third of the country, and soon after he 
set out, and came about autumn to Orkney ; but 
Rognvald, Bruse's son, remained behind in the East 
with King Olaf. Rognvald was one of the hand- 
somest men that could be seen, — his hair long, and 
yellow as silk ; and he soon grew up, stout and tall, 
and he was a very able superb man, both of great 
understanding and polite manners. He was long with 
King Olaf. Ottar Swarte speaks of these affairs in 
the poem he composed about King Olaf: — 

*^ From Shetland^ far off in the cold North sea, 
Come chiefs who desire to be subject to thee : 
No king so well known for his will, and his mighty ^ 
To defend his own people from scaitb or unright. 
These isles of the West midst the ocean's wild roar. 
Scarcely heard the voice of their sovereign before : 
Our bravest of sovereigns before could scarce bring 
These islesmen so proud to acknowledge their king." 

Chaptee The brothers Thorfinn and Bruse came west to 
Of the^* Orkney ; and Bruse took the two parts of the country 
Earls under his rule, and Thorfinn the third part. Thorfinn 
and Bruse. was usually iu Caithucss and elsewhere in Scotland ; 
but placed men of his own over the islands. It was left 
to Bruse alone to defend the islands, which at that time 
were severely scourged by vikings ; for the Northmen 
and Danes went much on viking cruises in the West 
sea, and frequently touched at Orkney on the way to 
or from the West, and plundered, and took provisions 
and cattle from the coast. Bruse often complained 
of his brother Thorfinn, that he made no equipment 
of war for the defence of Orkney and Shetland, yet 
levied his share of the scatt and duties. Then Thor- 
finn offered to him to exchange, and that Bruse should 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 145 

have one third and Thorfinn two thirds of the land, saga vil 
but should undertake the defence of the land for the 
whole. Although this exchange did not take place 
immediately, it is related in the saga of the earls that 
it was agreed upon at last; and that Thorfinn had two 
parts, and Bruse only one, when Canute the Great 
subdued Norway, and King Olaf fled the country. 
Earl Thorfinn Sigurdsson has been the ablest earl 
of these islands, and has had the greatest dominion of 
all the Orkney earls ; for he had under him Orkney, 
Shetland, and the Hebudes, besides very great pos- 
sessions in Scotland and Ireland. Amor, the earl's 
scald, tells of his possessions : — 

" Prom Thurso-skerry to Dublin^ 
All people hold with good Thorfinn — 
All people love his sway. 
And the generous chief obey." 

Thorfinn was a very great warrior. He came to 
the earldom at five years of age, ruled more than 
sixty years, and died in his bed about the last days 
of Harald Sigurdsson.* But Bruse died in the days 
of Canute the Great, a short time after the fall of 
Saint OM.f 

Having now gone through this second story, we Chaptkr 
shall return to that which we left, — at King Olaf ofHarek 
Haraldsson having concluded peace with King Olaf the ^^ Thiotto. 
Swedish king, and having the same summer gone 
north to Drontheim. He had then been king in 
Norway five years. In harvest time he prepared to 
take his winter residence at Nidaros, and he remained 
all winter there. Thorkel the Fosterer, Aamund's son, 
as before related, was all that winter with him. King 
Olaf inquired very carefully how it stood with Chris- 
tianity throughout the land, and learnt that it was 
not observed at all to the north of Halogaland, and was 

♦ About 1069. t After 1033. 

VOL. II. L 



146 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. far from being observed as it should be in Numedal, 
and the interior of Drontheim. There was a man by 
name Harek, a son of Eyvind Skaldaspiller, who 
dwelt in an island called Tlnotto in Halogaland. Ey- 
vind had not been a rich man, but was of high family 
and high mind. In Thiotto, at first, there dwelt 
many small bonders ; but Harek began with buying a 
farm not very large, and lived on it, and in a few 
years he had got all the bonders that were there be- 
fore out of the way ; so that he had the whole island, 
and built a large head-mansion. He soon became 
very rich ; for he was a very prudent man, and very 
successful. He had long been greatly respected by 
the chiefs ; and being related to the kings of Norway, 
had been raised by them to high dignities. Harek's 
father's mother, Gunhild, was a daughter of Earl 
Halfdan, and of Ingeborg, Harald Haarfager's daugh- 
ter. At the time the circumstance happened which 
we . are going to relate he was somewhat advanced in 
years. Harek was the most respected man in Halo- 
galand, and for a long time had the Lapland trade, 
and did the king's business in Lapland*; sometimes 
alone, sometimes with others joined to him. He 
had not himself been to wait on King Olaf, but mes- 
sages had passed between them, and all was on the 
most friendly footing. This winter that Olaf was 
in Nidaros, messengers passed between the king and 
Harek of Thiotto. Then the king made it known 
that he intended going north to Halogaland, and as 
far north as the land's end ; but the people of Halo- 
galand expected no good from this expedition. 
CHAfTKa Olaf rigged out five ships in spring, and had with 
of^ht^* him about 300 men. When he was ready for sea he 
people of g^t out uorthwards along the land ; and when he came 

Haloga- 
land. 

* Receiving the scatt paid in skins or furs by the Finns, — that is, the 

Laplanders, — has in all ages been a profitable office bestowed by the 

king. 



KINGS OF KORWAY. 147' 

to Numedal district he summoned the bonders to sagavil 
a Thing, and at every Thing was accepted as king. 
He also made the laws to be read there as elsewhere, 
by which the people are commanded to observe 
Christianity ; and he threatened every man with loss 
of life, and limbs, and property, who would not sub- 
ject himself to Christian law. He inflicted severe 
punishments on many men, great as well as small, 
and left no district until the people had consented to 
adopt the holy faith. The most of the men of power 
and of the great bonders made feasts for the king, 
and so he proceeded all the way north to Halogaland. 
Harek of Thiotto also made a feast for the king, at 
which there was a great multitude of guests, and the 
feast was very splendid. Harek was made lenderman, 
and got the same privileges he had enjoyed under the 
the former chiefs of the country. 

There was a man called Grankel, or Granketil, Chaftee 
who was a rich bonder, and at this time rather ad- of Aas-* 
vanced in age. In his youth he had been on viking ^raukeis- 
cruises, and had been a powerful fighter ; for he pos- son. 
sessed great readiness in all sorts of bodily exercises. 
His son Aasmund was equal to his father in all 
these, and in some, indeed, he excelled him. There 
were many who said that with respect to comeliness, 
strength, and bodily expertness, he might be con- 
sidered the third remarkably distinguished for these 
that Norway had ever produced. The first was Ha- 
kon Athelstan's foster-son; the second, Olaf Tryg- 
gvesson. Grankel invited King Olaf to a feast, which 
was very magnificent ; and at parting Grankel pre- 
sented the king with many honourable gifts and 
tokens of friendship. The king invited Aasmund, 
with many persuasions, to follow him ; and as Aas- 
mund could not decline the honours offered him, he 
got ready to travel with the king, became his man, 
and stood in high favour vnth him. The king re- 

L 2 



148 CHRONICLE OF THE 

sAGAvii. mained in Halogaland the greater part of the sum- 
mer, went to all the Things, and baptized all the 
people. Thorer Hund dwelt at that time in the 
island Biarko. He was the most powerful man in the 
North, and also became one of Olaf 's lendermen. 
Many sons of great bonders resolved also to follow 
King Olaf from Halogaland. Towards the end of 
summer King Olaf left the North, and sailed back to 
Drontheim, and landed at Nidaros*, where he passed 
the winter. It was then that Thorkel the Fosterer 
came from the West from Orkney, after killing Einar 
Rangmud, as before related. This autumn corn was 
dear in Drontheim, after a long course of good sea- 
sons, and the farther north the dearer was the com ; 
but there was com enough in the East country, and 
in the Uplands, and it was of great help to the peo- 
ple of Drontheim that many had old com remaining 
beside them, 
c^ni"^ In autumn the news was brought to King Olaf 
Of the that the bonders had had a great feast on the first 
^the*'** winter-day's eve, at which there was a numerous 
Drontheim attendance and much drinking ; and it was told the 
peop e. -j^ij^g that all the remembrance-cups to the Assers, or 
old gods, were blessed according to the old heathen 
forms ; and it was added, that cattle and horses had 
been slain, and the altars sprinked with their blood, 
and the sacrifices accompanied with the prayer that 
was made to obtain good seasons. It was also re- 
ported, that all men saw clearly that the gods were 
offended at the Halogaland people turning Christian. 
Now when the king heard this news he sent men 
into the Drontheim country, and ordered several 
bonders, whose names he gave, to appear before 
him. There was a man called Olver of Egge, so 
called after his farm on which he lived. He was 

* The town of Drontheim. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 149 

powerful, of great family, and the head-man of those sagajii 
who on account of the bonders appeared before the 
king. Now, Vhen they came to the king, he told them 
these accusations ; to which Olver, on behalf of the 
bonders, replied, that they had had no other feasts 
that harvest than their usual entertainments, and 
social meetings, and friendly drinking parties. " But 
as to what may have been told you of the words which 
may have fallen from us Drontheim people in our drink- 
ing parties, men of understanding would take good 
care not to use such language ; but I cannot hinder 
drunken or foolish people's talk." Olver was a man 
of clever speech, and bold in what he said, and de- 
fended the bonders against such accusations. In the 
end, the king said the people of the interior of Dron- 
theim must themselves give the best testimony to 
their being in the right faith. The bonders got 
leave to return home, and set off as soon as they 
were ready. 

Afterwards, when winter was advanced, it was told Chapter 

. CXIV 

the king that the people of the interior of Drontheim or the sa". 
had assembled in great number at Maere, and that the^p^pie 
there was a great sacrifice in the middle of winter, ©fthein- 
at which they sacrificed offerings for peace and a theDron- 
good season. Now when the king knew this on **'«'™^^*- 
good authority to be true, he sent men and messages 
into the interior, and summoned the bonders whom he 
thought of most understanding into the town. The 
bonders held a council among themselves about this 
message ; and all those who had been upon the same 
occasion in the beginning of winter were now very 
unwilling to make the journey. Olver, however, at 
the desire of all the bonders, allowed himself to be 
persuaded. When he came to the town he went 
immediately before the king, and they talked toge- 
ther. The king made the same accusations against 
the bonders, that they had held a mid-winter sacrifice. 

L 3 



trict. 



150 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA viL Olver replies, that this accusation against the bon- 
ders was false. " We had," said he, " Yule feasts and 
drinking feasts wide around in the districts ; and the 
bonders do not prepare their feasts so sparingly, sire, 
that there is not much left over, which people con- 
sume long afterwards. At Maere there is a great farm, 
with a large house on it, and a great neighbourhood 
all around it, and it is the great delight of the people 
to drink many together in company." The king 
said little in reply, but looked angry, as he thought 
he knew the truth of the matter better than it was 
now represented. He ordered the bonders to return 
home. " I shall some time or other," says he, " come 
to the truth of what you are now concealing, and in 
such a way that ye shall not be able to contradict it. 
But, however that may be, do not try such things 
again." The bonders returned home, and told the 
result of their journey, and that the king was altoge- 
ther enraged. 

^cxv * -^* Easter the king held a feast, to which he had 

Murder of invitcd many of the townspeople as well as bonders. 

eJI^/ After Easter he ordered his ships to be launched into 
the water, oars and tackle to be put on board, decks 
to be laid in the ships, and tilts* and rigging to be 
set up, and to be laid ready for sea at the piers. Im- 
mediately after Easter he sent men into Vaerdal. 
There was a man called Thorald, who was the king's 
bailiff, and who managed the king's farm there at 
at Haug ; and to him the king sent a message to come 
to him as quickly as possible. Thorald did not de- 
cline the journey, but went immediately to the to>vn 
with the messenger. The king called him in, and in 
a private conversation asked him what truth there 
was in what had been told him of the principles and 

♦ The ships appear to have been decked fore and aft only; and in 
the middle, where the rowers sat, to have had tilts or tents set up at 
night to sleep under. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 

living of the people of the interior of Drontheim, and 
if it really was so that they practised sacrifices to 
heathen gods. " I will," says the king, " that thou 
declare to me the things as they are, and as thou 
knowest to be true ; for it is thy duty to tell me the 
truth, being my man." 

Thorald replies, " Sire, I will first tell you that I 
have brought here to the town my two children, my 
wife, and all my loose property that I could take with 
me, and if thou desirest to know the truth it shall 
be told according to thy command ; but if I declare it, 
thou must take care of me and mine." 

The king replies, " Say only what is true on what 
I ask thee, and I wiU take care that no evil befal 
thee." 

Then said Thorald, " If I must say the truth, king, 
as it is, I must declare that in the interior of the 
Drontheim land almost all the people are heathen in 
faith, although some of them are baptized. It is 
their custom to offer sacrifice in autumn for a good 
winter, a second at mid-winter, and a third in sum- 
mer. In this the people of Eynar, Sparboe, Vaerdal, 
and Skogn partake. There are twelve men who pre- 
side over these sacrifice-feasts; and in spring it is 
Olver who has to get the feast in order, and he is 
now busy transporting to Maere every thing needful 
for it." Now when the king had got to the truth 
with a certaiuty, he orderd the signal to be sounded 
for his men to assemble, and for the men-at-arms to 
go on board ship. He appointed men to steer the 
ships, and leaders for the people, and ordered how the 
people should be divided among the vessels. All was 
got ready in haste, and with five ships and 300 men 
he steered up the fiord. The wind was favourable, 
the ships sailed briskly before it, and nobody could 
have thought that the king would be so soon there. 

L 4 



151 



SAGA VII. 



152 CHRONICLE OF THE 

sAGAjii. The king came in the night time to Maere*, and im- 
mediately surrounded the house with a ring of armed 
men. Olver was taken, and the king ordered him to 
be put to death, and many other men besides. Then 
the king took all the provision for the feast, and had 
it brought to his ships ; and also all the goods, both 
furniture, clothes, and valuables, which the people 
had brought there, and divided the booty among his 
men. The king also let all the bonders he thought 
had the greatest part in the business be plundered 
by his men-at-arms. Some were taken prisoners 
and laid in irons, some ran away, and many were 
robbed of their goods. Thereafter the bonders were 
summoned to a Thing; but because he had taken 
many powerful men prisoners, and held them in his 
power, their friends and relations resolved to promise 
obedience to the king, so that there was no insurrec- 
tion against the king on this occasion. He thus brought 
the whole people back to the right faith, gave them 
teachers, and built and consecrated churches. The 
king let Olver lie without fine paid for his bloodshed, 
and all that he possessed was adjudged to the king ; 
and of the men he judged the most guilty, some he 
ordered to be executed, some he maimed, some he 
drove out of the country, and took fines from others. 
The king then returned to Nidaros. 
Chapter Thcrc was a man called Arne Thomodsson, who 

Of the was married to Thora, Thorstein Galge's daughter. 

Arne?^ Their children were Kalf, Finn, Thorberg, Aamund, 
Kolbiom, Arnbiom, and Arne. Their daughter, who 
was called Rognhild, was married to Harek of Thiotto. 
Arne was a lenderman, powerful, and of ability, and 
a great friend of King Olaf. At that time his sons 
Kalf and Finn were with the king, and in great 

♦ Msre is now a large mound in Inderoen, near the bead of the* 
Drontheim fiord^ in the district called Sparbo. 



KINOS OF NORWAY. 153 

favour. The wife whom Olver of Egge* had left saga vil. 
was young and handsome, of great family, and rich, 
so that he who got her might be considered to have 
made an excellent marriage ; and her land was in the 
gift of the king. She and Olver had two sons, who 
were still in infancy. Kalf Ameson begged of the 
king that he would give him to wife the widow of 
Olver ; and out of friendship the king agreed to it, 
and with her he got all the property Olver had pos- 
sessed. The king at the same time made him his 
lenderman, and gave him an office in the interior of 
the Drontheim country. Kalf became a great chief, 
and was a man of very great understanding. 

When Kinff Olaf had been seven years in Norway Chaftkr 

CXVII 

the earls Thorfinn and Bruse came to him, as before King 
related, in the summer, from Orkney, and he became ?^*^** ^ 

' ^ ' •' ' journey to 

master of their land. The same summer Olaf went to the Up- 
North and South More, and in autumn to Raumsdal. *" ^' 
He left his ships there, and came to the Uplands, and 
to Lesso. Here he laid hold of all the best men, and 
forced them, both at Lesso and Dovre, either to re- 
ceive Christianity or suflfer death, if they were not so 
lucky as to escape. After they received Christianity, 
the king took their sons in his hands as hostages for 
their fidelity. The king staid several nights at a 
farm in Lesso called Bover, where he placed priests. 
Then he proceeded over Orkedal and Liardal, and 
came down from the Uplands at a place called Stafa- 
breka. There a river runs along the valley, called the 
Otta, and a beautiful hamlet, by name Loar, lies on 
both sides of the river, and the king could see far down 
over the whole neighbourhood. " A pity it is," said 
the king, " so beautiful a hamlet should be burnt." 
And he proceeded down the valley with his people, 

♦ E^e^ the estate of Olver, whose murder is related in the pre- 
ceding chapter, ia the farm of Egge, near Stenkicr, at the head of the 
Drontheim fiord. 



154 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VII. 



Chapter 
CXVIII. 

The story 

of Dale 

Gudbrand. 



and was all night on a farm called NaBS. The king 
took his lodging in a loft, where he slept himself; 
and it stands to the present day*, without any thing 
in it having been altered since. The king was five 
days there, and summoned by message-token the 
people to a Thing, both for the districts of Vaage, 
Loar, and Hedal; and gave out the message along 
with the token, that they must either receive Chris- 
tianity and give their sons as hostages, or see their 
habitations burnt. They came before the king, and 
submitted to his pleasure ; but some fled south down 
the valley. 

. There was a man called Dale Gudbrand, who was 
like a king in the valley (Gudbrandsdal), but was 
only hersirf in title. Sigvat the scald compared him 
for wealth and landed property to Erling Skialgsson. 
Sigvat sang thus concerning Erling : — 

" I know but one who can compare 
With Erlmg for broad lands and gear— 
Gudbrand is he, whose wide domains 
Are most like where some small king reigns. 
These two great bonders, I would say. 
Equal each other every way. 
He lies who says that he can find 
One by the other left behind." 

Gudbrand had a son, who is here spoken of. Now 
when Gudbrand received the tidings that King Olaf 
was come to Loar, and obliged people to accept 
Christianity, he sent out a message-token, and sum- 
moned all the men in the valley to meet him at a 
farm called Hundthorp.J All came, so that the 



* The house on this farm of Nses in which King Olaf lodged is said 
to have been standing within these few years, although only of wood. 

f Hersir (quere, if Sir may not be derived from this word ?) appears 
to have been merely a title of respect, like Sir with us, applied to per- 
sons of property or consideration ; not like Lenderman, Earl, or Baron, 
a title conferred by the kings, with function belonging to it. 

i Hundthorp is a farm on the side of the river Laugen in Gud- 
brandsal, with several mounds about it. It is a station-house for tra- 
vellers. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 155 

number could not be told ; for there is a lake in the sagavil 
neighbourhood called Laugen, so that people could 
come to the place both by land and by water. There 
Gudbrand held a Thing with them, and said, " A man 
is come to Loar who is called Olaf, and will force 
upon us another faith than what we had before, and 
will break in pieces all our gods. He says that he 
has a much greater and more powerful god ; and it 
is wonderful that the earth does not burst asunder 
under him, or that our god lets him go about un- 
punished when he dares to talk such things. I know 
this for certain that if we carry Thor, who has always 
stood by us, out of our temple that is standing upon 
this farm, Olaf 's god will melt away, and he and his 
men be made nothing so soon as Thor looks upon 
them." Then the bonders all shouted as one person 
that Olaf should never get away with life if he came 
to them ; and they thought he would never dare to 
come farther south through the valley. They chose 
out 700 men to go northwards to Breeden, to watch 
his movements. The leader of this band was Gud- 
brand's son, eighteen years of age, and with him were 
many other men of importance. When they came 
to a farm called Hof they heard of the king ; and 
they remained three nights there. People streamed 
to them from all parts, from Lesso, Loar, and Vaage, 
who did not wish to receive Christianity. The king 
and Bishop Sigurd fixed teachers in Loar and in 
Vaage. From thence they went round Urgovost, and 
came down into the valley at Usvold, where they staid 
all night, and heard the news that a great force of 
men were assembled against them. The bonders who 
were in Breeden heard also of the king's arrival, and 
prepared for battle. As soon as the king arose in the 
morning he put on his armour, and went southwards 
over Suwold, and did not halt until he came to 
Breeden, where he saw a great army ready for battle. 



156 CHRONICLE OP THE 

SAGA viL Then the king drew up his troops, rode himself at the 
head of them, and began a speech to the bonders, in 
which he invited them to adopt Christianity. They 
replied, " We shall give thee something else to do 
to-day than to be mocking us ;" and raised a general 
shout, striking also upon their shields with their 
weapons. Then the king's men ran forward and threw 
their spears ; but the bonders turned round instantly 
and fled, so that only few men remaiaed behind. Gud- 
brand's son was taken prisoner ; but the king gave him 
his life, and took him with him. The king was four 
days here. Then the king said to Gudbrand's son, " Go 
home now to thy father, and tell him I expect to be 
with him soon." 

He went accordingly, and told his father the news, 
that they had fallen in with the king, and fought with 
him ; but that their whole army, in the very beginning, 
took flight. " I was taken prisoner," said he, " but 
the king gave me my life and liberty, and told me to 
say to thee that he will soon be here. And now we 
have not 200 men of the force we raised against him ; 
therefore I advise thee, father, not to give battle to 
that man." 

Says Gudbrand, "It is easy to see that all courage 
has left thee, and it was an unlucky hour ye went out 
to the field. Thy proceeding will live long in the 
remembrance of people, and 1 see that thy fastening 
thy faith on the folly that man is going about with 
has brought upon thee and thy men so great a dis- 
grace." 

But the night after, Gudbrand dreamt that there 
came to him a man surrounded by light, who brought 
great terror with him, and said to him, " Thy son 
made no glorious expedition against King Olaf ; but 
still less honour wilt thou gather for thyself by hold- 
ing a battle with him. Thou with all thy people wilt 
fall ; wolves will drag thee, and all thine, away ; ravens 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 157 

will tear thee in stripes." At this dreadful vision he saga vn. 
was much afraid, and tells it to Thord Istromaga*, 
who was chief over the valley. He replies, " The very 
same vision came to me." In the morning they ordered 
the signal to sound for a Thing, and said that it 
appeared to them advisable to hold a Thing with the 
man who had come from the north with this new 
teaching, to know if there was any truth in it. Gud- 
brand then said to his son, "Go thou, and twelve 
men with thee, to the king who gave thee thy life." 
He went straightway, and found the king at a farm 
called Lidstad, and laid before him their errand ; 
namely, that the bonders would hold a Thing with 
him, and make a truce between them and him. The 
king was content ; and they bound themselves by faith 
and law mutually to hold the peace so long as the 
Thing lasted. After this was settled the men returned 
to Gudbrand and Thord, and told them there was 
made a firm agreement for a truce. The king, after 
the battle with the son of Gudbrand, had proceeded to 
Lidstad, and remained there for five days : afterwards 
he went out to meet the bonders, and hold a Thing 
with them. On that day there fell a heavy rain. 
When the Thing was seated, the king stood up and 
said that the people in Lesso, Loar, and Vaage had 
received Christianity, broken down their houses of 
sacrifice, and believed now in the true God who had 
made heaven and earth and knows all things. 

Thereupon the king sat down, and Gudbrand replies, 
" We know nothing of him whom thou speakest about. 
Dost thou call him God, whom neither thou nor any 
one else can see ? But we have a god who can be seen 
every day, although he is not out to-day, because the 
weather is wet, and he will appear to thee terrible and 
very grand; and I expect that fear will mix with 

* Big- belly. , 



158 CHRONICLE OF THU 

SAGA VII. your very blood when he comes into the Thing. But 
since thou sayest thy God is so great, let him make it 
so that to-morrow we have a cloudy day but without 
rain, and then let us meet again." 

The king accordingly returned home to his lodging, 
taking Gudbrand's son as a hostage ; but he gave them 
a man as hostage in exchange. In the evening the 
king asked Gudbrand's son what like their god was. 
He replied, that he bore the likeness of Thor; had a 
hammer in his hand; was of great size, but hollow 
within ; and had a high stand, upon which he stood 
when he was out. " Neither gold nor silver are want- 
ing about him, and every day he receives four cakes 
of bread, besides meat." They then went to bed, but 
the king watched all night in prayer. When day 
dawned the king went to mass, then to table, and 
from thence to the Thing. The weather was such as 
Gudbrand desired. Now the bishop stood up in his 
choir-robes, with bishop's coif upon his head, and 
bishop's staff in his hands. He spoke to the bonders 
of the true faith, told the many wonderful acts of God, 
and concluded his speech well. 

Thord Istromaga replies, " Many things we are told 

of by this horned man with the staff in his hand 

crooked at the top like a ram's horn ; but since ye say, 

comrades, that your god is so powerful, and can do 

so many wonders, teU him to make it clear sunshine 

to-morrow forenoon, and then we shall meet here again, 

and do one of two things, — either agree with you about 

this business, or fight you." And they separated for 

the day. 

Chapter There was a man with Kine; Olaf called Kolbein 

Dale Gud- Stcrki (the Strong), who came from a family in the 

brand is Fiorde district. Usually he was so equipt that he 

bantized. . iii-i -i 

was girt with a sword, and besides carried a great 

* Alluding to the bishop's coif. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 159 

stake, otherwise called a club, in his hands. The king saga vh. 
told Kolbein to stand nearest to him in the morning ; 
and gave orders to his people to go down in the night 
to where the ships of the bonders lay and bore holes 
in them, and to set loose their horses on the farms 
where they were : all which was done. Now the 
king was in prayer all the night, beseeching God of 
his goodness and mercy to release him from evil. 
When mass was ended, and morning was grey, the 
king went to the Thing. When he came there some 
bonders had already arrived, and they saw a great 
crowd coming along, and bearing among them a huge 
man's image glancing with gold and silver. When 
the bonders who were at the Thing saw it they started 
up, and bowed themselves down before the ugly idol. 
Thereupon it was set down upon the Thing-field ; and 
on the one side of it sat the bonders, and on the other 
the king and his people. 

Then Dale Gudbrand stood up, and said, " Where 
now, king, is thy god ? I think he will now carry his 
head lower ; and neither thou, nor the man with the 
horn whom ye call bishop, and sits there beside thee, 
are so bold to-day as on the former days ; for now our 
god, who rules over all, is come, and looks on you 
with an angry eye : and now I see well enough that 
ye are terrified, and scarcely dare to raise your eyes. 
Throw away now all your opposition, and believe in 
the god who has all your fate in his hands." 

The king now whispers to Kolbein Sterki, without 
the bonders perceiving it, " If it come so in the course 
of my speech that the bonders look another way 
than towards their idol, strike him as hard as thou 
canst with thy club." 

The king then stood up and spoke. " Much hast 
thou talked to us this morning, and greatly hast thou 
wondered that thou canst not see our God ; but we 
expect that he will soon come to us. Thou wouldst 



160 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. frighten us with thy god, who is both blind and deaf, 
and can neither save himself nor others, and cannot 
even move about without being carried; but now I 
expect it will be but a short time before he meets his 
fate : for turn your eyes towards the east, — behold 
our God advancing in great light." 

The sun was rising, and all turned to look. At 
that moment Kolbein gave their god a stroke, so that 
the idol burst asunder ; and there ran out of it mice 
as big almost as cats, and reptiles, and adders. The 
bonders were so terrified that some fled to their ships ; 
but when they sprang out upon them they filled with 
water, and could not get away. Others ran to their 
horses, but could not find them. The king then 
ordered the bonders to be called together, saying he 
wanted to speak with them ; on which the bonders 
came back, and the Thing was again seated. 

The king rose up and said, " I do not understand 
what your noise and running mean. Ye see yourselves 
what your god can do, — the idol ye adorned with gold 
and sUver, and brought meat and provisions to. Ye 
see now that the protecting powers who used it were 
the mice and adders, reptiles and paddocks ; and they 
do ill who trust to such, and will not abandon this 
folly. Take now your gold and ornaments that are 
lying strewed about on the grass, and give them to 
your wives and daughters ; but never hang them here- 
after upon stock or stone. Here are now two conditions 
between us to choose upon, — either accept Christianity, 
or fight this very day ; and the victory be to them 
to whom the God we worship gives it." 

Then Dale Gudbrand stood up and said, "We 
have sustained great damage upon our god ; but since 
he will not help us, we will believe in the God thou 
believest in." 

Then all received Christianity. The bishop baptized 
Gudbrand and his son. King Olaf and Bishop Sigurd 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 161 

left behind them teachers, and they who met as saga vh. 
enemies parted as friends ; and Gudbrand built a 
church in the valley. 

King Olaf proceeded from thence to Hedemark, and Chaptkr 
baptized there ; but as he had formerly carried away HedemMk 
their kings as prisoners, he did not venture himself, ^*p*'^^- 
after such a deed, to go far into the country with 
few people at that time, but a small part of Hedemark 
was baptized ; but the king did not desist from his 
expedition before he had introduced Christianity 
over all Hedemark, consecrated churches, and placed 
teachers. He then went to Hadeland and Thoten, 
improving the customs of the people, and persisting 
until all the country was baptized. He then went to 
Ringarike, where also all people went over to Chris- 
tianity. The people of Raumarige then heard that 
Olaf intended coming to them, and they gathered a 
great force. They said among themselves that the 
journey Olaf had made among them the last time was 
not to be forgotten, and he should never proceed so 
again. The king, notwithstanding, prepared for the 
journey. Now when the king went up into Rauma- 
rige with his forces, the multitude of bonders came 
against him at a river called Nittia ; and the bonders 
had a strong army, and began the battle as soon as 
they met ; but they soon fell short, and took to flight. 
They were forced by this battle into a better dis- 
position, and immediately received Christianity; and 
the king scoured the whole district, and did not leave 
it until all the people were made Christians. H*e then 
went east to Soloer, and baptized that neighbourhood. 
The scald Ottar Black came to him there, and begged 
to be received among his men. Olaf the Swedish 
king had died the winter before, and Onund, the son 
of Olaf, was now the sole king over all Sweden. 
King Olaf returned, when the winter was far advanced, 
to Raumarige. There he assembled a numerous 

VOL. II. M 



162 CHEONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. Thing, at a place where the Eidsvold Things have 
since been held. He made a law, that the Upland 
people should resort to this Thing, and that Eidsvold 
laws should be good through all the districts of the 
Uplands, and wide around in other quarters, ivhich 
also has taken place. As spring was advancing, he 
rigged his ships, and went by sea to Tunsberg. He 
remained there during the spring, and the time the 
town was most frequented, and goods from other 
countries were brought to the town for sale. There 
had been a good year in Viken, and tolerable as far 
north as Stad ; but it was a very dear time all to the 
north. 
Chapter In Spring King Olaf sent a message west to Agder, 
Reconcuia- and uorth all the way to Hordaland and Rogaland, 
khi" ^Ind^ prohibiting the exporting or selling of com, malt, or 
EinarTam- mcal ', adding, that he, as usual, would come there 
barskeiver. ^^j^ j^.^ people in gucst-quartcrs. The message went 
round all the districts; but the king remained in 
Viken aU summer, and went east to the boundary of 
the country. Einar Tambarskelver had been with the 
Swedish king Olaf since the death of his relation Earl 
Swend, and had, as the king's man, received great 
fiefs from him. Now that the king was dead, Einar 
had a great desire to come into friendly agreement 
with Olaf; and the same spring messages passed be- 
tween them about it. While the king was lying in 
the Gotha river, Einar Tambarskelver came there with 
some men ; and after treating about an agreement, it 
was settled that Einar should go north to Drontheim, 
and there take possession of aU the lands and property 
which Bergliot had received in dower. Thereupon 
Einar took his way north; but the king remained 
behind in Viken, and remained long in Sarpsburg in 
autumn, and during the first part of winter. 
cxxu Erling Skialgsson held his dominion so, that all 
Reconcile, uorth from Sogn Lake, and east to the Naze, the 

tion of the 



KINGS OF NOKWAY. 163 

bonders stood under him ; and although he had much saga vn. 
smaller royal fiefs than formerly, still so great a dread king and 
of him prevailed that nobody dared to do any thing skiS^son. 
against his will, so that the king thought his power 
too great. There was a man called Aslak Fitiaskalle, 
who was powerfiil, and of high birth. Erling's father 
Skialg, and Aslak's father Askel, were brother's sons. 
Aslak was a great friend of King Olaf, and the king 
settled him in South Hordaland, where he gave him a 
great fief, and great income, and ordered him in no 
respect to give way to Erling. But this came to 
nothing when the king was not in the neighbourhood ; 
for then Erling would reign as he used to do, and was 
not more humble because Aslak would thrust himself 
forward as his equal. At last the strife went so far 
that Aslak could not keep his place, but hastened to 
King Olaf, and told him the circumstances between 
him and Erling. The king told Aslak to remain with 
him until he should meet Erling ; and sent a message 
to Erling that he should come to him in spring at 
Tunsberg. When they all arrived there they held a 
meeting, at which the king said to him, " It is told me 
concerning thy government, Erling, that no man from 
Sogn Lake to the Naze can enjoy his freedom for 
thee ; although there are many men there who con- 
sider themselves born to udal rights, and have their 
privileges like others bom as they are. Now, here 
is your relation Aslak, who appears to have sufiered 
great inconvenience from your conduct ; and I do not 
know whether he himself is in fault, or whether he 
suffers because I have placed him to defend what is 
mine; and although I name him, there are many 
others who have brought the same complaint before 
us, both among those who are placed in office in our 
districts, and among the bailiffs who have our farms 
to manage, and are obliged to entertain me and my 
people." 

M 2 



164 CHRONICLE OF THE 

sAGAvii. Eriing replies to this, " I will answer at once. I 
deny altogether that I have ever injured Aslak, or 
any one else, for being in your service ; but this I vdll 
not deny, that it is now, as it has long been, that each 
of us relations will willingly be greater than the 
other: and, moreover, I fredy acknowledge that I 
am ready to bow my neck to thee, King Olaf ; but it 
is more difficult for me to stoop before one who is of 
slave descent in all his generation, although he is 
now your baiHff, or before others who are but equal 
to him in descent, although you bestow honours on 
, them." 

Now the friends of both interfered, and entreated 
that they would be reconciled ; saying, that the king 
never could have such powerful aid as from Eriing, 
" if he was your friend entirely." On the other hand, 
they represent to Eriing that he should give up 
to the king ; for if he was in friendship with the king, 
it would be easy to do with all the others what he 
pleased. The meeting accordingly ended so that 
Eriing should retain the fiefs he formerly had, and 
every complaint the king had against Eriing should 
be dropped ; but Skialg, Erling's son, should come 
to the king, and remain in his power. Then Aslak 
returned to his dominions, and the two were in some 
sort reconciled. Eriing returned home also to his 
domains, and followed his own way of ruling them, 
cxxiii There was a man called Sigurd Thorisson, a 
Here be- ' brother of Thorer Hund of Biarko Island. Sigurd 
ftorVof was married to Sigrid Skialg's daughter, a sister of 
^sb^ro Erhng. Their son, called Asbiorn, became as he grew 
up a very able man. Sigurd dwelt at Aupad, in 
Thrandarness, and was a very rich and respected 
man. He had not gone into the king's service ; and 
Thorer in so far had attained higher dignity than his 
brother, that he was the king's lenderman. But at 
home, on his farm, Sigurd stood in no respect behind 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 165 

his brother in splendour and magnificence. As long saga vn. 
as heathenism prevailed, Sigurd usually had three 
sacrifices every year : one on winter-night's eve, 
one on mid-winter's eve, and the third in summer. 
Although he had adopted Christianity, he continued 
the same custom with his feasts : he had, namely, a 
great friendly entertainment at harvest time ; a Yule 
feast in winter, to which he invited many ; the third 
feast he had about Easter, to which also he invited 
many guests. He continued this fashion as long as 
he lived. Sigurd died on a bed of sickness when 
Asbiomwas eighteen years old. He was the only 
heir of his father, and he followed his father's custom 
of holding three festivals every year. Soon after 
Asbiom came to his heritage the course of seasons 
began to grow worse, and the com harvests of the 
people to fail; but Asbiom held his usual feasts, 
and helped himself by having old com, and an old 
provision laid up of all that was useful. But when 
one year had passed and another came, and the crops 
were no better than the year before, Sigrid wished 
that some if not all of the feasts should be given up. 
That Asbiom would not consent to, but went round 
in harvest among his friends, buying corn where he 
could get it, and some he received in presents. He 
thus kept his feasts this winter also ; but the spring 
after people got but little seed into the ground, for 
they had to buy the seed-corn. Then Sigrid spoke of 
diminishing the number of their house-servants. That 
Asbiom would not consent to, but held by the old 
fashion of the house in all things. In summer it 
appeared again that there would be a bad year for 
com ; and to this came the report from the south that 
King Olaf prohibited all export of com, malt, or 
meal, from the southern to the northern parts of the 
country. Then Asbiom perceived that it would be 
difficult to procure what was necessary for a house- 

M 3 



166 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



sAGAvii. keeping, and resolved to put into the water a vessel 
for carrying goods which he had, and which was 
large enough to go to sea with. The ship was good, 
all that belonged to her was of the best, and in the 
sails were stripes of cloth of various colours. Asbiorn 
made himself ready for a voyage, and put to sea with 
twenty men. They sailed from the north in summer ; 
and nothing is told of their voyage until one day, 
about the time the days begin to shorten, they came 
to Kormtsund, and landed at Augvaldness. Up in 
the island Kormt there is a large farm not far from 
the sea, and a large house upon it called Augvaldness, 
which was a king's house, with an excellent farm, 
which Thorer Sel, who was the king's bailiff, had 
under his management. Thorer was a man of low 
birth, but had swung himself up in the world as an 
active man ; and he was polite in speech, showy in 
clothes, and fond of distinction, and not apt to give 
way to others, in which he was supported by the 
favour of the king. He was besides quick in speech, 
straightforward, and free in conversation. Asbiorn, 
with his company, brought up there for the night ; 
and in the morning, when it was light, Thorer went 
down to the vessel with some men, and inquired who 
commanded the splendid ship. Asbiorn named his own 
and his father's name. Thorer asks where the voyage 
was intended for, and what was the errand. 

Asbiorn replies, that he wanted to buy com and 
malt ; saying, as was true, that it was a very dear time 
north in the country. " But we are told that here the 
seasons are good ; and wilt thou, farmer, sell us corn? 
I see that here are great com stacks, and it would be 
very convenient if we had not to travel farther." 

Thorer replies, " I will give thee the information 
that thou needst not go farther to buy corn, or travel 
about here in Rogaland ; for I can tell thee that thou 
must turn about, and not travel farther, for the king 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 167 

forbids carrying com out of this to the north of the saga vn. 
country. Sail back again, Halogalander, for that will 
be thy safest course." 

Asbiorn replies, " If it be so, bonder, as thou sayest, 
that we can get no com here to buy, I will, notwith- 
standing, go forward upon my errand, and visit my 
family in Sole, and see my relation Erling's habitation." 

Thorer : " How near is thy relationship to Erling?" 

Asbiorn : " My mother is his sister." 

Thorer : " It may be that I have spoken heedlessly, 
if so be that thou art sister's son of Erling." 

Thereupon Asbiorn and his crew struck their tents, 
and turned the ship to sea. Thorer called after them, 
" A good voyage, and come here again on your way 
back." Asbiorn promised to do so, sailed away, and 
came in the evening to Jederen. Asbiorn went on 
shore with ten men ; the other ten men watched the 
ship. When Asbiorn came to the house he was very 
well received, and Erling was veiy glad to see him, 
placed him beside himself, and asked him all the news 
in the north of the country. Asbiorn concealed no- 
thing of his business from him; and Erling said it 
happened unfortunately that the king had just forbid 
the sale of corn. " And I know no man here," says 
he, " who has courage to break the king's order, and 
I find it difficult to keep well with the king, so many 
are trying to break our friendship." 

Asbiorn replies, " It is late before we learn the 
truth. In my childhood I was taught that my mo- 
ther was free-born throughout her whole descent, and 
that Erling of Sole was her boldest relation ; and now 
I hear thee say that thou hast not the freedom, for 
the king's slaves here in Jederen, to do with thy own 
com what thou pleasest." 

Erling looked at him, smiled through his teeth, 
and said, " Ye Halogalanders know less of the king's 
power than we do here ; but a bold man thou may st 

M 4 



168 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. be at home in thy conversation. Let us now drink, 
my friend, and we shall see to-morrow what can be 
done in thy business." 

They did so, and were very merry all the evening. 
The following day Erling and Asbiom talked over 
the matter again; and Erling said, " I have found out 
a way for you to purchase corn, Asbiom. It is the 
same thing to you whoever is the seller." He an- 
swered that he did not care of whom he bought the 
corn, if he got a good right to his purchase. Erling 
said, " It appears to me probable that my slaves have 
quite as much com as you require to buy ; and they 
are not subject to law, or land regulation, like other 
men." Asbiom agreed to the proposal. The slaves 
were now spoken to about the purchase, and they 
brought forward corn and malt, which they sold to 
Asbiom, so that he loaded his vessel with what he 
wanted. When he was ready for sea Erling followed 
him on the road, made him presents of friendship, and 
they took a kind farewell of each other. Asbiom got 
a good breeze, landed in the evening at Kormtsund, 
near to Augvaldsness, and remained there for the 
night. Thorer Sel had heard of Asbiom's voyage, 
and also that his vessel was deeply laden. Thorer 
summoned people to him in the night, so that before 
daylight he had sixty men ; and with these he went 
against Asbiom as soon as it was light, and went out 
to the ship just as Asbiorn and his men were putting 
on their clothes. Asbiom saluted Thorer, and Thorer 
asked what kind of goods Asbiorn had in the vessel. 

He replied, " Corn and malt." 

Thorer said, " Then Erling is doing as he usually 
does, and despising the king's orders, and is unwearied 
in opposing him in all things, insomuch that it is 
wonderful the king suffers it." 

Thorer went on scolding in this way, and when he 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 169 

was silent Asbiorn said that Eriing's slaves had owned saga vii. 
the corn. 

Thorer replied hastily, that he did not regard Er- 
ling's tricks. "And now, Asbiorn, there is no help for 
it : ye must either go on shore, or we will throw you 
overboard ; for we will not be troubled with you while 
we are discharging the cargo." 

Asbiorn saw that he had not men enough to resist 
Thorer ; therefore he and his people landed, and Thorer 
took the whole cargo out of the vessel. When the 
vessel was discharged Thorer went through the ship, 
and observed, " Ye Halogalanders have good sails : 
take the old sail of our vessel and give it them ; it is 
good enough for those who are sailing in a light 
vessel." Thus the sails were exchanged. When this 
was done Asbiorn and his comrades sailed away north 
along the coast, and did not stop until they reached 
home early in winter. This expedition was talked of 
far and wide, and Asbiorn had no trouble that winter 
in making feasts at home. Thorer Hund invited 
Asbiorn and his mother, and also aU whom they 
pleased to take along with them, to a Yule feast ; but 
Asbiorn sat at home, and would not travel, and it 
was to be seen that Thorer thought Asbiorn despised 
his invitation, since he would not come. Thorer 
scoffed much at Asbiom's voyage. " Now," said he, 
" it is evident that Asbiorn makes a great difference 
in his respect towards his relations; for in summer he 
took the greatest trouble to visit his relation Erhng 
in Jederen, and now will not take the trouble to come 
to me in the next house. I don't know if he thinks 
there may be a Thorer Sel in his way upon every 
holm." Such words, and the like sarcasms, Asbiorn 
heard of; and very ill satisfied he was with his voyage, 
which had thus made him a laughing-stock to the 
country, and he remained at home all winter, and 
went to no feasts. 



170 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



ClTAPTEn 

CXXIV. 
Murder of 
Asbiorn. 



sAGAviL Asbiorn had a long-ship standing in the noust* 

(dry dock), and it was a snekke (cutter) of twenty 

benches; and after Candlemas he had the vessel put 

in the water, brought out all his furniture, and rigged 

her out. He then summoned to him his firiends and 

people, so that he had nearly ninety men all well 

armed. When he was ready for sea, and got a wind, 

he sailed south along the coast ; but as the wind did 

not suit, they advanced but slowly. When they came 

farther south they steered outside the rocks, without 

the usual ships' channel, keeping to sea as much as 

it was possible to do so. Nothing is related of his 

voyage before the fifth day of Easter, when, about 

evening, they came on the outside of Kormt Island. 

This island is so shaped that it is very long, but not 

broad at its widest part ; and without it lies the usual 

ships' channel. It is thickly inhabited; but where 

the island is exposed to the ocean great tracts of it 

are uncultivated. Asbiorn and his men landed at a 

place in the island that was uninhabited. After they 

had set up their ship- tents Asbiorn said, " Now ye 

must remain here and wait for me. I will go on land 

in the isle, and spy what news there may be which 

we know nothing of." Asbiorn had on mean clothes, 

a broad-brimmed hat, a fork in his hand, but had girt 

on his sword under his clothes. He went up to the 

land, and in through the island ; and when he came 

upon a hillock, from which he could see the house on 

Augvaldness, and on as far as Kormt Sound, he saw 

people in all quarters flocking together by land and 

by sea, and all going up to the house of Augvaldness. 

This seemed to him extraordinary ; and therefore he 

went up quietly to a house close by, in which servants 



* Nost. The word Noust is in common use still in the Orkney Isles 
for a dock for a small boat excavated in the shore-bank. Antiquarians 
will have the Homeric word Naosterion, of the same meaning, to be of 
a common origin with Nost. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 171 

were cooking meat. From their conversation he dis- saga vil 
covered immediately that the king Olaf had come there 
to a feast, and that he had just sat down to table. 
Asbiom turned then to the feasting-room, and when 
he came into the ante-room one was going in and 
another coming out ; but nobody took notice of him. 
The hall-door was open, and he saw that Thorer Sel 
stood before the table of the high seat. It was get- 
ting late in the evening, and Asbiom heard people 
ask Thorer what had taken place between him and 
Asbiom \ and Thorer had a long story about it, in 
which he evidently departed from the truth. Among 
other things he heard a man say, " How did Asbiorn 
behave when you discharged his vessel?" Thorer 
replied, " When we were taking out the cargo he bore 
it tolerably, but not well ; and when we took the sail 
from him he wept." When Asbiorn heard this he 
suddenly drew his sword, rushed into the hall, and 
cut at Thorer. The stroke took him in the neck, so 
that the head fell upon the table before the king, and 
the body at his feet, and the table-cloth was soiled 
with blood from top to bottom. The king ordered 
him to be seized and taken out. This was done. 
They laid hands on Asbiorn, and took him from the 
haU. The table-furniture and table-cloths were re- 
moved, and also Thorer's corpse, and all the blood 
wiped up. The king was enraged to the highest ; 
but remained quiet in speech, as he always was when 
in anger. 

Skialg Erlingsson stood up, went before the king, Chapter 
and said, " Now may it go, as it often does, that every of sk^aig, 
case will admit of alleviation. I will pay thee the g^^jj^"^^^ 
mulct for the bloodshed on account of this man, so skiaigsson. 
that he may retain life and limbs. All the rest de- 
termine and do, king, according to thy pleasure." 

The king replies, "Is it not a matter of death, 
Skialg, that a man break the Easter peace ; and in the 



172 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. next place that he kills a man in the king's lodging ; 
and in the third that he makes my feet his execution- 
block, although that may appear a small matter to 
thee and thy father?" 

Skialg replies, "It is lU done, king, in as far as it 
displeases thee ; but the deed is, otherwise, done ex- 
cellently well. But if the deed appear to thee so 
important, and be so contrary to thy will, yet may I 
expect something for my services from thee; and 
certainly there are many who will say that thou didst 
well." 

The king replies, " Although thou hast made me 
greatly indebted to thee, Skialg, for thy services, yet 
I will not for thy sake break the law, or cast away 
my own dignity." 

Then Skialg turned round, and went out of the 
hall. Twelve men who had come with Skialg all 
followed him, and many others went out with him. 
Skialg said to Thorarin Nefiolfsson, " If thou wilt 
have me for a friend, take care that this man be not 
killed before Sunday." Thereupon Skialg and his 
men set off, took a rowing boat which he had, and 
rowed south as fast as they could, and came to Jederen 
with the first glimpse of morning. They went up 
instantly to the house, and to the loft in which Erling 
slept. Skialg rushed so hard against the door that it 
burst asunder at the nails. Erling and the others 
who were within started up. He was in one spring 
upon his legs, grasped his shield and sword, and 
rushed to the door, demanding who was there. 
Skialg names himself, and begs him to open the door. 
Erling replies, " It was most likely to be thee who 
hast behaved so foolishly ; or is there any one who is 
pursuing thee?" Thereupon the door was unlocked. 
Then said Skialg, " Although it appears to thee that 
I am so hasty, I suppose our relation Asbiom will not 
think my proceedings too quick ; for he sits in chains 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 173 

there in the north at Augvaldsness, and it would be saga vn. 
but manly to hasten back and stand by him." The 
father and son then had a conversation together, and 
Skialg related the whole circumstances of Thorer Sel's 
murder. 

Kinff Olaf took his seat affain when every thing in Chapmr 

•^ c CXXVI 

the hall was put in order, and was enraged beyond of xho- * 
measure. He asked how it was with the murderer. '*"" ,. 

. . Nefiolfsson. 

He was answered, that he was sittmg out upon the 
door-step under guard. 

The king says, " Why is he not put to death ? " 

Thorarin Nefiolfsson repUes, " Sire, would you not 
call it murder to kill a man in the night-time? " 

The king answers, " Put him in irons then, and kill 
him in the morning." 

Then Asbiom was laid in chains, and locked up in 
a house for the night. The day after the king heard 
the morning mass, and then went to the Thing, where 
he sat tiU high mass. As he was going to mass he 
said to Thorarin, " Is not the sun high enough now 
in the heavens that your friend Asbiorn may be 
hanged?" 

Thorarin bowed before the king, and said, " Sire, 
it was said by Bishop Sigurd on Friday last, that the 
King who has all things in his power had to endure 
great temptation of spirit; and blessed is he who 
rather imitates him, than those who condemned the 
man to death, or those who caused his slaughter. It 
is not long tiU to-morrow, and that is a working day." 

The king looked at him, and said, " Thou must take 
care then that he is not put to death to-day ; but take 
him under thy charge, and know for certain that thy 
own life shall answer for it if he escape in any way." 

Then the king went away. Thorarin went also to 
where Asbiom lay in irons, took off his chains, and 
brought him to a small room, where he had meat and 
drink set before him, and told him what the king 



174 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. had determined in case Asbiorn ran away. Asbiom 
replies, that Thorarin need not be afraid of him. 
Thorarin sat a long while with him during the daj'-, 
and slept there all night. On Saturday the king 
arose and went to the early mass, and from thence he 
went to the Thing, where a great many bonders were 
assembled, who had many complaints to be deter- 
mined. The king sat there long in the day, and it 
was late before the people went to high mass. There- 
after the king went to table. When he had got meat 
he sat drinking for a while, so that the tables were not 
removed. Thorarin went out to the priest who had 
the church under his care, and gave 1dm two marks 
of silver to ring in the Sabbath as soon as the king's 
table was taken away. When the king had drunk as 
much as he wished the tables were removed. Then 
said the king, that it was now the time for the slaves 
to go to the murderer and put him to death. In the 
same moment the bell rang in the Sabbath. 

Then Thorarin went before the king, and said, 
" The Sabbath-peace this man must have, although 
he has done evil." 

The king said, " Do thou take care, Thorarin, that 
he do not escape." 

The king then went to the church, and attended the 
vesper service, and Thorarin sat the whole day with 
Asbiom. On Sunday the bishop visited Asbiorn, 
confessed him, and gave him orders to hear high mass. 
Thorarin then went to the king, and asked him to 
appoint men to guard the murderer. " I will now," he 
said, " be free of this charge." The king thanked him 
for his care, and ordered men to watch over Asbiom 
who was again laid in chains. When the people went 
to high mass Asbiorn was led to the church, and he 
stood outside of the church with his guard ; but the 
king and all the people stood in the church at mass. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 175 

Now we must again take up our story where we left saga vn. 
it, — that Erling and his son Skialg held a council on c^I^ek 
this affair, and according to the resolution of Erhng, E^i^V^* 
and of Skialg and his other sons, it was determined reconciUa- 
to assemble a force and send out message-tokens. A KinJ'oiaf. 
great multitude of people accordingly came together. 
They got ready with aU speed, rigged their ships, and 
when they reckoned upon their force they found they 
had nearly 1500 men. With this war-force they set 
off, and came on Sunday to Augvaldsnees on Kormt 
Island. They went straight up to the house with all 
the men, and arrived just as the Scripture lesson was 
read. They went directly to the church, took Asbiom, 
and broke off his chains. At the tumult and clash of 
arms all who were outside of the church ran into it ; 
but they who were in the church looked all towards 
them, except the king, who stood still, without looking 
around him. Erling and his sons drew up their men 
on each side of the path which led from the church 
to the hall, and Erling with his sons stood next to 
the hall. When high mass was finished the king went 
immediately out of the church, and first went through 
the open space between the ranks drawn up, and then 
his retinue, man by man ; and as he came to the door 
Erhng placed himself before the door, bowed to the 
king, and saluted him. The king saluted him in re- 
turn, and prayed God to help him. Erling took up 
the word first, and said, " My relation Asbiorn, it is 
reported to me, has been guilty of misdemeanor, king ; 
and it is a great one, if he has done any thing that in- 
curs your displeasure. Now I am come to entreat 
for him peace, and such penalties as you yourself may 
determine ; but that thereby he redeem life and limb, 
and his remaining here in his native land." 

The king replies, " It appears to me, Erling, that 
thou thinkest the case of Asbiom is now in thy own 
power, and I do not therefore know why thou speakest 



176 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. now as if thou wouldst offer terms for him. I think 
thou hast drawn together these forces because thou 
art determined to settle what is between us." 

Erhng replies, " Thou only, king, shalt determine, 
and determine so that we shall be reconciled." 

The king : " Thinkest thou, Erling, to make me 
afraid? and art thou come here in such force with that 
expectation? No, that shall not be; and if that be 
thy thought, I must in no way turn and fly." 

Erling repUes, " Thou hast no occasion to remind 
me how often I have come to meet thee with fewer 
men than thou hadst. But now I shall not conceal 
what lies in my mind, namely, that it is my will that 
we now enter into a reconcihation ; for otherwise I ex- 
pect we shall never meet again." Erling was then as 
red as blood in the face. 

Now Bishop Sigurd came forward to the king and 
said, " Sire, I entreat you on God Almighty's account 
to be reconciled with Erling according to his offer, — 
that the man shall retain life and limb, but that thou 
shalt determine according to thy pleasure all the 
other conditions." 

The king replies, " You will determine." 

Then said the bishop, " Erling, do thou give secu- 
rity for Asbiom, such as the king thinks sufficient, 
and then leave the conditions to the mercy of the 
king, and leave all in his power." 

Erling gave a surety to the king on his part, which 
he accepted. 

Thereupon Asbiom received his life and safety, 
and delivered himself into the king's power, and kissed 
his hand. 

Erling then withdrew with his forces, without ex- 
changing salutation with the king ; and the king went 
into the hall, followed by Asbiorn. The king there- 
after made known the terms of reconciliation to be 
these : — " In the first place, Asbiorn, thou must submit 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 177 

to the h(W of the land, which commands that the man saga vil 
who kills a servant of the king must undertake his 
service, if the king will. Now I will that thou shalt 
undertake the office of bailijff which Thorer Sel had, 
and manage my estate here in Augvaldsness." Asbiom 
replies, that it should be according to the king's 
will ; " but I must first go home to my farm, and put 
things in order there/' The king was satisfied with 
this, and proceeded to another guest-quarter. Asbiom 
made himself ready with his comrades, who aU kept 
themselves concealed in a quiet creek during the time 
Asbiom was away from them. They had had their 
spies out to learn how it went with him, and would 
not depart without having some certain news of him. 

Asbiom then set out on his voyage, and about Chapter 
spring got home to his farm. After this exploit he or Thorer* 
was always called Asbiom Selsbane.* Asbiom had ^^J^^ «"^ 

1 1 1 n ^ t 1 • 1- Asbiom 

not been long at home before he and his relation SeUbane. 
Thorer met and conversed together, and Thorer asked 
Asbiom particularly all about his journey, and about 
all the circumstances which had happened in the 
course of it. Asbiom told every thing as it had taken 
place. 

Then said Thorer, " Thou thinkest that thou hast 
well rubbed out the disgrace of having been plundered 
in last harvest." 

" I think so," replies Asbiorn; " and what is thy 
opinion, cousin?" 

'' That 1 will soon teU thee," said Thorer. " Thy 
first expedition to the south of the country was in- 
deed very disgraceful, and that disgrace has been 
redeemed; but this expedition is both a disgrace to 
thee and to thy family, if it end in thy becoming the 
king's slave, and being put on a footing with that 
worst of men, Thorer Sel. Show that thou art manly 

• The bane or destroyer of Thorer Sel. 
VOL. II. N 



178 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA viL enough to sit here on thy own property, and we thy 
relations shall so support thee that thou wilt never 
more come into such trouble." 

Asbiom found this advice much to his mind ; and 
before they parted it was firmly determined that 
Asbiom should remain on his farm, and not go back 
to the king or enter into his service. And he did so, 
and sat quietly at home on his farm. 
Chapter After King Olaf and Erling Skialgsson had this 
King Olaf meeting at Angvaldsnses, new differences arose be- 
Vors Md *w^^^ them, and increased so much that they ended 
Vaiders in pcrfcct cumity. In spring the king proceeded to 
guest-quarters in Hordaland, and went up also to Vors, 
because he heard there was but little of the true faith 
among the people there. He held a Thing with the 
bonders at a place called Vang, and a number of 
bonders came to it fuUy armed. The king ordered 
them to adopt Christianity ; but they challenged him 
to battle, and it proceeded so far that the men were 
drawn up. on both sides. But when it came to the 
point such a fear entered into the blood of the 
bonders that none would advance or command, and 
they chose the part which was most to their advan- 
tage; namely, to obey the king and receive Chris- 
tianity : and before the king left them they were all 
baptized. One day it happened that the king was 
riding on his way a singing of psalms, and when he 
came right opposite some hills he halted and said, 
" Man after man shall relate these my words, that I 
think it not advisable for any king of Norway to 
travel hereafter between these hills." And it is a 
saying among the people that the most kings since 
that time have avoided it. The king proceeded to 
Osterfiord, and came to his ships, with which he went 
north to Sogn, and had his living in guest-quarters 
there in summer : when autumn approached he turned 
in towards the Fiord district, and went from thence to 



KINGS OF NOBWAY. 179 

Valders, where the people were still heathen. The saga va 
king hastened up to the lake in Valders, came unex- 
pectedly on the bonders, seized their vessels, and went 
on board of them with all his men. He then sent 
out message-tokens, and appointed a Thing so near 
the lake that he could use the vessels if he found he 
required them. The bonders resorted to the Thing in a 
great and well-armed host ; and when he commanded 
thena to accept Christianity the bonders shouted 
against him, told him to be silent, and made a great 
uproar and clashing of weapons. But when the king 
saw that they would not listen to what he would 
teach them, and also that they had too great a force 
to contend with, he turned his discourse, and asked if 
there were people at the Thing who had disputes with 
each other which they wished him to settle. It was 
soon found by the conversation of the bonders that 
they had many quarrels among themselves, although 
they had all joined in speaking against Christianity. 
When the bonders began to set forth their own cases, 
each endeavoured to get some upon his side to sup- 
port him ; and this lasted the whole day long until 
evening, when the Thing was concluded. When the 
bonders had heard that the king had travelled to 
Valders, and was come into their neighbourhood, they 
had sent out message-tokens summoning the free and 
the unfree to meet in arms, and with this force they 
had advanced against the king ; so that the neighbour- 
hood all around was left without people. When the 
Thing was concluded the bonders still remained as- 
sembled ; and when the king observed this he went on 
board his ships, rowed in the night right across the 
water, landed in the country there, and began to 
plunder and bum. The day after the king's men 
rowed from one point of land to another, and over all 
the king ordered the habitations to be set on fire. 
Now when the bonders who were assembled saw what 

N 2 



180 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAQA VI L the king was doing, namely, plundering and burning, 
and saw the smoke and flame of their houses, they 
dispersed, and each hastened to his own home to see 
if he could find those he had left. As soon as there 
came a dispersion among the crowd, the one slipped 
away after the other, until the whole multitude was 
dissolved. Then the king rowed across the lake again, 
burning also on that side of the country. Now came 
the bonders to him begging for mercy, and offering to 
submit to him. He gave every man who came to 
him peace if he desired it, and restored to him his 
goods ; and nobody refused to adopt Christianity. 
The king then had the people christened, and took 
hostages from the bonders. He ordered churches, 
to be built and consecrated, and placed teachers in 
them. He remained a long time here in autumn, and 
had his ships drawn across the heck of land between 
the two lakes.* The king did not go far from the 
sides of the lakes into the country, for he did not 
much trust the bonders. When the king thought 
that frost might be expected, he went farther up the 
country, and came to Thoten. Arnor, the earl's scald, 
tells how King Olaf burnt in the Uplands, in the 
poem he composed concerning the king's brother 
King Harald: — 

'* Against the Upland people wroth, 
Olaf, to most so mild^ went forth : 

The houses burnings 

All people mourning; 

Who could not fly 

Hung on gallows high. 
It was, I think, in Olaf 's race 
The Upland people to oppress." 

Afterwards King Olaf went north through the val- 
leys to Dovrefield, and did not halt until he reached 
the Drontheim district and arrived at Nidaros, where 

* The Eid, or neck of land between two lakes, is here the neck between 
the Myosen and the Sledre lakes. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 181 

he had ordered winter provision to be collected, and saga vn. 
remained all winter. This was the tenth year of his 
reign. 

The summer before Einar Tambarskelver left the ^?^™* 
country, and went westward to England. There he of Einar' 
met his relative Earl Hakon, and staid some time with ^Xe*'" 
him. He then visited King Canute, from whom he 
received great presents. Einar then went south aU 
the way to Rome, and came back the following sum- 
mer, and returned to his house and land. King Olaf 
and Einar did not meet this time. 

There was a girl whose name was Alf hild, and who Chapter 

. CXXXT. 

was usually called the king's slave-woman, although The birth* 
she was of good descent. She was a remarkably hand- ^ ^^^^ 
some girl, and lived in King Olaf 's court. It was 
reported this spring that Alf hild was with child, and 
the king's confidential friends knew that he was father 
of the child. It happened one night that Alf hild was 
taken ill, and only few people were at hand; namely, 
some women, priests, Sigvat the scald, and a few 
others. Alfhild was so iU that she was nearly dead ; 
and when she was delivered of a man-child, it was 
some time before they could discover whether the 
child was in life. But when the infant drew breath, 
although very weak, the priest told Sigvat to hasten 
to the king, and teU him of the event. 

He replies, " I dare not on any account waken the 
king; for he has forbid that any man should break his 
sleep until he awakens of himself." 

The priest replies, " It is of necessity that this child 
be immediately baptized, for it appears to me there 
is but little life in it." 

Sigvat said, " I would rather venture to take upon 
me to let thee baptize the child, than to awaken the 
king; and I will take it upon myself if any thing be 
amiss, and will give the child a name." 

They did so ; and the child was baptized, and got 

N 3 



182 CHBONICLE OF THE 

8A0A viL the name of Magnus. The next morning, when the 
king awoke and had dressed himself, the circumstance 
was told him. He ordered Sigvat to be called, and 
said, " How earnest thou to be so bold as to have my 
child baptized before I knew any thing about it? " 

Sigvat replies, " Because I would rather give two 
men to Grod than one to the devil." 

The king — " What meanest thou? " 

Sigvat — " The child was near death, and must have 
been the devil's if it had died as a heathen, and now 
it is God's. And I knew besides that if thou shouldst 
be so angry on this account that it affected my life, 
I would be God's also." 

The king asked, "But why didst thou call him 
Magnus, which is not a name of our race ?" 

Sigvat — "I called him after Kmg Carl Magnus, 
who, I knew, had been the best man in the world."* 

* The pagan Northmen^ according to the learned Finn Magnusen, 
the first antiquary of our times, in his "Runamo,** page 103., held, in 
common with the Druids and Brahmins, the doctrine of transmigration, 
or rather reincarnation of souls. They helieved that hy giving a diild 
the name of a distinguished man, especially of his own forefathers, the 
soul of the name-father was transfused into the chUd. Saint Olaf was 
named hy his foster-father Rane after his ancestor King Olaf Geir- 
stad-Alf, who was popular in his time ; and the people helieved that this 
Olaf Geirstad-Alf was horn again in Saint Olaf. Saint Olaf himself was 
pleased with his son being named after Charlemagne. This pagan belief 
accounts for the giving a name at baptism being to this day reckoned in 
the Northern Christian churches an essential part in baptism, although in 
reality it is no part of that sacrament at all, but merely a pagan usage, 
attached, and very conveniently and properly, to the adoption by baptism 
into the Christian faith. This pagan belief also, on which Finn Magnu- 
sen is too deeply versed in the Northern mythology to be under any 
mistake, removes the difficulty in the ordinary view given us of the 
Odin religion, and of its Valhalla. We find that heroes, or men slain 
in battle, or distinguished by warlike deeds during a long life, were 
alone admitted into their Valhalla; and what, according to their belief, 
became of ordinary souls, of the souls of the many and of the females, 
does not appear. They had no part in Valhalla. But this pagan belief 
in a reincarnation, if Finn Magnusen be correct, removes this difficulty 
in understanding the Odin paganism, and makes the system intelligible 
as something embracing all, and not merely the few heroes who die in 
battle. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 



183 



Then said the king, '* Thou art a very lucky man, saga vn. 
Sigvat ; but it is not wonderful that luck should ac- 
company understanding. It is only wonderful how it 
sometimps happens that luck attends ignorant men, 
and that foohsh counsel turns out lucky." The king 
was overjoyed at the circumstance. The boy grew up, 
and gave good promise as he advanced in age. 

The same spring, the king gave into the hands of ^^^™ 
Aasmund Grankelsson the half of the sheriffdom of the The mur- * 
district of Halogalaad, which Harek of Thiotto had "^^^^l^ 
formerly held, partly in fief, partly for defraying the Sekbaae. 
king's entertainment in guest-quarters. Aasmund had 
a ship manned with nearly thirty well-armed men. 
When Aasmund came north he met Harek, and told 
him what the king had determined with regard to the 
district, and produced to him the tokens of the king's 
full powers. Harek said, " The king had the right to 
give the sheriffdom to whom he pleased; but the 
former sovereigns had not been in use to diminish our 
rights who are entitled by birth to hold powers from 
the king, and to give them into the hands of peasants 
who never before held such offices." But although 
it was evident that it was against Harek's inclination, 
he allowed Aasmund to take the sheriffdom according 
to the king's order. Then Aasmund proceeded home 
to his father, staid there a short time, and then went 
north to Halogaland to his sheriffdom ; and he came 
north to Largo Island, where there dwelt two brothers 
called Gunstein and Carl, both very rich and respect- 
able men. Gunstein, the eldest of the brothers, was 
a good husbandman. Carl was a handsome man in 
appearance, and splendid in his dress ; and both were, 
in many respects, expert in all feats. Aasmund was 
well received by them, remained with them a while, 
and collected such revenues of his sheriffdom as he 
could get. Carl spoke with Aasmund of his wish to 
go south with him and take service in the court of 

N 4 



18^ CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. King Olaf, to which Aasmund encouraged him much, 
promising his influence with the king for obtaining 
for Carl such a situation as he desired ; and Carl ac- 
cordingly accompanied Aasmund. Aasmund heard 
that Asbiom, who had killed Thorer Sel, had gone 
to the market-meeting of Vaage with a large ship of 
burden manned with nearly twenty men, and that he 
was now expected from the south. Aasmund and his 
retinue proceeded on their way southwards along the 
coast with a contrary wind, but there was little of it. 
They saw some of the fleet for Vaage sailing towards 
them; and they privately inquired of them about 
Asbiorn, and were told he was upon the way coming 
from the south. Aasmund and Carl were bedfellows, 
and excellent friends. One day, as Aasmund and his 
people were rowing through a sound, a ship of burden 
came sailing towards them. The ship was easily 
known, having high bulwarks, was painted with white 
and red colours, and coloured cloth was woven in the 
sail. Carl said to Aasmund, " Thou hast often said 
thou wast curious to see Asbiorn who killed Thorer 
Sel ; and if I know one ship from another, that is his 
which is coming sailing along." 

Aasmund replies, " Be so good, comrade, and tell 
me which is he when thou seest him." 

When the ships came alongside of each other, 
" That is Asbiorn," said Carl; "the man sitting at the 
helm in a blue cloak." 

Aasmund replies, " I shall make his blue cloak red ;" 
threw a spear at Asbiorn, and hit him in the middle 
of the body, so that it flew through and through him, 
and stuck fast in the upper part of the stern-post, and 
Asbiorn feU down dead from the helm. Then each ves- 
sel sailed on its course, and Asbiorn's body was carried 
north to ThrandamaBs. Then Sigrid sent a message 
to Biarko Isle to Thorer Hund, who came to her while 
they were, in the usual way, dressing the corpse of 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 



186 



Asbiom. When he returned Sigrid gave presents saga vil 
to all her Mends, and followed Thorer to his ship ; 
but before they parted she said, " It has so fallen out, 
Thorer, that my son has suflfered by thy friendly 
counsel, but he did not retain life to reward thee for 
it; but although I have not his ability, yet wiU I 
sho^NV my good wiU. Here is a gift I give thee, which 
I expect thou wilt use. Here is the spear which went 
through Asbiorn my son, and there is stiU blood upon 
it, to remind thee that it fits the wound thou hast 
seen on the corpse of thy brother's son Asbiom. It 
would be a manly deed, if thou shouldst throw this 
spear from thy hand so that it stood in Olaf 's breast ; 
and this I can teU thee, that thou wilt be named 
coward in every man's mouth, if thou dost not avenge 
Asbiom." Thereupon she turned about, and went her 
way. 

Thorer was so enraged at her words that he could 
not speak. He neither thought of casting the spear 
from him, nor took notice of the gangway ; so that he 
would have fallen into the sea, if his men had not laid 
hold of him as he was going on board his ship. It was 
a feathered spear; not large, but the handle was gold- 
mounted. Now Thorer rowed away with his people, 
and went home to Biarko Isle. Aasmund and his 
companions also proceeded on their way until they 
came south to Drontheim, where they waited on 
King Olaf ; and Aasmund related to the king all 
that had happened on the voyage. Carl became one 
of the king's court-men, and the friendship continued 
between him and Aasmund. They did not keep 
secret the words that had passed between Aasmund 
and Carl before Asbiom was killed; for they even told 
them to the king. But then it happened, according 
to the proverb, that every one has a friend in the 
midst of his enemies. There were some present who 



186 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VII. 



Chaftkr 
CXXXHL 
Of King 
Olaf. 



Chapter 
CXXXIV. 

King 
Olafs 
message to 
Iceland, 
and the 
counsels 
of the Ice- 
landers. 



took notice of the words, and they reached Thorer 
Hand's ears. 

When spring was advanced King Olaf rigged out 
his ships, and sailed southwards in summer along the 
land. He held Things with the bonders on the way, 
settled the law business of the people, put to rights 
the faith of the country, and collected the king's taxes 
wherever he came. In autumn he proceeded south to 
the frontier of the country ; and King Olaf had now 
made the people Christians in all the great districts, 
and every where, by laws, had introduced order into 
the country. He had also, as before related, brought 
the Orkney Islands under his power, and by messages 
had made many Mends in Iceland, Greenland, and the 
Faroe Islands. King Olaf had sent timber for build- 
ing a church to Iceland, of which a church was built 
upon the Thing-field where the General Thing is 
held, and had sent a bell for it, which is still there. 
This was after the Iceland people had altered their 
laws, and introduced Christianity, according to the 
word King Olaf had sent them. After that time, 
many considerable persons came from Iceland, and 
entered into King Olaf's service; as Thorkel Eyolfs- 
son, and Thorleif BoUason, Thord Kolbeinsson, Thord 
Bakarson, Thorgeir Haavardson, Thormod Kalbrunar 
the scald. King Olaf had sent many friendly presents 
to chief people in Iceland; and they in return sent 
him such things as they had which they thought 
most acceptable. Under this show of friendship which 
the king gave Iceland were concealed many things 
which afterwards appeared. 

King Olaf this summer sent Thorarin NefioHsson to 
Iceland on his errands; and Thorarin went out of 
Drontheim fiord along with the king, and followed 
him south to More. From thence Thorarin went out 
to sea, and got such a favourable breeze that after 
four days' sail he landed at the Westmann Isles, in 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 187 

Iceland, He proceeded immediately to the Al-thing, saga vn. 
and came just as the people were upon the Law hillock, 
to which he repaired. When the cases of the people 
before the Thing had been determined according to 
law, Thorarin Nefiolfsson took up the word as fol- 
lows: — "We parted four days ago from King Olaf 
Haraldsson, who sends God Almighty's and his own 
salutation to all the chiefs and principal men of the 
land ; as also to all the people in general, men and 
women, young and old, rich and poor. He also lets 
you know that he will be your sovereign if ye wiU 
become his subjects, so that he and you will be 
friends, assisting each other in all that is good." 

The people replied in a friendly way, that they 
would gladly be the king's friends, if he would be a 
friend of the people of their country. 

Then Thorarin again took up the word: — "This 
follows, in addition to the king's message, that he will 
in friendship desire of the people of the north district 
that they give him the island, or out-rock, which lies 
at the mouth of Ofiord, and is called Grimso Island, 
for which he will give you from his country whatever 
good the people of the district may desire. He sends 
this message particularly to Gudmund of Modrovold 
to support this matter, because he understands that 
Gudmund has most influence in that quarter." 

Gudmund replies, " My inclination is greatly for 
^ng Olaf's friendship, and that I consider much 
more useful than the out-rock he desires. But the 
king has not heard rightly if he think I have more 
power in this matter than any other, for the island is 
a common. We, however, who have the most use 
of the isle, will hold a meeting among ourselves 
about it." 

Then the people went to their tent-houses ; and the 
Northland people had a meeting among themselves, 
and talked over the business, and every one spoke 



188 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. according to his judgment. Gudmund supported the 
matter, and many others formed their opinions by his. 
Then some asked why his brother Einar did not 
speak on the subject. " We think he has the clearest 
insight into most things." 

Einar answers, " I have said so little about the 
matter because nobody has asked me about it ; but if 
I may give my opinion, our countrymen might just 
as well make themselves at once liable to land-scatt to 
King Olaf, and submit to all his exactions as he has 
them among his people in Norway ; and this heavy 
burden we wiU lay not only upon ourselves, but on 
our sons, and their sons, and all our race, and on all 
the community dwelling and living in this land, which 
never after will be free from this slavery. Now although 
this king is a good man, as I well believe him to be, 
yet it must be hereafter, when kings succeed each 
other, that some will be good, and some bad. There- 
fore if the people of this country will preserve the 
freedom they have enjoyed since the land was first 
inhabited, it is not advisable to give the king the 
smallest spot to fasten himself upon the country by, 
and not to give him any kind of scatt or service that 
can have the appearance of a duty. On the other 
hand, I think it very proper that the people send 
the king such friendly presents of hawks or horses, 
tents or sails, or such things which are suitable gifts ; 
and these are well applied if they are repaid with 
friendship. But as to Grimso Isle, I have to say, that 
although nothing is drawn from it that can serve for 
food, yet it could support a great war-force cruising 
from thence in long-ships ; and then, I doubt, there 
would be distress enough at every poor peasant's 
door." 

When Einar had thus explained the proper con- 
nection of the matter, the whole commimity were of 
one mind that such a thing should not be permitted ; 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 189 

and Thorarin saw sufficiently well what the result of saga vil 

his errand was to be. 

The day following, Thorarin went again to the Law- Chapter 

. • • cxxxv 

hill, and brought forward his errand in the following xheanswCT 

words : — " King Olaf sends his message to his friends f^^^er^**^ 
here in the country, among whom he reckons Gudmund 
Eyolfsson, Snorro Gode, Thorkel Eyolfsson, Skopte 
the lagman, and Thorstein HaUsson, and desires them 
by me to come to him on a friendly visit ; and adds, 
that ye must not excuse yourselves, if you regard 
his friendship as worth any thing." In their answer 
they thanked the king for his message; and added, that 
they would afterwards give a reply to it by Thorarin 
when they had more closely considered the matter 
with their friends. The chiefs now weighed the matter 
among themselves, and each gave his own opinion 
about the journey. Snorro and Skopte dissuaded from 
such a dangerous proceeding with the people of Nor- 
way ; namely, that all the men who had the most to 
say in the country should at once leave Iceland. 
They added, that from this message, and from what 
Einar had said, they had the suspicion that the king 
intended to use force and strong measures against the 
Icelanders if he ruled in the coimtry. Gudmund and 
Thorkel Eyolfsson insisted much that they should 
follow King Olaf 's invitation, and called it a journey 
of honour. But when they had considered the matter 
on all sides, it was at last resolved that they should 
not travel themselves, but that each of them should 
send in his place a man whom they thought best 
suited for it. After this determination the Thing was 
closed, and there was no journey that sunamer. Thorarin 
made two voyages that summer, and about harvest was 
back again at King Olaf 's, and reported the result of 
his mission, and that some of the chiefs, or their sons, 
would come from Iceland according to his message. 



190 CHRONICLE OF THE 

sAOAvii. The same summer there came from the Faroe 
Chapter Islands to Nopway, OH the king's invitation, Gille the 
ofthf ^^* lagman, Leif Ossursson, Thoralf of Dimon, and many 
people of other bonders' sons. Thord of Gata made himself 
jsiandT.*^ ready for the voyage ; but just as he was setting out 
he got a stroke of palsy, and could not come, so he 
remained behind. Now when the people from the 
Faroe Isles arrived at King Olaf 's, he called them to 
him to a conference, and explained the purpose of the 
journey he had made them take ; namely, that he would 
have scatt from the Faroe Islands, and also that the 
people there should be subject^to the laws which the 
king should give them. In that meeting it appeared 
from the king's words that he would make the Faroe 
people who had come answerable, and would bind 
them by oath to conclude this union. He also oflFered 
to the men whom he thought the ablest to take them 
into his service, and bestow honour and friendship on 
them. These Faroe men understood the king's words 
so, that they must dread the turn the matter might 
take if they did not submit to all that the king de- 
sired. Although they held several meetings about 
the business before it ended, the king's desire at last 
prevailed. Leif Gille and Thoralf went into the king's 
service, and became his court-men ; and they, with all 
their travelling companions, swore the oath to King 
Olaf, that the law and land privilege which he set 
them should be observed in the Faroe Islands, and 
also the scatt be levied that he laid upon them. 
Thereafter the Faroe people prepared for their return 
home, and at their departure the king gave those 
who had entered into his service presents in testi- 
mony of his friendship, and they went their way. 
Now the king ordered a ship to be rigged, manned it, 
and sent men to the Faroe Islands to receive the scatt 
from the inhabitants which they should pay him. It 
was late before they were ready ; but they set off at 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 191 

last : and of their journey all that is to be told is, that saga vn. 
they did not come back, and no scatt either, the 
foUo^mng summer ; for nobody had come to the Faroe 
Isles, and no man had demanded scatt there. 

King Olaf proceeded about harvest time to Viken, ^^^ 
and sent a message before him to the Uplands that ofthemar- 
they should prepare guest-quarters for him, as he Ke^tLd 
mtended to be there in winter. Afterwards he made °^^**Jj^ ,^ 
ready for his journey, and went to the Uplands, and sisters. 
remained the winter there ; going about in guest- 
quarters, and puttmg things to rights where he saw 
it needful, advancing also the cause of Christianity 
wheresoever it was requisite. It happened while King 
Olaf was in Hedemark that Ketil Kalf of Ringenaes 
courted GunhUd, a daughter of Sigurd Syr and of 
King Olaf's mother Asta. GunhUd was a sister of 
King Olaf, and therefore it belonged to the king to 
give consent and determination to the business. He 
took it in a friendly way ; for he knew Ketil, that he 
was of high birth, wealthy, and of good understanding, 
and a great chief ; and also he had long been a great 
friend of King Olaf, as before related. All these cir- 
cumstances induced the king to approve of the match, 
and so it was that Ketil got Gunhild. King Olaf was 
present at the wedding. From thence the king went 
north to Gudbrandsdal, where he was entertained in 
guest-quarters. There dwelt a man, by name Thord 
Guttormsson, on a farm called Steig*; and he was the 
most powerful man in the north end of the valley. 
When Thord and the king met, Thord made proposals 
for Isrid, the daughter of Gudbrand, and the sister 
of King Olaf 's mother, as it belonged to the king to 
give consent. After the matter was considered, it was 
determined that the marriage should proceed, and 

* Steig is a farm two miles south-east of Froen's church in Gud- 
bransdal. 



192 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. Thord got Isrid. Afterwards Thord was the king's 
faithful friend, and also many of Thord's relations 
and friends, who followed his footsteps. From thence 
King Olaf returned south through Thoten and Hade- 
land, from thence to Ringerige, and so to Viken. In 
spring he went to Tunsberg, and staid there while 
there was the market-meeting, and a great resort of 
people. He then had his vessels rigged out, and had 
many people about him. 
c^rT^^ The same summer came Stein, a son of the lagman 
Of the Ice-' Skopte, from Iceland, in compliance with King Olaf 's 
landers. mcssagc ; and with him Thorod, a son of Snorro the 
godar, and GeUir, a son of Thorkel Eyolfsson, and 
Egil, a son of Sidu HaU, brother of Thorstein Hall. 
Gudmund Eyolfsson had died the winter before. 
These Iceland men repaired to King Olaf as soon as 
they had opportunity ; and when they met the king 
they were well received, and all were in his house. 
The same summer King Olaf heard that the ship was 
missing which he had sent the summer before to the 
Faroe Islands after the scatt, and nobody knew what 
had become of it. The king fitted out another ship, 
manned it, and sent it to the Faroe Islands for the 
scatt. They got under weigh, and proceeded to sea ; 
but as little was ever heard of this vessel as of the 
former one, and many conjectures were made about 
what had become of them. 
Chapter Duriuff this time Cauutc the Great, called by some 

CXXXIX 'J 

Here be- ' Cauutc the Old, was king of England and Denmark, 
gins the Canute the Great was a son of Swend Haraldsson 

story ot 

Canute the Forkcd-bcard, whose forefathers, for a long course of 
^'^*^ generations, had ruled over Denmark. Harald Gorms- 
son, Canute's grandfather, had conquered Norway 
after the fall of Harald Greyskin, Gunhild's son, had 
taken scatt from it, and had placed Earl Hakon the 
Great to defend the country. The Danish king, 
Swend Haraldsson, ruled also over Norway, and 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 193 

placed his son-in-law Earl Eric, the son of Earl Hakon, saga vit 
to defend the country. The brothers Eric and Swend, 
Earl Hakon's sons, ruled the land until Earl Eric 
went west to England, on the invitation of his bro- 
ther-in-law Canute the Great, when he left behind his 
son Earl Hakon, sister's son of Canute the Great, to 
govern Norway. But when Olaf the Thick came 
first to Norway, as before related, he took prisoner 
Earl Hakon, the son of Eric, and deposed him from 
the kingdom. Then Hakon proceeded to his mother's 
brother, Canute the Great, and had been with him 
constantly until the time to which here in our saga 
we have now come. Canute the Great had conquered 
England by blows and weapons, and had a long strug- 
gle before the people of the land were subdued. But 
when he had set himself perfectly firm in the govern- 
ment of the country, he remembered that he also had 
right to a kingdom which he had not brought under 
his authority; and that was Norway. He thought 
he had hereditary right to all Norway ; and his sister's 
son Hakon, who had held a part of it, appeared to 
him to have lost it with disgrace. The reason why 
Canute and Hakon had remained quiet with respect 
to their claims upon Norway was, that when King 
Olaf Haraldsson landed in Norway the people and 
commonalty ran together in crowds, and would hear 
of nothing but that Olaf should be king over all the 
country, although some afterwards, who thought that 
the people upon account of his power had no self- 
government left to them, went out of the country. 
Many powerful men, or rich bonders' sons, had there- 
fore gone to Canute the Great, and pretended various 
errands ; and every one who came to Canute and de- 
sired his friendship was loaded with presents. With 
Canute, too, could be seen greater splendour and pomp 
than elsewhere, both with regard to the multitude of 
people who were daily in attendance, and also to the 
VOL. ii. o 



194 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. other magnificent things about the houses he owned 
and dwelt in himself. Canute the Great drew scatt 
and revenue from the people who were the richest of 
all in northern lands; and in the same proportion 
as he had greater revenues than other kings, he also 
made greater presents than other kings. In his whole 
kingdom peace was so well established, that no man 
dared break it. The people of the country kept the 
peace towards each other, and had their old country 
law: and for this he was greatly celebrated in all 
countries. And many of those who came from Nor- 
way represented their hardships to Earl Hakon, and 
some even to King Canute himself; and that the 
Norway people were ready to turn back to the go- 
vernment of King Canute, or Earl Hakon, and receive 
deliverance from them. This conversation suited well 
the earl's inclination, and he carried it to the king, 
and begged of him to try if King Olaf would not sur- 
render the kingdom, or at least come to an agreement 
to divide it ; and many supported the earl's views. . 
Chapter Cauutc the Great sent men from the West, from 
Cani^e^s England, to Norway, and equipped them magnificently 
message to for the joumcy. They were bearers of the Enghsh 
"'^ ** king Canute's letter and seal. They came about 
spring to the king of Norway, Olaf Haraldsson, in 
Tunsberg. Now when it was told the king that em- 
bassadors had arrived from Canute the Great he was 
ill at ease, and said that Canute had not sent messen- 
gers hither with any messages that could be of advan- 
tage to him or his people ; and it was some days before 
the embassadors could come before the king. But 
when they got permission to speak to him they ap- 
peared before the king, and made known King Canute's 
letter, and their errand which accompanied it; namely, 
" that King Canute considers all Norway as his pro- 
perty, and insists that his forefathers before him have 
possessed that kingdom ; but as King Canute offers 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 195 

peace to all countries, he will also offer peace to all saga vh. 
here, if it can be so settled, and will not invade Nor- 
way with his army if it can be avoided. Now if King 
Olaf Haraldsson wishes to remain king of Norway, he 
will come to King Canute, and receive his kingdom as 
a fief from him, become his vassal, and pay the scatt 
which the earls before him formerly paid." There- 
upon they presented their letters, which contained 
precisely the same conditions. 

Then King Olaf replies, " I have heard say, by old 
stories, that the Danish king Gorm was considered 
but a small king of a few people, for he ruled over 
Denmark alone; but the kings who succeeded him 
thought that was too little. It has since come so far 
that King Canute rules over Denmark and England, 
and has conquered for himself a great part of Scotland. 
Now he claims also my paternal heritage, and will 
then show some moderation in his covetousness. Does 
he wish to rule over aU the countries of the North ? 
Will he eat up all the kail in England? He shall do 
so, and reduce that country to a desert, before I lay 
my head in his hands, or show him any other kind of 
vassalage. Now ye shall tell him these my words, — 
I will defend Norway with battle-axe and sword as 
long as life is given me, and will pay scatt to no man 
for my kingdom." 

After this answer King Canute's embassadors made 
themselves ready for their journey home, and were by 
no means rejoiced at the success of their errand. 

Sigvat the scald had been with King Canute, who 
had given him a gold ring that weighed half a mark. 
The scald Birse Thorfeson was also there, and to him 
King Canute gave two gold rings, each weighing two 
marks, and besides a sword inlaid with gold. Sigvat ' 
made this song about it : — 

o 2 



196 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA viL " When we came o'er the wave, you cub*, when we came o'er the wave, 
""~" To me one ring, to thee two rings, the mighty Canute gave : 
One mark to me. 
Four marks to thee, — 
A sword too, fine and brave. 
Now God knows well. 
And scalds can tell, 
What justice here would crave." 

Sigvat the scald was very intimate with King 
Canute's messengers, and asked them many questions. 
They answered all his inquiries about their conver- 
sation with King Olaf, and the result of their message. 
They said the king listened unwillingly to their pro- 
posals. " And we do not know," say they, " to what 
he is trusting when he refuses becoming King Canute's 
vassal, and going to him, which would be the best 
thing he could do ; for King Canute is so mild that 
however much a chief may have done against him, he 
is pardoned if he only show himself obedient. It is 
but lately that two kings came to him from the North, 
from Fife in Scotland, and he gave up his wrath 
against them, and allowed them to retain all the lands 
they had possessed before, and gave them besides very 
valuable gifts." Then Sigvat sang: — 

" From the North land, the midst of Fife, 
Two kings came hegging peace and life ; 
Craving from Canute life and peace, — 
May Olaf's good luck never cease! 
May he, our gallant Norse king^ never 
Be brought, like these, his headf to offer 
As ransom to a Uving man 
For the broad lands his sword has won." 

King Canute's embassadors proceeded on their way 
back, and had a favourable breeze across the sea. 
They came to King Canute, and told him the result 

* Berse, the name of the more fortunate scald, signifies also a young 
hear ; and Sigvat puns upon it. 

f The feudal ceremony of the vassal laying his head on the knee, or 
hetween the hands of the feudal lord, appears to have been held dis- 
graceful by the Northmen. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 197 

of their errand, and King Olaf 's last words. King sagavh. 
Canute replies, " King Olaf guesses wrong, if he thinks 
I shall eat up all the kail in England ; for I will let 
him see that there is something else than kail under 
my ribs, and cold kail it shall be for him." The 
same summer Aslak and Skialg, the sons of Erling of 
Jederen, came from Norway to King Canute, and 
were well received ; for Aslak was married to Sigrid, 
a daughter of Earl Swend Hakonsson, and she and 
Earl Hakon Ericsson were brothers' children. King 
Canute gave these brothers great fiefs over there, and 
they stood in great favour. 

King Olaf summoned to him all the lendermen, Chapter 
and had a great many people about him this summer, K^g ^^* 
for a report was abroad that King Canute would come ,?**^'^ ^i. 
from England. People had heard from merchant Onundthe 
vessels that Canute was assembling a great army in swfden. 
England. When summer was advanced, some affirmed 
and others denied that the army would come. King 
Olaf was all summer in Viken, and had spies out to 
learn if Canute was come to Denmark. In autumn 
he sent messengers eastward to Sweden to his brother- 
in-law King Onund, and let him know King Canute's 
demand upon Norway; adding, that, in his opinion, if 
Canute subdued Norway, King Onund would not long 
enjoy the Swedish dominions in peace. He thought 
it advisable, therefore, that they should unite for their 
defence. "And then," said he, " we will have strength 
enough to hold out against Canute." King Onund 
received King Olaf's message favourably, and replied' 
to it, that he for his part would make common cause 
with King Olaf, so that each of them should stand by 
the one who first required help with all the strength 
of his kingdom. In these messages between them it 
was also determined that they should have a meeting,^ 
and consult with each other. The following winter 
King Onund intended to travel across West Gotland, 

o 3 



198 CHRONICLE OF THE 

sAGAvii. and King Olaf made preparations for taking his winter 

abode at Sarpsburg, 
Chapter In autunui King Canute the Great came to Den- 
King ' niark, and remained there all winter with a numerous 
Canute's armv. It was told him that embassadors with mes- 
sadorsto sages had been passing between the Swedish and 
Swedlli °^ Norwegian kings, and that some great plans must be 
concerting between them. In winter King Canute 
sent messengers to Sweden, to King Onund, with 
great gifts and messages of friendship. He also told 
Onund that he might sit altogether quiet in this strife 
between him and Olaf the Thick ; " for thou, Onund," 
says he, " and thy kingdom, shall be in peace as far 
as I am concerned." When the embassadors came to 
King Onund they presented the gifts which King 
Canute sent him, together with the friendly message. 
King Onund did not hear their speech very willingly, 
and the embassadors could observe that King Onund 
was most inclined to a friendship with King Olaf. 
They returned accordingly, and told King Canute the 
result of their errand, and told him not to depend 
much upon the friendship of King Onund. 
Chaftkr This winter King Olaf sat in Sarpsburg, and was 
Theexpe- surrouuded by a very great army of people. He 
Biirml^ scut the Halogalandcr Carl to the north country upon 
land. his business. Carl went first to the Uplands, then 

across the Dovrefield, and came down to Nidaros, 
where he received as much money as he had the 
king's order for, together with a good ship, such as 
he thought suitable for the voyage which the king 
had ordered him upon ; and that was to proceed north 
to Biarmeland.* It was settled that the king should 
be in partnership with Carl, and each of them have 
the half of the profit. Early in spring Carl directed 
his course to Halogaland, where his brother Gunstein 

* The coasts of tlie White Sea. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 199 

prepared to accompany him, having his own merchant saga vil 
goods with him. There were about twenty-five men 
in the ship ; and in spring they sailed north to Fin- 
mark. When Thorer Hund heard this, he sent a man 
to the brothers with the verbal message that he in- 
tended in summer to go to Biarmeland, and that he 
would sail with them, and that they should divide 
what booty they made equally between them. Carl 
sent him back the message that Thorer must have 
twenty-five men as they had, and they were willing 
to divide the booty that might be taken equally, but 
not the merchant goods which each had for himself. 
When Thorer's messenger came back he had put a 
stout long-ship he owned into the water, and rigged 
it, and he had put eighty men on board of his house- 
servants. Thorer alone had the command over this 
crew, and he alone had all the goods they might 
acquire on the cruise. When Thorer was ready for 
sea he set out northwards along the coast, and found 
Carl a little north of SandraBr. They then proceeded 
with good wind. Gunstein said to his brother, as 
soon as they met Thorer, that in his opinion Thorer 
was strongly manned. " I think," said he, " we had 
better turn back than sail so entirely in Thorer's 
power, for I do not trust him." Carl replies, " I will 
not turn back, although if I had known when we were 
at home on Largo Isle that Thorer Hund would join us 
on this voyage with so large a crew as he has, I would 
have taken more hands with us." The brothers spoke 
about it to Thorer, and asked what was the meaning 
of his taking more people with him than was agreed 
upon between them. He replies, " We have a large 
ship which requires many hands, and methinks there 
cannot be too many brave lads for so dangerous a 
cruise." They went in summer as fast in general as 
the vessels could go. When the wind was light the 
ship of the brothers sailed fastest, and they separated ; 

o 4 



200 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. but when the wind freshened Thorer overtook them. 
They were seldom together, but always in sight of 
each other. When they came to Biarmeland they 
went straight to the merchant town, and the market 
began. All who had money to pay with got filled up 
with goods. Thorer also got a number of fiirs, and 
of beaver and sable skins. Carl had a considerable 
sum of money with him, with which he purchased 
skins and furs. When the fair was at an end they 
went out of the Dwina river, and then the truce with 
the country people was also at an end. When they 
came out of the river they held a seaman's council, 
and Thorer asked the crews if they would like to go 
on the land and get booty. 

They replied, that they would like it well enough, 
if they saw the booty before their eyes. 

Thorer replies, that there was booty to be got, if 
the voyage proved fortunate ; but that in all proba- 
bihty there would be danger in the attempt. 

All said they would try, if there was any chance of 
booty. Thorer explained, that it was so established 
in this land, that when a rich man died aU his move- 
able goods were divided between the dead man and 
his heirs. He got the half part, or the third part, 
or sometimes less, and that part was carried out into 
the forest and buried, — sometimes under a mound, 
sometimes in the earth, and sometimes even a house 
was built over it. He tells them at the same time 
to get ready for this expedition at the fall of day. It 
was resolved that one should not desert the other, 
and none should hold back when the commander or- 
dered them to come on board again. They now left 
people behind to take care of the ships, and went on 
land, where they found flat fields at first, and then 
great forests. Thorer went first, and the brothers 
Carl and Gunstein in rear. Thorer commanded the 
people to observe the utmost silence. " And let us 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 201 

peel the bark off the trees/' says he, " so that one tree- saga vil 
mark can be seen from the other." They came to a 
large cleared opening, where there was a high fence 
upon which there was a gate that was locked. Six 
men of the coutitry people held watch every night at 
this fence, two at a time keeping guard, each two for a 
third part of the night. When Thorer and his men 
came to the fence the guard had gone home, and 
those who should relieve them had not yet come 
upon guard. Thorer went to the fence, struck his 
axe up in it above his head, hauled himself up by it, 
and so came over the fence, and inside the gate. 
Carl had also come over the fence, and to the inside 
of the gate ; so that both came at once to the port, 
took the bar away, and opened the port ; and then the 
people got in within the fence. Then said Thorer, 
" Within this fence there is a mound in which gold, 
and silver, and earth are all mixed together: seize 
that. But within here stands the Biarmeland people's 
god Jomala : let no one be so presumptuous as to rob 
him." Thereupon they went to the mound, and 
took as much of the money as they could carry away 
in their clothes, with which, as might be expected, 
much earth was mixed. Thereafter Thorer said that 
the people now should retreat. " And ye brothers, 
Carl and Gunstein," says he, " do ye lead the way, 
and I will go last." They all went accordingly out 
of the gate: but Thorer went back to Jomala, and 
took a silver bowl that stood upon his knee full of 
silver money. He put the silver in his purse, and 
put his arm within the handle of the bowl, and so 
went out of the gate. The whole troop had come 
without the fence; but when they perceived that 
Thorer had staid behind, Carl returned to trace him, 
and when they met upon the path Thorer had the 
silver bowl with him. Thereupon Carl immediately 
ran to Jomala; and observing he had a thick gold 



202 CHRONICUE OF THE 

SAGA VII. ornament hanging around his neck, he lifted his axe, 
cut the string with which the ornament was tied be- 
hind his neck, and the stroke was so strong that the 
head of Jomala rang with such a great sound that they 
were all astonished. Carl seized the ornament, and 
they all hastened away. But the moment the sound 
was made the watchmen came forward upon the 
cleared space, and blew their horns. Immediately the 
sound of the lure* was heard all around from every 
quarter, calling the people together. They hastened 
to the forest, and rushed into it; and heard the 
shouts and cries on the other side of the Biarmeland 
people in pursuit. Thorer Hund went the last of 
the whole troop; and before him went two men 
carrying a great sack between them, in which was 
something that was like ashes. Thorer took this 
in his hand, and strewed it upon the footpath, and 
sometimes over the people. They came thus out of 
the woods, and upon the fields, but heard incessantly 
the Biarmeland people pursuing with shouts and 
dreadfiil yells. The army of the Biarmeland people 
rushed out after them upon the field, and on both 
sides of them ; but neither the people nor their wea- 
pons came so near as to do them any harm : from 
which they perceived that the Biarmeland people 
did not see them. Now when they reached their 
ships Carl and his brother went on board ; for they 
were the foremost, and Thorer was far behind on 
the land. As soon as Carl and his men were on 
board they struck their tents, cast loose their land 
ropes, hoisted their sails, and their ship in all haste 
went to sea. Thorer and his people, on the other 
hand, did not get on so quickly, as their vessel was 
heavier to manage ; so that when they got under sail 

* Ludr — the lure — is a long tube or roll of birch^bark used as a 
horn by the herdboys in the mountains in Norway. 



KINGS OF NOBWAY. 203 

Carl and his people were far off from land. Both sagavu. 
vessels sailed across the White sea. The nights were 
clear, so that both ships sailed night and day ; until 
one day, towards the time the day turns to shorten, 
Carl and his people took up the land near an island, 
let down the sail, cast anchor, and waited until 
the slack-tide set in, for there was a strong rost* be- 
fore them. Now Thorer came up, and lay at anchor 
there also. Thorer and his people then put out a 
boat, went into it, and rowed to Carl's ship. Thorer 
came on board, and the brothers saluted him. Tho- 
rer told Carl to give him the ornament. " I think," 
said he, " that I have best earned the ornaments that 
have been taken, for methinks ye have to thank me 
for getting away without any loss of men ; and also 
I think thou, Carl, set us in the greatest fright." 

Carl replies, " King Olaf has the half part of all 
the goods I gather on this voyage, and I intend the 
ornament for him. Go to him, if you like, and it is 
possible he will give thee the ornament, although I 
took it from Jomala." 

Then Thorer insisted that they should go upon the 
island, and divide the booty. 

Gunstein says, " It is now the turn of the tide, and 
it is time to sail." Whereupon they began to raise 
their anchor. 

When Thorer saw that, he returned to his boat 
and rowed to his own ship. Carl and his men had 
hoisted sail, and were come a long way before Thorer 
got under way. They now sailed so that the brothers 
were always in advance, and both vessels made all the 
haste they could. They sailed thus until they came 
to Geirsvasr, which is the first roadstead of the traders 
to the North. They both came there towards even- 



* Ro6t^ or race^ the heavy sea made by a strong current running 
against the wind. 



204 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. ing, and lay in the harbour near the landing place. 
Thorer's ship lay inside, and the brothers' the outside 
vessel in the port. When Thorer had set up his 
tents he went on shore, and many of his men with 
him. They went to Carl's ship, which was well pro- 
vided. Thorer hailed the ship, and told the com- 
manders to come on shore ; on which the brothers, 
and some men with them, went on the land. Now 
Thorer began the same discourse, and told them to 
bring the goods they got in booty to the land to have 
them divided. The brothers thought that was not 
necessary, until they had arrived at their own neigh- 
bourhood. Thorer said it was unusual not to divide 
booty but at their own home, and thus to be left to 
the honour of other people. They spoke some words 
about it, but could not agree. Then Thorer turned 
away ; but had not gone far before he came back, and 
tells his comrades to wait there. Thereupon he calls 
to Carl, and says he wants to speak with him alone. 
Carl went to meet him; and when he came near, 
Thorer struck at him with a spear, so that it went 
through him. "There," said Thorer, "now thou hast 
learnt to know a Biarko Island man. I thought thou 
shouldst feel Asbiom's spear." Carl died instantly, 
and Thorer with his people went immediately on 
board their ship. When Gunstein and his men saw 
Carl's fall they ran instantly to him, took his body and 
carried it on board their ship, struck their tents, and 
cast off from the pier, and left the land. When Tho- 
rer and his men saw this, they took down their tents, 
and made preparations to follow. But as they were 
hoisting the sail the fastenings to the mast broke in 
two, and the sail fell down across the ship, which 
caused a great delay before they could hoist the sail 
again. Gunstein had already got a long way a-head 
before Thorer's ship fetched way, and now they used 
both sails and oars. Gunstein did the same. On 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 205 

both sides they made great way day and night ; but saga vii. 
so that they did not gain much on each other, al- 
though when they came to the small sounds among the 
islands Gunstein's vessel was lighter in turning. But 
Thorer's ship made way upon them, so that when 
they came up to Lehvik, Gunstein turned towards the 
land, and with all his men ran up into the country, 
and left his ship. A little after Thorer came there 
with his ship, sprang upon the land after them, and 
pursued them. There was a woman who helped 
Gunstein to conceal himself, and it is told that she 
was much acquainted with witchcraft. Thorer and 
his men returned to the vessels, and took aU the goods 
out of Gunstein's vessel, and put on board stones 
in place of the cargo, and then hauled the ship out 
into the fiord, cut a hole in its bottom, and sank it 
to the bottom. Thereafter Thorer, with his people, 
returned home to Biarko Isle. Gunstein and his peo- 
ple proceeded in small boats at first, and lay con- 
cealed by day, until they had passed Biarko, and had 
got beyond Thorer's district. Gunstein went home 
first to Largo Isle for a short time, and then pro- 
ceeded south, without any halt, until he came to 
King Olaf, to whom he told all that had happened 
on this Biarmeland expedition. The king was iU 
pleased with the voyage, but told Gunstein to remain 
with him, promising to assist him when opportunity 
offered. Gunstein took the invitation with thanks, 
and staid with King Olaf. 

King Olaf was, as before related, in Sarpsburg the Chaptbr 
winter that King Canute was in Denmark. The Mefting^V 
Swedish kins: Onund rode across West Gotland the ^?s 9^*^ 
same winter, and had 3,000 men with him. Men Onund. 
and messages passed between them ; and they agreed 
to meet in spring at Konghelle. The meeting had 
been postponed, because they wished to know before 
they met what King Canute intended doing. As it 



206 CHBOBIGLB OF THE 

SAGA VII. was now approaching towards winter, King Canute 
made ready to go over to England with his forces, 
and left his son Hardaknnt to role in Denmark, 
and with him Earl UI^ a son of Thorkel Sprakalegg. 
Ulf was married to Astrid, King Swend's daughter, 
and sister of Cannte the Great. Their son Swend 
was afterwards king of Denmark. Earl Ulf was a 
very distinguished man. When the kings Olaf and 
Onund heard that Canute the Great had gone west 
to England, they hastened to hold their conference, 
and met at Konghelle, on the Gotha river. They had 
a joyful meeting, and had many ftiendly conversa- 
tions, of which something might become known to 
the public; but they also spake often a great deal 
between themselves, with none but themselves two 
present, of which only some things afterwards were 
carried into eflfect, and thus became known to every 
one. At parting the kings presented each other with 
gifts, and parted the best of friends. King Onund 
went up into Gotland, and Olaf northwards to Viken, 
and afterwards to Agder, and thence northwards 
along the coast, but lay a long time at Eggersund 
waiting a wind. Here he heard that Erling Skialgs- 
son, and the inhabitants of Jederen with him, had 
assembled a large force. One day the king's people 
were talking among themselves whether the wind 
was south or south-west, and whether with that wind 
they could sail past Jederen or not. The most said 
it was impossible to fetch round. Then answers Hal- 
dor Bryniolfsson, " I am of opinion that we would go 
round Jederen with this wind fast enough, if Erling 
Skialgsson had prepared a feast for us at Sole." Then 
King Olaf ordered the tents to be struck, and the 
vessels to be hauled out, which was done. They 
sailed the same day past Jederen with the best wind, 
and in the evening reached the Whiting Isles, from 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 207 

whence the king proceeded to Hordaland, and was saoavh. 
entertained there in guest-quarters. 

The same summer a ship sailed from Norway to Chapter 

• CXLV 

the Faroe Islands, with messengers carrying a verbal xhoraif 's 
message from King Olaf, that one of his court-men, ""'<*«>•• 
Leif Ossursson, or Lagman Gille, or. Thoralf of 
Dimon, should come over to him from the Faroe 
Islands. Now when this message came to the Faroe 
Islands, and was delivered to- those whom it concerned, 
they held a meeting among themselves, to consider 
what might lie under this message, and they were all 
of opinion that the king wanted to inquire into the 
real state of the event which some said had taken 
place upon the islands ; namely, the failure and dis- 
appearance of the former messengers of the king, and 
the loss of the two ships, of which not a man had 
been saved. It was resolved that Thoralf should 
undertake the journey. He got himself ready, and 
rigged out a merchant-vessel belonging to himself, 
manned with ten or twelve men. When it was ready, 
waiting a wind, it happened at Ostero, in the house 
of Thrand of Gatta, that he went one fine day into 
the room where his brother's two sons, Sigurd and 
Thord the Low, sons of Thorlak, were lying upon 
the benches in the room. Gaut the Ked was also 
there, who was one of their relations and a man of 
distinction. Sigurd was the oldest, and their leader 
in all things. Thord had a distinguishing name, and 
was called Thord the Low, although in reality he 
was uncommonly tall, and yet in proportion more 
strong than large. Then Thrand said, " How many 
things are changed in the course of a man's life. 
When we were young, it was rare for young people 
who were able to do any thing to sit or lie still upon 
a fine day, and our forefathers would scarcely have 
believed that Thoralf of Dimon would be bolder and 
more active than ye are. I believe the vessel I have 



208 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA vii. standing here in the boat-house will be so old that it 
will rot under its coat of tar. Here are all the houses 
full of wool, which is neither used nor sold. It should 
not be so if I were a few winters younger." Sigurd 
sprang up, called upon Gaut and Thord, and said he 
would not endure Thrand's scoflfe. They went out to 
the house-servants, and launched the vessel upon the 
water, brought down a cargo, and loaded the ship. 
They had no want of a cargo at home, and the ves- 
sel's rigging was in good order, so that in a few days 
they were ready for sea. There were ten or twelve 
men in the vessel. Thoralf 's ship and theirs had the 
same wind, and they were generally in sight of each 
other. They came to the land at Herdlo * in the evening, 
and Sigurd with his vessel lay outside on the strand, 
but so that there was not much distance between the 
two ships. It happened towards evening, when it 
was dark, that just as Thoralf and his people were 
preparing to go to bed, Thoralf and another went on 
shore for a certain purpose. When they were ready, 
they prepared to return on board. The man who had 
accompanied Thoralf related afterwards this story, — 
that a cloth was thrown over his head, and that he 
was lifted up from the ground, and he heard a great 
bustle. He was taken away, and thrown head fore- 
most down; but there was sea under him, and he 
sank under the water. When he got to land, he went 
to the place where he and Thoralf had been parted, 
and there he found Thoralf with his head cloven down 
to his shoulders, and dead. When the ship's people 
heard of it they carried the body out to the ship, and 
let it remain there all night. Bang Olaf was at that 
time in guest-quarters at Lygref, and thither they 
sent a message. Now a Thing was called by message- 
token, and the king came to the Thing. He had 

* An island near Askeland Isle^ in Bergen district. 
I A farm on the mainland, not far from Herdlo Isle. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 209 

also ordered the Faroe people of both vessels to be sagavh. 
summoned, and they appeared at the Thing. Now 
when the Thing was seated, the king stood up and 
said, "Here an event has happened which (and it is 
well that it is so) is very seldom heard of. Here has 
a good man been put to death, without any cause. Is 
there any man upon the Thing who can say who has 
done it ? " 

Nobody could answer. 

" Then," said the king, " I cannot conceal my sus- 
picion that this deed has been done by the Faroe 
people themselves. It appears to me that it has been 
done in this way, — that Sigurd Thorlaksson has 
killed the man, and Thord the Low has cast his com- 
rade into the sea. I think, too, that the motives to 
this must have been to hinder Thoralf from telling 
about the misdeed of which he had information; 
namely, the murder which I suspect was conunitted 
upon my messengers." 

When he had ended his speech, Sigurd Thorlaksson 
stood up, and desired to be heard. "I have never 
before," said he, " spoken at a Thing, and I do not 
expect to be looked upon as a man of ready words. 
But I think there is sufficient necessity before me to 
reply something to this. I will venture to make a 
guess that the speech the king has made comes from 
some man's tongue who is of far less understanding 
and goodness than he is, and has evidently proceeded 
from those who are our enemies. It is speaking im- 
probabilities to say that I could be Thoralf 's mur- 
derer ; for he was my foster-brother and good friend. 
Had the case been otherwise, and had there been any 
thing outstanding between me and Thoralf, yet I am 
surely born with sufficient understanding to have 
done this deed in the Faroe Islands, rather than here 
between your hands, sire. But I am ready to clear 
myself, and my whole ship's crew, of this act, and to 

VOL. n. p ^ 



210 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. make oath according to what stands in your laws. 
Or, if ye find it more satisfactory, I offer to clear 
myself by the ordeal of hot iron ; and I wish, sire, 
that you may be present yourself at the proof." 

When Sigurd had ceased to speak there were many 
who supported his case, and begged the king that 
Sigurd might be allowed to clear himself of this accu- 
sation. They thought that Sigurd had spoken well, 
and that the accusation against him might be untrue. 

The king replies, " It may be with regard to this 
man very differently, and if he is belied in any respect 
he must be a good man ; and if not, he is the boldest 
I have ever met with : and I doubt this is the case, and 
that he will bear witness to it himself." 

At the desire of the people, the king took Sigurd's 
obBgation to take the iron ordeal: he should come 
the following day to Lygra, where the bishop should 
preside at the ordeal ; and so the Thing closed. The 
king went back to Lygra, and Sigurd and his comrades 
to their ship. 

As soon as it began to be dark at night, Sigurd 
said to his ship's people, " To say the truth, we have 
come into a great misfortune ; for a great lie is got up 
against us, and this king is a deceitful crafty man. 
Our fate is easy to be foreseen where he rules ; for 
first he made Thoralf be slain, and then made us the 
misdoers, without benefit of redemption by fine. For 
him it is an easy matter to manage the iron ordeal, 
so that I doubt he will come ill off who tries it against 
him. Now there is coming a brisk mountain breeze, 
blowing right out of the sound and off the land ; and 
it is my advice that we hoist our sail, and set out to 
sea. Let Thrand himself come with his wool to 
market another summer ; but if I get away, it is my 
opinion I shall never think of coming to Norway 
again." 

His comrades thought the advice good, hoisted 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 211 

their sail, and in the night time took to the open sea saga vh. 
with all speed. They did not stop until they came to 
Faroe, and home to Gata. Thrand was ill pleased with 
their voyage, and they did not answer him in a very 
fiiendly way ; but they remained at home, however, 
with Thrand. The morning after, King Olaf heard of 
Sigurd's departure, and heavy reports went round 
about this case ; and there were many who beheved 
that the accusation against Sigurd was true, although 
they had denied and opposed it before the king. 
King Olaf spoke but little about the matter, but 
seemed to know of a certainty that the suspicion he 
had taken up was founded in truth. The king after- 
wards proceeded in his progress, taking up his abode 
where it was provided for him. 

King Olaf called before him the men who had come Chapter 
from Iceland, Thorodd Snorresson, Geller Thorkelsson, o^uieTJ^ 
Stein Skoptason, and Egil Hallsson, and spoke to them landers- 
thus : — "Ye have spoken to me much in summer 
about making yourselves ready to return to Iceland, 
and I have never given you a distinct answer. Now 
I will tell you what my intention is. Thee, Geller, 
I propose to allow to return, if thou wilt carry my 
message there.; but none of the other Icelanders who 
are now here may go to Iceland before I have heard 
how the message which thou Geller shalt bring thither 
has been received." 

When the king had made this resolution known, it 
appeared to those who had a great desire to return, and 
were thus forbidden, that they were unreasonably and 
hardly dealt with, and that they were placed in the con- 
dition of unfree men. In the mean time Geller got 
ready for his journey^ and sailed in summer to Iceland, 
taking with him the message he was to bring before 
the Thing the following summer. The king's message 
was, that he required the Icelanders to adopt the laws 
which he had set in Norway, also to pay him thane- 

p 2 



212 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA viL tax* and nose- tax; namely, a penny for every nose, 
and the penny at the rate of ten pennies to the yard 
of wadmal.f At the same time he promised them his 
friendship if they accepted, and threatened them with 
all his vengeance if they refused his proposals. 

The people sat long in deliberation on this business ; 
but at last they were unanimous in refusing all the 
taxes and burdens which were demanded of them. 
That summer Geller returned back from Iceland to 
Norway to King Olaf, and found him in autumn in 
the east in Viken, just as he had come from Gotland ; 
of which I shall speak hereafter in this story of King 
Olaf. Towards the end of autumn King Olaf repaired 
north to Drontheim, and went with his people to 
Nidaros, where he ordered a winter residence to be 
prepared for him. The winter that he passed here in 
the merchant town of Nidaros was the thirteenth year 
of his reign. 

There was once a man called Ketil Jemte, a son of 
Earl Onund of Sparboe, in the Drontheim district. 
He fled over the ridge of mountains from Eystein 
Ildraade, cleared the forest, and settled the country 
now called the province of Jemteland. A great many 
people joined him from the Drontheim land, on ac- 
count of the disturbances there ; for this Bang Eystein 
had laid taxes on the Drontheim people, and set his dog, 
called Saur, to be king over them. Thorer Hilsing was 
Ketil's grandson, and he colonised the province called 
Hilsingialand, which is named after him. WhenHarald 
Haarfager subdued the kingdom by force, many people 
fled out of the country from him, both Drontheim 
people and Naumedal people, and thus new settle- 



Chaptsr 
CXLVII. 
Of the 
Jemteland 
people. 



* Thegn.giUdi has been probably a thane-tax, or tax on free men 
having certain property and rank. 

t Wadmal was the coarse woollen cloth made in Iceland, and so 
generally used for clothing that it was a measure of value in the North, 
like money, for other commodities. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 213 

ments were added to Jemteland ; and some settlers saga vn. 
went even eastwards to Helsingialand and down to the 
Baltic coast, and all became subjects of the Swedish 
long. While Hakon Athelstan's foster-son was over 
Norw^ay there was peace, and merchant traffic from 
Drontheim to Jemteland ; and, as he was an excellent 
king, the Jemtelanders came from the east to him, 
paid him scatt, and he gave them laws and adminis- 
tered justice. They would rather submit to his go- 
vernment than to the Swedish king's, because they 
were of Norwegian race ; and all the Helsingialand 
people, who had their descent from the north side of 
the mountain ridge, did the same. This continued 
long after those times, until Olaf the Thick and the 
Swedish king Olaf quarrelled about the boundaries. 
Then the Jemteland and Helsingialand people went 
back to the Swedish king ; and then the forest of Eida 
was the eastern boundary of the land, and the moun- 
tain ridge, or keel of the country, the northern : and 
the Swedish king took scatt of Helsingialand, and also 
of Jemteland. Now, thought the king of Norway, 
Olaf, in consequence of the agreement between him 
and the Swedish king, the scatt of Jemteland should 
be paid differently than before ; although it had long 
been established that the Jemteland people paid their 
scatt to the Swedish king, and that he appointed 
officers over the country. The Swedes would listen 
to nothing, but that all the land to the east of the keel 
of the country belonged to the Swedish king. Now 
this went so, as it often happens, that although the 
kings were brothers-in-law and relations, each would 
hold fast the dominions which he thought he had a 
right to. King Olaf had sent a message round in 
Jemteland, declaring it to be his will that the Jemte- 
land people should be subject to him, threatening 
them with violence if they refused ; but the Jemteland 
people preferred being subjects of the Swedish king. 

p 3 



214 CHBONICLE OF THE 

SAG A VII. The Icelanders, Thorodd Snorresson and Stein Skop- 
ciili^Fa tason, were ill pleased at not being allowed to do as 
s^in'7"^ they liked. Stein was a remarkably handsome man, 
story. dexterous at all feats, a great poet, splendid in his 
apparel, and very ambitious of distinction. His father, 
Skopte, had composed a poem on King Olaf, which he 
had taught Stein, in the intention that he should bring 
it to King Olaf. Stein could not now restrain him- 
self from making the king reproaches in word and 
speech, both in verse and prose. Both he and Thorodd 
were imprudent in their conversation, and said the 
king would be looked upon as a worse man than those 
who, under faith and law, had sent their sons to him, 
as he now treated them as men without liberty. The 
king was angry at this. One day Stein stood before 
the king, and asked if he would listen to the poem 
which his father Skopte had composed about him. 
The king replies, " Thou must first repeat that. Stein, 
which thou hast composed about me." Stein replies, 
that it was not the case that he had composed any. 
" I am no scald, sire," said he ; " and if I even could 
compose any thing, it, and all that concerns me, would 
appear to thee of little value." Stein then went out, 
but thought he perceived what the king alluded to. 
Thorgeir, one of the king's land-bailiffs, who managed 
one of his farms in Orkadal, happened to be present, 
and heard the conversation of the king and Stein, and 
soon afterwards Thorgeir returned home. One night 
Stein left the city, and his footboy with him. They 
went up Gulaasen and into Orkadal. One evening 
they came to one of the king's farms which Thorgeir 
had the management of, and Thorgeir invited Stein to 
pass the night there, and asked where he was travel- 
ling to. Stein begged the loan of a horse and sledge, 
for he saw they were just driving home com. 

Thorgeir replies, " I do not exactly see how it 
stands with thy journey, and if thou art travelling 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 215 

with the king's leave. The other day, methinks, the s^ga vit. 
w^ords were not very sweet that passed between the 
king and thee." 

Stein said, " If it be so that I am not my own 
master for the king, yet I will not submit to such 
treatment from his slaves ; " and, drawing his sword, 
he killed the land-bailiff. Then he took the horse, 
put the boy upon him, and sat himself in the sledge, 
and so drove the whole night. They travelled until 
they came to Surendal in More. There they had 
themselves ferried across the fiord, and proceeded 
onwards as fast as they could. They told nobody 
about the murder; but wherever they came called 
themselves king's men, and met good entertainment 
every where. One day at last they came towards 
evening to Gisko Isle, to Thorberg Arneson's house. 
He was not at home himself, but his wife Ragnhild, 
a daughter of Erling Skialgsson, was. There Stein 
was well received, because formerly there had been 
great friendship between them. It had once hap- 
pened, namely, that Stein, on his voyage from Iceland 
with his own vessel, had come to Gisko from sea, and 
had anchored at the island. At that time Ragnhild 
was in the pains of childbirth, and very ill, and there 
was no priest on the island, or in the neighbourhood 
of it. There came a message to the merchant-vessel 
to inquire if, by chance, there was a priest on board. 
There happened to be a priest in the vessel, who was 
called Baard ; but he was a young man from West- 
fiord, who had little learning. The messengers begged 
the priest to go with them, but he thought it was a 
difficult matter ; for he knew his own ignorance, and 
would not go. Stein added his word to persuade 
the priest. The priest replies, " I will go if thou wilt 
go with me; for then I will have confidence, if I should 
require advice." Stein said he was willing ; and they 
went forthwith to the house, and to where Ragnhild 

p 4 



216 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA viL was in labour. Soon after she brought forth a female 
child, which appeared to be rather weak. Then the 
priest baptized the infant, and Stein held it at the 
baptism, at which it got the name of Thora; and Stein 
gave it a gold ring. Ragnhild promised Stein her 
perfect friendship, and bade him come to her when- 
ever he thought he required her help. Stein replied 
that he would hold no other female child at baptism, 
and then they parted. Now it was come to the time 
when Stein required this kind promise of Ragnhild to 
be fulfilled, and he told her what had happened, and 
that the king's wrath had fallen upon him. She an- 
swered, that all the aid she could give should stand 
at his service; but bade him wait for Thorberg's 
arrival. She then showed him to a seat beside her 
son Eystein Orre, who was then twelve years old. 
Stein presented gifts to Ragnhild and Eystein. Thor- 
berg had already heard how Stein had conducted 
himself before he got home, and was rather vexed at 
it. Ragnhild went to him, and told him how matters 
stood with Stein, and begged Thorberg to receive him, 
and take care of him. 

Thorberg replies, " I have heard that the king, 
after sending out a message-token, held a Thing con- 
cerning the murder of Thorgeir, and has condemned 
Stein as having fled the country, and likewise that 
the king is highly incensed; and I have too much 
sense to take the cause of a foreigner in hand, and 
draw upon myself the king's wrath. Let Stein, there- 
fore, withdraw from hence as quickly as thou canst." 

Ragnhild replied, that they should either both go 
or both stay. 

Thorberg told her to go where she pleased. " For I 
expect," said he, " that wherever thou goest thou wilt 
soon come back, for here is thy importance greatest." 

Her son Eystein Orre then stood forward, and said 
he would not stay behind if Ragnhild goes. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 217 

Thorberg said that they showed ' themselves very sagavii. 
stiff and obstinate in this matter. " And it appears 
that ye must have your way in it, since ye take it so 
near to heart; but thou art reckoning too much, 
Ragnhild, upon thy descent, in paying so little regard 
to King Olaf 's word." 

Ragnhild replied, " If thou art so much afraid to 
keep Stein with thee here^ go with him to my father 
Erling, or give him attendants, so that he may get 
there in safety." 

Thorberg said he would not send Stein there ; " for 
there are enough of things besides to enrage the king 
against Erling." Stein thus remained there all winter. 

After Yule a king's messenger came to Thorberg, 
with the order that Thorberg should come to him before 
midsummer; and the order was serious and severe. 
Thorberg laid it before his friends, and asked their 
advice if he should venture to go to the king after what 
had taken place. The greater number dissuaded him, 
and thought it more advisable to let Stein slip out of 
his hands than to venture within the king's power ; 
but Thorberg himself had rather more inclination not 
to decline the journey. Soon after Thorberg went to 
his brother Finn, told him the circumstances, and 
asked him to accompany him. Finn replied, that he 
thought it foolish to be so completely under woman's 
influence that he dared not, on account of his wife, 
keep the fealty and law of his sovereign. 

" Thou art free," replied Thorberg, " to go with 
me or not ; but I believe it is more fear of the king 
than love to him that keeps thee back." And so they 
parted in anger. 

Then Thorberg went to his brother Ame Ameson, 
and asked him to go with him to the king. Arne 
says, " It appears to me wonderful that such a sensible, 
prudent man, should fall into such a misfortune, with- 
out necessity, as to incur the king's indignation. It 



218 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. might be excused if it were thy relation or foster- 
brother whom thou hadst thus sheltered ; but not at 
all that thou shouldst take up an Iceland man, and 
harbour the king's outlaw, to the injury of thyself 
and all thy relations." 

Thorberg replies, " It stands good, according to the 
proverb, — a rotten branch will be found in every tree. 
My father's greatest misfortune evidently was that he 
had such ill luck in producing sons that at last he 
produced one incapable of acting, and without any 
resemblance to our race, and whom in truth I never 
would have called brother, if it were not that it would 
have been to my mother's shame to have refused." 

Thorberg turned away in a gloomy temper, and 
went home. Thereafter he sent a message to his bro- 
ther Kalf in the Drontheim district, and begged him 
to meet him at Agdanaes ; and when the messengers 
found Kalf he promised, without more ado, to make 
the journey. Ragnhild sent men east to Jederen to 
her father Erling, and begged him to send people. 
Erling's sons, Sigurd and Thord, came out, each with 
a ship of twenty benches of rowers and ninety men. 
When they came north Thorberg received them joy- 
fully, entertained them well, and prepared for the 
voyage with them. Thorberg had also a vessel with 
twenty benches, and they steered their course north- 
wards. When they came to the mouth of the Dron- 
theim fiord Thorberg's two brothers, Finn and Ame, 
were there already, with two ships each of twenty 
benches. Thorberg met his brothers with joy, and 
observed that his whetstone had taken effect; and 
Finn replied he seldom needed sharpening for such 
work. Then they proceeded north with aU their 
forces to Drontheim, and Stein was along with them. 
When they came to AgdanaBs, Kalf Arneson was there 
before them ; and he also had a well-manned ship of 
twenty benches. With this war-force they sailed up 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 219 

to Nidaros, where they lay aU night. The morning saga vii 
after they had a consultation with each other. Kalf 
and Erling's sons were for attacking the town with 
all their forces, and leaving the event to fate; but 
Thorberg wished that they should first proceed with 
moderation, and make an oflfer; in which opinion Finn 
and Arne also concurred. It was accordingly re- 
solved that Finn and Arne, with a few men, should 
first wait upon the king. The king had previously 
heard that they had come so strong in men, and was 
therefore very sharp in his speech. Finn ofiered to 
pay mulct for Thorberg, and also for Stein, and bade 
the king to fix what the penalties should be, however 
large ; stipulating only for Thorberg safety and his 
fiefs, and for Stein life and limb. 

The king replies, " It appears to me that ye come 
from home so equipped that ye can determine half as 
much as I can myself, or more ; but this I expected 
least of all from you brothers, that ye should come 
against me with an army: and this counsel, I can 
observe, has its origin from the people of Jederen; 
but ye have no occasion to offer me money in mulct." 

Finn replies, " We brothers have collected men, 
not to offer hostility to you, sire, but to offer rather 
our services ; but if you will bear down Thorberg alto- 
gether, we must all go to King Canute the Great with 
such forces as we have." 

Then the king looked at him, and said, " If ye 
brothers wiU give your oaths that ye will follow me 
in the country and out of the country, and not part 
from me without my leave and permission, and shall 
not conceal from me any treasonable design that may 
come to your knowledge against me, then will I agree 
to a peace with you brothers." 

Then Finn returned to his forces, and told the con- 
ditions which the king had proposed to them. Now 
they held a council upon it, and Thorberg, for his 



220 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA vit part, said he would accept the terms oiFered. " I 
have no wish," says he, " to fly from my property, 
and seek foreign masters ; but, on the contrary, will 
always consider it an honour to follow King Olaf, and 
be where he is." Then says Kalf, " I wiU make no 
oath to King Olaf, but will be with him always, so 
long as I retain my fiefs and dignities, and so long as 
the king will be my friend ; and my opinion is that 
we should all do the same." Finn says, " We will 
venture to let King Olaf himself determine in this 
matter." Arne Ameson says, " I was resolved to 
follow thee, brother Thorberg, even if thou hadst 
given battle to King Olaf, and I shall certainly not 
leave thee for listening to better counsel ; so I intend 
to follow thee and Finn, and accept the conditions ye 
have taken." 

Thereupon the brothers Thorberg, Finn, and Arne, 
went on board a vessel, rowed into the fiord, and waited 
upon the king. The agreement went accordingly 
into fulfilment, so that the brothers gave their oaths 
to the king. Then Thorberg endeavoured to make 
peace for Stein with the king; but the king replied 
that Stein might for him depart in safety, and go 
where he pleased, but " in my house he can never be 
again." Then Thorberg and his brothers went back 
to their men. Kalf went to Egge, and Finn to the 
king ; and Thorberg, with the other men, went south 
to their homes. Stein went with Erling's sons ; but 
early in the spring he went west to England into the 
service of Canute the Great, and was long with him, 
and was treated with great distinction. 
Chapter Nqw whcu Finn Amcson had been a short time 
Finn ' with King Olaf, the king called him to a conference, 
^p"edlXn ^^^S ^*^ some other persons he usually held con- 
to Halo- sultation with ; and in this conference the king spoke 
^^^^ ' to this effect : — " The decision remains fixed in my 
mind that in spring I should raise the whole country 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 221 

to a levy both of men and ships, and then proceed, saga vil 
with all the force I can muster, against King Canute 
the Great ; for I know for certain that he does not 
intend to treat as a jest the claim he has awakened 
upon my kingdom. Now I let thee know my will, 
Finn Arneson, that thou proceed on my errand to 
Halogaland, and raise the people there to an expedition, 
men and ships, and summon that force to meet me at 
AgdanaBs." Then the king named other men whom 
he sent to Drontheim, and some southwards in the 
country, and he commanded that this order should 
be circulated through the whole land. Of Finn's 
voyage we have to relate that he had with him a ship 
with about thirty men, and when he was ready for 
sea he prosecuted his journey until he came to Haloga- 
land. There he summoned the bonders to a Thing, 
laid before them his errand, and craved a levy. The 
bonders in that district had large vessels, suited to a 
levy expedition, and they obeyed the king's message, 
and rigged their ships. Now when Finn came farther 
north in Halogaland he held a Thing again, and sent 
some of his men from him to crave a levy where he 
thought it necessary. He sent also men to Biarko 
Island to Thorer Hund, and there, as elsewhere, craved 
the quota to the levy. When the message came to 
Thorer he made himself ready, and manned with his 
house-servants the same vessel he had sailed with on 
his cruise to Biarmeland, and which he equipped at 
his own expense. Finn summoned all the people of 
Halogaland who were to the north to meet at Vaage. 
There came a great fleet together in spring, and they 
waited there until Finn returned from the North. 
Thorer Hund had also come there* When Finn 
arrived he ordered the signal to sound for all the 
people of the levy to attend a House-Thing ; and at 
it all the men produced their weapons, and also the 
fighting men from each ship-district were mustered. 



222 CHBONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. When that was all finished Finn said, " I have also 
to bring thee a salutation, Thorer Hund, from King 
Olaf, and to ask thee what thou wilt ofier him for the 
murder of his court-man Carl, or for the robbery in 
taking the king's goods north in Lingiovik. I have 
the king's orders to settle that business, and I wait 
thy answer to it." 

Thorer looked about him, and saw standing on both 
sides many fully armed men, among whom were Gun- 
stein and others of Carl's kindred. Then said Thorer, 
" My proposal is soon made. I will refer altogether 
to the king's pleasure the matter he thinks he has 
against me." 

Finn replies, " Thou must put up with a less ho- 
nour; for thou must refer the matter altogether to my 
decision, if any agreement is to take place." 

Thorer replies, " And even then I think it will 
stand well with my case, and therefore I will not 
decline referring it to thee." 

Thereupon Thorer came forward, and confirmed 
what he said by giving his hand upon it ; and Finn 
repeated first all the words he should say. 

Finn now pronounced his decision upon the agree- 
ment, — that Thorer should pay to the king ten marks 
of gold, and to Gunstein and the other kindred ten 
marks, and for the robbery and loss of goods ten 
marks more; and all which should be paid imme- 
diately. 

Thorer says, " This is a heavy money mulct." 

" Without it," replies Finn, " there will be no 
agreement." 

Thorer says, there must time be allowed to ga- 
ther so much in loan from his followers; but Finn 
told him to pay immediately on the spot ; and besides, 
Thorer should lay down the great ornament which he 
took from Carl when he was dead. Thorer asserted 
that he had not got the ornament. Then Gunstein 



KINGS OP NORWAY. 223 

pressed forward, and said that Carl had the ornament saga vh. 
around his neck when they parted, but it was gone 
when they took up his corpse. Thorer said he had 
not observed any ornament; but if there was any 
such thing, it must be lying at home in Biarko. Then 
Finn put the point of his spear to Thorer's breast, 
and said that he must instantly produce the orna- 
ment ; on which Thorer took the ornament from his 
neck and gave it to Finn. Thereafter Thorer turned 
away, and went on board his ship. Finn, with many 
other men, followed him, went through the whole 
vessel, and took up the hatches. At the mast they 
saw two very large casks ; and Finn asked, " What 
are these puncheons?" 

Thorer replies, " It is my liquor." 

Finn says, "Why don't you give us something 
to drink then, comrade, since you have so much 
liquor?" 

Thorer ordered his men to run off a bowlftill from 
the puncheons, from which Finn and his people got 
liquor of the best quality. Now Finn ordered Thorer 
to pay the mulcts. Thorer went backwards and for- 
wards through the ship, speaking now to the one, 
now to the other, and Finn calling out to produce the 
pence. Thorer begged him to go to the shore, and 
said he would bring the money there, and Finn with 
his men went on shore. Then Thorer came and paid 
silver ; of which, from one purse, there were weighed 
ten marks. Thereafter Thorer brought many knotted 
nightcaps ; and in some was one mark, in others half 
a mark, and in others some small money. " This is 
money my friends and other good people have lent 
me," said he ; " for I think all my travelling money 
is gone." Then Thorer went back again to his ship, 
and returned, and paid the silver by little and little ; 
and this lasted so long that the day was drawing to- 
wards evening. When the Thing had closed the people 



224 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. had gone to their vessels, and made ready to depart; and 
as fast as they were ready they hoisted sail and set 
out, so that most of them were under sail. When 
Finn saw that they were most of them under sail, he 
ordered his men to get ready too ; but as yet little 
more than a third part of the mulct had been paid. 
Then Finn said, " This goes on very slowly, Thorer, 
with the pajonent. I see it costs thee a great deal to 
pay money. I shall now let it stand for the present, 
and what remains thou shalt pay to the king himself." 
Finn then got up and went away. 

Thorer replies, " I am well enough pleased, Finn, 
to part now ; but the good will is not wanting to pay 
this debt, so that both thou and the king shall say it 
is not unpaid." 

Then Finn went on board his ship, and followed 
the rest of his fleet. Thorer was late before he was 
ready to come out of the harbour. When the sails 
were hoisted he steered out over Westfiord, and went 
to sea, keeping south along the land so far off that 
the hill-tops were half sunk, and soon the land alto- 
gether was sunk from view by the sea. Thorer held 
this course until he got into the English sea, and 
landed in England. He betook himself to King Canute 
forthwith, and was well received by him. It then 
came out that Thorer had with him a great deal of 
property ; and, with other things, aU the money he 
and Carl had taken in Biarmeland. In the great 
liquor-casks there were sides within the outer sides, 
and the liquor was between them. The rest of the 
casks were filled with furs, and beaver and sable 
skins. Thorer was then with King Canute. Finn 
came with his forces to King Olaf, and related to 
him how all had gone upon his voyage, and told at 
the same time his suspicion that Thorer had left the 
country, and gone west to England to King Canute. 
" And there I doubt he will be of little service to us." 



Grankels- 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 225 

The king replies, " I believe that Thorer must be saoavii. 
our enemy, and it appears to me always better to 
have him at a distance than near." 

Aasmund Grankelsson had been this winter in CHAPT«a 
Halogaland in his sheriffdom, and was at home with Dispute 
his father Grankel. There lies a rock out in the sea, Hlre^and 
on which there is both seal and bird catchinff, and a Asmund 
iishmg ground, and egg-gathermg ; and from old 
times it had been an appendage to the farm which 
Grankel owned, but now Harek of Thiotto laid claim 
to it. It had gone so far, that some years he had 
taken by force all the gain of this rock ; but Aasmund 
and his father thought that they might expect the 
king's help in all cases in which the right was upon 
their side. Both father and son went therefore in 
spring to Harek, and brought him a message and 
tokens from King Olaf that he should drop his claim. 
Harek answered Aasmund crossly, because he had 
gone to the king with such insinuations — "for .the 
just right is upon my side. Thou shouldst learn 
moderation, Aasmund, although thou hast so much 
confidence in the king's favour. It has succeeded 
with thee to kill some chiefs, and leave their slaughter 
unpaid for by any mulct; and also to plunder us, 
although we thought ourselves at least equal to all of 
equal birth, and thou art far from being my equal in 
family." 

Aasmund replies, " Many have experienced from 
thee, Harek, that thou art of great connections, and 
too great power; and many in consequence have 
suffered loss in their property through thee. But it 
is likely that now thou must turn thyself elsewhere, 
and not against us with thy violence, and not go 
altogether against law, as thou art now doing." Then 
they separated. 

Harek sent ten or twelve of his house-servants 
with a large rowing boat, with which they rowed to 

VOL. II. Q 



226 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. the rock, took all that was to be got upon it, and 
loaded their boat. But when they were ready to 
return home, Aasmund Grankelsson came with thirty 
men, and ordered them to give up aU they had taken. 
Harek's house-servants were not quick in complying, 
so that Aasmund attacked them. Some of Harek's 
men were cudgelled, some wounded, some thrown 
into the sea, and all they had caught was taken from 
on board of their boat, and Aasmund and his people 
took it along with them. Then Harek's servants 
came home, and told him the event. Harek replies, 
" That is called news indeed that seldom happens : 
never before has it happened that my people have 
been beaten." 

The matter dropped. Harek never spoke about it, 
but was very cheerful. In spring, however, Harek 
rigged out a cutter of twenty seats of rowers, and 
manned it with his house-servants, and the ship was 
remarkably well fitted out both with people and all 
necessary equipment ; and Harek went to the levy : 
but when he came to King Olaf, Aasmund was there 
before him. The king summoned Harek and Aasmund 
to him, and reconciled them so that they left the 
matter entirely to him. Aasmund then produced 
witnesses to prove that Grankel had owned the rock, 
and the king gave judgment accordingly. The case 
had a one-sided result. No mulct was paid for Harek's 
house-servants, and the rock was declared to be Gran- 
kePs. Harek observed it was no disgrace to obey the 
king's decision, whatever way the case itself was de- 
cided. 
Chapter Thorodd Suorrcsson had remained in Norway, ac- 
Th^rodd's cordiQg to King Olaf's commands, when GeUer Thor- 
story. kelsson got leave to go to Iceland, as before related. 
He remained there with King Olaf, but was ill pleased 
that he was not free to travel where he pleased. Early 
in winter, King Olaf, when he was in Nidaros, made it 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 227 

known that he would send people to Jemteland to saoavh. 
collect the scatt ; but nobody had any great desire to 
go on this business, after the fate of those whom King 
Olaf had sent before, — namely, Thrand White and 
others, twelve in number, who lost their lives, as be- 
fore related; and the Jemtelanders had ever since 
been subject to the Swedish king. Thorodd Snorres- 
son now oflFered to undertake this journey, for he cared 
little what became of him if he could but become his 
own master again. The king consented, and Thorodd 
set out with eleven men in company. They came 
east to Jemteland, and went to a man called Thorer, 
who was lagman, and a person in high estimation. 
They met with an hospitable reception ; and when they 
had been there a while, they explained their business 
to Thorer. He replied, that other men and chiefs of 
the country had in all respects as much power and 
right to give an answer as he had, and for that pur- 
pose he would call together a Thing. It was so done ; 
the message-token was sent out, and a numerous Thing 
assembled. Thorer went to the Thing, but the mes- 
sengers in the mean time remained at home. At the 
Thing, Thorer laid the business before the people, but 
all were unanimous that no scatt should be paid to the 
king of Norway ; and some were for hanging the mes- 
sengers, others for sacrificing them to the gods. At 
last it was resolved to hold them fast until the king 
of Sweden's sheriffs arrived, and they could treat 
them as they pleased with consent of the people ; and 
that, in the mean time, this decision should be con- 
cealed, and the messengers treated well, and detained 
under pretext that they must wait until the scatt is 
collected; and that they should be separated, and 
placed two and two, as if for the convenience of board- 
ing them. Thorodd and another remained in Thorer's 
house. There was a great Yule feast and ale-drink- 
ing, to which each brought his own liquor ; for there 

Q 2 



228 CHRONICLE OF THE 

jsAGA VII. were many peasants in the village, who all drank in 
company together at Yule. There was another village 
, not far distant, where Thorer's brother-in-law dwelt, 

who was a rich and powerful man, and had a grown-up 
son. The brothers-in-law intended to pass the Yule 
in drinking feasts, half of it at the house of the one 
and half with the other ; and the feast began at Tho- 
rer's house. The brothers-in-law drank together, and 
Thorodd and the sons of the peasants by themselves ; 
and it was a drinking match. In the evening words 
arose, and comparisons between the men of Sweden 
and of Norway, and then between their kings both 
of former times and at the present, and of the man- 
slaughters and robberies that had taken place be- 
tween the countries. Then said the peasants' sons, 
" If our king has lost most people, his sheriflfe will 
make it even with the lives of twelve men when they 
come from the south after Yule ; and ye little know, 
ye silly fools, why ye are kept here." Thorodd took 
notice of these words, and many made jest about it, 
and scoflFed at them and their king. When the ale 
began to talk out of the hearts of the Jemtelanders, 
what Thorodd had before long suspected became 
evident. The day after Thorodd and his comrade 
took all their clothes and weapons, and laid them 
ready ; and at night, when the people were all asleep, 
they fled to the forest. The next morning, when the 
Jemtelanders were aware of their flight, men set out 
after them with dogs to trace them, and found them 
in a wood in which they had concealed themselves. 
They brought them home to a room in which there 
was a deep cellar, into which they were thrown, and 
the door locked upon them. They had little meat, 
and only the clothes they had on them. In the mid- 
dle of Yule, Thorer, with all his freebom men, went to 
his brother-in-law's, where he was to be a guest until 
the last of Yule. Thorer's slaves were to keep guard 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 229 

upon the cellar, and they were provided with plenty saga vil 
of liquor; but as they observeid no moderation in 
drinking, they became towards evening confused in 
the head with the ale. As they were quite drunk, 
those who had to bring meat to the prisoners in the 
cellar said among themselves that they should want 
for nothing. Thorodd amused the slaves by singing 
to them. They said he was a clever man, and gave 
him a large candle that was lighted ; and the slaves 
who were in went to call the others to come in : but 
they were all so confiised with the ale, that in going 
out they neither locked the cellar nor the room after 
them. Now Thorodd and his comrades tore up their 
skin clothes in strips, knotted them together, made a 
noose at one end, and threw up the rope on the floor 
of the room. It fastened itself around a chest, by 
which they tried to haul themselves up. Thorodd 
lifted up his comrade until he stood on his shoulders, 
and from thence scrambled up through the hatch- 
hole. There was no want of ropes in the chamber, 
and he threw a rope down to Thorodd ; but when he 
tried to draw him up, he could not move him from the 
spot. Then Thorodd told him to cast the rope over a 
cross-beam that was in the house, make a loop in it, 
and place as much wood and stones in the loop as 
would outweigh him ; and the heavy weight went 
down into the cellar, and Thorodd was drawn up by 
it. Now they took as much clothes as they required 
in the room ; and among other things they took some 
reindeer hides, out of which they cut sandals, and 
bound them under their feet, with the hoofs of the 
reindeer feet trailing behind. But before they set off 
they set fire to a large com bam which was close by, 
and then ran out into the pitch-dark night. The 
bam blazed, and set fire to many other houses in the 
village. Thorodd and his comrade travelled the whole 
night until they came to a lonely wood, where they 

Q 3 



230 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. concealed themselves when it was daylight. In the 
morning they were missed. There was chase made 
with dogs to trace the footsteps aU round the house ; 
but the hounds always came back to the house, for 
they had the smeU of the reindeer hoofs, and followed 
the scent back on the road that the hoofs had left, 
and therefore could not find the right direction. 
Thorodd and his comrade wandered long about in the 
desert forest, and came one evening to a small house, 
and went in. A man and a woman were sitting by 
the fire. The man called himself Thorer, and said it 
was his wife who was sitting there, and the hut be- 
longed to them. The peasant asked them to stop 
there, at which they were well pleased. He told them 
that he had come to this place, because he had fled 
from the inhabited district on account of a murder. 
Thorodd and his comrade were well received, and they 
aU got their supper at the fireside ; and then the benches 
were cleared for them, and they lay down to sleep, but 
the fire was stiU burning with a clear light. Thorodd 
saw a man come in from another house, and never had 
he seen so stout a man. He was dressed in a scarlet 
cloak beset with gold clasps, and was of very hand- 
some appearance. Thorodd heard him scold them for 
taking guests, when they had scarcely food for them- 
selves. The housewife said, " Be not angry, brother ; 
seldom such a thing happens; and rather do them 
some good too, for thou hast better opportunity 
to do so than we." Thorodd heard also the stout 
man named by the name of Amliot Gallina, and ob- 
served that the woman of the house was his sister. 
Thorodd had heard speak of Arnliot as the greatest 
of robbers and malefactors. Thorodd and his com- 
panion slept the first part of the night, for they were 
wearied with walking ; but when a third of the night 
was still to come, Amliot woke them, told them to get 
up, and make ready to depart. They arose immediately, 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 231 

put on their clothes, and some breakfast was given sagavii. 
them ; and Amliot gave each of them also a pair of 
snow-scates.* Amliot made himself ready to accom- 
pany them, and got upon his snow-scates, which were 
both broad and long ; but scarcely had he swung his 
snow-scate staff before he was a long way past them. 
He waited for them, and said they would make no 
progress in this way, and told them to stand upon 
the edge of his scates beside him. They did so. 
Thorodd stood nearest to him, and held by Amliot's 
belt, and his comrade held by him. Arnliot strode 
on as quickly with them both, as if he was alone and 
without any weight. The following day they came, 
towards night, to a lodge for travellers, struck fire, 
and prepared some food ; but Arnliot told them to 
throw away nothing of their food, neither bones nor 
crumbs. Arnliot took a silver plate out of the pocket 
of his cloak, and ate from it. When they were done 
eating, Arnliot gathered up the remains of their meal, 
and they prepared to go to sleep. In the other end 
of the house there was a loft upon cross-beams, and 
Amliot and the others went up, and laid themselves 
down to sleep. Amliot had a large halberd, of which 
the upper part was mounted with gold, and the shaft 
was so long that with his arm stretched out he 
could scarcely touch the top of it ; and he was girt 
with a sword. They had both their weapons and 
their clothes up in the loft beside them. Amliot, 
who lay outermost in the loft, told them to be per- 
fectly quiet. Soon after twelve men came to the 
house, who were merchants going with their wares to 
Jemteland ; and when they came into the house they 
made a great disturbance, were merry, and made a 
great fire before them ; and when they took their sup- 

* Snow-scates are slips of light wood about five feet long^ with a 
leather loop in the middle^ into which the foot is thrust ; and the expert 
scater shuffles along at a great rate^ especially down a slope. 

Q 4 



232 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. per they cast away all the bones around them. They 
then prepared to go to sleep, and laid themselves down 
upon the benches around the fire. When they had 
been asleep a short time, a huge witch came into the 
house ; and when she came in, she carefully swept to- 
gether all the bones and whatever was of food kind 
into a heap, and threw it into her mouth. Then she 
gripped the man who was nearest to her, riving and 
tearing him asunder, and threw hun upon the fire. 
The others awoke in dreadful fright, and sprang up ; 
but she took them, and sent them one by one to hell, 
so that one only remained in life. He ran under the 
loft calling for help, and if there was any one on the 
loft to help hun. Axnliot reached down his hand, seized 
him by the shoulder, and drew him up into the loft. 
The witch- wife had turned towards the fire, and began 
to eat the men who were roasting. Now Amliot stood 
up, took his halberd, and struck her between the 
shoulders, so that the point came out at her breast. 
She writhed with it, gave a dreadful shriek, and sprang 
up. The halberd slipped from Arnliot's hands, and 
she ran out with it. Amliot then went in ; cleared 
away the dead corpses out of the house ; set the door 
and the door-posts up, for she had torn them down in 
going out; and they slept the rest of the night. When 
the day broke they got up ; and first they took their 
breakfast. When they had got food, Amliot said, 
" Now we must part here. Ye can proceed upon the 
new-traced path the merchants have made in coming 
here yesterday. In the mean time I wiU seek after 
my halberd, and in reward for my labour I will take 
so much of the goods these men had with them as I 
find useful to me. Thou, Thorodd, must take my 
salutation to King Olaf ; and say to him that, he is the 
man I am most desirous to see, although my saluta- 
tion may appear to him of little worth." Then he 
took his silver plate, wiped it dry with a cloth, and 



KINGS OF NORWAY- 233 



SAGA VII. 



Chapter 
CLII. 



said, " Give King Olaf this plate ; salute him, and say 
it is from me." Then they made themselves ready 
for their journey, and parted. Thorodd went on with 
his comrade and the man of the merchants' company 
who had escaped. He proceeded until he came to 
King Olaf in the town (Nidaros) ; told the king all 
that had happened, and presented to him the silver 
plate. The Idng said it was wrong that Amliot him- 
self had not come to him; " for it is a pity so brave a 
hero, and so distinguished a man, should have given 
himself up to misdeeds." 

Thoradd remained the rest of the winter with the 
king, and in summer got leave to return to Iceland ; 
and he and King Olaf parted the best of friends. 

King Olaf made ready in spring to leave Nidaros, 
and many people were assembled about him, both King 
from Drontheim and the Northern country; and S'men.*^^ 
when he was ready he proceeded first with his men 
to More, where he gathered the men of the levy, and 
did the same at Raumsdal. He went from thence to 
South More. He lay a long time at the Hero Isles 
waiting for his forces; and he often held House- 
things, as many reports came to his ears about which 
he thought it necessary to hold councils. In one of 
these Things he made a speech, in which he spoke of 
the loss he suffered from the Faroe islanders. " The 
scatt which they promised me," he said, "is not 
forthcoming ; and I now intend to send men thither 
after it." Then he proposed to different men to un- 
dertake this expedition ; but the answer was, that all 
declined the adventure. 

Then there stood up a stout and very remarkable- 
looking man in the Thing. He was clad in a red 
kirtle, had a helmet on his head, a sword in his belt, 
and a large halberd in his hands. He took up the 
word and said, " In truth here is a great want of 
men. Ye have a good king ; but ye are bad servants 



234 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. who say no to this expedition he offers you, although 
ye have received many gifts of friendship and tokens 
of honour from him. I have hitherto been no friend 
of the king, and he has been my enemy, and says, be- 
sides, that he has good grounds for being so. Now I 
offer, sire, to go upon this expedition, if no better 
will undertake it." 

The king answers, " Who is this brave man who 
replies to my offer? Thou showest thyself different 
from the other men here present, in offering thyself 
for this expedition from which they excuse them- 
selves, although I expected they would willingly have 
undertaken it ; but I do not know thee in the leasts 
and do not know thy name." 

He replies, "My name, sire, is not difficult to 
know, and I think thou hast heard my name before. 
I am Karl Maerske." 

The king — "So this is Karl! I have indeed 
heard thy name before ; and, to say the truth, there 
was a time when our meeting must have been such, 
if I had had my will, that thou shouldst not have had 
to teU it now. But I wiU not show myself worse 
than thou, but wiU join my thanks and my favour to 
the side of the help thou hast offered me. Now thou 
shalt come to me, Karl, and be my guest to-day ; and 
then we shall consult together about this business." 
Karl said it should be so. 
c'lhi* ^^^^ MaBrske had been a viking, and a celebrated 
Karl robber. Often had the king sent out men against 

Marske's j^- ^^^ ^^^ wishcd to make an end of him ; but Karl, 
who was a man of high connection, was quick in all 
his doings, and besides a man of great dexterity, 
and expert in all feats. Now when Karl had under- 
taken this business the king was reconciled to him, 
gave him his friendship, and let him be fitted out in 
the best manner for this expedition. There were 
about twenty men in the ship; and the king sent 



KINGS OF NORWAY- 235 

messages to his friends in the Faroe Islands, and ^^^iJ^^ 
recommended him also to Leif Ossursson and Lag- 
man Gille, for aid and defence; and for this purpose 
furnished Karl with tokens of the fuU powers given 
him. Karl set out as soon as he was ready ; and as 
he got a favourable breeze soon came to the Faroe 
Islands, and landed at Thorshaven, in the island 
Stromsey. A Thing was called, to which there came 
a great number of people. Thrand of Gata came 
with a great retinue, and Leif and Gille came there 
also, with many in their following. After they had 
set up their tents, and put themselves in order, they 
went to Karl MsBrske, and saluted each other on 
both sides in a friendly way. Then Karl produced 
King Olaf 's words, tokens, and friendly message to 
Leif and Gille, who received them in a friendly man- 
ner, invited Karl to come to them, and promised him 
to support his errand, and give him all the aid in their 
power, for which he thanked them. Soon after came 
Thrand of Gata, who also received Karl in the most 
friendly manner, and said he was glad to see so able 
a man coming to their country on the king's business, 
which they were aU bound to promote. " I wiU 
insist, Karl," says he, " on thy taking up thy winter 
abode with me, together with all those of thy people 
who may appear to thee necessary for thy dignity." 

Karl replies, that he had already settled to lodge 
with Leif; " otherwise I would with great pleasure 
have accepted thy invitation." 

" Then fate has given great honour to Leif," says 
Thrand ; " but is there any other way in which I can 
be of service?" 

Karl replies, that he would do him a great service 
by collecting the scatt of the eastern island, and of 
aU the northern islands. 

Thrand said it was both his duty and interest to 
assist in the king's business, and thereupon Thrand 
returned to his tent : and at that Thing nothing else 



236 CHRONICLE OF THE 

sAGAviL worth speaking of occurred. Karl took up his abode 
with Leif Ossursson, and was there all winter. Leif 
collected the scatt of Stromo Island, and aU the 
islands south of it. The spring after Thrand of Gata 
fell ill, and had sore eyes and other complaints ; but 
he prepared to attend the Thing, as was his custom. 
When he came to the Thing he had his tent put up, 
and within it another black tent, that the light might 
not penetrate. After some days of the Thing had 
passed, Leif and Karl came to Thrand's tent, with a 
great many people, and found some persons standing 
outside. They asked if Thrand was in the tent, and 
were told he was. Leif told them to bid Thrand 
come out, as he and Karl had some business with 
him. They came back, and said that Thrand had 
sore eyes, and could not come out; "but he begs 
thee, Leif, to come to him within." Leif told his 
comrades to come carefuUy into the tent, and 
not to press forward, and that he who came last 
in should go out first. Leif went in first, fol- 
lowed by Karl, and then his comrades ; and all ftilly 
armed as if they were going into battle. Leif went 
into the black tent, and asked if Thrand was there. 
Thrand answered, and saluted Leif. Leif returned 
his salutation, and asked if he had brought the scatt 
from the northern islands, and if he would pay the 
scatt that had been collected. Thrand replies, that he 
had not forgotten what had been spoken of between 
him and Karl, and that he would now pay over the 
scatt. " Here is a purse, Leif, fuU of silver, which 
thou canst receive." Leif looked around, and saw but 
few people in the tent, of whom some were lying upon 
the benches, and a few were sitting up. Then Leif 
went to Thrand, and took the purse, and carried it 
into the outer tent, where it was light, turned out 
the money on his shield, groped about in it with his 
hand, and told Karl to look at the silver. When they 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 237 

had looked at it a while, Karl asked Leif what he saga vii. 
thought of the silver. He replied, " I am thinking 
where the bad money that is in the north isles can 
have come from." Thrand heard this, and said, " Do 
you not think, Leif, the silver is good ? " " No," says he. 
Thrand replies, "Our relations, then, are rascals not 
to be trusted. I sent them in spring to collect the 
scatt in the north isles, as I could not myself go any 
where, and they have allowed themselves to be bribed 
by the bonders to take false money, which nobody 
looks upon as current and good ; it is better, there- 
fore, Leif, to look at this silver which has been paid 
me as land-rent." Leif thereupon carried back this 
silver, and received another bag, which he carried to 
Karl, and they looked over the money together. Karl 
asked Leif what he thought of this money. He 
answered, that it appeared to him so bad that it 
would not be taken in payment, however little hope 
there might be of getting a debt paid in any other 
way ; " therefore I will not take this money upon 
the king's account." A man who had been lying on 
the bench now cast the skin coverlet off which he 
had drawn over his head, and said, " True is the old 
word, — he grows worse who grows older : so it is with 
thee, Thrand, who aUowest Karl Maarske to handle thy 
money all the day." This was Gaut the Red. Thrand 
sprang up at Gaut's words, and reprimanded his rela- 
tion with many angry words. At last he said that Leif 
should leave this silver, and take a bag which his own 
peasants had brought him in spring. "And although 
I am weak-sighted, yet my own hand is the truest 
test." Another man who was lying on the bench 
raised himself now upon his elbow ; and this was 
Thorer the Low. He said, " These are no ordinary 
reproaches we suffer from Karl Maerske, and therefore 
he well deserves a reward for them." Leif in the 
mean time took the bag, and carried it to Karl ; and 



238 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. when they cast their eyes on the money, Leif said, "We 
need not look long at this silver, for here the one 
piece of money is better than the other; and this is the 
money we will have. Let a man come to be present 
at the counting it out/' Thrand says that bethought 
Leif was the fittest man to do it upon his account. 
Leif and Karl thereupon went a short way from the 
tent, sat down, and counted and weighed the silver. 
Karl took the helmet off his head, and received in it 
the weighed silver. They saw a man coming to them 
who had a stick with an axe-head on it in his hand, 
a hat low upon his head, and a short green cloak. 
He was bare-legged, and had linen breeches on tied 
at the knee. He laid his stick down in the field, and 
went to Karl, and said, "Take care, KarlMaerske, that 
thou dost not hurt thyself against my axe-stick." 
Immediately a man came running, and calls with great 
haste to Leif Ossursson, telling him to come as quick 
as possible to Lagman Gille's tent; "for," says he, 
" Sigurd Thorlakson ran in just now into the mouth 
of the tent, and gave one of Gille's men a desperate 
wound." Leif rose up instantly, and went off to 
Gille's tent along with his men. Karl remained sitting, 
and the Norway people stood around in aU comers. 
Gaut immediately sprang up, and struck with a hand- 
axe over the heads of the people, and the stroke came 
on Karl's head ; but the wound was slight. Thord 
the Low seized the stick-axe, which lay in the field at 
his side, and struck the axe-blade right into Karl's 
scull. Many people now streamed out of Thrand's 
tent. Karl was carried away dead. Thrand was 
much grieved at this event, and offered money-mulcts 
for his relations ; but Leif and Gille, who had to pro- 
secute the business, would accept no mulct. Sigurd 
was banished the country for having wounded GiUe's 
tent comrade, and Gaut and Thorer for the murder of 
Karl. The Norway people rigged out the vessel 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 2^9^ 

which Karl had with him, and sailed eastward to saga vil 
Olaf, and gave him these tidings. He was in no 
pleasant humour at it, and threatened a speedy ven- 
geance ; but it was not allotted by fate to King Olaf 
to revenge himself on Thrand and his relations, be- 
cause of the hostilities which had begun in Norway, 
and which are now to be related. And there is 
nothing more to be told of what happened after King 
Olaf sent men to the Faroe Islands to take scatt of 
them. But great strife arose after Karl's death in 
the Faroe Islands between the family of Thrand of 
Gata and Leif Ossursson, and of which there are great 
sagas. 

Now we must proceed with the relation we began Chapter 
before, — that King Olaf set out with his men, and Kkig^^ 
raised a levy over the whole country. All lendermen ^^ff > ®*- 

— — . DC iition 

in the North followed him excepting Einar Tambar- with hu 
skelv^r, who sat quietly at home upon his farm since ^®^- ' 
his return to the country, and did not serve the king. 
Einar had great estates and wealth, although he held 
no fiefs from the king, and he lived splendidly. King 
Olaf sailed with his fleet south around Stad, and many 
people from the districts around joined him. King 
Olaf himself had a ship which he had got built the 
winter before, and which was called the Bison.* It 
was a very large ship, with a bison's head gilded all 
over upon the bow. Sigvat the scald speaks thus 
of it: — 

^' Tryggvesson's Long Serpent bore. 
Grim gaping o'er the waves before, 
A dragon's head with open throat. 
When last the hero was afloat : 

His cruise was closed. 

As God disposed. 



* Visundr is the bufFalo ; although the modern bison, or American 
animal of that name, might have been known through the Greenland 
colonists, who in this reign had visited some parts of America. 



240 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA vir. 



Chapter 

CLV. 
Of King 
Olafand 
King 
Onund. 



Olaf has raised a bison's head^ 
Which proudly seems the waves to tread^ 
While o'er its golden forehead dashing 
The waves its glittering horns are washing : 

May Grod dispose 

A luckier close." 

The king went on to Hordaland : there he heard 
the news that Erling Skialgsson had left the country 
with a great force, and four or five ships. He him- 
self had a large war-ship, and his sons had three of 
twenty rowing banks each; and they had sailed west- 
ward to England to Canute the Great. Then King 
Olaf sailed eastward along the land with a mighty 
war-force, and he inquired every where if any thing 
was known of Canute's proceedings ; and all agreed in 
saying he was in England, but added that he was 
fitting out a levy, and intended coming to Norway. 
As Olaf had a large fleet, and could not discover with 
certainty where he should go to meet King Canute, 
and as his people were dissatisfied with lying quiet in 
one place with so large an armament, he resolved to 
sail with his fleet south to Denmark, and took with 
him all the men who were best appointed aud most 
warlike; and he gave leave to the others to return 
home. And it is told in the song, — 

^^ The Bison's oars^ in sunshine glancing^ 
Wake the slumb ring deep^ 
As they southwards sweep 
To find King Canute's fleet advancing," 

Now the people whom he thought of little use 
having gone home. King Olaf had many excellent and 
stout men-at-arms besides those who, as before re- 
lated, had fled the country, or sat quietly at home ; 
and most of the chief men and lendermen of Norway 
were along with him. 

When King Olaf sailed to Denmark, he set his 
course for Sealand ; and when he came there he made 
incursions on the land, and began to plunder. The 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 241 

country people were severely treated; some were sagavil 
killed, some bound and dragged to the ships. All 
who could do so took to flight, and made no oppo- 
sition. King Olaf committed there the greatest ra- 
vages. While Olaf was in Sealand, the news came 
that King Onund Olafsson of Sweden had raised a 
levy, and fallen upon Scania, and was ravaging there ; 
and then it became known what the resolution had 
been that the two kings had taken at the Gotha river, 
where they had concluded a union and friendship, 
and had bound themselves to oppose King Canute. 
King Onund continued his march until he met his 
brother-in-law King Olaf. When they met they 
made proclamation, both to their own people and to 
the people of the country, that they intended to con- 
quer Denmark; and asked the support of the people 
of the country for this purpose. And it happened, 
as we find examples of every where, that if hostilities 
are brought upon the people of a country not strong 
enough to withstand, the greatest number will submit 
to the conditions by which peace can be purchased at 
any rate. So it happened here that many men went 
into the service of the kings, and agreed to submit to 
them. Wheresoever they went they laid the country 
ail round in subjection to them, and otherwise laid 
waste all with fire and sword. Of this foray Sigvat 
the scald speaks, in a ballad he composed concerning 
King Canute the Great : — 

'^ ' Canute is on the sea ! ' 

The news is told. 

And the Norsemen bold 
Repeat it with great glee. 
And it runs from mouth to mouth — 

* On a lucky day 

We came away 
From Drontheim to the south.' 
Across the cold East sea. 

The Swedish king 

His host did bring, 
To gain great victory. 
VOL. II. R 



242 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA vii. King Onund came to fight^ 

"~~" In Sealand's plains, 

Against the Danes^ 
With his steel-clad men so bright 
Canute is on the land ; 

Side to side 

His long-ships ride 
Along the yellow strand. 
Where waves wash the green banks^ 

Mast to mast^ 

All bound fast^ 
His great fleet lies in ranks." 

Chapter King Canute had heard in England that King Olaf 
Of King of Norway had called out a levy, and had gone with 
G^tf *^* his forces to Denmark, and was making great ravages 
in his dominions there. Canute began to gather 
people, and he had speedily collected a great army 
and a numerous fleet. Earl Hakon was second in 
command over the whole. 

Sigvat the scald came this summer from the West, 
from Rouen in VaUand, and with him was a man 
called Berg. They had made a merchant voyage 
there the summer before. Sigvat had made a little 
poem about this journey, called " The Western Travel- 
ler's Song," which begins thus: — 

" Berg ! many a merry mom was pass'd, 
When our vessel was made fast. 
And we lay on the glittering tide 
Of Rouen river's western side." 

When Sigvat came to England he went directly to 
King Canute, and asked his leave to proceed to Nor- 
way; for King Canute had forbidden all merchant 
vessels to sail until he himself was ready with his 
fleet. When Sigvat arrived he went to the house in 
which the king was lodged ; but the doors were locked, 
and he had to stand a long time outside, but when he 
got admittance he obtained the permission he desired. 
He then sang — 

" The way to Jutland's king I sought ; 
A little patience I was taught. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 



243 



The doors were shut — all ftill within ; saga vii. 

The udaller could not get in. 

But Gorm's great son did condescend 

To his own chamber me to send^ 

And grant my prayer — although I'm one 

Whose arms the fetters' weight have known." 

When Sigvat became aware that Bang Canute was 
equipping an armament against King Olaf, and knew 
what a mighty force King Canute had, he made these 
lines : — 

*' The mighty Knut, and Earl Hakon, 
Have leagued themselves^ and counsel taken 
Against King Olaf 's life. 
And are ready for the strife. 
In spite of king and earl, I say, 
' I love him well — may he get away : * 
On the Fielde, wild and dreary. 
With him I'd live, and ne'er be weary." 

Sigvat made many other songs concerning this 
expedition of Canute and Hakon. He made this 
among others : — 

" 'Twas not the earl's intention then 
'Twixt Olaf and the udalmen 
Peace to establish, and the land 
Upright to hold with Northman's hand ; 
But ever with deceit and lies 
Eric's descendant, Hakon, tries 
To make ill-will and discontent, 
Till all the udalmen are bent 
Against King Olaf 's rule to rise." 

Canute the Great was at last ready with his fleet, ^^^^^^ 
and left the land ; and a vast number of men he had, of King* 
and ships frightfuUy large. He himself had a dra- f^^^^^^l' 
gon-ship so large that it had sixty banks of rowers. Dragon, 
and the head was gilt all over. Earl Hakon had 
another dragon of forty banks, and it also had a gilt 
figure-head. The sails of both were in stripes of 
blue, red, and green, and the vessels were painted all 
above the water-stroke ; and all that belonged to their 
equipment was most splendid. They had also many 
other huge ships remarkably well fitted out, and 

R 2 



244 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VII. grand. Sigvat the scald talks of this in his song on 
Knut : — 

'* Canute is out beneath the sky — 
Canute of the clear blue eye! 
The kmg is out on the ocean's breast. 
Leading his grand fleet from the West. 
On to the East the ship-masts glide. 
Glancing and bright each long-ship's side. 
The conqueror of great Ethelred, 
Canute, is there, his foeman*s dread : 
His dragon with her sails of blue. 
All bright and brilliant to the view. 
High hoisted on the yard-arms wide. 
Carries great Canute o'er the tide. 
Brave is the royal progress — fast 
The proud ship's keel obeys the mast. 
Dashes through foam, and gains the land. 
Raising a surge on Lymfiord's strand." 

It is related that King Canute sailed with this vast 
force from England, and came with all his force safely 
to Denmark, where he went into Lymfiord, and there 
he found gathered besides a large army of the men 
of the country. 

Earl Ulf Sprakalegsson had been set as protector 
over Denmark when King Canute went to England, 
and the king had intrusted his son Hardaknut in 
the earl's hands. This took place the summer be- 
fore, as we related. But the earl immediately gave 
it out that King Canute had, at parting, made known 
to him his will and desire that the Danes should 
take his son Hardaknut as king over the Danish domi- 
nions. " On that account," says the earl, " he gave 
the matter into our hands ; as I, and many other chiefs 
and leading men here in the country, have often com- 
plained to King Canute of the evil consequences to the 
country of being without a king, and that former 
kings thought it honour and power enough to rule over 
the Danish kingdom alone ; and in the times that are 
past many kings have ruled over this kingdom. But 
now there are greater difficulties than have ever been 
before ; for we have been so fortunate hitherto as to 



Chapter 
CLVin. 
Hardcca- 
nute taken 
to be king 
iu Den- 
mark. 



KINGS OF NORWAY- 245 

live without disturbance from foreign kings, but sagavh. 
now we hear the king of Norway is going to attack 
us, to which is added the fear of the people that the 
Swedish king will join him; and now King Canute is 
in England." The earl then produced King Canute's 
letter and seal, confirming all that the earl asserted. 
Many other chiefs supported this business; and in 
consequence of all these persuasions the people re- 
solved to take Hardaknut as king, which was done at 
the same Thiag. The Queen Emma had been prin- 
cipal promoter of this determination ; for she had got 
the letter to be written, and provided with the seal, 
having cunningly got hold of the king's signet : but 
from him it was all concealed. Now when Harda- 
knut and Earl Ulf heard for certain that King Olaf 
was come from Norway with a large army, they went 
to Jutland, where the greatest strength of the Danish 
kingdom lies, sent out message-tokens, and summoned 
to them a great force ; but when they heard the Swe- 
dish king was also come with his army, they thought 
they would not have strength enough to give battle 
to both, and therefore kept their army together in 
Jutland, and resolved to defend that country against 
the kings. The whole of their ships they assembled 
in Lymfiord, and waited thus for King Canute. Now 
when they heard that King Canute had come from 
the West to Lymfiord, they sent men to him, and to 
Queen Emma, and begged her to find out if the king 
was angry at them or not, and to let them know. 
The queen talked over the matter with him, and said, 
" Your son Hardaknut will pay the fuU mulct the 
king may demand, if he has done any thing which is 
thought to be against the king." He replies, that 
Hardaknut has not done this of his own judgment. 
" And therefore," says he, " it has turned out as might 
have been expected, that when he, a child, and with- 
out understanding, wanted to be called king, the 

II 3 



246 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA viL country, when any evil came and an enemy appeared, 
must be conquered by foreign princes, if our might 
had not come to his aid. If he will have any recon- 
ciliation with me, let him come to me, and lay down 
the mock title of king he has given himself." The 
queen sent these very words to Hardaknut, and at the 
same time she begged him not to decline coming; for, 
as she truly observed, he had no force to stand against 
his father. When this message came to Hardaknut, 
he asked advice of the earl and other chief people 
who were with him ; but it was soon found that 
when the people heard King Canute the Old was ar- 
rived they aU streamed to him, and seemed to have 
no confidence but in him alone. Then Earl Ulf and 
his fellows saw they had but two roads to take; 
either to go to the king and leave all to his mercy, 
or to fly the country. All pressed Hardaknut to go 
to his father, which advice he followed. When they 
met he feU at his father's feet, and laid his seal, which 
accompanied the kingly title, on his knee. King 
Canute took Hardaknut by the hand, and placed him 
in as high a seat as he used to sit in before. Earl 
Ulf sent his son Swend, who was a sister's son of 
King Canute, and the same age as Hardaknut, to the 
king. He prayed for grace and reconciliation for his 
father, and offered himself as hostage for the earl. 
King Canute ordered him to teU the earl to assemble 
his men and ships, and come to him, and then they 
would talk of reconciliation. The earl did so. 
Chaotr When King Olaf and King Onund heard that King 
Foray in Cauutc was comc fpom the West, and also that he had 
Scania. ^^ y^^ forcc, they sailed east to Scania, and allowed 
themselves to ravage and bum in the districts there, 
and then proceeded eastward along the land to the 
frontier of Sweden. As soon as the country people 
heard that King Canute was come from the West, no 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 247 

one thought of going into the service of the two kings, saga vn. 
Sigvat speaks of these matters: — 

" Great Canute brings^ 
Against the kings^ 
His steel-clad band 
To fend his land : 
The greatest he, 
By land or sea. 
To Scania they 
Were driven away." 

Now the kings sailed eastward along the coast, and 
brought up in a river called Helge-aa, and remained 
there some time. When they heard that King Ca- 
nute was coming eastward with his forces against 
them, they held a council ; and the result was, that 
King Olaf with his people went up the country to 
the forest, and to the lake out of which the river 
Helge flows. There at the river-head they made 
a dam of timber and turf, and dammed in the lake. 
They also dug a deep ditch, through which they led 
several waters, so that the lake waxed very high. In 
the river-bed they laid large logs of timber. They 
were many days about this work, and King Olaf had 
the management of this piece of artifice ; but King 
Onund had only to command the fleet and army. 
When King Canute heard of the proceedings of the 
two kings, and of the damage they had done to his 
dominions, he sailed right against them to where 
they lay in Helge river. He had a war-force which 
was one half greater than that of both the kings to- 
gether. Sigvat speaks of these things : — 

'^ The king^ who shields 
His Jutland fields 
From scaith or harm 
By foeman's arm. 
Will not allow 
Wild plundering now : 
' The greatest he. 
On land or sea.' '* 

B 4 



river. 



248 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. One day, towards evening, King Onund's spies 
CHAFTEa saw King Canute coming sailing along, and he was 
Battle 'm ^^^t far off. Then King Onund ordered the war-homs 
Heige to sound ; on which his people struck their tents, put 
on their weapons, rowed out of the harbour and east 
round the land, bound their ships together, and pre- 
pared for battle. King Onund made his spies run 
up the country to look for King Olaf, and tell him 
the news. Then King Olaf broke up the dam, and 
let the river take its course. King Olaf travelled 
down in the night to his ships. When King Canute 
came outside the harbour, he saw the forces of the 
kings ready for battle. He thought that it would be 
too late in the day to begin the fight by the time his 
forces could be ready ; for his fleet required a great 
deal of room at sea, and there was a long distance 
between the foremost of his ships and the hindmost, 
and between those outside and those nearest the land. 
Now, as Canute saw that the Swedes and Norwegians 
had quitted the harbour, he went into it with as many 
ships as it could hold ; but the main strength of the fleet 
lay without the harbour. In the morning, when it was 
light, a great part of the men went on shore ; some for 
amusement, some to converse with the people of other 
ships. They observed nothing until the water came 
rushing over them Hke a waterfall, carrying huge trees, 
which drove in among their ships, damaging all they 
struck ; and the water covered all the fields. The men 
on shore perished, and many who were in the ships. 
All who could do it cut their cables ; so that the ships 
were loose, and drove before the stream, and were 
scattered here and there. The great dragon, which 
King Canute himself was in, drove before the stream; 
and as it could not so easily be turned with oars, 
drove out among Olaf 's and Onund's ships. As they 
knew the ship, they laid her on board on all quarters. 
But the ship was so high in the hull, as if it were a 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 249 

castle, and had besides such a numerous and chosen saga vii. 
crew on board, well armed and exercised, that it was 
not easy to attack her. After a short time also Earl 
Ulf came up with his fleet ; and then the battle be- 
gan, and King Canute's fleet gathered together from 
all quarters. But the kings Olaf and Onund, seeing 
they had for this time got all the victory that fate 
permitted them to gain, let their ships retreat, cast 
themselves loose from King Canute's ship, and the 
fleets separated. But as the attack had not been 
made as King Canute had determined, he made no 
farther attempt ; and the kings on each side arranged 
their fleets, and put their ships in order. When the 
fleets were parted, and each sailing its course, Olaf and 
Onund looked over their forces, and found they had 
suffered no loss of men. In the mean time they saw 
that if they waited until King Canute got his large 
fleet in order to attack them, the difference of force 
was so great that for them there was little chance of 
victory. It was also evident that if the battle was 
renewed, they must suffer a great loss of men. They 
took the resolution, therefore, to row with the whole 
fleet eastward along the coast.* Observing that King 
Canute did not pursue them, they raised up their 
masts and set sail. Ottar Swarte teUs thus of it 
in the poem he composed upon King Canute the 
Great : — 

'* The king^ in battle fray. 
Drove the Swedish host away; 
The wolf did not miss prey. 
Nor the raven on that day. 
Great Canute might deride 
Two kings if lie had pride. 
For at Helge river's side 
They would not his sword abide." 

* According to the Saxon Chronicle, this battle of Canute at the 
Helge-aa, or Holy River, took place in the year 1025. In the dates of 
events it is probable that the Saxon Chronicle, being a dry list of the 
events of each year, is much better authority than the Sagas, or Snorro. 



250 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VII. 



Chaftxk 
CLXI. 
King Olaf 
and King 
Onund's 
plans. 



Thord Siareksson also sang these lines in his death- 
song of King Olaf: — 

^* King Olaf, Agder's lord. 
Ne'er shunned the Jutland king. 
But with his blue-edged sword 
Broke many a panzer-ring. 
King Canute was not slow: 
King Onund filled the plain 
With dead, killed by his bow : 
The wolf howled o'er the slain." 

Bang Olaf and King Onund sailed eastward to the 
Swedish king's dominions ; and one day, towards 
evening, landed at a place called Barvik, where they 
lay all night. But then it was observed of the 
Swedes that they were home-sick ; for the greater part 
of their forces sailed eastward along the land in the 
night, and did not stop their course until they came 
home to their houses. Now when King Onund ob- 
served this he ordered, as soon as the day dawned, to 
sound the signal for a House-thing; and the whole 
people went on shore, and the Thing sat down. 
Then King Onund took up the word, and spake thus : 
" So it is, King Olaf, that, as you know, we have 
been assembled in sumjner, and have forayed wide 
around in Denmark, and have gained much booty, but 
no land. I had 350 vessels, and now have not above 
100 remaining with me. Now it appears to me we can 
make no greater progress than we have made, although 
you have still the 60 vessels which have followed you 
the whole summer. It therefore appears to me best 
that we come back to my kingdom ; for it is always 
good to drive home with the waggon safe. In this ex- 
pedition we have won something, and lost nothing. 
Now I will offer you. King Olaf, to come with me, 
and we shall remain assembled during the winter. 
Take as much of my kingdom as you will, so that 
you and the men who follow you may support your- 
selves weU ; and when spring comes let us take such 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 251 

measures as we find serviceable. If you, however, sagavii. 
will prefer to travel across our country, and go over- 
land to Norway, it shall be free for you to do so." 

King Olaf thanked King Onund for his friendly 
offer. " But if I may advise," says he, "then we 
should take another resolution, and keep together the 
forces we have still remaining. I had in the first of 
sunmier, before I left Norway, 360 ships ; but when I 
left the country I chose from among the whole war- 
levy those I thought to be the best, and with them I 
manned 60 ships ; and these I still have. Now it ap- 
pears to me that the part of your war-force which 
has now run away is the most worthless, and of least 
assistance ; but now I see here all your chiefs and 
leaders, and I know well that the people who belong 
to the court-troops* are by far the best suited to 
carry arms. We have here chosen men and superb 
ships, and we can very well lie all winter in our ships, 
as vikings' custom is. But Canute cannot lie long in 
Helge river; for the harbour will not hold so many 
vessels as he has. If he steers eastward after us, we 
can escape from him, and then people will soon 
gather to us ; but if he return to the harbours where 
his fleet can lie, I know for certain that the desire to 
return home will not be less in his army than in ours. 
I think, also, we have ravaged so widely in summer, 
that the villages, both in Sealand and Scania, know 
well whose favour they have to seek. Canute's army 
will thus be dispersed so widely, that it is uncertain 
to whom fate may at the last give the victory ; but 
let us first find out what resolution he takes." 

Thus King Olaf ended his speech, and it found - 
much applause, and his advice was followed. Spies 
were sent into King Canute's army, and both the 
kings Olaf and Onund remained lying where they 
were. 

* The thingmen^ or hired body-guard attending the court. 



252 CHRONICLE OF THE 

sAGAvii. When King Canute saw that the kings of Norway 
Chapter and Sweden steered eastward with their forces along 
Of King' the coast, he gent men to ride night and day on the 
^fd E^ land to follow their movements. Some spies went 
uif. forward, others returned ; so that King Canute had 

news every day of their progress. He had also spies 
always in their army. Now when he heard that a great 
part of the fleet had sailed away from the kings, he 
turned back with his forces to Sealand, and lay with 
his whole fleet in the Sound ; so that part lay on the 
Scania* side, and a part on the Sealand side. King 
Canute himself, the day before Michaelmas, rode with 
a great retinue to Roeskilde. There his brother-in- 
law, Earl Ulf, had prepared a great feast for him. 
The earl was the most agreeable host ; but the king 
was silent and sullen. The earl talked to him in 
every way to make him cheerful, and brought forward 
every thing which he thought would amuse him ; but 
the king remained stern, and speaking little. At last the 
earl proposed to him a game at chess, which he agreed 
to; and a chess-board was produced, and they played 
together. Earl Ulf was hasty in temper, stiff, and 
in nothing yielding ; but every thing he managed 
went on well in his hands : and he was a great war- 
rior, about whom there are many stories. He was 
the most powerful man in Denmark next to the king. 
Earl Ulf 's sister Gyda was married to Earl Gudin 
(Godwin) Ulfnadsson; and their sons were Harald 
king of England, and Earl Toste, Earl Walthiof, Earl 
Mauro-kaare, and Earl Swend. Gyda was the name 
of their daughter, who was married to the English 
king Edward the Good. 
Chapter Whcu thev had plavcd a while the king made a 

CLXIII J ^ r J o 

Of the ' false move, at which the earl took a knight from the 
murder ^^S 5 ^^^ ^^ ^Tig sct the piccc again upon the 

* Scania^ on the northern or Swedish side of the Sound. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 253 

board, and told the earl to make another move ; but saga vii. 
the earl grew angry, threw over the chess-board, 
stood up, and went away. The king said, " Run 
away, UK the Fearful." The earl turned round at 
the door and said, " Thou wouldst have run farther 
at Helge river, if thou hadst come to battle there. 
Thou didst not call me Ulf the Fearful, when I 
hastened to thy help while the Swedes were beating 
thee like a dog." The earl then went out, and went 
to bed. The following morning while the king was 
putting on his clothes he said to his footboy, "Go thou 
to Earl Ulf, and kill him." 

The lad went, was away a while, and then came 
back. 

The king said, " Hast thou killed the earl ?" 

" I did not kill him, for he was gone to Saint 
Lucius' church." 

There was a man called Ivar White, a Norwegian 
by birth, who was the king's courtman and chamber- 
lain.* The king said to him, " Go thou and kiU the 
earl." 

Ivar went to the church, and in at the choir, and 
thrust his sword through the earl, who died on the 
spot. Then Ivar went to the king, with the bloody 
sword in his hand. 

The king said, " Hast thou kiUed the earl ?" 

" I have kiUed him," says he. 

" Thou didst well." 

After the earl was kiUed the monks closed the 
church, and locked the doors. When that was told 
the king he sent a message to the monks, ordering 
them to open the church and sing high mass. They 
did as the king ordered ; and when the king came to 
the church he bestowed on it great property, so that 

* Or quartermaster — lodging-man, who had charge of the king's 
accommodation ; and also a courtman^ or one of his hody-guard. 



254 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA viL it had a large domain, by which that place was raised 
very high ; and these lands have since always be- 
longed to it. King Canute rode down to his ships, 
and lay there till late in harvest with a very large 
army. 
Chapter WhcH King Olaf and King Onund heard that King 
o^nl' Canute had sailed to the Sound, and lay there with a 
Olaf and great force, the kings held a House-thmg, and spoke 
^ ^ ^' much about what resolution they should adopt. Ejtng 
Olaf wished they should remain there with aU the 
fleet, and see what King Canute would at last resolve 
to do. But the Swedes held it to be unadvisable to 
remain until the frost set in, and so it was determined ; 
and King Onund went home with all his army, and 
King Olaf remained lying after them. 
Chaptk* While King Olaf lay there, he had frequently con- 
of eS^' ferences and consultations with his people. One night 
and Tove. Egill HallssoH and Tove Valgautsson had the watch 
upon the king's ship. Tove came from West Got- 
land, and was a man of high birth. While they sat 
on watch they heard much lamentation and crying 
among the people who had been taken in the war, 
and who lay bound on the shore at night. Tove said 
it made him ill to hear such distress, and asked Egill 
to go with him and let loose these people. This work 
they set about, cut the cords, and let the people 
escape, and they looked upon it as a piece of great 
friendship ; but the king was so enraged at it, that 
they themselves were in the greatest danger. When 
Egill afterwards fell sick the king for a long time 
would not visit him, until many people entreated it 
of him. It vexed Egill much to have done any thing 
the king was angry at, and he begged his forgiveness. 
The king now dismissed his wrath against Egill, laid 
his hands upon the side on which Egill's pain was, 
and sang a prayer; upon which the pain ceased in- 
stantly, and Egill grew better. Tove came, after 



KBNUS OV NORWAY. '255 

entreaty, into reconciliation with the king, on condi- saga vn. 
tion that he should exhort his father Valgaut to come 
to the king. He was a heathen; but after conversa- 
tion with the king he went over to Christianity, and 
died instantly when he was baptized. 

King Olaf had now frequent conferences with his Chapte» 
people, and asked advice from them, and from his xre^^* 
chiefs, as to what he should determine upon. But ^!^"q, - 
there was no unanimity among them — some consi- 
dering that unadvisable which others considered highly 
serviceable; and there was much indecision in their 
councils. King Canute had always spies in King 
Olaf 's army, who entered into conversation with many 
of his men, offering them presents and favour on ac- 
count of King Canute. Many allowed themselves to 
be seduced, and gave promises of fidelity, and to be 
King Canute's men, and bring the country into his 
hands if he came to Norway. This was apparent, after- 
wards, of many who at first kept it concealed. Some 
took at once money bribes, and others were promised 
money afterwards ; and a great many there were who 
had got great presents of money from him before : for 
it may be said with truth of King Canute, that every 
man who came to him, and who he thought had the 
spirit of a man and would like his favour, got his 
hands full of gifts and money. On this account he 
was very popular, although his generosity was prin- 
cipally shown to foreigners, and was greatest the 
greater distance they came from. 

King Olaf had often conferences and meetings chapter 
with his people, and asked their counsel; but as he ^^f^^^' 
observed they gave different opinions, he had a sus- oiaf 's con- 
picion that there must be some who spoke differently *" '°"^' > 
from what they really thought advisable for him, 
and he was thus uncertain if all gave him due fidelity 
in council. Some pressed that with the first fair 
wind they should sail to the Sound, and so to Norway. 



256 CflRONICLE OF TltE 

8AGA VII. They said the Danes would not dare to attack them, 
although they lay with so great a force right in the 
way. But the king was a man of too much under- 
standing not to see that this was impracticable. He 
knew also that Olaf Tryggvesson had found it quite 
otherwise, as to the Danes not daring to fight, when 
he with a few people went into battle against a great 
body of them. The king also knew that in King 
Canute's army there were a great many Norwegians; 
therefore he entertained the suspicion that those who 
gave this advice were more favourable to King Canute 
than to him. King Olaf came at last to the deter- 
mination, from aU these considerations, that the peo- 
ple who would follow him should make themselves 
ready to proceed by land across Gotland, and so to 
Norway. " But our ships," said he, " and all things 
that we cannot take with us, I will send eastward to 
the Swedish king's dominions, and let them be taken 
care of for us there." 
Chaptkb Harek of Thiotto replied thus to the king's speech ; 
Harek of ^' " ^* ^® evident that I cannot travel on foot to Nor- 
Thiotto's way. I am old and heavy, and little accustomed to 
yojage. walking. Besides, I am unwilling to part with my 
ship ; for on that ship and its apparel I liave be- 
stowed so much labour, that it would go much against 
my inclination to put her into the hands of my 
enemies." 

The king said, " Come along with us, Harek, and 
we shall carry thee when thou art tired of walking." 
Then Harek sang these lines : — 

*^ I'll mount my ocean steed^ 
And o'er the sea I'll speed; 
Forests and liills are not for me>^* 
I love the moying sea. 
Though Canute block the Sounds 
Rather than ivaUc the ground^ 
And leave my ship^ I'll see 
What my ship will do for me." 



KINGS OR NORWAY. 257 

Then King Olaf let every thing be put in order for saga vn. 
the journey. The people had their walking clothing 
and weapons, but their other clothes and effects they 
packed upon such horses as they could get. Then he 
sent off people to take his ships east to Calmar. There 
he had the vessels laid up, and the ships' apparel and 
and other goods taken care of. Harek did as he had 
said, and waited for a wind, and then sailed west to 
Scania, until, about the decline of the day, he came 
with a fresh and fair wind to the eastward of Holvig. 
There he let the sail and the vane, and flag and mast 
be taken down, and let the upper works of the ship 
be covered over with some grey tilt-canvass, and let a 
few men sit at the oars in the fore part and aft, but 
the most were sitting low down in the vessel. 

When Canute's watchmen saw the ship, they talked 
with each other about what ship it might be, and 
made the guess that it must be one loaded with her- 
rings or salt, as they only saw a few men at the oars ; 
and the ship, besides, appeared to them grey, and 
wanting tar, as if burnt up by the sun, and they saw 
also that it was deeply loaded. Now when Harek 
came farther through the Sound, and past the fleet, 
he raised the mast, hoisted sail, and set up his gilded 
vane. The sail was white as snow, and in it were 
red and blue stripes of cloth interwoven. When the 
king's men saw the ship sailing in this state, they told 
the king that probably King Olaf had sailed through 
them. But King Canute replies, that King Olaf was 
too prudent a man to sail with a single ship through 
King Canute's fleet, and thought it more likely to be 
Harek of Thiotto, or the like of him. Many believed 
the truth to be that King Canute knew of this expe- 
dition of Harek, and that it would not have succeeded 
so if they had not concluded a friendship beforehand 
with each other; which seemed likely, after King 

VOL. II. s 



258 CHUONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. Canute's and Harek's friendly understanding became 
generally known. 

Harek made this song as he sailed northward round 
the isle of Vederey : — 

" The widows of Land may smile through their tears. 
The Danish girls may have their jeers ; 

They may laugh or smile. 

But outside their isle 
Old Harek still on to his North land steers." 

Harek went on his way, and never stopped till 

he came north to Halogaland, to his own house in 

Thiotto Isle. 

Chawfr When King Olaf began his journey, he came first 

cLXix. jj^^Q Smaaland, and then into West Gotland. He 

King ' 

oiaf*8 marched quietly and peaceably, and the country 
s^we'd^n!°"' people gave him all assistance on his journey. Thus 
he proceeded until he came into VU^en, and north 
through Viken to Sarpsburg, where he remained, and 
ordered a winter abode to be prepared. Then he gave 
most of the chiefs leave to return home, but kept the 
lendermen by him whom he thought the most ser- 
viceable. There were with him also all the sons of 
Arne Armodsson, and they stood in great favour with 
the king. Geller Thorkelsson, who the summer be- 
fore had come from Iceland, also came there to the 
king, as before related. 
Chapter Sigvat thc scald had long been in King Olaf's 
Of si^v^t household, as before related, and the king made him 
the scald, iiis marshal. Sigvat had no talent for speaking in 
prose ; but in scaldcraft he was so practised, that the 
verses came as readily from his tongue as if he were 
speaking in usual language. He had made a mer- 
cantile journey to Normandy, and in tlie course of it 
had come to England, where he met King Canute, 
and obtained permission from him to sail to Norway, 
as before related. When he came to Norway he 
proceeded straight to King Olaf, and found him at 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 259 

Sarpsburg. He presented himself before the king saga vh. 
just as he was sitting down to table. Sigvat saluted 
him. The king looked at Sigvat and was silent. 
Then Sigvat sang, — 

** Great king ! thy marshal is come home, 
No more hy knd or sea to roam^ 

But by thy side 

Still to abide. 
Great king ! what seat here shall he take 
For the king's honour — not his sake? 

For all seats here 

To me are dear." 

Then was verified the old saying, that " many are 
the ears of a king;" for King Olaf had heard all 
about Sigvat's journey, and that he had spoken with 
Canute. He says to Sigvat, " I do not know if thou 
art my marshal, or hast become one of Canute's 
men." Sigvat said, — 

" Canute^ whose golden gifts display 
A generous hearty would have me stay^ 
Service in his great court to take, 
And my own Norway king forsake. 
Two masters at a time, I said^ 
Were one too many for men bred 
VThere truth and virtue, shown to all. 
Make all men true in Olaf 's hall." 

Then King Olaf told Sigvat to take his seat where 
he before used to sit ; and in a short time Sigvat was 
in as high favour with the king as ever. 

Erling Skialgsson and all his sons had been all Chawer 
summer in King Canute's army, in the retinue of q^^^J^ 
Earl Hakon. Thorer Himd was also there, and was skiaigsson 
in high esteem. Now when King Canute heard that wns. " 
King Olaf had gone overland to Norway, he dis- 
charged his army, and gave all men leave to go to 
their winter abodes. There was then in Denmark a 
great army of foreigners, both EngUsh, Norwegians, 
and men of other* countries, who had joined'the expe- 

s 2 



260 CHRONICLE OF THE 

sAGAjii. dition in summer. In autumn Erling Skialgsson 
went to Norway with his men, and received great 
presents from King Canute at parting ; but Thorer 
Hund remained behind in King Canute's court. With 
Erling went messengers from King Canute well pro- 
vided with money; and in winter they travelled 
through all the country, paying the money which 
King Canute had promised to many in autunm for 
their assistance. They gave presents in money, be- 
sides, to many whose friendship could be purchased 
for King Canute. They received much assistance in 
their travels from Erling. In this way it came to 
pass that many turned their support to King Canute, 
promised him their services, and agreed to oppose 
King Olaf. Some did this openly, but many more 
concealed it from the public. King Olaf heard this 
news, for many had something to tell him about it ; 
and the conversation in the court often turned upon 
it. Sigvat the scald made a song upon it : — 

^* The base traitors ply 
With purses of gold. 
Wanting to buy 
What is not to be sold, — 
The king's life and throne 
Wanting to buy : 
But our souls are our own. 
And to hell we*ll not hie. 
No pleasure in heaven. 
As we know full well. 
To the traitor is given, — 
His soul is his hell." 

Often also the conversation turned upon how ill it 
beseemed Earl Hakon to raise his hand in arms against 
King Olaf, who had given him his life when he fell 
into the king's power; but Sigvat was a particular 
friend of Earl Hakon, and when he heard the earl 
spoken against he sang, — 

" Our own court people we may blame. 
If they take gold to their own shame. 



KINGS OP NORWAY. 26 1 

Their king and country to betray. saga vu. 

With those who give it's not the same^ 

From them we have no faith to claim : 
'Tifl we are wrong, if we give way." 

King Olaf gave a great feast at Yule, and many ^""^""i* 
great people had come to him. It was the seventh of King 
day of Yule that the king, with a few persons, among ^Jft^ ^t^'^*'" 
whom was Sigvat, who attended him day and night, Yuie. 
went to a house in which the king's most precious 
valuables were kept. He had, according to his cus- 
tom, collected there with great care the valuable pre- 
sents he was to make on New Year's eve. There was 
in the house no small number of gold-mounted swords ; 
and Sigvat sang, — 

" The swords stand there. 
All bright and fair, — 
Those oars that dip in blood : 
If I in favour stood, 
I too might have a share. 
A sword the scald would gladly take. 
And use it for his master's sake : 
In favour once he stood. 
And a sword has stained in blood." 

The king took a sword of which the handle was 
twisted round with gold, and the guard was gold- 
mounted, and gave it to him. It was a valuable 
article; but the gift was not seen without envy, as 
will appear hereafter. 

Immediately after Yule the king began his journey 
to the Uplands ; for he had a great many people about 
him, but had received no income that autumn from 
the North country, for there had been an armament 
in sunmier, and the king had laid out aU the revenues 
he could command; and also he had no vessels with 
which he and his people could go to the North. At 
the same time he had news from the North, from 
which he could see that there would be no safety for 
him in that quarter, unless he went with a great force. 
For these reasons he determined to proceed through 

s 3 



262 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA viL the Uplands, although it was not so long a time since 
he had been there in guest-quarters as the law pre- 
scribes, and as the kings usually had the custom of 
observing in their visits. When he came to the Up- 
lands the lendermen and the richest bonders invited 
him to be their guest, and thus lightened his ex- 
penses. 
Chapter ThcFC was a man called Biom who was of Gotland 
Of Biom ' family, and a friend and acquaintance of Queen Astrid, 
the bailiff. Qj^^ [j^ some way related to her. She had given him 
farm-management and other offices in the upper part 
of Hedemark. He had also the management of Oster- 
dal district. Biom was not in esteem with the king, 
nor liked by the bonders. It happened in a hamlet 
which Biom ruled over, that many swine and cattle 
were missing ; therefore Biom ordered a Thing to be 
called to examine the matter. Such pillage he attri- 
buted chiefly to the people settled in forest-farms 
far from other men ; by which he referred particu- 
larly to those who dwelt in Osterdal, for that district 
was very thinly inhabited, and full of lakes and 
forest clearings, and but in few places was any great 
neighbourhood together. 
Chapter Thcrc was s, man called Raud who dwelt in Oster- 
ofRaud's' dal. His wife was called Ragnhild; and his sons, 
sons. jy^g g^jj^ Sigurd, were men of great talent. They 

were present at the Thing, made a reply in defence 
of the Osterdal people, and removed the accusation 
from them. Biom thought they were too pert in 
their answer, and too fine in their clothes and wea- 
pons ; and therefore turned his speech against these 
brothers, and said it was not unlikely they may have 
committed these thefts. They denied it, and the 
Thing closed. Soon after King Olaf, with his retinue, 
came to guest-quarters in the house of bailiff Biom. 
The matter which had been before the Thing was 
then complained of to the king ; and Biom said that 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 263 

Eaud's sons appeared to him to have committed these saga vn. 
thefts. A messenger was sent for Raud's sons ; and 
when they appeared before the king he said they had 
not at all the appearance of thieves, and acquitted 
them. Thereupon they invited the king, with all his 
retinue, to a three days' entertainment at their father's; 
and although Biom dissuaded him from it, the king 
went. At Raud's there was a very excellent feast. 
The king asked Raud what people he and his wife were. 
Raud answered that he was originally a Swedish man, 
rich, and of high birth ; ^' but I ran away with the 
wife I have ever since had, and she is a sister of King 
Ring Dagsson." The king then remembered both their 
families. He found that father and sons were men 
of understanding, and asked them what they could 
do. Sigurd said he could interpret dreams, and de- 
termine the time of the day although no heavenly 
bodies could be seen. The king made trial of his art, 
and found it was as Sigurd had said. Dag stated, as 
his accomplishment, that he could see the misdeeds 
and vices of every man who came under his eye, when 
he chose to observe him closely. The king told him 
to declare what faults of disposition he saw in the 
king himself. Dag mentioned a fault which the king 
was sensible he really had. Then the king asked what 
fault the bailiff Biom had. Dag said Biorn was a 
thief; and told also where Biorn had concealed on his 
fc^rm the bones, horns, and hides of the cattle he had 
stolen in autumn; " for he committed," said Dag, " aU 
the thefts in autumn which he accuses other people 
of." Dag also told the king the places where the king 
should go after leaving them. When the king de- 
parted from Raud's house he was accompanied on the 
way, and presented with friendly gifts ; and Raud's 
sons remained with the king. The king went first to 
Biorn's, and found there that all Dag had told him 
was true. Upon which he drove Biom out of the 

s 4 



264 CHRONICLE OF TUE 

8A0AVII. country ; and he had to thank the queen that he pre- 
served life and limbs. 
Chaptrr Thorer, a son of Olver of Egge, a stepson of Kalf 
Tiiorer^ ' Ameson, and a sister's son of Thorer Hund, was a 
death. remarkably handsome man, stout and strong. He 
was at this time eighteen years old ; had made a good 
marriage in Hedemark, by which he got great wealth ; 
and was besides one of the most popular of men, and 
formed to be a chief. He invited the king and his 
retinue home to him to a feast. The king accepted 
the invitation, went to Thorer's, and was well received. 
The entertainment was very splendid ; they were ex- 
cellently treated, and all that was set before the guests 
was of the best that could be got. The king and his 
people talked among themselves of the excellence of 
every thing, and knew not what they should admire 
the most, — whether Thorer's house outside, or the 
inside furniture, the table service or the liquors, or 
the host who gave them such a feast. But Dag said 
little about it. The king used often to speak to Dag, 
and ask him about various things; and he had 
proved the truth of all that Dag had said, both of 
things that had happened or were to happen, and 
therefore the king had much confidence in what he 
said. The king called Dag to him to have a private 
conversation together, and spoke to him about many 
things. Afterwards the king turned the conversation 
on Thorer, — what an excellent man Thorer was, and 
what a superb feast he had made for them. Dag 
answered but little to this, but agreed it was true 
what the king said. The king then asked Dag what 
disposition or faith he found in Thorer. Dag replied 
that he must certainly consider Thorer of a good dis- 
position, if he be really what most people believe him 
to be. The king told him to answer direct what he 
waf? asked, and said that it was his duty to do so. 
Dag replies, " Then thou must allow me to determine 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 265 

the pmnshment if I disclose his faith." The king sagavh. 
replied that he would not submit his decision to an- 
other man, but again ordered Dag to reply to what 
he asked. 

Dag replies, " The sovereign's order goes before all. 
I find this disposition in Thorer, as in so many others, 
that he is too greedy of money." 

The king : " Is he then a thief, or a robber ?" 

" He is neither." 

"What is he then?" 

" To win money he is a traitor to his sovereign. 
He has taken money from King Canute the Great for 
thy head." 

The king asks, " What proof hast thou of the truth 
of this?" 

Dag : " He has upon his right arm, above the elbow, 
a thick gold ring, which King Canute gave him, and 
which he lets no man see." 

This ended their conference, and the king was very 
wroth. Now as the king sat at table, and the guests 
had drunk a while with great mirth, and Thorer went 
round to see the guests well served, the king ordered 
Thorer to be called to him. He went up before the 
table, and laid his hands upon it. 

The king asked, " How old a man art thou, Thorer?" 

He answered, " I am eighteen years old." 

" A stout man thou art for those years, and thou 
hast been fortunate also." 

Then the king took his right hand, and felt it to- 
wards the elbow. 

Thorer said, " Take care, for I have a boil upon 
my arm." 

The king held his hand there, and felt there was 
something hard under it. " Hast thou not heard," 
said he, "that I am a physician? Let me see the 
boil." 



266 CHBONICLE OF THE 

SAGA TIL As Thorer saw it was of no use to conceal it longer, 
he took off the ring and laid it on the table. 

The king asked if that was the gift of King Canute. 
Thorer replied that he could not deny it was. 
The king ordered him to be seized and laid in irons. 
Kalf came up and entreated for mercy, and offered 
money for hun, which also was seconded by many ; 
but the king was so wroth that nobody could get in 
a word. He said Thorer should suffer the doom he 
had prepared for himself. Thereupon he ordered 
Thorer to be killed. This deed was much detested 
in the Uplands, and not less in the Drontheim country, 
where many of Thorer's connections were. Kalf took 
the death of this man much to heart, for he had been 
his foster-son in childhood. 
CHArrsa Griotgard Olversson, Thorer's brother, and the 
The hxi of eldest of the brothers, was a very wealthy man, and 
Griotgard. j^^ ^ great troop of people about him. He lived 
also at this time in Hedemark. When he heard that 
Thorer had been killed, he made an attack upon the 
places where the king's goods and men were; but, 
between whiles, he kept himself in the forest and 
other secret places. ^Vhen the king heard of this 
disturbance, he had inquiry made about Griotgard's 
haunts, and found out that he had taken up night- 
quarters not far from where the king was. King 
Olaf set out in the night-time, came there about day- 
dawn, and placed a circle of men round the house in 
which Griotgard was sleeping. Griotgard and his 
men, roused by the stir of people and clash of arms, 
ran to their weapons, and Griotgard himself sprang 
to the front room. He asked who commanded the 
troop; and it was answered him, "King Olaf was 
come there." Griotgard asked if the king would hear 
his words. The king, who stood at the door, said 
that Griotgard might speak what he pleased, and he 
would hear his words. Griotgard said, "I do not 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 267 

beg for mercy ; " and at the same moment he rushed saga vh. 
out, having his shield over his head, and his drawn 
sword in his hand. It was not so much light that 
he could see clearly. He struck his sword at the 
king; but Arnbiom Ameson ran in, and the thrust 
pierced him under his armour into his stomach, and 
Arnbiom got his death-wound. Griotgard was killed 
inMnediately, and most of his people with him. After 
this event the king turned back to the south to 
Viken. 

Now when the king came to Tunsberg he sent (^"aptir 
men out to all the districts, and ordered the people King oiat* 
out upon a levy. He had but a small provision of ^1" thips 
shipping, and there were only bonders' vessels to be ^d goods, 
got. From the districts in the near neighbourhood 
many people came to him, but few from any distance ; 
and it was soon found that the people had turned away 
from the king. King Olaf sent people to Gotland 
for his ships, and other goods and wares which had 
been left there in autumn ; but the progress of these 
men was very slow, for it was no better now than in 
autumn to sail through the Sound, as King Canute 
had in spring fitted out an army throughout the 
whole of the Danish dominions, and had no fewer 
than 1200 vessels. 

The news came to Norway that Kin^ Canute had Chapter 

Cl XXVII f 

assembled an immense armament through all Den- Kingoiafs 
mark, with which he intended to conquer Norway, counsels. 
When this became known the people were less will- 
ing to join King Olaf, and he got but little aid from 
the bonders. The king's men often spoke about this 
among themselves. Sigvat tells of it thus : — 

" Our men are few, our ships are small, 
While £ngland*s king is strong in all ; 
But yet our king is not afraid — 
O ! never be such king betrayed 1 
'Tis evil counsel to deprive 
Our king of countrymen to strive 



268 



SAGA VIL 



Chapter 
LCXXIX. 

Harek of 

Thiotto 

burns 

Grankel 

and his 

men. 



CHRONICLE OP THE' 

To save their country^ sword in hand : 
'Tis money that betrays our land." 

The king held meetings with the men of the court, 
and sometimes House-things with all his people, and 
consulted with them what they should, in their opi- 
nion, undertake. " We must not conceal from our- 
selves," said he, "that Canute will come here this 
sunmier; and that he has, as ye all know, a large 
force, and we have at present but few men to oppose 
to him ; and, as matters now stand, we cannot depend 
much on the fidelity of the country people." The 
king's men replied to his speech in various ways ; but 
it is said that Sigvat the scald replied thus, advising 
flight, as treachery, not cowardice, was the cause of 
it: — 

" We may well fly, when even our foe 
Offers us money if we go. 
I may be blamed, accused of fear ; 
But treachery, not faith, rules here. 
Men may retire who long have shown 
Their faith and love, and now alone 
Retire because they cannot save — 
This is no treachery in the brave.** 

The same spring it happened in Halogaland that 
Harek of Thiotto remembered how Asmund Grankel- 
son "had plundered and beaten his house-servants. A 
ten-oared cutter which belonged to Harek was afloat 
in front of the house, with tent and deck, and he 
spread the report that he intended to go south to 
Drontheim. One evening Harek went on board with 
his house-servants, about eighty men, who rowed the 
whole night ; and he came towards morning to Gran- 
kel's house, and surrounded it with his men. They 
then made an attack on the house, and set fire to it ; 
and Grankel with his people were burnt, and some 
were killed outside ; and in all about thirty men lost 
their lives. After this deed Harek returned home, 
and sat quietly in his farm. Asmund was with King 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 269 

Olaf when he heard of it ; therefore there was nobody saga vii. 
in Halogaland to sue Harek for mulct for this deed, 
and also he offered none. 

Canute the Great collected his forces, and went to ^lxxx. 
Lymfiord. When he was ready with his equipment King 
he sailed from thence with his whole fleet to Norway; expedition 
made all possible speed, and did not land to the east- *** Norway, 
ward of the Fiords, but crossed Folden*, and landed 
in Agder, where he summoned a Thing. The bon- 
ders came down from the upper country to hold a 
Thing with Canute, who was every where in that 
country accepted as king. Then he placed men over 
the districts, and took hostages from the bonders, 
and no man opposed him. King Olaf was in Tuns- 
berg when Canute's fleet sailed across the mouth of 
the fiord. Canute saQed northwards along the coast, 
and people came to him from all the districts, and 
promised him fealty. He lay a while in Egersound, 
where Erling Skialgsson came to him with many 
people, and King Canute and Erling renewed their 
league of friendship. Among other things, Canute 
promised Erling the whole country between Stad and 
Rygiarbit to rule over. Then King Canute pro- 
ceeded ; and, to be short in our tale, did not stop un- 
til he came to Drontheim, and landed at Nidaros. In 
Drontheim he called together a Thing for the eight 
districts, at which King Canute was chosen king of 
all Norway. Thorer Hund, who had come with King 
Canute from Denmark, was there, and also Harek of 
Thiotto; and both were made sheriffs of the king, and 
took the oath of fealty to him. King Canute gave 
them great fiefs, and also right to the Lapland trade, 
and presented them besides with great gifts. He en- 
riched all men who were inclined to enter into 
friendly accord with him both with fiefs and money, . 
and gave them greater power than they had before. 

• The mouth of Christiania fiord. 



270 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. When King Canute had laid the whole of Norway 
Chavter under his authority, he called together a numerous 
of^Khig^' Thing, both of his ovm people and of the people of 
Canute. ^j^q couutry ; and at it he made proclamation, that he 
made his relation Earl Hakon the governor-in-chief of 
all the land in Norway that he had conquered in this 
expedition. In like manner he led his son Harda- 
knut to the high seat at his side, gave him the title 
of king, and therewith the whole Danish dominion. 
King Canute took as hostages from all lendermen 
and great bonders in Norway either their sons, bro- 
thers, or other near connections, or the men who 
were dearest to them and appeared to him most suit- 
able ; by which he, as before observed, secured their 
fidelity to him. As soon as Earl Hakon had attained 
this power in Norway his brother-in-law, Einar 
Tambarskelver, made an agreement with him, and 
received back all the fiefs he formerly had possessed 
while the earls ruled the country. King Canute 
gave Einar great gifts, and bound him by great kind- 
ness to his interests ; and promised that Einar should 
be the greatest and mo^t important man in Norway, 
among those who did not hold the highest dignity, as 
long as he had power over the country. He added 
to this, that Einar appeared to him the most suitable 
man to hold the highest title of honour in Norway if 
no earls remained, and his son Endrid also, on ac- 
count of his high birth. Einar placed a great value 
on these promises, and, in return, promised the 
greatest fidelity. Einar's chiefship began anew with 
this. 
' Chapter There was a man by name Thorarin Loftunge, an 
Of Thora-' Icelander by birth, and a great scald, who had been 
tunJ^**^ much with the kings and other great chiefs. He was 
now with King Canute the Great, and had composed 
a flock, or short poem, in his praise. When the king 
heard of this he was very angry, and ordered him to 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 271 

bring the next day a drapa, or long poem, by the saga vil 
time he went to table ; and if he failed to do so, said 
the king, " he shall be hanged for his impudence in 
composing such a small poem about King Canute." 
Thorarin then composed a stave as a refrain, which 
he inserted in the poem, and also augmented it with 
several other strophes or verses. This was the re- 
frain: — 

" Canute protects his realm, as Jove*, 
Guardian of Greece, his realm ahove." 

King Canute rewarded him for the poem with fifty 
marks of silver. The poem was called the " Head- 
ransom." Thorarin composed another poem about 
King Canute, which was called the " Campaign Poem ; " 
and therein he tells of King Canute's expedition 
when he sailed from Denmark to Norway; and the 
following are strophes from one of the parts of his 
poem: — 

" Canute with all his men is out, 
Under the heavens in war-ships stout, — 
Out on the sea, from Lymfiord's green. 
My good, my hrave friend's fleet is seen. 
The men of Agder on the coast 
Tremhle to see this mighty host: 
The guilty tremhle as they spy 
The victor's fleet heneath the sky. 

" The sight surpasses far the tale. 
As glancing in the sun they sail ; 
The king's ship glittering all with gold. 
And splendour there not to be told. 
Round Lyster many a coal-black mast 
Of Canute's fleet is gliding past 
And now through Eyka sound they ride, 
Upon the gently heaving tide. 



♦ '* Knutr verr grund sem gcetir, 
Grikialands himenriki." 
The guardian of Greece is more probably an allusion to the Greek 
mythology than the Christian. But as Christianity came from the East, 
which was all included under the name Grikialand, it is perhaps an allu- 
sion to the Christian Divinity. 



272 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. ** And all the sound is covered oer 

With ships and sails, from shore to shore, 

A mighty king, a mighty host. 

Hiding Uie sea on Eyka coast. 

And peaceful men in haste now hie 

Up Hiorngla-hill the fleet to spy. 

As round the ness where Stade lies 

Each high-stemmed ship in splendour flie». 

" Nor seemed the voyage long, I trow, 
To warrior on the high-huilt how. 
As o*er the ocean-mountains riding 
The land and hills seem past him gUiiing. 
With whistling hreeze and flashing spray 
Past Stein the gay ships dashed away ; 
In open sea, the southern gale 
Filled every wide out-hellying sail. 

" Still on they fly, still northwards go. 
Till he who conquers every foe, 
The mighty Canute, came to land, 
Far in the north on Drontheim's strand. 
There this great king of Jutland race. 
Whose deeds and gifts surpass in grace 
AH other kings, bestowed the throne 
Of Norway on his sister's son. 

" To his own son he gave the crown 
(This I must add to his renown) 
Of Denmark — land of shadowy vales. 
In which the white swan trims her sails." 

Here it is told that King Canute's expedition was 

grander than saga can tell ; but Thorarin sang thus, 

because he would pride himself upon being one of 

King Canute's retinue when he came to Norway. 

Chaffee The mcu whom King Olaf had sent eastwards to 

chr^^^ Gotland after his ships took with them the vessels they 

messengers thought the bcst, Biid bumt the rest. The ship-apparel 

King oiaf and other goods belonging to the king and his men they 

Iw" ^Is^ *^^^ ^^^ them ; and when they heard that King 

Canute had gone to Norway they sailed west through 

the Sound, and then north to Viken to King Olaf, to 

whom they delivered his ships. He was then at 

Tunsberg. When King Olaf learnt that King Canute 

was sailing north along the coast, King Olaf steered 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 273 

with his fleet into Oslo fiord*, and into a branch of it saga vil 
called Drafaf , where he lay quiet until King Canute's 
fleet had sailed southwards again. On this expedition 
which King Canute made from the North along the 
coast, he held a Thing in each district, and in every 
Thing the country was bound by oath in fealty to 
him, and hostages were given him. He went east- 
ward across the mouths of the fiords to Sarpsburg, 
and held a Thing there, and, as elsewhere, the country 
was surrendered to him under oath of fidelity. King 
Canute then returned south to Denmark, after having 
conquered Norway without stroke of sword, and he 
ruled now over three kingdoms. So says Halvard* 
Hareksblese when he sang of King Canute : — 

'* The warrior -king, whose blood- stain'd shield 
Has shone on many a hard-fought field, 
England and Denmark now has won. 
And o'er three kingdoms rules alone. 
Peace now he gives us fast and sure, 
Since Norway too is made secure 
By him who oft, in days of yore. 
Glutted the hawk and wolf with gore." 

King Olaf sailed with his ships out to Tunsberg, as Chapter 
soon as he heard that King Canute had turned back, o^^^g^* 
and was gone south to Denmark. He then made oia^a^d 
himself ready with the men who liked to follow him, ceedings. 
and had then thirteen ships. Afterwards he sailed 
out along Viken ; but got Uttle money, and few men, 
as those only followed him who dwelt in islands, or 
on outlying points of land. The king landed in such 
places, but got only the money and men that fell in 
his way ; and he soon perceived that the country had 
abandoned him. He proceeded on according to the 
winds. This was in the beginning of winter. The 
wind turned very late in the season in their favour, 

* Now Christian ia fiord, f Drammen fiord. 

VOL. II. T 



274 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. SO that they lay long in the Sol Islands*, where they 
heard the news from the North, through merchants, 
who told the king that Erling Skialgsson had collected 
a great force in Jederen, and that his ship lay fully 
rigged outside of the land, together with many other 
vessels belonging to the bonders ; namely, skiffs, fisher- 
yachts, and great row-boats. Then the king sailed 
with his fleet from the East, and lay a while in Eger 
sound. Both parties heard of each other now, and 
Erling assembled all the men he could. 
Chapter Qh Thomasmas, before Yule, the king left the har- 
of King * hour as soon as day appeared. With a good but rather 
?of^e, strong gale he sailed northwards past Jederen. The 
weather was rainy, with dark flying clouds in the sky. 
The spies went immediately in through the Jederen 
country when the king sailed past it ; and as soon 
as Erlmg heard that the king was sailing past from 
the East, he let the war-horn call all the people on 
board, and the whole force hastened to the ships, and 
prepared for battle. The king's ship passed by Jederen 
at a great rate ; but thereafter turned in towards the 
land, intending to run up the fiords to gather men and 
money. Erling Skialgsson perceived this, and sailed 
after him with a great force and many ships. Swiftly 
their vessels flew, for they had nothing on board but 
men and arms : but ErUng's ship went much faster 
than the others; therefore he took in a reef in the 
sails, and waited for the other vessels. Then the king 
saw that Erling with his fleet gained upon him fast ; 
for the king's ships were heavily laden, and were 
besides water-soaked, having been in the sea the whole 
summer, autumn, and winter, up to this time. He 
saw also that there would be a great want of men, if 
he should go against the whole of Erling's fleet when 
it was assembled. He hailed from ship to ship the 

* Sol Isles are a little north of the Naze. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 275 

orders to let the sails gently sink, and to unship the sagajii. 
booms and out-riggers, which was done. When Erling 
saw this he calls out to his people, and orders them 
to get on more sail. " Ye see," says he, " that their 
sails are diminishing, and they are getting fast away 
from our sight." He took the reef out of the sails of 
his ship, and outsailed all the others immediately ; for 
Erling was very eager in his pursuit of King Olaf. 

Kinff Olaf then steered in towards the Isle of Boken, Chaptir 

CTj X. X V V I 

by which the ships came out of sight of each other, or Eriing 
Thereafter the king ordered his men to strike the ^^^i 
sails, and row forwards through a narrow sound that 
was there, and all the ships lay collected within a 
rocky point. Then aU the king's men put on their 
weapons. Erling sailed in through the sound, and 
observed nothing until the whole fleet was before 
him, and he saw the king's men rowing towards him 
with all their ships at once. Erling and his crew let 
fall the sails, and seized their weapons ; but the king's 
fleet surrounded his ship on all sides. Then the fight 
began, and it was of the sharpest ; but soon the great- 
est loss was among Erling's men. Erling stood on 
the quarter-deck of his ship. He had a helmet on his 
head, a shield before him, and a sword in his hand. 
Sigvat the scald had remained behind in Viken, and 
heard the tidings. He was a great friend of Erling, 
had received presents from him, and had been at his 
house. Sigvat composed a poem upon Erling's fall, 
in which there is the following verse : — 

'' Erling has set his ship on sea — 
Against the king away is he : 
He who oft lets the eagle stain 
Her yellow feet in blood of slain. 
His little war-ship side by side 
With the king's fleet, the fray will bide. 
Now sword to sword the fight is raging^ 
Which Erling with the king is waging." 

Then Erling's men began to fall, and at the same 

T 2 



276 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. moment his ship was carried by boarding, and every 
man of his died in his place. The king himself was 
among the foremost in the fray. So says Sigvat : — 

*' The king's men hewed with hasty sword^ — 
The king urged on the ship to boards — 
All o'er the decks the wounded lay : 
Right fierce and bloody was that fray. 
In Tungen sounds on Jederen shore^ 
The decks were slippery with red gore ; 
Warm blood was dropping in the sounds 
Where the king's sword was gleaming round." 

So entirely had Erling's men fallen, that not a man 
remained standing in his ship but himself alone ; for 
there was none who asked for quarter, or none who 
got it if he did ask. There was no opening for flight, 
for there lay ships all around Erling's ship on every 
side, and it is told for certain that no man attempted 
to fly; and Sigvat says, — 

*' All Erling's men fell in the fray, 
Off Boken Isle^ this hard-fought day. 
The brave king boarded^ onward cheered, 
And north of Tung the deck was cleared. 
Erling alone^ the brave, the stout. 
Cut off from all, yet still held out ; 
I High on the stem — a sight to see — 

In his lone ship alone stood he." 

Then Erling was attacked both from the forecastle 
and from the other ships. There was a large space upon 
the poop which stood high above the other ships, and 
which nobody could reach but by arrow-shot, or partly 
with the thrust of spear, but which he always struck 
from him by parrying. Erling defended himself so 
manfully, that no example is known of one man having 
sustained the attack of so many men so long. Yet 
he never tried to get away, nor asked for quarter. 
So says Sigvat : — 

*' Skialg's brave son no mercy craves, — 
The battle's fury still he biraves ; 
The spear-storm, through the air sharp singing. 
Against his shield was ever ringing. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 277 

So Erling stood ; but fate had willed saga vii. 

His life off Boken should be spilled. 

No braver man has, since his day. 
Past Boken Island ta'en his way." 

When Olaf went back a little upon the fore-deck 
he saw Erlmg's behaviour ; and the king accosted hiTn 
thus : — " Thou hast turned against me to-day, Erling." 

He replies, " The eagle turns his claws in defence 
when torn asunder." Sigvat the scald tells thus of 
these words of Erling : — 

" Erling, our best defence of old, — 
Erling the brave, the brisk, the bold, — 
Stood to his arms, gaily crying, 
' Eagles should show their claws, though dying f 
The very words which once before 
To Olaf he had said on shore. 
At Utstein, when they both prepared 
To meet the foe, and danger shared." 

Then said the king, " Wilt thou enter into my ser- 
vice, Erling?" 

" That I will," said he ; took the helmet off his 
head, laid down his sword and shield, and went for- 
ward to the forecastle deck. 

The king stuck him in the chin with the sharp 
point of his battle-axe, and said, " I shall mark thee 
as a traitor to thy sovereign." 

Then Aslak Fitiaskalle rose up, and struck Erling 
in the head with an axe, so that it stood fast in his 
brain, and was instantly his death-wound. Thus 
Erling lost his life. 

The king said to Aslak, " May all ill luck attend thee 
for that stroke ; for thou hast struck Norway out of 
my hands." 

Aslak replied, " It is bad enough if that stroke dis- 
please thee, for I thought it was striking Norway into 
thy hands ; and if I have given thee offence, sire, by 
this stroke, and have thy ill-will for it, it will go badly 
with me, for I will get so many men's iU-will and 

T 3 



278 CHRONICLE OF THE 

sAGAviL enmity for this deed that I would need all your pro- 
tection and favour." 

The king replied that he should have it. 

Thereafter the king ordered every man to return 
to his ship, and make ready for battle as fast as he 
could; and scarcely was this done before the other 
vessels ran in from the south into the sound. It went 
with the bonder army as is often seen, that the men, 
although many in numbers, know not what to do when 
they have experienced a check, have lost their chief, 
and are without leaders. None of Erling's sons were 
there, and the bonders therefore made no attack, and 
the king sailed on his way northwards. But the 
bonders took Erling's corpse, adorned it, and carried 
it with them home to Sole, and also the bodies of all 
who had fallen. There was great lamentation over 
Erling ; and it has been a common observation among 
people, that Erling Skialgsson was the greatest and 
worthiest man in Norway of those who had no high 
title. Sigvat made these verses upon the occasion: — 

'' Thus £rling fell — and such a gain 
To buy with such a lose was vain ; 
For better man than he ne'er died, 
And the king's gain was small beside. 
In truth no man I ever knew 
Was, in all ways, so firm and true ; 
Free from servility and pride, 
Honoured by all — yet thus he died." 

Sigvat also says that Aslak had very unthinkingly 

committed this murder of his own kinsman : 

'^ Norway's brave defender's dead ! 
Aslak has heaped on his own head 
The guilt of murdering his own kin : 
May few be guilty of such sin ! 
His kinsman's murder on him lies — 
Our forefathers, in sayings wise. 
Have said, what is unknown to few, 
* Kinsmen to kinsmen should be true.' " 

cLxjSvn. ^ Erling's sons some at that time were north in 
Oftheinp Drontheim, some in Hordaland, and some in the 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 279 

Fiorde district, for the purpose of collecting men. saga vil 
When Erling's death was reported, the news came suwection 
also that there was a levy raising in Agder, Horda- diatneu^ 
land, and Rogaland. Forces were raised and a great 
army assembled, under Erling's sons, to pursue King 
Olaf. 

When King Olaf retired from the battle with Er- 
ling, he went northward through the sounds, and it 
was late in the day. It is related that the king then 
made the following verses : — 

*^ This nighty with battle sounds wild ringing, 
Small joy to the fair youth is bringing 
Who sits in Jederen^ little dreaming 
O'er what this night the raven's screaming. 
The far-descended Erling's life 
Too soon has fallen; but, in the strife, 
He met the luck they well deserve 
Who from their faith and fealty swerve.*' 

Afterwards the king sailed with his fleet along the 
land northwards, and got certain tidings of the bon- 
ders assembling an army. There were many chiefs 
and lendermen at this time with King Olaf, and 
all the sons of Ame. Of this Biom Guldbraascald 
speaks in the poem he composed about Kalf Ame- 
son: — 

" Kalf ! thou hast fought at Boken well ; 
Of thy brave doings all men tell : 
When Harald*s son his men urged on 
To the hard strife, thy courage shone. 
Thou soon hadst made a good Yule feast 
For Gridur's wolf there in the East : 
Wliere stone and spear were flying rounds 
There thou wast still the foremost found. 
The people suffered in the strife 
When noble Erling lost his life^ 
And north of Utstein many a speck 
Of blood lay black upon the deck. 
The king^ 'tis clear, has been deceived^ 
By treason of his land bereaved ; 
And Agder now^ whose force is great^ 
Will rule o'er all parts of the state." 

King Olaf continued his voyage until he came 

T 4 



280 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA Vil. 



Chapter 
CLXXXVIII. 
Death of 
Aslak 
Fitiaskalle. 



north of Stad, and brought up at the Hero Isles. 
Here he heard the news that Earl Hakon had a great 
war-force in Drontheim, and thereupon the king held 
a council with his people. Kalf Arneson urged much 
to advance to Drontheim, and fight Earl Hakon, not- 
withstanding the difference of numbers. Many others 
supported this advice, but others dissuaded from it, 
and the matter was left to the king's judgment. 

Afterwards the king went into Stein vaag, and re- 
mained there all night ; but Aslak Fitiaskalle ran into 
Borgund, where he remained the night, and where 
Vigleik Arneson was before him. In the morning, 
when Aslak was about returning on board, Vigleik 
assaulted him, and sought to avenge Erling's murder. 
Aslak fell there. Some of the king's court-men, who 
had been home aU summer, joined the king here. They 
came from Frekosund, and brought the king tidings 
that Earl Hakon, and many lendermen with him, had 
come in the morning to Frekosund with a large force ; 
" and they will end thy days, sire, if they have 
strength enough." Now the king sent his men up to 
a hiU that was near ; and when they came to the top, 
and looked northwards to Biamo Island, they per- 
ceived that a great armament of many ships was coming 
from the north, and they hastened back to the king 
with this intelligence. The king, who was lying 
there with only twelve ships, ordered the war-horn 
to sound, the tents to be taken down on his ships, and 
they took to their oars. When they were quite ready, 
and were leaving the harbour, the bonder army sailed 
north around Thiotand with twenty-five ships. The 
king then steered inside of Nyrfe Island, and inside 
of the Hund skerries. Now when King Olaf came 
right abreast of Borgund, the ship which Aslak had 
steered came out to meet him, and when they found the 
king told him the tidings, — that Vigleik Arneson had 
killed Aslak Fitiaskalle, because he had kiUed Erling 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 281 

SHalgsson. The king took this news very angrily, but saga vil 
could not delay his voyage on account of the enemy, 
and he sailed in by Vegsund and Skot. There some 
of his people left him ; among others, Kalf Ameson, 
with many other lendermen and ship commanders, who 
all went to meet Earl Hakon. King Olaf, however, 
proceeded on his way without stopping until he came 
to Fodrar fiord, where he brought up at Valdai, and 
landed from his ship. He had then five ships with 
him, which he drew up upon the shore, and took care 
of their sails and materials. Then he set up his land 
tent upon a point of land called Suit, where there are 
pretty flat fields, and set up a cross near to the 
point of land. A bonder, by name Bruse, who dwelt 
there in More, and was chief over the valley, came 
down to King Olaf, together with many other bon- 
ders, and received him well, and according to his 
dignity ; and he was friendly, and pleased with their 
reception of him. Then the king asked if there was 
a passable road up in the country from the valley to 
Lesie ; and Bruse replied, that there was a slope in 
the valley called Sessur not passable for man or 
beast. King Olaf answers, " That we must try, bon- 
der, and it will go as God pleases. Come here in the 
morning with your yoke, and come yourself with it, 
and let us then see, when we come to the sloping 
precipice, what chance there may be, and if we cannot 
devise some means of coming over it with horses and 
people." 

Now when day broke the bonders drove down Chapter 
with their yokes, as the king had told them. The clearing of 
clothes and weapons were packed upon horses, but *^®^°**^- 
the king and all the people went on foot. He went 
thus until he came to a place called Aros-Brukke; 
and when he came up upon the hill he rested him- 
self, sat down there a while, looked down over the 
fiord, and said, "A difficult expedition ye have thrown 



282 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA vii. upon my hands, ye lendermen, who have now changed 
your fealty, although but a little while ago ye were 
my friends and faithful to me." There are now two 
crosses erected upon the bank on which the king sat. 
Then the king mounted a horse, and rode without 
stopping up the valley, until he came to the preci- 
pice. Then the king asked Bruse if there was no 
summer hut of cattle-herds* in the neighbourhood, 
where they could remain. He said there was. The 
king ordered his land-tent to be set up, and re- 
mained there all night. In the morning the king 
ordered them to drive to the steep slope, and try if 
they could get across it witl^ the waggons. They drove 
there, and the king remained in the mean time in his 
tent. Towards evening the king's court-men and the 
bonders came back, and told how they had had a very 
fatiguing labour, without making any progress, and 
that there never could be a road made that they could 
get across ; so they continued there the second night, 
during which, for the whole night, the king was oc- 
cupied in prayer. As soon as he observed day dawn- 
ing he ordered his men to drive again to the steep, 
and try once more if they could get across it with 
the waggons ; but they went very unwillingly, say- 
ing nothing could be gained by it. When they were 
gone the man who had charge of the king's kitchen 
came, and said there were only two carcasses of young 
cattle remaining of provision : " although you, sire, 
have 300 men, and there are 100 bonders besides." 
Then the king ordered that he should set all the kettles 
on the fire, and put a Kttle bit of meat in each kettle, 
which was done. Then the king went there, and made 
the sign of the cross over each kettle, and told them to 
make ready the meat. The king then went to the steep 

* Sel — Sseter in Norwegian — is a chalot or sheeling ; viz. a 
summer hut among the mountains for herds and their cattle. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 283 

slope called Sessur, where a road should be cleared saga vn. 
When the king came all his people were sitting down, 
quite worn out with the hard labour. Bruse said, 
" I told you, sire, but you would not believe me, that 
we could make nothing of this steep.'' The king laid 
aside his cloak, and told them to go to work once 
more at the steep slope. They did so, and now twenty 
men could han<Ue stones which before 100 men could 
not move from the place; and thus before mid-day 
the road was cleared so well, that it was as passable for 
men, and for horses with packs, as a road in the plain 
fields. The king, after this, went down again to where 
the meat was, which place is still called Olaf 's Hil- 
lock. At the hillock is a spring, at which Olaf washed 
himself; and therefore at the present day, when the 
cattle in the valley are sick, their illness is made bet- 
ter by their drinking at this well. Thereafter the 
king sat down to table with all the others; and when 
he was satisfied he asked if there was any other 
sheeling on the other side of the steep, and near the 
mountains, where they could pass the night. Bruse 
said there was such a sheeling, called Gronningen; but 
that nobody could pass the night there on account of 
witchcraft, and evil beings who were, in the sheeling. 
Then the king said they must get ready for their 
journey, as he wanted to be at the sheeling for the 
night. Then came the kitchen-master to the king, 
and tells that there was come an extraordinary sup- 
ply of provisions, and he did not know where it had 
come from, or how. The king thanked Grod for this 
blessing, and gave the bonders who drove down again 
to their valley some rations of food, but remained him- 
self all night in the sheeling. In the middle of the 
night, while the people were asleep, there was heard 
in the cattle-fold a dreadful cry, and these words: 
" Now Olaf 's prayers are burning me," says the spirit, 
"so that I can no longer be in my habitation; now 



284 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VII. must I fly, and never more come to this fold." When 
the king's people awoke in the morning the king 
proceeded to the mountains, and said to Bruse, " Here 
shall now a farm be settled, and the bonder who dwells 
here shall never want what is needful for the support 
of life ; and never shall his crop be destroyed by frost, 
although the crops be frozen on the farms both above 
it and below it." Then the king proceeded over the 
mountains, and came to a farm called Einbo, where 
he remained for the night. King Olaf had then been 
fifteen years king of Norway, including the year both 
he and Swend were in the country, and this year we 
have now been telling about. It was, namely, a little 
past Yule when the king left his ships and took to 
the land, as before related. Of this portion of his 
reign the priest Are Thorgilson the Wise was the first 
who wrote; and he was both faithful in his story, of a 
good memory, and so old a man that he could remember 
the men, and had heard their accounts, who were so old 
that through their age they could remember these 
circumstances as he himself wrote them in his books, 
and he named the men fi'om whom he received his 
information. Otherwise it is generally said that King 
Olaf had been fifteen years king of Norway when he 
fell; but they who say so reckon to Earl Swend's 
government, the last year he was in the country, 
for King Olaf lived fifteen years afterwards as Hng. 

^cxc"* When the king had been one night in Lesie he pro- 
oiaPspro- ceeded on his journey with his men, day by day; first 
into Gudbrandsdal, and from thence out to Hedemark. 
Now it was seen who had been his Mends, for they 
followed him; but those who had served him with 
less fidelity separated from him, and some showed 
him even indifference, or even full hostility, which 
afterwards was apparent ; and also it could be seen 
clearly in many Upland people that they took very 
ill his putting Thorer to death, as before related. 



phecies. 



KINGS OF NORWAY- 



285 



King Olaf gave leave to return home to many of his saga vil 
men who had farms and children to take care of; for 
it seemed to them uncertain what safety there might 
be for the families and property of those who left the 
country with him. Then the king explained to his 
friends his intention of leaving the country, and going 
first east into Sweden, and there taking his deter- 
mination as to where he should go : but he let his 
friends know his intention to return to the country, 
and regain his kingdom, if God should grant him 
longer life; and he did not conceal his expectation 
that the people of Norway would again return to their 
fealty to him. " I think," says he, " that Earl Hakon 
will have Norway but a short time und^r his power, 
which many will not think an extraordinary expec- 
tation, as Earl Hakon has had but little luck against 
me : but probably few people wiU trust to my pro- 
phecy, that Canute the Great will in the course of a 
few years die, and his kingdoms vanish ; and there 
will be no risings in favour of his race." When the 
king had ended his speech, his men prepared them- 
selves for their departure. The king, with the troop 
that followed him, turned east to Eida forest. And 
there were along with him the Queen Astrid ; their 
daughter Ulfhild; Magnus, King Olaf's son; Rogn- 
vald Brusesson; the three sons of Arne, Thorberg, 
Finn, and Arne, with many lendermen; and the 
king's attendants consisted of many chosen men. 
Biorn the marshal got leave to go home, and he went 
to his farm, and many others of the king's friends 
returned home with his permission to their farms. 
The king begged them to let him know the events 
which might happen in the country, and which it 
might be important for him to know : and now the 
king proceeded on his way. 

It is to be related of King Olaf 's journey, that he S^xci* 
went first from Norway eastward through Eyda Kingoiaf 



286 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



sAGAjiL forest to Vermeland, then to Vatsbo, and through 
proceeds to the forests m which there are roads, until he came 
"*^ out in Nerike district. There dwelt a rich and power- 
ful man in that part called Sigtryg, who had a son, 
Ivar, who afterwards became a distinguished person. 
Olaf staid with Sigtryg all spring ; and when summer 
came he made ready for a journey, procured a ship 
for himself, and without stopping went on to Russia 
to King Jarisleif and his queen Ingigerd; but his 
own queen Astrid, and their daughter Ulfhild, re- 
mained behind in Sweden, and the king took his son 
Magnus eastward with him. King Jarisleif received 
King Olaf in the kindest manner, and made him the 
oflfer to remain with him, and to have so much land as 
was necessary for defraying the expense of the enter- 
tainment of his followers. King Olaf accepted this 
offer thankfully, and remained there. It is related 
that King Olaf was distraguished all his life for pious 
habits, and zeal in his prayers to God. But after- 
wards, when he saw his own power diminished, and 
that of his adversaries augmented, he turned all his 
mind to God's service ; for he was not distracted by- 
other thoughts, or by the labour he formerly had 
upon his hands, for during aU. the time he sat upon 
the throne he was endeavouring to promote what was 
most usefjil : and first to free and protect the country 
from foreign chiefs' oppressions, then to convert the 
people to the right faith ; and also to establish law 
and the rights of the country, which he did by letting 
justice have its way, and punishing evil-doers. 
Chapter It had becu au old custom in Norway that the 
cai^w of ^^^® ^^ lendermen, or other great men, went out in 
the revolt war-ships to gather property, and they marauded both 
Kfng^iaf. in the country and out of the country. But after 
King Olaf came to the sovereignty he protected the 
country, so that he abolished all plundering there; and 
even if they were the sons of powerful men who com- 



KINGS OF NORWAY, 287 

mitted any depredation, or did what the king con- saga vh. 
sidered against law, he did not spare them at all, but 
they must sujffer in life or limbs ; and no man's en- 
treaties, and no offer of money-penalties, could help 
them. So says Sigvat : — 

" They who on viking cruises drove 
With gifts of red gold often strove 
To buy their safety — but our chief 
Had no compassion for the thief. 
He made the bravest lose his head 
Who robbed at sea^ and pirates led; 
And his just sword gave peace to aU^ 
Sparing no robber, great or small." 

And he also says : — 

'' Great king I whose sword on many a field 
Food to the wandering wolf did yield. 
And then the thief and pirate band 
Swept wholly off by sea and land — 
Good king ! who for the people's sake 
Set hands and feet upon a stake. 
When plund^ers of great name and bold 
Harried the country as of old. 

*' The country's guardian showed his might 
When oft he made his just sword bite 
Through many a viking's neck and hair, 
And never would the guilty spare. 
King Magnus' father, I must say. 
Did many a good deed in his day. 
Olaf the Thick was stern and stout. 
Much good his victories brought out." 

He punished great and small with equal severity, 
which appeared to the chief people of the country too 
severe ; and animosity rose to the highest when they 
lost relatives by the king's just sentence, although 
they were in reality guilty. This was the origin of 
the hostility of the great men of the country to King 
Olaf, that they could not bear his just judgments. 
He again would rather renounce his dignity than 
omit righteous judgment. The accusation against 
him, of being stingy with his money, was not just, for 
he was a most generous man towards his friends ; but 
that alone was the cause of the discontent raised 



288 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VII. 



Chaftek 
CXCIII. 
Of Jokul 
Bardson. 



against him, that he appeared hard and severe in his 
retributions. Besides, King Canute offered great sums 
of money, and the great chiefs were corrupted by this, 
and by his offering them greater dignities than they 
had possessed before. The inclinations of the people, 
also, were all in favour of Earl Hakon, who was much 
beloved by the country folks when he ruled the 
country before. 

Earl Hakon had sailed with his fleet from Dron- 
theim, and gone south to More against King Olaf, as 
before related. Now when the king bore away, and 
ran into the fiord, the earl followed him thither ; and 
then Kalf Ameson came to meet him, with many of the 
men who had deserted King Olaf. Kalf was well 
received. The earl steered in through Todarfiord to 
Valdai, where the king had laid up his ships on the 
strand. He took the ships which belonged to the 
king, had them put upon the water and rigged, and 
cast lots, and put conmianders in charge of them 
according to the lots. There was a man called Jokul, 
who was an Icelander, a son of Bard Jokulson of 
Vatsdal: the lot fell upon Jokul to command the 
Bison, which King Olaf himself had commanded. Jokul 
made these verses upon it: — 

" Mine is the lot to take the helm 
WTiich Olaf owned^ who owned the realm ; 
From Suit King Olaf 's ship to steer 
(III luck I dread on his reindeer). 
My girl will never bear the tiding, 
Till o'er the wild wave I come riding 
In Olaf 's ship, who loved his gold. 
And lost his ships with wealth untold." 

We may here shortly tell what happened a long 
time after, — that this Jokul fell in with King Olaf 's 
men in the island of Gotland, and the king ordered 
him to be taken out to be beheaded. A willow twig 
accordingly was plaited in with his hair, and a man 
held him fast by it. Jokul sat down upon a bank, 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 289 

and a man swung the axe to execute him ; but Jokul sagavii. 
hearing the sound, raised his head, and the blow 
struck him in the head, and made a dreadful wound. 
As the king saw it would be his death-wound, he 
ordered them to let him lie with it. Jokul raised 
himself up, and he sang : — 

" My hard fate I moarn^ — 
Alas ! my wounds bum, 
My red wounds are gaping^ 
My life-blood escaping. 
My wounds bum sore; 
But I suffer still more 
From the king's angry word. 
Than his sharp-biting sword," 

Kalf Arneson went with Earl Hakon north to chapter 
Drontheim, and the earl invited him to enter into his of Kaif^' 
service. Kalf said he would first go home to his farm Ameson. 
of Egge, and afterwards make his determination ; and 
Kalf did so. When he came home he found his wife 
Sigrid much irritated; and she reckoned up all the 
sorrow inflicted on her, as she insisted, by King Olaf. 
First, he had ordered her first husband Olver to be 
killed. " And now since," says she, " my two sons ; and 
thou thyself, Kalf, wert present when they were cut 
oflF, and which I little expected from thee." Kalf says, 
it was much against his will that Thorer was killed. " I 
offered money-penalty for him," says he ; " and when 
Griotgard was killed, I lost my brother Arnbiom at 
the same time." She replies, " It is well thou hast 
suffered this from the king ; for thou mayst perhaps 
avenge him, although thou wilt not avenge my in- 
juries. Thou sawest how thy foster-son Thorer was 
kaied, with all the regard of the king for thee." She 
frequently brought out such vexatious speeches to 
Kalf, to which he often answered angrily ; but yet he 
allowed himself to be persuaded by her to enter into 
the earl's service, on condition of renewing his fiefs to 
him. Sigrid sent word to the earl how far she had 

VOL. II. u 



290 CHBONICMi OF THE 

SAGA VII. brought the matter with Kalf. As soon as the earl 
heard of it, he sent a message to Kalf that he should 
come to the town to him. Kalf did not decline the 
invitation, but came directly to Nidaros, and waited 
on the earl who received him kindly. In their con- 
versation it was fully agreed upon that Kalf should 
go into the earl's service, and should receive great 
fiefs. After this Kalf returned home, and had the 
greater part of the interior of the Drontheim country 
under him. As soon as it was spring Kalf rigged out 
a ship that belonged to him, and when she was ready 
he put to sea, and sailed west to England ; for he had 
heard that in spring King Canute was to sail from 
Denmark to England, and that King Canute had 
given Harald, a son of Thorkel the High, an earldom 
in Denmark. Kalf Ameson went to King Canute as 
soon as he arrived in England. Biom Guldbraa- 
scald tells of this : — 

** King Olaf eastward o'er the sea 
To Russia's monarch had to flee ; 
Our Harald' s brother ploughed the main, 
And furrowed white its dark-blue plain. 
Whilst thou — the truth I still will say. 
Nor fear nor favour can me sway — 
Thou to King Canute hastened fast, 
As soon as Olaf 's luck was past." 

Now when Kalf came to King Canute the king 
received him particularly well, and had many con- 
versations with him. Among other things, King 
Canute, in a conference, asked Kalf to bind himself 
to raise a warfare against King Olaf, if ever he should 
return to the country, "And for which," says the 
king, " I will give thee the earldom, and place thee to 
rule over Norway ; and my relation Hakon shall come 
to me, which will suit him better, for he is so honour- 
able and trustworthy that I believe he would not even 
throw a spear against the person of King Olaf if he 
came back to the country." Kalf lent his ear to what 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 



291 



the king proposed, for he had a great desire to attain saga vn. 
this high dignity; and this conclusion was settled 
upon between King Canute and Kalf. Kalf then pre- 
pared to return home, and on his departure he received 
splendid presents from King Canute. Biom the scald 
tells of these circumstances : — 

'' Sprung from old earls ! — to England's lord 
Thou owest many a thankful wonl 
For many a gift : if all be trae^ 
Thy interest has been kept in view ; 
For when thy course was bent for home, 
(Althoi^h that luck is not yet come,) 
^ That Norway should be thine/ 'tis said, 
The London king a promise made." 

Kalf thereafter returned to Norway, and came to 
his farm. 

Earl Hakon left the country this summer, and went ceiPTEa 
to England, and when he came there was well received or ^^^' 
by the king. The earl had a bride in England, and death of 
he travelled to conclude this marriage; and as he Hakon. 
intended holding his wedding in Norway, he came to 
procure those things for it in England which it was 
difficult to get in Norway. In autumn he made ready 
for his return, but it was somewhat late before he was 
clear for sea ; but at last he set out. Of his voyage 
aU that can be told is, that the vessel was lost, and 
not a man escaped. Some relate that the vessel was 
seen north of Caithness in the evening in a heavy 
storm, and the wind blowing out of Pentland Firth. 
They who believe this report say the vessel drove out 
among the breakers of the ocean ; but with certainty 
people knew only that Earl Hakon was missing in the 
ocean, and nothing belonging to the ship ever came 
to land. The same autumn some merchants came to 
Norway, who told the tidings that were going through 
the country of Earl Hakon being missing; and all 
men knew that he neither came to Norway nor to 

u 2 



292 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. England that autumn, so that Norway that winter 

was without a head. 
Chafter Biom the marshal sat at home on his farm after his 

Of morn parting from King Olaf. Biom was a celebrated man ; 

the^mar- therefore it was soon reported far and wide that he 
had set himself down in quietness. Earl Hakon and 
the other chiefs of the country heard this also, and 
sent persons with a verbal message to Biom. When 
the messengers arrived Biom received them well ; and 
afterwards Biom called them to him to a conference, 
and asked their business. He who was their foreman 
presented to Biom the salutations of Bang Canute, 
Earl Hakon, and of several chiefs. " King Canute," 
says he, " has heard much of thee, and that thou hast 
been long a follower of King Olaf the Thick, and hast 
been a great enemy of King Canute ; and this he thinks 
not right, for he will be thy friend, and the fnend of 
all worthy men, if thou wilt turn from thy friend- 
ship to King Olaf and become his enemy. And the 
only thing now thou canst do is to seek friendship 
and protection there where it is most readily to be 
found, and which all men in this northern world think 
it most honourable to be favoured with. Ye who 
have followed Olaf the Thick should consider how he 
is now separated from you ; and that now ye have no 
aid against King Canute and his men, whose lands ye 
plundered last summer, and whose friends ye mur- 
dered. Therefore ye ought to accept, with thanks, 
the friendship which the king offers you ; and it would 
become you better if you offered money even in mulct 
to obtain it." 

When he had ended his speech Biom replies, " I 
wish now to sit quietly at home, and not to enter into 
the service of any chief." 

The messenger answers, " Such men as thou art 
are just the right men to serve the king ; and now I 
can tell thee there are just two things for thee to 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 293 

choose, — either to depart in peace from thy property, saga vn. 
and wander about as thy comrade Olaf is doing ; or, 
which is evidently better, to accept King Canute's and 
Earl Hakon's friendship, become their man, and take 
the oaths of fealty to them. Eeceive now thy re- 
ward." And he displayed to him a large bag fuU of 
English money. 

Biorn was a man fond of money, and self-interested ; 
and when he saw the silver he was silent, and reflected 
with himself what resolution he should take. It 
seemed to him much to abandon his property, as he 
did not think it probable that King Olaf would ever 
have a rising in his favour in Norway. Now when 
the messenger saw that Biorn's inclinations were 
turned twards the money, he threw down two thick 
gold rings, and said, " Take the money at once, Biorn, 
and swear the oaths to King Canute; fori can pro- 
mise thee that this money is but a trifle, compared 
to what thou wilt receive if thou foUowest King 
Canute." 

By the heap of money, the fine promises, and the 
great presents, he was led by covetousness, took the 
money, went into King Canute's service, and gave 
the oaths of fealty to King Canute and Earl Hakon, 
and then the messengers departed. 

When Biorn heard the tidings that Earl Hakon Cbtapter 

CXCVIT 

was missing he soon altered his mind, and was much of Biom ' 
vexed with himself fo^ having been a traitor in his ^^l^^^^' 
fidelity to King Olaf. He thought, now, that he was jommey. 
freed from the oath by which he had bound hhnself 
to Earl Hakon. It seemed to Biom that now there 
was some hope that King Olaf might again come to 
the throne of Norway if he came back, as the country 
was without a head. Biom therefore immediately 
made himself ready to travel, and took some men 
with him. He then set out on his journey, travelling 
night and day, on horseback when he could, and by 

u 3 



294 CHRONICLE OF THB 

sAOAviL ship when he found occasion ; and never halted until 
he came east to Eussia to King Olaf, who was very 
glad to see Biom. Then the king inquired much 
about the news from Norway. Biom tells him that 
Earl Hakon was missing, and the kingdom left with- 
out a head. At this news the men who had followed 
King Olaf were very glad, — all who had left property, 
connections, and friends in Norway ; and the longing 
for home was awakened in them. Biom told King 
Olaf much news from Norway, and very anxious the 
king was to know, and asked much how his friends 
had kept their fidelity towards him. Biom answered, 
it had gone difierently with diflferent people. 

Then Biom stood up, fell at the king's feet, held 
his foot, and said, " All is in your power, sire, and in 
God's ! I have taken money from King Canute's 
men, and sworn them the oaths of fealty ; but now 
will I follow thee, and not part from thee so long as 
we both live." 

The king replies, " Stand up, Biorn : thou shalt be 
reconciled with me ; but reconcile thy perjury with 
God. I can see that but few men in Norway have 
held fast by their fealty, when such men as thou art 
could be false to me. But true it is also that people 
sit in great danger when I am distant, and they are 
exposed to the wrath of my enemies." 

Biom then reckoned up those who had principally 

bound themselves to rise in hostility against the 

king and his men; and named, among others, Erling's 

son in Jederen and their connections, Einar Tambar- 

skelver, Kalf Ameson, Thorer Hund, and Harek of 

Thiotto. 

Chapter After King Olaf camc to Eussia he was very 

of^Khig ' thoughtful, and weighed what counsel he now should 

Olaf. foUow. King Jarisleif and Queen Ingigerd offered 

him to remain with them, and receive a kingdom 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 295 

called Bulgaria*, which is a part of Eussia, and in saga vil 
which land the people were stiU heathen. King Olaf 
thought over this offer; but when he proposed it to 
his men they dissuaded him from settling himself 
there, and urged the king to betake himself to Norway 
to his own kingdom: but the king himself had re- 
solved almost in his own mind to lay down his royal 
dignity, to go out into the world to Jerusalem, or 
other holy places, and to enter into some order of 
monks. But yet the thought lay deep in his soul to 
recover again, if there should be any opportunity for 
him, his kingdom in Norway. When he thought 
over this, it recurred to his mind how all things had 
gone prosperously with him during the first ten years 
of his reign, and how afterwards every thing he un- 
dertook became heavy, difficult, and hard ; and that 
he had been unlucky on all occasions in which he had 
tried his luck. On this account he doubted if it would 
be prudent to depend so much upon his luck, as to go 
with so little strength into the hands of his enemies, 
seeing that all the people of the country had taken 
part with them to oppose King Olaf. Such cares he 
had often on his mind, and he left his cause to God, 
praying that he would do what to him seemed best. 
These thoughts he turned over in his mind, and knew 
not what to resolve upon ; for he saw how evidently 
dangerous that was which his inclination was most 
bent upon. 

One night the king lay awake in his bed, thinking CHAPTEa 
with great anxiety about his determination, and at (^^iJ?^* 
last, being tired of thinking, sleep came over him oiaPs 
towards morning ; but his sleep was so light that he '^""* 
thought he was awake, and could see all that was 
doing in the house. Then he saw a great and superb 

* Valgaria wad not the present province Bulgaria of the Turkish 
empire; hut the present Russian province Casan^ on the east of the 
Wolga. 

u 4 



296 CHBONICLE OF THE 

SAGA viL nian, in splendid clothes, standing by his bed ; and it 
came into the king's mind that this was King Olaf 
Tryggvesson who had come to him. This man said 
to him, " Thou art very sick of thinking about thy 
future resolutions ; and it appears to me wonderful 
that these thoughts should be so tumultuous in thy 
soul that thou shouldst even think of laying down 
the kingly dignity which God hath given thee, and 
of remaining here, and accepting of a kingdom from 
foreign and unknown kings. Go back rather to that 
kingdom which thou hast received in heritage, and 
rule over it with the strength which God hath given 
thee, and let not thy inferiors take it from thee. It 
is the glory of a king to be victorious over his ene- 
mies, and it is a glorious death to die in battle. Or 
art thou doubtful if thou hast right on thy side in 
the strife with thine enemies ? Thou must have no 
doubts, and must not conceal the truth from thyself. 
Thou must go back to thy country, and God will give 
open testimony that the kingdom is thine by pro- 
perty." When the king awoke he thought he saw 
the man's shoulders going out. From this time the 
king's courage rose, and he fixed firmly his resolution 
to return to Norway ; to which his inclination also 
tended most, and which he also found was the desire 
of all his men. He bethought himself also that the 
country being without a chief could be easily attacked, 
from what he had heard, and that after he came him- 
self many would turn back towards him. When the 
king told his determination to his people they all gave 
it their approbation joyfully, 
^"cc " ^^ ^® related that once upon a time, while King 
Of King Olaf was in Russia, it happened that the son of an 
i^i*ing honest widow had a sore boil upon his neck, of which 
powers. the lad lay very ill; and as he could not swallow any 
food, there was little hope of his life. The boy's 
mother went to Queen Ingigerd, with whom she was 



KINGS OF NORWAY- 



297 



acquainted, and showed her the lad. The queen said 
she knew no remedy for it. " Go," said she, " to King 
Olaf, he is the best physician here ; and beg him to lay 
his hands on thy lad, and bring him my words if he 
will not otherwise do it." She did as the queen told 
her J and when she found the king she says to him 
that her son is dangerously ill of a boil in his neck, 
and begs him to lay his hand on the boil. The king 
tells her he is not a physician, and bids her go to 
where there were physicians. She replies, that the 
queen had told her to come to him; " and told me to 
add the request from her, that you would use the 
remedy you understood, and she said that thou art the 
best physician here in the town." Then the king 
took the lad, laid his hands upon his neck, and felt the 
boil for a long time, until the boy made a very wry 
face. Then the king took a piece of bread, laid it in 
the figure of the cross upon the palm of his hand, 
and put it into the boy's mouth. He swallowed it 
down, and from that time aU the soreness left his 
neck, and in a few days he was quite well, to the great 
joy of his mother and aU his relations. Then first 
came Olaf into the repute of having as much healing 
power in his hands* as is ascribed to men who have 
been gifted by nature with healing by the touch ; and 
afterwards, when his miracles were universally acknow- 
ledged, this also was considered one of his miracles. 

It happened one Sunday that the king sat in his 
high seat at the dinner table, and had fallen into such 
deep thought that he did not observe how time went. 
In one hand he had a knife, and in the other a piece 
of fir-wood from which he cut splinters from time to 
time. The table-servant stood before him with a bowl 
in his hands ; and seeing what the king was about, and 



SAGA VIL 



Ch AFTER 

CCI. 
King Olaf 
bums the 
wood 

shavings on 
his hand 
for his 
Sabbath 
breach. 



* Is the touching for the king's evil, which was continued down to 
the time of Charles I. or later, any way connected with this royal saint's 
gift of healing hy the touch ? 



298 CHBONICLE OF THB 

sAGAYii. that he was involved in thought, he said, "It is 
Monday, sire, to-morrow." The king looked at him 
when he heard this, and then it came into his mind 
what he was doing on the Sunday. Then the Inng 
ordered a lighted candle to be brought him, swept 
together all the shavings he had made, set them on 
fire, and let them bum upon his naked hand ; showing 
thereby that he would hold fast by God's law and 
commandment, and not trespass without punishment 
on what he knew to be right, 
^cc"" When King Olaf had resolved on his return home, 
Of King he made known his intention to King Jarisleif and 
^^^' Queen Ingigerd. They dissuaded him from this ex- 
pedition, and said he should receive as much power in 
their dominions as he thought desirable ; but begged 
him not to put himself within the reach of his 
enemies with so few men as he had. Then King 
Olaf told them of his dream; adding, that he believed 
it to be God's will and providence that it should be 
so. Now when they found he was determined on 
travelling to Norway, they offered him all the assist- 
ance to his journey that he would accept from them. 
The king thanked them in many fine words for their 
good will ; and said that he accepted from them, with 
no ordinary pleasure, what might be necessary for his 
undertaking. 
Chapter Immediately after Yule, King Olaf made himself 
Of King' ready; and had about 200 of his men with him. 
jWiiey ^^S Jarisleif gave him aU the horses, and whatever 
from else he required ; and when he was Tesidj he set off. 

King Jarisleif and Queen Ingigerd p&rted from him 
with all honour ; and he left his son Magnus behind 
with the king. The first part of his journey, down to 
the sea-coast, King Olaf and his men made on the ice; 
but as spring approached, and the ice broke up, they 
rigged their vessels, and when they were ready and 
got a Avind they set out to sea, and had a good 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 299 

voyage. When Olaf came to the island of Gotland saga vn. 
with his ships he heard the news — ^which was told as 
truth, both in Sweden, Denmark, and over all Nor- 
way — that Earl Hakon was missing, and Norway with- 
out a head. This gave the king and his men good 
hope of the issue of their journey. From thence they 
sailed, when the wind suited, to Sweden, and went 
into the Maelare lake, to Westeraas, and sent men to 
the Swedish King Onund appointing a meeting. King 
Onund received his brother-in-law's message in the 
kindest manner, and went to him according to his 
invitation. Astrid also came to King Olaf, with the 
men who had attended her ; and great was the joy on 
all sides at this meeting. The Swedish king also 
received his brother-in-law King Olaf with great joy 
when they met. 

Now we must relate what, in the mean time, was Chaptir 

f CIV 

going on in Norway. Thorer Hund, in these two ofthe 
winters, had made a Lapland journey, and each winter ^^^°* '"^ 
had been a long time on the Fielde, and had gathered 
to himself great wealth by trading in various wares 
with the Laplanders. He had twelve large coats of 
reindeer-skin made for him, with so much Lapland 
witchcraft that no weapon could cut or pierce them 
any more than if they were armour of ring-mail, nor 
so much. The spring thereafter Thorer rigged a 
long-ship which belonged to him, and manned it with 
his house-servants. He summoned the bonders, de- 
manded a levy from the most northern Thing district, 
collected in this way a great many people, and pro- 
ceeded with this force southwards. Harek of Thiotto 
had also collected a great number of people ; and in 
this expedition many people of consequence took a 
part, although these two were the most distinguished. 
They made it known publicly that with this war- 
force they were going against King Olaf, to defend the 



300 CHEONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. country against him, in case he should come from the 

eastward. 
^ccT* Einar Tambarskelver had most influence in the 
OfEina'r outcr part of the Drontheim country after Earl 
^eWen" Hakon's death was no longer doubtful ; for he and his 
son Endrid appeared to be the nearest heirs to the 
moveable property the earl had possessed. Then Einar 
remembered the promises and oflFers of Mendship 
which King Canute had made him at parting; and he 
ordered a good vessel which belonged to him to be 
got ready, and embarked with a great retinue, and when 
he was ready sailed southwards along the coast, then 
set out to sea westwards, and sailed without stopping 
until he came to England. He immediately waited on 
King Canute, who received him well and joyfully. 
Then Einar opened his business to the king, and said 
he was come there to see the fulfilment of the pro- 
mises the king had made him; namely, that he, Einar, 
should have the highest title of honour in Norway if 
Earl Hakon were no more. King Canute repUes, 
that now the circumstances were altered. " I have 
now," said he, " sent men and tokens to my son 
. Swend in Denmark, and promised him the kingdom 
of Norway ; but thou shalt retain my friendship, and 
get the dignity and title which thou art entitled by 
birth to hold. Thou shall be lenderman with great 
fiefs, and be so much more raised above other lender- 
men as thou art more able than they." Einar saw 
sufficiently how matters stood with regard to his 
business, and got ready to return home ; but as he 
now knew the king's intentions, and thought it pro- 
bable if King Olaf came from the East the country 
would not be very peaceable, it came into his mind 
that it would be better to proceed slowly, and not to 
be hastening his voyage, in order to fight against 
King Olaf without his being advanced by it to any 
higher dignity than he had before. Einar accordingly 



KINGS OF NORWAT. 301 

went to sea when he was ready; but only came to saga vn. 
Norway after the events were ended which took place 
there during that summer. 

The chiefs in Norway had their spies east in Swe- Chapter 
den, and south in Denmark, to find out if King Olaf of the 
had come from Kussia. As soon as these men could p^^^Jpeopie 

in JNorway. 

get across the country, they heard the news that 
King Olaf was arrived in Sweden ; and as soon as full 
certainty of this was obtained, the war message-token 
went round the land. The whole people were called 
out to a levy, and a great army was collected. The 
lendermen whQ were from Agder, Eogaland, and 
Hordaland, divided themselves, so that some went 
towards the north, and some towards the east; for 
they thought they required people on both sides. 
Erling's sons from Jederen went eastward, with all 
the men who lived east of them, and over whom they 
were chiefs ; Aslak of Finno, and Erlend of Garde, 
with the lendermen north of them, went towards the 
north. All those now named had sworn an oath to 
King Canute to deprive Olaf of life, if opportunity 
should ofier. 

Now when it was reported in Norway that King ^"^"""^ 
Olaf was come from the East to Sweden, his friends or Haraii 
gathered together to give him aid. The most distin- fo^."'p^o, 
guished man in this flock was Harald Sigurdsson, a ceedings. 
brother* of King Olaf, who then was fifteen years of 
age, very stout, and manly of growth as if he were 
full-grown. Many other brave men were there also; 
and there were in all 600 men when they proceeded 
from the Uplands, and went eastward with their force 
through Eida forest to Vsermeland. From thence 
they went eastward through the forests to Sweden, 
and made inquiry about King Olaf 's proceedings. 

* His step-brotber — a son of Sigurd Syr, and of Astrid, King 
Olaf 's mother. He must have been more than fifteen years of age^ 
being described as a boy of four or five years old on King Olaf *s visit 
to his mother. 



302 CHBONICLE OF THE 

SAGA viL King Olal was in Sweden in spring, and had sent 
CuAmtL spies from thence into Norway. All accounts from 
Of^KiJi"' *^^* quarter agreed that there was no safety for 
oiaf'spro- him if he went there, and the people who came from 
Swedte? "* the north dissuaded him much from penetrating into 
the country. But he had firmly resolved within him- 
self, as before stated, to go into Norway; and he 
asked King Onund what strength King Onund would 
^ve him to conquer his kingdom. King Onund 
replied, that the Swedes were little inclined to make 
an expedition against Norway. " We know," says he, 
" that the Northmen are rough and warlike, and it is 
dangerous to carry hostility to their doors ; but I will 
not be slow in telling thee what aid I can give. I will 
give thee 400 chosen men from my court-men, active, 
and warlike, and well equipt for battle ; and more- 
over will give thee leave to go through my country, 
and gather to thyself as many men as thou canst get 
to follow thee." King Olaf accepted this offer, and 
got ready for his march. Queen Astrid, and Ulf hild 
the king's daughter, remained behind in Sweden. 
Chapter Just as King Olaf began his journey the men came 
King ouf to him whom the Swedish king had given, in aU 400 

ji?nbero*° ^^^» ^^^ *^® ^^S *^^^ ^^^ ^^^^ *^® Swcdcs showed 
land ' him. He advanced upwards in the country to the 
forests, and came to a district called Jaemberaland.* 
Here the people joined him who had come out of Nor- 
way to meet Mm, as before related ; and he met here his 
brother Harald, and many other of his relations, and 
it was a joyful meeting. They made out together 
1200 men. 
Chapter Thcrc was a mau called Dag, who is said to have 
Of ni^* been a son of King Ring, who fled the country from 
Ringsson. jdug OM. This Ring, it is said further, had been a 
son of Dag, and grandson of Ring, Harald Haar- 

* Now Dalcarlia^ the most productive in iron and other metals of the 
Swedish provinces. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 303 

fager's son. Thus was Dag King Olaf's relative, sagavh. 
Both Eing the father, and Dag the son, had settled 
themselves in Sweden, and got land to rule over. In 
spring, when Olaf came firom the East to Sweden, he 
sent a message to his relation Dag, that he should 
join him in this expedition with aU the force he could 
collect; and if they gained the country of Norway 
again. Dag should have no smaller part of the kingdom 
under him than his forefathers had enjoyed. When 
this message came to Dag it suited his inclination 
well, for he had a great desire to go to Norway and 
get the dominion his family had ruled over. He was 
not slow, therefore, to reply, and promised to come. 
Dag was a quick-speaking, quick-resolving man, mbc- 
ing himself up in every tMng ; eager, but of little 
understanding. He collected a force of almost 1200 
men, with which he joined King Olaf. 

King Olaf sent a message before him to all the inha- Chapter 
bited places he passed through, that the men who of^Kbg 
wished to get goods and money, and share of booty, p'^^'s 
and the lands besides which now were in the hands of ^°"™®^* 
his enemies, should come to him, and follow him. 
Thereafter King Olaf led his army through forests, 
often over desert moors, and often over large lakes ; 
and they dragged, or carried the boats, from lake to 
lake. On the way a great many followers joined the 
king, partly forest settlers, partly vagabonds. The 
places at which he halted for the night are since called 
Olaf 's Huts. He proceeded without any break upon his 
journey until he came to Jemteland, from which he 
marched north over the keel or ridge of the land. 
The men spread themselves over the hamlets, and 
proceeded, much scattered, so long as no enemy was 
expected ; but always, when so dispersed, the North- 
men accompanied the king. Dag proceeded with his 
men on another line of march, and the Swedes on a 
third with their troop. 



304 CHBONICLE OF THE 

SAGA viL There were two men, the one called Gauka-Thorer, 
CRArrBR the other Afarfeste, who were vagabonds and great 
Of vagi^ robbers, and had a company of thirty men such as 
bond-men. themselvcs. Thcsc two men were larger and stronger 
than other men, and they wanted neither courage nor 
impudence. These men heard speak of the army that 
was crossing the country, and said among themselves 
it would be a clever counsel to go to the king, follow 
him to his country, and go with him into a regular 
battle, and try themselves in this work ; for they had 
never been in any battle in which people were regu- 
larly drawn up in line, and they were curious to see 
the king's order of battle. This counsel was approved 
of by their comrades, and accordingly they went to 
the road on which King Olaf was to pass. When they 
came there they presented themselves to the king, 
with their followers, fiilly armed. They saluted him, 
and he asked what people they were. They told 
their names, and said they were natives of the place ; 
and told their errand, and that they wished to go 
with the king. The king said, it appeared to him 
there was good help in such folks. " And I have a 
great inclination," said he, " to take such; but are ye 
Christian men?" 

Gauka-Thorer replies, that he is neither Christian 
nor heathen. " I and my comrades have no faith but 
on ourselves, our strength, and the luck of victory ; 
and with this faith we slip through sufficiently 
well." 

The king replies, "A great pity it is that such 
brave slaughtering fellows did not believe in Christ 
their Creator." 

Thorer replies, " Is there any Christian man, king, 
in thy following, who stands so high in the air as we 
two brothers?" 

The king told them to let themselves be baptized, 
and to accept the true faith. " Follow me then, and I 



KINGS OP NORWAY. 305 

will advance you to great dignities ; but if ye will not saga vii . 
do so, return to your former vocation." 

Afarfaste said he would not take on Christianity, 
and he turned away. 

Then said Gauka-Thorkel, "It is a great shame 
that the king drives us thus away from his army, and 
I never before came where I was not received into the 
company of other people, and I shall never return 
back on this account." They joined accordingly the 
rear with other forest-men, and followed the troops. 
Thereafter the king proceeded west up to the keel- 
ridge of the country. 

Now when King Olaf, coming from the east, went Ch/ftkr 
over the keel-ridge and descended on the west side of the of King ' 
Fielde, where it declines towards the sea, he could see 9^^ 
from thence far over the country. Many people rode 
before the king and many after, and he himself rode 
so that there was a free space around him. He was 
silent, and nobody spoke to him, and thus he rode a 
great part of the day without looking much about 
him. Then the bishop rode up to him, asked him 
why he was so silent, and what he was thinking of; 
for, in general, he was very cheerful, and very talk- 
ative on a journey to his men, so that all who were 
near him were merry. The king rd^lied, full of 
thought, " Wonderful things have come into my mind 
a while ago. As I just now looked over Norway, out 
to the west from the Fielde, it came into my mind 
how many happy days I have had in that land. It 
appeared to me at first as if I saw over all the Dron- 
theim country, and then over all Norway ; and the 
longer this vision was before my eyes the farther, me- 
thought, I saw, until I saw over the whole wide world, 
both land and sea. Well I know the places at which 
I have been in former days ; some even which I have 
only heard speak of, and some I saw of which I had 
never heard, both inhabited and uninhabited, in this 

VOL. II. X 



306 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA viL wide world." The bishop replied that this was a holy 

vision, and very remarkable. 
Chapter When the Mnff had come lower down on the Fielde, 

CCXIV • 

Of the ' there lay a farm before him called Suul*, on the 
miracle on highest part of VaBrdal district ; and as they came 
land. nearer to the house the corn-land appeared on both 

sides of the path. The king told his people to proceed 
carefully, and not destroy the com to the bonder. 
The people observed this when the king was near ; but 
the crowd behind paid no attention to it, and the 
people ran over the com, so that it was trodden flat 
to the earth. There dwelt a bonder there called 
Thorgeir Flek, who had two sons nearly grown up. 
Thorgeir received the king and his people well, and 
offered all the assistance in his power. The king was 
pleased with his offer, and asked Thorgeir what was 
the news of the country, and if any forces were as- 
sembled against him. Thorgeir says that a great 
army was drawn together in the Drontheim country, 
and that there were some lendermen both from the 
south of the country, and from Halogaland in the 
north ; " but I do not know," says he, " if they are 
intended against you, or going elsewhere." Then 
he complained to the king of the damage and waste 
done him by the people breaking and treading down 
aU his corn-fields. The king said it was ill done to 
bring upon him any loss. Then the king rode to 
where the com had stood, and saw it was laid flat on 
the earth ; and he rode round the field, and said, " I 
expect, bonder, that God will repair thy loss, so that the 
field, within a week, will be better ; " and it proved 
the best of the corn, as the king had said. The king 
remained all night there, and in the morning he made 
himself ready, and told Thorgeir the bonder to accom- 

* Suul is a farm still known by the same name at the head of 
Vaerdal. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 307 

pany him, and Thorgeir oifered his two sons also for saga vn. 

the journey ; and although the king said that he did 

not want them with him, the lads would go. As 

they would not stay behind, the king's court-men were 

about binding them; but the king seeing it said, "Let 

them come with us: the lads will come safe back again." 

And it was with the lads as the king foretold. 

Thereafter the army advanced to Staf *, and when Chaptkr 

ccxv 
the king reached Staf's moor he halted. There he of the bap. 

ffot the certain information that the bonders were ad- tism of the 

o , , vagabond 

vancing with an army against him, and that he might forest-men. 
soon expect to have a battle with them. He mustered 
his force here, and, after reckoning them up, found he 
had more than 3000 men. There were in the army 900 
heathen men, and when he came to know it he ordered 
them to allow themselves to be baptized, saying 
that he would have no heathens with him in battle. 
" We must not," says he, " put our confidence in 
numbers, but in God alone must we trust ; for through 
his power and favour we must be victorious, and I 
will not mix heathen people with my own." When 
the heathens heard this, they held a council among 
themselves, and at last 400 men agreed to be bap- 
tized ; but 500 men refused to adopt Christianity, and 
that body returned home to their land. Then the 
brothers Gauka-Thorer and Afarfaste presented them- 
selves to the king, and offered again to follow him. 
The king asked if they had now taken baptism. 
Gauka-Thorer replied that they had not. Then the 
king ordered them to accept baptism and the true 
faith, or otherwise to go away. They stepped aside 
to talk with each other on what resolution they should 
take. Afarfaste said, " To give my opinion, I will not 
turn back, but go into the battle, and take a part on 
the one side or the other ; and I don't care much in 

* A farm in Vaerdal. 

X 2 



308 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VII. which army I am." Gauka-Thorer replies, " If I go 
into battle I will give my help to the Mng, for he has 
most need of help. And if I must believe in a God, 
why not in the white Christ as well as in any other? 
Now it is ray advice, therefore, that we let ourselves 
be baptized, since the king insists so much upon it, 
and then go into the battle with him." They all 
agreed to this, and went to the king, and said they 
would receive baptism. Then they were baptized by 
. a priest, and the baptism was confirmed by the bishop. 
The king then took them into the troop of his court- 
^ men, and said they should fight under his banner in 
the battle. 

King Olaf got certain intelligence now that it would 
be but a short time until he had a battle with the 
bonders; and after he had mustered his men, and 
reckoned up the force, he had more than 3000 men*, 
which appears to be a great army in one field. Then 
the king made the following speech to the people: 
" We have a great army, and excellent troops ; and 
now I will tell you, my men, how I will have our 
force drawn up. I will let m^ banner go forward in 
the middle of the army, and my court-men, and pur- 
suivants shall follow it, together with the war forces 
that joined us from the Uplands, and also those who 
may come to us here in the Dpontheim land. On the 
right hand of my banner shall be Dag Ringson, with 
all the men he brought to our aid ; and he shall have 
the second banner. And on the left hand of our 
line shall the men be whom the Swedish king gave 
us, together with all the peopje who came to us in 
Sweden; and they shall have .the third banner. I will 



Chapter 
CCXVI. 

King 
Olafs 
speech. 



* It does not appear that more than three or four thousand men 
could be collected and supported in those days, in one body, by any king 
of Norway. We may judge that the numbers of Danes or Northmen 
who invaded England or Normandy were in reality' small.. They con- 
quered because the people had no interests to defend against them 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 309 

also have the people divide themselves into distinct saga vii. 
flocks or parcels, so that relations and acquaintances 
should be together ; for thus they defend each other 
best, and know each other. We will have all our men 
distinguished by a mark, so as to be a field-token 
upon their helmets and shields, by painting the holy 
cross thereupon with white colour. When we come 
into battle we shall all have one countersign and 
field-cry, — ' Forward, forward. Christian men ! cross 
men ! king's men ! ' We must draw up our men in 
thinner ranks, because we have fewer people, and I 
do not wish to let them surround us with their men. 
Now let the men divide themselves into separate 
flocks, and then each flock into ranks ; then let each 
man observe well his proper place, and take notice 
what banner he is drawn up under. And now we 
shall remain drawn up in array ; and our men shaU be 
fully armed, night and day, until we know where the 
meeting shall be between us and the bonders." When 
the king had finished speaking, the army arrayed, and 
arranged itself according to the king's orders. 

Thereafter the kinff had a meeting with the chiefs Chapter 

. CCXVII 

of the different divisions, and then the men had re- King 
turned whom the king had sent out into the neigh- 
bouring districts to demand men from the bonders. 
They brought the tidings from the inhabited places 
they had gone through, that all around the country 
was stripped of all men able to carry arms, as all the 
people had joined the bonders' army ; and where they 
did find any they got but few to follow them, for the 
most of them answered that they staid at home be- 
cause they would not follow either party: they would 
not go out against the king, nor yet against their own 
relations. Thus they had got but few people. Now 
the king asked his men their counsel, and what they 
now should do. Finn Arneson answered thus to the 
king's question : " I will say what should be done, if 

X 3 



Olaf's 
counsel. 



310 CHRONICLE OF THB 

SAGA VII. I may advise. We should go with armed hand over 
aU the inhabited places, plunder all the goods, and 
burn all the habitations, and leave not a hut standing, 
and thus punish the bonders for their treason against 
their sovereign. I think many a man wiU then cast 
himself loose from the bonders' army, when he sees 
smoke and flame at home on his farm, and does not 
know how it is going with children, wives, or old men, 
fathers, mothers, and other connections. I expect 
also," he added, " that if we succeed in breaking the 
assembled host, their ranks will soon be thinned ; for 
so it is with the bonders, that the counsel which is the 
newest is always the dearest to them all, and most 
followed." When Finn had ended his speech it met 
with general applause ; for many thought weU of such 
a good occasion to make booty, and all thought the 
bonders weU deserved to suffer damage; and they 
also thought it probable, what Finn said, that many 
would in this way be brought to forsake the assem- 
bled army of the bonders. Thormod Kolbrunarscald 
made these verses to the same effect : — 

" Fire house and hut throughout the land ! 
Bum all around^ our mountain-hand ! 
And with our good swords stout and hold 
The king's own we'll win hack^ and hold. 
The Drontheimers should nothing find 
But ashes whirling in the wind, 
Where houses stood — what melts the ice 
Should burn the hut, by my advice.*' 

Now when the king heard the warm expressions of 
his people he told them to listen to him, and said, 
" The bonders have well deserved that it should be 
done to them as ye desire. They also know that I 
have formerly done so, burning their habitations, and 
punishing them severely in many ways ; but then I 
proceeded against them with fire and sword because 
they rejected the true faith, betook themselves to 
sacrifices, and would not obey my commands. We 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 311 

had then God's honour to defend. But this treason saga vil 
against their sovereign is a much less grievous crime, 
although it does not become men who have any man- 
hood in them to break the faith and vows they have 
sworn to me. Now, however, it is more in my power 
to spare those who have dealt ill with me, than those 
whom Grod hated. I will, therefore, that my people 
proceed gently, and commit no ravage. First, I will 
proceed to meet the bonders : if we can then come to 
a reconciliation, it is well ; but if they will fight with 
us, then there are two things before us: either we 
fail in the battle, and then it will be well advised 
not to have to retire encumbered with spoil and cattle ; 
or we gain the victory, and then ye will be the 
heirs of aU who fight now against us : for some will 
fall, and others will fly, but both will have forfeited 
their goods and properties, and then it will be good 
to enter into full houses and well-stocked farms ; but 
what is burnt is of use to no man, and with pillage 
and force more is wasted than what turns to use. 
Now we will spread out far through the inhabited 
places, and take with us all the men we can find able 
to carry arms. The men will also capture cattle for 
slaughter, or whatever else of provision that can serve 
for food ; but not do any other ravage. But I wUl 
see willingly that ye kill any spies of the bonder army 
ye may fall in with. Dag and his people shall go by 
the north side down along the valley, and I will go 
on along the country road, and so we shall meet in 
the evening, and all have one night quarter.'' 

It is related that when Kinff Olaf drew up his men Chapter 

• . . CCXVIII 

in battle order, he made a shield rampart with his ofKing 
troop that should defend him in battle, for which he ^J^^ 
selected the strongest and boldest. Thereafter he 
called his scalds, and ordered them to go in within 
the shield defence. " Ye shall," says the king, " re- 
main here, and see the circumstances which may take 

X 4 



312 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA vii. place, and then ye will not have to follow the repoVts 
of others in what ye afterwards tell or sing concerning 
it." There were Thormod Kolbrunarscald, Gissur 
Gulbraascald, a foster-son of Hofgarde Refr, and 
Thorfin Mudr. Then said Thormod to Gissur, " Let 
us not stand so close together, brother, that Sigvat 
the scald should not find room when he comes. He 
must stand before the king, and the king wiU not 
have it otherwise." The king heard this, and said, 
" Ye need not sneer at Sigvat, because he is not here. 
Often has he followed me well, and now he is praying 
for us, and that we greatly need." Thormod replies, 
" It may be, sire, that ye now require prayers most ; 
but it would be thin around the banner-staff if all thy 
court-men were now on the way to Rome. True it 
was what we spoke about, that no man who would 
speak with you could find room for Sigvat." 

Thereafter the scalds talked among themselves that 
it would be well to compose a few songs of remem- 
brance about the events which would soon be taking 
place. Then Gissur sang : — 

*' From me shall bonder girl ne'er hear 
A thought of sorrow, care, or fear : 
I wish my girl knew how gay 
We arm us for our viking fray. 
Many and brave they are, we know. 
Who come against us there below; 
But, life or death, we, one and all. 
By Norway's king will stand or fail." 

And Thorfin Mudr made another song, viz. : — 

" Dark is the cloud of men and shields, 
Slow moving up through Vserdal's fields : 
These Vardal folks presume to bring 
Their armed force against their king. 
On ! let us feed the carrion crow, — 
Give her a feast in every blow ; 
And, above all, let Drontheim's hordes 
Feel the sharp edge of true men's swords," 

And Thormod sang, — 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 313 

*' The whistling arrows pipe to battle^ saga vii. 

Sword and shield their war-call rattle. 

Up ! brave men, up ! the faint heart here 
Finds courage when the danger s near. 
Up ! brave men, up ! with Olaf on ! 
With heart and hand a field is won. 
One viking cheer ! — then, stead of words, 
We'll speak with our death-dealing swords." 

These songs were immediately got by heart by the 
army. 

Thereafter the king made himself ready, and marched Chapter 
down through the valley. His whole forces took up of King ' 
their night-quarter in one place, and lay down aU ^l^l^^^^ 
night under their shields ; but as soon as day broke souls of 
the king again put his army in order, and that being shouid^b^ 
done they proceeded down through the valley. Many s^****- 
bonders then came to the king, of whom the most 
joined his army ; and all, as one man, told the same 
tale, — that the lendermen had collected an enormous 
army, with which they intended to give battle to the 
Hng. 

The king took many marks of silver, and delivered 
them into the hands of a bonder, and said, " This 
money thou shalt conceal, and afterwards lay out, — 
some to churches, some to priests, some to alms-men, 
— as gifts for the hfe and souls of those who fight 
against us, and may fall in battle." 

The bonder repUes, " Should you not rather give 
this money for the soul-mulct of your own men ?" 

The king says, " This money shall be given for the 
souls of those who stand against us in the ranks of 
the bonders' army, and fall by the weapons of our 
own men. The men who follow us to battle, and fall 
therein, will all be saved together with ourself." 

This night the king lay with his army around him Chapter 
on the field, as before related, and lay long awake in or m^* 
prayer to God, and slept but little. Towards morning mod KoI- 
a slumber fell on him, and when he awoke daylight J^±' 



314 CHRONICLE OF THE 

sAGAjrii. ^as shooting up. The king thought it too early to 
awaken the army, and asked where Thormod the scald 
was. Thormod was at hand, and asked what was the 
king's pleasure. " Sing us a song," said the king. 
Thormod raised himself up, and sang so loud that the 
whole army could hear him. He began to sing the 
old Biarkamal*, of which these are the first verses : — 

'* The day is breakings — 

The house cock^ shaking 

His rustling wings^ 

While priest-bell rings^ 

Crows up the mom^ 

And touting horn 

Wakes thralls to work and weep : 

Ye sons of Adilf^ cast off sleep! 

Wake up ! wake up ! 

Nor wassail cup^ 

Nor maiden's jeer. 

Awaits you here. 

Hrolf J of the bow ! 

Hare § of the blow ! 
Up in your might ! the day is breaking; 
'Tis Hildur's game|| that bides your waking." 

Then the troops awoke, and when the song was 
ended the people thanked him for it ; and it pleased 
many, as it was suitable to the time and occasion, 
and they called it the house-carle's whet. The king 
thanked him for the pleasure, and took a gold ring 
that weighed half a mark and gave it him. Thormod 
thanked the king for the gift, and said, " We have a 
good king; but it is not easy to say how long the 

* The Biarkamal is so called because it was composed and sung by 
Bodvar Biarke, a great hero among the Northmen, before the battle in 
which he, Rolf Krake, and many others felL Saxo Grammaticus, lib. ii., 
gives a paraphrase in Latin hexameters of part of the Biarkamal not in 
Snorro. The £dda has also some strophes of the Biarkamal. 

t Rolf Krake's men were on the side of Adil fighting against King 
Ale, and therefore are called Adil's sons. 

i Hrolf appears to have been a name applied to bowmen, and Hare 
to axemen, as we apply Jack to seamen. 

§ Hare was one of Odin's names — the striker. 

II Hildur's game is the battle, — from the name of the war-goddess 
Hildur. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 315 

king's life may be. It is my prayer, sire, that thou sagavh. 
shouldst never part from me either in life or death." 

The king replies, " We shall all go together so long 
as I rule, and as ye will foUow me." 

Thormod says, " I hope, sire, that whether in safety 
or danger I may stand near you as long as I can 
stand, whatever we may hear of Sigvat travelling 
with his gold-hilted sword." Then Thormod made 
these lines : — 

" To thee, my king, I'll still be true. 
Until another scald I view. 
Here in the field with golden sword. 
As in thy hall, with flattering word. 
Thy scald shall never be a craven. 
Though he may feast the croaking raven. 
The warrior's fate unmoved I view, — 
To thee, my king, I'll still be true." 

King Olaf led his army farther down through the Chapter 
valley, and Dag and his men went another way, and King ojaf 
the king did not halt until he came to Stiklestad. 
There he saw the bonder army spread out all around; 
and there were so great numbers that people were 
going on every footpath, and great crowds were col- 
lected far and near. They also saw there a troop 
which came down from Vaerdal, and had been out to 
spy. They came so close to the king's people that 
they knew each other. It was Rut of Viggia, with 
thirty men. The king ordered his pursuivants to go 
out against Rut, and make an end of him, to which 
his men were instantly ready. The king said to the 
Icelanders, " It is told me that in Iceland it is the 
custom that the bonders give their house-servants a 
sheep to slaughter ; now I give you a ram to slaugh- 
.ter.* The Icelanders were easily invited to this, and 
went out immediately with a few men against Rut, 
and killed him and the troop that followed him. 
When the king came to Stiklestad he made a halt, 

* Rut means a young ram. 



comes to 
Stiklestad. 



316 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VH. and made the army stop, and told his people to alight 
from their horses, and get ready for battle ; and the 
people did as the king ordered. Then he placed his 
army in battle array, and raised his banner. Dasj 
was not yet arrived iith his men, so that his wing of 
the battle array was wanting. Then the king said 
the Upland men should go forward in their place, and 
raise their banner there. " It appears to me ad- 
visable," says the king, " that Harald my brother 
should not be in the battle, for he is still in the years 
of childhood only." Harald replies, " Certainly I shall 
be in the battle, for I am not so weak that I cannot 
handle the sword ; and as to that, I have a notion of 
tying the sword-handle to my hand. None is more 
willing than I am to give the bonders a blow ; so I 
shall go with my comrades." It is said that Harald 
made these lines : — 

'' Our army's wing, where I shall stand, 
I will bold good with heart and hand ; 
My mother's eye shall joy to see 
A battered, blood-stained shield from me. 
The brisk young scald should gaily go 
Into the fray, give blow for blow. 
Cheer on his men, gain inch by inch. 
And from the spear-point never flinch." 

Harald got his will, and was allowed to be in the 
battle. 

A bonder, by name Thorgils Hialmeson, father to 
Grim the Good, dwelt in Stiklestad farm. Thorgils 
offered the king his assistance, and was ready to go 
into battle with him. The king thanked him for the 
offer. " I would rather," says the king, " thou shouldst 
not be in the fight. Do us rather the service to take 
care of the people who are wounded, and to bury those 
who may fall, when the battle is over. Should it 
happen, bonder, that I fall in this battle, bestow the 
care on my body that may be necessary, if that be 
not forbidden thee." Thorgils promised the king what 
he desired. 



Chapter 
CCXXII. 

Of Thor- 
gils Hial- 
meson. 



KINGS or NORWAY. 



317 



Now when King Olaf had drawn up his army in saga vii. 
battle array he made a speech, in which he told the chapter 

• r'PXX TTT 

people to raise their spirit, and go boldly forward, if oiafs 
it came to a battle. " We have," says he, " many »p^««^- 
men, and good ; and although the bonders may have 
a somewhat larger force than we, it is fate that rules 
over victory. This I will make known to you so- 
lemnly, that I shall not fly from this battle, but shall 
either be victorious over the bonders, or fall in the 
fight. I will pray to God that the lot of the two may 
befall me which will be most to my advantage. With 
this we may encourage ourselves, that we have a more 
just cause than the bonders ; and likewise that God 
must either protect us and our cause in this battle, or 
give us a far higher recompence for what we may lose 
here in the world than what we ourselves could ask. 
Should it be my lot to have any thing to say after the 
battle, then shall I reward each of you according to 
his service, and to the bravery he displays in the 
battle ; and if we gain the victory, there must be land 
and moveables enough to divide among you, and which 
are now in the hands of your enemies. Let us at the 
first make the hardest onset, for then the consequences 
are soon seen. There being a great difference in the 
numbers, we have to expect victory from a sharp 
assault only ; and, on the other hand, it will be heavy 
work for us to fight until we are tired, and unable to 
fight longer ; for we have fewer people to relieve with 
than they, who can come forward at one time and 
retreat and rest at another. But if we advance so 
hard at the first attack that those who are foremost 
in their ranks must turn round, then the one will fall 
over the other, and their destruction will be the 
greater the greater numbers there are together." 
When the king had ended his speech it was re- 
ceived with loud applause, and the one encouraged 
the other. 



318 



CHRONICLE OP THE 



SAGA VII. Thord Folason carried King Olaf 's banner. So 

cTI^ER says Sigvat the scald, in the death song which he 

Of Th^r7' composed about King Olaf, and put together according 

T?^u„«« ^Q ^Yie saga of this insurrection : — 



Folason. 



Chapter 

ccxxv. 

Of King 
Olaf's 



Chaptkr 

ccxxvi. 

King 
Olaf's 
dream. 



" Thord, I have heard, hy Olaf 's side. 
Where raged the battle's wildest tide, 
Moved on, and, as by one accord^ 
Moved with them every heart and sword. 
The banner of the king on high. 
Floating all splendid in the sky 
From golden shaft, aloft he bore, — 
The Norsemen's rallying point of yore." 

King Olaf was armed thus : — He had a gold-mounted 
helmet on his head, and had in one hand a white 
shield, on which the holy cross was inlaid in gold. 
In his other hand he had a lance, which to the pre- 
sent day stands beside the altar in Christ Church. 
In his belt he had a sword, which was called Hneyter, 
which was remarkably sharp, and of which the handle 
was worked with gold. He had also a strong coat of 
ring-mail. Sigvat the scald speaks of this : — 

" A greater victory to gain, 
Olaf the Stout strode o'er the plain 
In strong chain armour, aid to bring 
To his brave men on either wing. 
High rose the fight and battle-heat, — 
The clear blood ran beneath the feet 
Of Swedes, who from the East came there. 
In Olaf's gain or loss to share." 

Now when King Olaf had drawn up his men the 
army of the bonders had not yet come near upon any 
quarter, so the king said the people should sit down 
and rest themselves. He sat down himself, and the 
people sat around him in a wide-spread crowd. He 
leaned down, and laid his head upon Finn Ameson's 
knee. There a slumber came upon him, and he slept a 
httle while ; but at the same time the bonders' army 
was seen advancing with raised banners, and the mul- 
titude of these was very great. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 319 

Then Finn awakened the king, and said that the saga vn. 
bonder-army advanced against them. 

The king awoke, and said, " Why did you waken 
me, Finn, and did not allow me to enjoy my dream?" 

Finn, " Thou must not be dreaming ; but rather 
thou shouldst be awake, and preparing thyself against 
the host which is coming down upon us; or, dost 
thou not see that the whole bonder crowd is coming? " 

The king replies, " They are not yet so near to us, 
and it would have been better to have let me sleep." 

Then said Finn, " What was the dream, sire, of 
which the loss appears to thee so great that thou 
wouldst rather have been left to waken of thyself?" 

Now the king told his dream, — that he seemed 
to see a high ladder, upon which he went so high in 
the air that heaven was open : for so high reached the 
ladder. "And when you awoke me, I was come to the 
highest step towards heaven." 

Finn replies, " This dream does not appear to me 

so good as it does to thee. I think it means that thou 

art fey* ; unless it be the mere want of sleep that has 

worked upon thee." 

When Kinff Olaf was arrived at Stiklestad, it hap- Chapter 
. ' JT ccxxvn. 

pened, among other circumstances, that a man came of Amiiot 

to him ; and although it was nowise wonderful that ^^"("^'^ 
there came many men from the districts, yet this 
must be regarded as unusual, that this man did not 
appear hke the other men who came to him. He was 
so taU that none stood higher than up to his shoulders : 
very handsome he was in countenance, and had beau- 
tiful fair hair. He was well armed ; had a fine helmet, 
and ring armour ; a red shield ; a superb sword in 
his belt; and in his hand a gold-mounted spear, the 
shaft of it so thick that it was a handful to grasp. 

♦ The involuntary actions or words of a man doomed^ not sane and 
composed action or word ; but foretelling his speedy death. 



320 CHEONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. The man went before the king, saluted him, and 
asked if the king would accept his services. 

The king asked his name and family, also what 
countryman he was. 

He replies, " My family is in Jemteland and Hel- 
singland, and my name is Arnliot Gellina; but this 
I must not forget to tell you, that I came to the 
assistance of those men you sent to Jemteland to col- 
lect scatt, and I gave into their hands a silver dish, 
which I sent you as a token that I would be your 
friend." 

Then the king asked Arnliot if he was a Chris- 
tian or not. 

He replied, " My faith has been this, to rely upon 
my power and strength, and which faith hath hitherto 
given me satisfaction ; but now I intend rather to put 
my faith, sire, in thee." 

The king replies, " If thou wilt put faith in me, 
thou must also put faith in what I will teach thee. 
Thou must believe that Jesus Christ has made heaven 
and earth, and all mankind, and to him shall all those 
who are good and rightly believing go after death." 

Arnliot answers, " I have indeed heard of the 
white Christ, but neither know what he proposes, 
nor what he rules over ; but now I will believe all 
that thou sayest to me, and lay down my lot in your 
hands." 

Thereupon Arnliot was baptized. The king faught 

him so much of the holy faith as appeared to him 

needful, and placed him in the front rank of the order 

of battle, in advance of his banner, where also Gauka- 

Thorer and Afarfaste with their men were. 

rcxxvm ^ow shall we relate what we have left behind in 

Concerning our talc, — that the lendermen and bonders had col- - 

cdkct^d lected a vast host as soon as it was reported that 

in Norway. King Olaf was comc from Russia, and had arrived in 

Sweden ; but when they heard that he had come to 



KINGS OF NORWAY, 321 

Jemteland, and intended to proceed westwards over saga vh. 
the keel-ridge to Vaerdal, they brought their forces 
into the Drontheim country, where they gathered 
together the whole people, free and unfree, and pro- 
ceeded towards VaBrdal with so great a body of men, 
that there was nobody in Norway at that time who 
had seen so large a force assembled. But the force, as 
it usually happens in so great a multitude, consisted 
of many different sorts of people. There were many 
lendermen, and a great many powerful bonders ; but 
the great mass consisted of labourers and cottars. 
The chief strength of this army lay in the Dron- 
theim land, and it was the most warm in enmity and 
opposition to the king. 

When Kinff Canute had, as before related, laid all Chapter 

CCXXIX. 

Norway under his power, he set Earl Hakon to ma- of Bishop 
nage it, and gave the earl a court-bishop, by name ^*^"'^ 
Sigurd, who was of Danish descent, and had been 
long with King Canute. This bishop was of a very 
hot temper, and particularly obstinate, and haughty 
in his speech ; but supported Bang Canute all he could 
in conversation, and was a great enemy of King Olaf. 
He was now also in the bonders' army, spoke often 
before the people, and urged them much to insur- 
rection against King Olaf. 

At a House-thing, at which a great many people Chapter 
were assembled, the bishop desired to be heard, and bS^^^ 
made the following speech : " Here are now assembled Sigurd's 
a great many men, so that probably there will never 
be opportunity in this poor country of seeing so 
great a native army ; but it would be desirable if this 
strength and multitude could be a protection : for it 
will all be needed, if this Olaf does not give over bring- 
ing war and strife upon you. From his very earliest 
youth he has been accustomed to plunder and kill : 
for which purposes he drove widely around through 
all countries, until he turned at last against this, 

VOL. II. y 



322 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. where he began to show hostilities against the men 
who were the best and most powerful; and even 
against King Canute, whom all are bound to serve 
according to their ability, and in whose scatt-lands he 
set himself down. He did the same to Olaf the Swe- 
dish king. He drove the earls Swend and Hakon 
away from their heritages ; and was even most tyran- 
nical towards his own connections, as he drove all the 
kings out of the Uplands: although, indeed, it was but 
just reward for having been false to their oaths of 
fealty to King Canute, and having followed this King 
Olaf in all the folly he could invent ; so their friend- 
ship ended according to their deserts, by this king 
mutilating some of them, taking their kingdoms him- 
self, and ruining every man in the country who had 
an honourable name. Ye know yourselves how he 
has treated the lendermen, of whom many of the 
worthiest have been murdered, and many obliged to 
fly from their country ; and how he has roamed far 
and wide through the land with robber bands, burning 
and plundering houses, and killing people. Who is 
the man among us here of any consideration who has 
not some great injury from him to avenge ? Now he 
has come hither with a foreign troop, consisting 
mostly of forest-men, vagabonds, and such marauders. 
Do ye think he wiU now be more merciful to you, 
when he is roaming about with such a bad crew, after 
committing devastations which all who followed him 
dissuaded him from? Therefore it is now my advice, 
that ye remember King Canute's words when he 
told you, if King Olaf attempted to return to the 
country ye should defend the liberty King Canute 
had promised you, and should oppose and drive away 
such a vile pack. Now the only thing to be done is, 
to advance against them, and cast forth these male- 
factors to the wolves and eagles, leaving their corpses 
on the spot they cover, unless ye drag them aside 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 323 

to out-of-the-way corners in the woods or rocks. No saga vii. 
man would be so imprudent as to remove them to 
churches, for they are all robbers and evil-doers." 
When he had ended his speech it was hailed with 
the loudest applause, and- all unanimously agreed to 
act according to his recommendation. 

The lendermen who had come together appointed ^^^^xxi 
meetings with each other, and consulted together how of the 
they should draw up their troops, and who should be ^®»*^«'^™®"- 
their leader. Kalf Ameson said that Harek of Thi- 
otto was best fitted to be the chief of this army, 
for he was descended from Harald Haarfager's race. 
" The king also is particularly enraged against him on 
account of the murder of Grankel, and therefore he 
would be exposed to the severest fate if Olaf re- 
covered the kingdom: and Harek withal is a man 
experienced in battles, and a man who does much for 
honour alone." 

Harek replies, that the men are best suited for this 
who are in the flower of their age. " I am now," 
says he, " an old and decaying man, not able to do 
much in battle: besides, there is near relationship 
between me and King Olaf; and although he seems 
not to put great value upon that tie, it would not be- 
seem me to go as leader of the hostilities against him, 
before any other in this meeting. On the other 
hand, thou, Thorer, art well suited to be our chief in 
this battle against King Olaf; and thou hast distinct 
grounds for being so, both because thou hast to 
avenge the death of thy relation, and also hast been 
driven by him as an outlaw from thy property. Thou 
hast also promised King Canute, as well as thy con- 
nections, to avenge the murder of thy relative As- 
biom; and dost thou suppose there ever will be a 
better opportunity than this of taking vengeance on 
Olaf for all these insults and injuries ? " 

Thorer replies thus to his speech : " I do not con- 

y 2 



324 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VII. fide in myself so much as to raise the banner against 
King Olaf, or, as chief, to lead on this army ; for the 
people of Drontheim have the greatest part in this 
armament, and I know well their haughty spirit, and 
that they would not obey me, or any other Halogaland 
man, although I need not be reminded of my injuries 
to be roused to vengeance on King Olaf. I remem- 
ber well my heavy loss when King Olaf slew four 
men, all distinguished both by birth and personal 
qualities ; namely, my brother's son Asbiorn, my sis- 
ter's sons Thorer and Griotgard, and their father 01- 
ver; and it is my duty to- take vengeance for each 
man of them. I will not conceal that I have selected 
eleven of my house-servants for that purpose, and of 
those who are the most daring ; and I do not think 
we shall be behind others in exchanging blows with 
King Olaf, should opportunity be given." 

Then Kalf Ameson desired to speak. " It is highly 
necessary," says he, " that this business we have on 
hand do not turn out a mockery and childwork, now 
that an army is collected. Something else is needful, 
if we are to stand battle with King Olaf, than that 
each should shove the danger from himself; for we 
must recollect that although King Olaf has not many 
people compared to this army of ours, the leader of 
them is intrepid, and the whole body of them will be 
true to him, and obedient in the battle. But if we 
who should be the leaders of this army show any 
fear, and will not encourage the army and go at the 
head of it, it must happen that with the great body 
of our people the spirit will leave their hearts, and 
the next thing will be that each will seek his own 
safety. Although we have now a great force assem- 
bled, we shall find our destruction certain, when we 
meet King Olaf and his troops, if we the chiefs of the 
people are not confident in our cause, and have not 
the whole army confidently and bravely going along 



Chapter 
CCXXXII. 

Kalf 

Arneson*s 

speech. 



KINGS OF NORWAY, 325 

with US. If it cannot be so, we had better not risk a sagavh. 
battle ; and then it is easy to see that nothing would 
be left us but to shelter ourselves under King Olaf 's 
mercy, however hard it might be, as then we would 
be less guilty than we now may appear to him to be. 
Yet I know there are men in his ranks who would 
secure my life and peace if I would seek it. Will ye now 
adopt my proposal — then shalt thou, friend Thorer, 
and thou, Harek, go under the banner which we will 
all of us raise up, and then follow. Let us all be speedy 
and determined in the resolution we have taken, and 
put ourselves so at the head of the bonders' army that 
they see no distrust in us ; for then will the common 
man advance with spirit when we go merrily to work 
in placing the army in battle-order, and in encourag- 
ing the people to the strife." 

When Kalf had ended they all concurred in what 
he proposed, and all would do what Kalf thought of 
advantage. All desired Kalf to be the leader of the 
army, and to give each what place in it he chose. 

Kalf Ameson then raised his banner, and drew up Chapter 
his house-servants along with Harek of Thiotto and How the * 
his men. Thofer Hund, with his troop, was at the ^arons^set 
head of the order of battle in front of the banner; and banners. 
on both sides of Thorer was a chosen body of bonders, 
all of them the most active and best armed in the 
forces. This part of the array was long and thick, 
and in it were drawn up the Drontheim people and 
the Halogalanders. On the right wing was another 
array; and on the left of the main array were drawn 
up the men from Rogaland, Hordaland, the Fiord 
districts, and Sogn, and they had the third banner. 

There was a man called Thorstein Knarrarsmed, chapter 
who was a merchant and master ship-carpqnter, stout of t^«^* 
and strong, very passionate, and a great manslayer. tein Knar- 
He had been in enmity against Kiug Olaf, who had ^"^^^ ' 
taken from him a new and large merchant vessel he 

Y 3 



326 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. had built, on account of some manslaughter-mulct, 

incurred in the course of his misdeeds, which he owed 

to the king. Thorstein, who was with the bonders' 

army, went forward in front of the line in which 

Thorer Hund stood, and said^ " Here I will be, Thorer, 

in your ranks ; for I think if I and King Olaf meet, to 

be the first to drive a weapon at him, if I can get so 

near, to repay him for the robbery of the ship he took 

from me, which was the best that ever went on 

merchant voyage." Thorer and his men received 

Thorstein, and he went uito their ranks. 

Chapter Whcu the boudcrs' mcH and array were drawn up 

ccxxxv 

Of the pr^ the lendermen addressed the men, and ordered them 

thr*^°'°^ to take notice of the place to which each man belonged, 
•ants. under which banner each should be, who there were in 
front of the banner, who were his side-men, and that they 
should be brisk and quick in taking up their places in 
the array ; for the army had still to go a long way, 
and the array might be broken in the course of march. 
Then they encouraged the people ; and Kalf invited 
all the men who had any injury to avenge on King 
Olaf, to place themselves under the banner which was 
advancing against King Olaf's own 'banner. They 
should remember the distress he had brought upon 
them ; and, he said, never was there a better opportu- 
nity to avenge their grievances, and to free themselves 
from the yoke and slavery he had imposed on them. 
" Let him," says he, " be held a useless coward who 
does not fight this day boldly: and they are not 
innocents who are opposed to you, but people who 
wlQ not spare you if ye spare them." 

Kalf 's speech was received with loud applause, and 

shouts of encouragement were heard through the 

whole army. 

Chapter Thereafter the bonders' army advanced to Stiklestad, 

of^^^' where King Olaf was already with his people. Kalf 

king'? and ^ud Harck went in front, at the head of the army 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 327 

under their banners. But the battle did not begin saga vn. 
inmiediately on their meeting; for the bonders delayed the pea- 
the assault, because all their men were not come upon ^^*f^ 
the plain, and they waited for those who came after 
them. Thorer Hund had come up with his troop 
the last, for he had to take care that the men did not 
go off behind when the battle-cry was raised, or the 
armies were closing with each other; and therefore 
Kalf and Harek waited for Thorer. For the encou- 
ragement of their men in the battle the bonders had 
the field-cry — " Forward, forward, bonderman ! " 
King Olaf also made no attack, for he waited for Dag 
and the people who followed him. At last the king 
saw Dag and his men approaching. It is said that 
the army of the bonders was not less on this day than 
a hundred times a hundred men. Sigvat the scald 
speaks thus of the numbers : — 

*' I grieve to think the king had brought 
Too small a force for what he sought : 
He held his gold too fast to bring 
The numbers that could make him king. 
The foemen, more than two to one. 
The victory by numbers won; 
And this alone, as I've heard say, 
Against King Olaf turned the day." 

As the armies on both sides stood so near that chaptkh 

CCXXXVTT 

people knew each other, the king said, " Why art Meeting of 
thou here, Kalf, for we parted good friends south in Ind the^ 
More? It beseems thee ill to fight against us, or to peasants. 
throw a spear into our army; for here are four of thy 
brothers." 

Kalf replied, " Many things come to pass differently 
from what may appear seemly. You parted from us 
so that it was necessary to seek peace with those who 
were behind in the country. Now each must remain 
where he stands ; but if I might advise, we should be 
reconciled." 

Then Finn, his brother, answered, " This is to be 

Y 4 



328 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. observed of Kalf, that when he speaks fairly he has it 
in his mind to do ill." 

The king answered, " It may be, Kalf, that thou art 
inclined to reconciliation ; but, methinks, the bonders 
do not appear so peaceful." 

Then Thorgeir of Quiststad said, " You shall now 
have such peace as many formerly have received at 
your hands, and which you shall now pay for." 

The king replies, " Thou hast no occasion to hasten 

so much to meet us ; for fate has not decreed to thee 

to-day a victory over me, who raised thee to power 

and dignity from a mean station." 

Chaptkr Now came Thorer Hund, went forward in front of 

CCXXXVIIL ■»-. 

Beginning thc banner with his troop, and caUed out, " Forward, 
^*stikie"** forward, bonderman ! " Thereupon the bondermen 
stad. raised the war-cry, and shot their arrows and spears. 

The king's men raised also a war-shout ; and that 
done, encouraged each other to advance, crying out, 
" Forward, forward, Christ-man! cross-man! king's 
man ! " When the bonders who stood outermost on 
the wings heard it, they repeated the same cry ; but 
when the other bonders heard them they thought 
these were king's men, turned their arms against 
them, and they fought together, and many were slain 
before they knew each other. The weather was beau- 
tiful, and the sun shone clear ; but when the battle 
began the heaven and the sun became red, and before 
the battle ended it became as dark as at night. King 
Olaf had drawn up his army upon a rising ground, 
and it rushed down from thence upon the bonder- 
army with such a fierce assault, that the bonders' array 
bent before it ; so that the breast of the king's array 
came to stand upon the ground on which the rear of 
the bonders' array had stood, and many of the bonders' 
army were on the way to fly, but the lendermen and 
their house-men stood fast, and the battle became 
very severe. So says Sigvat : — 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 



329 



^' Thundered the ground beneath their tread^ saga vir. 

As, iron-cladj thick-tramping, sped 
The men-at-arms, in row and rank. 
Past Stiklestad's sweet grassy bank. 
The clank of steel, the bowstrings' twang. 
The sounds of battle, loudly rang; 
And bowmen hurried on advancing. 
Their bright helms in the sunshine glancing/* 

The lendermen urged their men, and forced them 
to advance. Sigvat speaks of this : — 

'^ Midst in their line their banner flies, 
Thither the stoutest bonder hies : 
But many a bonder thinks of home. 
And many wish they ne'er had come." 

Then the bonder-army pushed on from all quarters. 
They who stood in front hewed down with their 
swords; they who stood next thrust with their spears ; 
and they who stood hindmost shot arrows, cast spears, 
or threw stones, hand-axes, or sharp stakes. Soon 
there was a great fall of men in the battle. Many 
were down on both sides. In the first onset fell 
Arnliot Gallina, Gauka Thorer, and Afarfaste, with all 
their men, after each had killed a man or two, and 
some indeed more. Now the ranks in front of the 
king's banner began to be thinned, and the king 
ordered Thord to carry the banner forward, and the 
king himself followed it with the troop he had chosen 
to stand nearest to him in battle ; and these were the 
best armed men in the field, and the most expert in 
the use of their weapons. Sigvat the scald tells of 
this : — 

<' Loud was the battle-storm there. 
Where the king's banner flamed in air. 
The king beneath his banner stands. 
And there the battle he commands." 

Olaf came forth from behind the shield-bulwark, 
and put himself at the head of the array ; and when 
the bonders looked him in the face they were fright- 
ened, and let their hands drop. So says Sigvat : — 



830 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VU 



Chapter 
CCXXXIX. 

Thorgeir 
of Quist- 
stad*s fall. 



'^ I think I saw them shrink with fear 
Who would not shrink from foeman's spear^ 
When Olaf 's lion-eye was cast 
On them^ and called up all the past. 
Clear as the serpent's eye — his look 
No Drontheim man could standi hut shook 
Beneath its glance^ and skulked away^ 
Knowing his king — and cursed the day." 

The combat became fierce, and the king went for- 
ward in the fray. So says Sigvat : — 

^^ When on they came in fierce array. 
And round the king arose the fray, 
With shield on arm hrave Olaf stood. 
Dyeing his sword in tJieir best blood. 
For vengeance on his Drontheim foes. 
On their best men he dealt his blows : 
He who knew well death's iron play, 
To his deep vengeance gave full sway." 

King Olaf fought most desperately. He struck the 
lenderman before mentioned (Thorgeir of Quiststad) 
across the face, cut off the nose-piece of his helmet, 
and clove his head down below the eyes so that they 
almost fell out. When he fell the king said, " Was it 
not true, Thorgeir, what I told thee, that thou shouldst 
not be victor in our meeting?" At the same instant 
Thord stuck the banner-pole so fast in the earth that 
it remained standing. Thord had got his death-wound, 
and fell beneath the banner. There also fell Thorfinn 
Mudr, and also Gissur Gulbraascald, who was attacked 
by two men, of whom he killed one, but only wounded 
the other before he fell. So says Hofgarda Refr : — 

" Bold in the iron-storm was he. 
Firm and stout as forest tree. 
The hero who, 'gainst two at once. 
Made Odin's fire from sword-edge glance ; 
Dealing a death-blow to the one. 
Known as a brave and generous man. 
Wounding the other, ere he fell, — 
His bloody sword his deeds showed well." 

It happened then, as before related, that the 
sun, although the air was clear, withdrew from the 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 331 

sight, and it became dark. Of this Sigvat the scald saga vn. 
speaks : — 

^^ No common wonder in the sky 
Fell out that day — the sun on high^ 
And not a cloud to see around, 
Shone not^ nor warmed Norway's ground. 
The day on which fell out this fight 
Was marked by dismal dusky light. 
This from the East I heard* — the end 
Of our great king it did portend." 

At the same time Dag Eingson came up with his 
people, and began to put his men in array, and to set 
up his banner; but on account of the darkness the 
onset could not go on so briskly, for they could not 
see exactly whom they had before them. They turned, 
however, to that quarter where the men of Hordaland 
and Rogaland stood. Many of these circumstances 
took place at the same time, and some happened a 
little earlier, and some a little later. 

On the one side of Kalf Arneson stood his two CHAWEa 
relations, Olaf and Kalf, with many other brave and King 
stout men. Kalf was a son of Amfinn Armodson, ^^*^'* ^*^^' 
and a brother's son of Ame Armodson. On the other 
side of Kalf Arneson stood Thorer Hund. King Olaf 
hewed at Thorer Hund, and struck him across the 
shoulders ; but the sword would not cut, and it was 
as if dust flew from his reindeer-skin coat. So says 
Sigvat : — 

'' The king himself now proved the power 
Of Finn-folk's craft in magic hour. 
With magic song ; for stroke of steel 
Thor's reindeer coat would never feel. 
Bewitched hy them it turned the stroke 
Of the king's sword, — a dust-like smoke 
Rose from Thor's shoulders from the blow 
Which the king thought would end his foe." 

Thorer struck at the king, and they exchanged 
some blows; but the king's sword would not cut 

* The scald has been in Iceland, or in the West, and where the eclipse 
has not been total. 



332 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA viL where it met the reindeer skin, although Thorer was 
wounded in the hands. Sigvat sang thus of it : — 

" Some say that Thor is not right bold; 
"^VTiy never yet have I been told 
Of one who did a bolder thing 
Than to change blows with his true king. 
Against his king his sword to wield^ 
Leaping across the shield on shield 
Which fenced the king round in the fight^ 
Shows the dog's * courage — brave, not bright." 

The king said to Biorn the marshal, " Do thou kill 
the dog on whom steel will not bite." Biorn turned 
round the axe in his hands, and gave Thorer a blow 
with the hammer of it on the shoulder so hard that 
he tottered. The king at the same moment turned 
against Kalf 's relation Olaf, and gave him his death- 
wound. Thorer Hund struck his spear right through 
the body of Marshal Biorn, and killed him outright ; 
and Thorer said, " It is thus we hunt the bear." f 
Thorstein Knararsmed struck at King Olaf with his 
axe, and the blow hit his left leg above the knee. 
Finn Arneson instantly killed Thorstein. The king^ 
after the wound staggered towards a stone, threw 
down his sword, and prayed God to help him. Then 
Thorer Hund struck at him with his spear, and the 
stroke went in under his mail- coat and into his belly. 
Then Kalf struck at him on the left side of the neck. 
But all are not agreed upon Kalf having been the 
man who gave him the wound in the neck. These 
three wounds were King Olaf's death; and after the 
king's death the greater part of the forces which had 
advanced with him fell with the king. Biorn Gulbraa- 
scald sang these verses about Kalf Arneson : — 

'^ Warrior ! who Olaf dared withstand^ 
Who against Olaf held the land, 



* Thor or Thorer' s name was Hund — the dog; and a 'play upon 
Thorer Hund's name was intended by the scald, 
f Biorn^ the marshal's name^ signifies a bear. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 333 

Thou hast withstood the bravest, best, saga vii. 

Who e*er has gone to his long rest. 

At Stiklestad thou wast the head ; 

With flying banners onwards led 

Thy bonder troops, and still fought on. 

Until he fell — the much-mourned one." 

Sigvat also made these verses on Biom : — 

^' The marshal Biom, too, I find, 
A great example leaves behind. 
How steady courage should stand proof. 
Though other servants stand aloof. 
To Russia first his steps he bent, 
To serve his master still intent; 
And now beside his king he fell, — 
A noble death for scalds to tell." 

Dag Ringson still kept up the battle, and made in Chapter 
the beginning so fierce an assault that the bonders Beginnmg 
gave way, and some betook themselves to flight. ^^^^ . 
There a great nuipber of the bonders fell, and these attack, 
lendermen, Erlend of Gerdi and Aslak of Finno ; and 
the banner also which they had stood under was cut 
down. This onset was particularly hot, and was called 
Dag's storm. But nowKalf Ameson, Harek of Thiotto, 
and Thorer Hund turned against Dag, with the array 
which had followed them, and then Dag was over- 
whelmed with numbers ; so he betook himself to flight 
with the men still left him. There was a valley through 
which the main body of the fugitives fled, and men lay 
scattered in heaps on both sides ; and many were se- 
verely wounded, and many so fatigued that they were 
fit for nothing. The bonders pursued only a short 
way ; for their leaders soon returned back to the field 
of battle, where they had their friends and relations to 
look after. 

Thorer Hund went to where King OlaFs body lay, Cha™r 
took care of it, laid it straight out on the ground, and k^^^^^' 
spread a cloak over it. He told since that when he ^l**"^ 
wiped the blood from the face it was very beautiful ; sho^^o 
and there was red in the cheeks, as if he only slept, ^ITnT 
and even much clearer than when he was in life. The 



334 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SA6AVII. ting's blood came on Thorer's hand, and ran up be- 
tween his fingers to where he had been wounded, and 
the wound grew up so speedily that it did not require 
to be bound up. This circumstance was testified by 
Thorer himself when King Olaf 's holiness came to be 
generally known among the people ; and Thorer Hund 
was among the first of the king's powerful opponents 
* who endeavoured to spread abroad the king's sanctity. 
ccxLin -^^^ Ameson searched for his brothers who had 
Of Kaif * fallen, and found Thorberg and Finn. It is related 
4™^*' that Finn threw his dagger at him, and wanted to 
kill him, giving him hard words, and calling him a 
faithless villain, and a traitor to his king. Kalf did 
not regard it, but ordered Finn and Thorberg to be 
carried away from the field. When their wounds 
were examined they were found not to be deadly, and 
they had fallen from fatigue, and under the weight of 
their weapons. Thereafter Kalf tried to bring his 
brothers down to a ship, and went himself with them. 
As soon as he was gone the whole bonder-army, 
having their homes in the neighbourhood, went off 
also, excepting those who had friends or relations to 
look after, pr the bodies of the slain to take care of. 
The wounded were taken home to the farms, so that 
every house was full of them ; and tents were erected 
over some. But wonderful as was the number col- 
lected in the bonder-army, no less wonderful was the 
haste with which this vast body was dispersed when 
it was once free ; and the cause of this was, that the 
most of the people gathered together from the country 
places were longing for their homes. 
Chapter Thc boudcrs who had their homes in Vaerdal went 
Of th^pJ^ to the chiefs Harek and Thorer, and complained of 
sants of their distress, saying, " The fugitives who have escaped 
from the battle have proceeded up over the valley of 
Vasrdal, and are destroying our habitations, and there 
is no safety for us to travel home so long as they are 



KINGS OF NOKWAY. 335 

in the valley. Go after them with war-force, and let saga vil 
no mother's son of them escape with life ; for that is 
what they intended for us if they had got the upper 
hand in the battle, and the same they would do now 
if they met us hereafter, and had better luck than we. 
It may also be that they will linger in the valley if 
they have nothing to be frightened for, and then they 
would not proceed very gently in the inhabited coun- 
try." The bonders made many words about this, 
urging the chiefs to advance directly, and kill those 
who had escaped. Now when the chiefs talked over 
this matter among themselves, they thought there was 
much truth in what the bonders said. They resolved, 
therefore, that Thorer Hund should undertake this 
expedition through VaBrdal, with 600 men of his own 
troops. Then, towards evening, he set out with his 
men ; and Thorer continued his march without halt 
until he came in the night to Suul, where he heard 
the news that Dag Ringson had come there in the 
evening, with many other flocks of the king's men, 
and had halted there until they took supper, but were 
afterwards gone up to the Fielde. Then Thorer said 
he did not care to pursue them up through the Fielde, 
and he returned down the valley again, and they did 
not kill many of them this time. The bonders then 
returned to their homes, and the following day Thorer, 
with his people, went to their ships. The part of the 
king's men who were still on their legs concealed 
themselves in the forests, and some got help from the 
people. 

Harald Sigurdsson* was severely wounded; but Chapter 
Rognvald Brusesson brought him to a bonder's the oft?e^^' 
night after the battle, and the bonder took in Harald, ^'^^s*^ 
and healed his wound in secret, and afterwards gave Haraid' 
him his son to attend him. They went secretly over Sigurdsson. 

» King Olaf 's half-brother, the son of Sigurd Syr. 



336 CHRONICLE OF THE 

sAOAjii. the Fielde, and through the waste forests, ajid came out 
in Jemteland. Harald Sigurdsson was fifteen years 
old when King Olaf fell. In Jemteland, Harald 
found Rognvald Brusesson; and they went both east 
to King Jarisleif in Russia, as is related in the Saga 
of Harald Sigurdsson. 
Chapter Thormod Kolbrunapscald was under King Olaf 's 
ofThor- ' banner in the battle ; but when the king had fallen, 
mod Koi- tj^g battle was raging so that of the king's men the 
scald. one fell by the side of the other, and the most of those 
who stood on their legs were wounded. Thormod 
was also severely wounded, and retired, as all the 
others did, back from where there was most danger of 
life, and some even fled. Now when the onset began 
which is called Dag's storm, aU of the king's men 
who were able to combat went there ; but Thormod 
did not come into that combat, being unable to figbt, 
both from his wound and from weariness, but he 
stood by the side of his comrade in the ranks, 
although he could do nothing. There he was struck 
by an arrow in the left side; but he broke off the shaft 
of the arrow, went out of the battle, and up towards 
the houses, where he came to a bam which was a large 
building. Thormod had his drawn sword in his hand; 
and as he went in a man met him, coming out, and 
said, " It is very bad there with howling and scream- 
ing ; and a great shame it is that brisk young fellows 
cannot bear their wounds : it may be that the king's 
men have done bravely to-day, but they certainly 
bear their wounds very ill." 

Thormod asks, " What is thy name ?" 
He called himself Kimbe. 
Thormod: " Wast thou in the battle too ?" 
" I was with the bonders, which was the best side," 
says he. 

"And art thou wounded any way?" says Thor- 
mod. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 337 

^^ A little,^' said Kimbe. " And hast thou been in the sagavil 
battle too ?" 

Thormod replied, " I was with them who had the 
best." 

" Art thou wounded ? " says Kimbe. 

" Not much to signify," replies Thormod. 

As Kimbe saw that Thormod had a gold ring on his 
arm, he said, " Thou art certainly a king's man. 
Give me thy gold ring, and I wiU hide thee. The 
bonders will kill thee if thou faUest in their way." 

Thormod says, "Take the ring if thou canst get 
it : I have lost that which is more worth." 

Kimbe stretched out his hand, and wanted to take 
the ring; but Thormod, swinging his sword, cut off 
his hand: and it is related that Kimbe behaved him- 
self no better under his wound than those he had been 
blaming just before. Kimbe went off, and Thormod 
sat down in the bam, and listened to what people 
were saying. The conversation was mostly about 
what each had seen in the battle, and about the valour 
of the combatants. Some praised most King Olaf 's 
courage, and some named others who stood nowise 
behind him in bravery. Then Thormod sang these 
verses: — 

''Olaf was brave beyond all doubt^ — 
At Stiklestad was none so stout; 
Spattered with blood, the king^ unsparing^ 
Cheered on his men with deed and daring. 
But I have heard that some were there 
Who in the fight themselves would spare; 
Though^ in the arrow-storm, the most 
Had perils quite enough to boast/' 

Thormod went out, and entered into a chamber Chaptkr 
apart, in which there were many wounded men, and Ti?o^Id'8 
with them a woman binding their wounds. There ^®***'- 
was fire upon the floor, at which she warmed water to 
wash and clean their wounds. Thormod sat himself 
down beside the door, and one came in, and another 

VOL. II. z 



338 CHRONICLE OF THE 

sAOAjvii. went out, of those who were busy about the wounded 
men. One of them turned to Thormod, looked at him, 
and said, "Why art thou so dead-pale? Art thou 
wounded ? Why dost thou not caU for the help of 
the wound-healers? Thormod then sang these verses : — 

*' I am not bloomings and the fair 
And slender girl loved to care 
For blooming youths -^ few care for me ; 
With Finri's meal* I cannot fee. 
This is the reason why I feel 
The slash and thrust of Danish steel; 
And pale and faint^ and bent with pain^ 
Return from yonder battle-plain. " 

Then Thormod stood up and went in towards the 
fire, and stood there awhile. The young woman said 
to him, " Go out, man, and bring in some of the split 
fire-wood which lies close beside the door." He went 
out and brought in an armful of wood, which he 
threw down upon the floor. Then the nurse-girl 
looked him in the face, and said, " Dreadfully pale 
is this man — why art thou so?" Then Thormod 
sang : — 

*' Thou wonderest, sweet sprigs at me^ 
A man so hideous to see : 
Deep wounds but rarely mend the face. 
The crippling blow gives little grace. 
The arrow-drift oertook me, girl, — 
A fine-ground arrow in the whirl 
Went through me, and I feel the dart 
Sits, lovely girl, too near my heart." 

The girl said, " Let me see thy wound, and I will 
bind it." Thereupon Thormod sat down, cast off his 
clothes, and the girl saw his wounds, and examined 
that which was in his side, and felt that a piece of 
iron was in it, but could not find where the iron had 
gone in. In a stone pot she had stirred together 
leeks and other herbs, and boiled them, and gave the 

* Finri, one of Loke's daughters : her meal was gold. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 339 

wounded men of it to eat, by which she discovered if saga vil 
the wounds had penetrated into the belly ; for if the 
wound had gone so deep, it would smell of leek. She 
brought some of this now to Thormod, and told him 
to eat of it. He replied, " Take it away, I have no 
appetite for my broth." Then she took a large pair of 
tongs, and tried to pull out the iron ; but it sat too 
fast, and would in no way come, and as the wound 
was swelled, little of it stood out to lay hold of. Now 
said Thorer, " Cut so deep in that thou canst get at 
the iron with the tongs, and give me the tongs and 
let me pull." She did as he said. Then Thormod took 
a gold ring from his hand, gave it to the nurse- woman, 
and told her to do with it what she liked. " It is a 
good man's gift," said he : " King Olaf gave me the 
ring this morning." Then Thormod took the tongs, 
and pulled the iron out ; but on the iron there was a 
hook, at which there hung some morsels of flesh 
from the heart, — some white, some red. When he 
saw that, he said, " The king has fed us well. I 
am fat even at the heart-roots:" and so saying he 
leant back, and was dead. And with this ends what 
we have to say about Thormod. 

King Olaf fell on Wednesday, the 29th of July.* Chapter 
It was near mid-day when the two armies met, and of "^e™" 
the battle besan before half-past one, and before three circum- 

° r 7 stances of 

the battle. 

* The date given in the text is Midvikodag IV. Calendas Augusti 
manader ; and the year which antiquaries have reckoned, in conformity 
with the other events in Snorro's saga, and with all historical researches, 
as that of this battle and King Olaf's death, is 1033. But there was 
no eclipse of the sun on the IV. Calends of August, via. the 29th 
July of that year, visible at Stiklestad. Professor Hansten, of Chris- 
tiania, has calculated that the nearest total eclipse of the sun visible at 
Stiklested was on the 31st August, 1030; and the eclipse during the 
battle being a fixed point for chronology, some error of Snorro or his 
transcribers has crept in, and damages a great deal of antiquarian lore 
by this difference of three years in the time of so important an event, 
from which many others were dated. The Saxon Chronicle gives the 
right date, 1030, to this battle. 

z 2 



340 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VII. the king fell-. The darkness continued from about 
half-past one to three also. Sigvat the scald speaks 
thus of the result of the battle : — 

'^ The loss was great to England's foes. 
When their chief fell heneath the blows 
By his own thoughtless people given, — 
When the king's shield in two was riven. 
The people's sovereign took the field. 
The people dove the sovereign's shidd. 
Of all the chiefs, that bloody day. 
Dag only came out of the fray." 

And he composed these : — 

*^ Such mighty bonder-power, I ween. 
With chiefs or rulers ne'er was seen. 
It was the people's mighty power 
That struck the king that fatal hour. 
When such a king, in such a strife. 
By his own people lost his life. 
Full many a gallant man must feel 
The death-wound from the people's steeL" 

The bonders did not spoil the slain upon the field 
of battle, for immediately after the battle there came 
upon many of them who had been against the king a 
kind of dread as it were ; yet they held by their evil 
inclination, for they resolved among themselves that 
all who had fallen with the king should not receive 
the interment which belongs to good men, but reck- 
oned them all robbers and outlaws. But the men 
who had power, and had relations on the field, cared 
little for this, but removed their remains to the 
churches, and took care of their burial. 

Thorgils Halmesson and his son Grim went to the 
field of battle towards evening when it was dusk, 
took King Olaf 's corpse up, and bore it to a little 
empty houseman's hut which stood on the other side 
of their farm. They had light and water with them. 
Then they took the clothes off the body, swathed it in 
a linen cloth, laid it down in the house, and concealed 
it under some fire-wood so that nobody could see it, 
even if people came into the hut. Thereafter they 



Chapter 

CCXLIX. 

A miracle 

on a blind 

man. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 341 

went home again to the farm-house. A great many saga vh. 
beggars and poor people had followed both armies, 
who begged for meat ; and the evening after the 
battle many remained there, and sought lodging round 
about in all the houses, great or small. It is told 
of a blind man who was poor, that a boy attended 
him and led him. They went out around the farm 
to seek a lodging, and came to the same empty house, 
of which the door was so low that they had almost to 
creep in. Now when the blind man had come in, he 
fumbled about the floor seeking a place where he could 
lay himself down. He had a hat on his head, which 
fell down over his face when he stooped down. He 
felt with his hands that there was moisture on the 
floor, and he put up his wet hand to raise his hat, and 
in doing so put his fingers on his eyes. There came 
immediately such an itching in his eyelids, that he 
wiped the water with his fingers irom his eyes, and 
went out of the hut, saying nobody could lie there it 
was so wet. When he came out of the hut he could 
distinguish his hands, and aU that was near him, as 
far as things can be distinguished by sight in the 
darkness of night ; and he went immediately to the 
farm-house into the room, and told all the people he 
had got his sight again, and could see every thing, 
although many knew he had been blind for a long 
time, for he had been there before going about among 
the houses of the neighbourhood. He said he first 
got his sight when he was coming out of a little ruin- 
ous hut which was all wet inside. " I groped in the 
water," said he, " and rubbed my eyes with my wet 
hands." He told where the hut stood. The people 
who heard him wondered much at this event, and 
spoke among themselves of what it could be that pro- 
duced it : but Thorgils the peasant and his son Grim 
thought they knew how this came to pass ; and as they 
were much afraid the king's enemies might go there 

z 3 



342 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VII. 



Chapter 

CCL. 
Of Thorer 
Hund. 



Cm AFTER 

CCLI. 
Of King 
Olafs 
body. 



and search the hut, they went and took the body out 
of it, and removed it to a garden, where they con- 
cealed it, and then returned to the farm, and slept 
there all night. 

The fifth day after this, Thorer Hund came down 
the valley of Vaerdal to Stiklestad ; and many people, 
both chiefs and bonders, accompanied him. The field 
of battle was still being cleared, and people were carry- 
ing away the bodies of their friends and relations, and 
were giving the necessary help to such of the wounded 
as they wished to save ; but many had died since the 
battle. Thorer Hund went to where the king had 
fallen, and searched for his body; but not finding it, he 
inquired if any one could tell him what had become of 
the corpse, but nobody could tell him where it was. 
Then he asked the bonder ThorgUs, who said, " I was 
not in the battle, and knew little of what took place 
there; but many reports are abroad, and among others 
that King Olaf has been seen in the night up at Staf, 
and a troop of people with him : but if he fell in the 
battle, your men must have concealed him in some 
hole, or under some stone-heap." Now although 
Thorer Hund knew for certain that the king had 
fallen, many allowed themselves to believe, and to 
spread abroad the report, that the king had escaped 
from the battle, and would in a short time come again 
upon them with an army. Then Thorer went to his 
ships, and sailed down the fiord, and the bonder-army 
dispersed, carrying with them all the wounded men 
who could bear to be removed. 

Thorgils Halmesson and his son Grim had King 
Olaf 'a body, and were anxious about preserving it 
from falling into the hands of the king's enemies, and 
being ill-treated; for they heard the bonders speaking 
about burning it, or sinking it in the sea. The father 
and son had seen a clear light burning at night over 
the spot on the battle-field where King Olaf 's body 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 343 

lay, and since, while they concealed it, they had sagavii. 

always seen at night a light burning over the corpse ; 

therefore they were afraid the king's enemies might 

seek the body where this signal was visible. They 

hastened, therefore, to take the body to a place where 

it would be safe. ThorgUs and his son accordingly 

made a coffin, which they adorned as well as they 

could, and laid the king's body in it ; and afterwards 

made another coffin, in which they laid stones and 

straw, about as much as the weight of a man, and 

careftilly closed the coffins. As soon as the whole 

bonder-army had left Stiklestad, Thorgils and his son 

made themselves ready, got a large rowing boat, and 

took with them seven or eight men, who were all 

Thorgil's relations or friends, and privately took the 

coffin with the king's body down to the boat, and set 

it under the foot-boards. They had also with them 

the coffin containing the stones, and placed it in the 

boat where all could see it ; and then went down the 

fiord with a good opportunity of wind and weather, and 

arrived in the dusk of the evening at Nidaros, where 

they brought up at the king's pier. Then Thorgils 

sent some of his men up to the town to Bishop Sigurd, 

to say that they were come with the king's body. As 

soon as the bishop heard this news, he sent his men 

down to the pier, and they took a small rowing boat, 

came alongside of Thorgil's ship, and demanded the 

king's body. Thorgils and his people then took the 

coffin which stood in view, and bore it into the boat ; 

and the bishop's men rowed out into the fiord, and 

sank the coffin in the sea. It was now quite dark. 

Thorgils and his people now rowed up into the river 

past the town, and landed at a place called Saurlid, 

above the town. Then they carried the king's body 

to an empty house standing at a distance from other 

houses, and watched over it for the night, while 

Thorgils went down to the town, where he spoke with 

z 4 



344 



CHBONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VIL 



Chapter 
CCLII. 
Of the be- 
ginning of 
King 
Swend 
Alfifiison*s 
govern- 
ment. 



some of the best friends of King Olaf, and asked 
them if they would take charge of the king's body; 
but none of them dared to do so. Then Thorgils and 
his men went with the body higher up the river, 
buried it in a sand-hill on the banks, and levelled all 
around it so that no one could observe that people 
had been at work there. They were ready with all 
this before break of day, when they returned to their 
vessel, went immediately out of the river, and pro- 
ceeded on their way home to Stiklestad, 

Swend, a son of Bang Canute, and of Alfifa, a 
daughter of Earl Alfrim, had been appointed to 
govern Jomsberg in Vendland. There came a mes- 
sage to him from his father King Canute, that he 
should come to Denmark; and likewise that afterwards 
he should proceed to Norway, and take that kingdom 
under his charge, and assume, at the same time, the 
title of king of Norway. Swend repaired to Den- 
mark, and took many people with him from thence, 
and also Earl Harald and many other people of con- 
sequence attended him. Thorarin Loftunge speaks of 
this in the song he composed about King Swend, 
called the Glelogn song: — 

" *Tis told by fame. 
How grandly came 
The Danes to tend 
Their young king Swend. 
Grandest was he. 
That all could see; 
Then, one by one, 
Each following man 
More splendour wore 
Than him before." 

Then Swend proceeded to Norway, and his mother 
Alfifa was with him; and he was taken to be king 
at every Law-thing in the country. He had already 
come as far as Viken at the time the battle was fought 
at Stiklestad, and King Olaf fell. Swend continued 
his journey until he came north, in autumn, to the 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 345 

Drontheim country; and there, as elsewhere, he was sagavii. 
received as king. 

King Swend introduced new laws in many respects Chapter 
into the country, partly after those which were in cS King^' 
Denmark, and in part much more severe. No man Swend*s 
must leave the country without the king's permission ; 
or if he did, his property fell to the king. Whoever 
killed a man outright, should forfeit aU his land and 
moveables. If any one was banished the country, 
and an heritage fell to him, the king took his inhe- 
ritance. At Yule every man should pay the king a 
meal* of malt from every harvest steading, and a leg 
of a three-year old ox, which was called a friendly gift, 
together with a spandf of butter; and every house- 
wife a rock J fiiU of unspun lint, as thick as one could 
span with the fingers of the longest hand. The 
bonders were boimd to build aU the houses the king 
required upon his farms. Of every seven males one 
should be taken for the service of war, and reckoning 
from the fifth year of age; and the outfit of ships 
should be reckoned in the same proportion. Every 
man who rowed upon the sea to fish should pay the 
king five fish as a tax, for the land defence, wherever 
he might come from. Every ship that went out of 
the country should have stowage reserved open for 
the king in the middle of the ship. Every man, 
foreigner or native, who went to Iceland, should pay a 
tax to the king. And to all this was added, that 
Danes should enjoy so much consideration in Norway, 
that one witness of them should invalidate ten of 
Northmen.§ 

* A meal of com was a measure^ and is still used in Orkney and 
Shetland rentals. 

t A spand of butter was eighteen marks. 

X A " rock of tow " would still be understood in the north of Scot- 
land. The rock — rykiar — is the wooden pin round which the lint to 
be spun is bound, to be drawn out by the fingers of the spinner. 

§ This may probably have referred not to witnesses of an act, but to 



346 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VIL 



Chapter 
CCLIV. 
Of King 
Olafs 
sanctity. 



Chapter 
CCLV. 
Of Einar 
Tarabar- 
skelver. 



When these laws were promulgated the minds 
of the people were instantly raised against them, 
and murmurs were heard among them. They who 
had not taken part agaiast King Olaf said, " Now 
take your reward and friendship from the Canute 
race, ye men of the interior of Drontheim who fought 
against King Olaf, and deprived him of his kingdom. 
Ye were promised peace and justice, and now ye have 
got oppression and slavery for your great treachery 
and crime." Nor was it very easy to contradict 
them, as all men saw how miserable the change had 
been. But people had not the boldness to make an 
insurrection against King Swend, principally because 
many had given King Canute their sons or other near 
relations as hostages; and also because no one ap- 
peared as leader of an insurrection. They very soon, 
however, complained of King Swend ; and his mother 
Alfifa got much of the blame of all that was against 
their desire. Then the truth, with regard to Olaf, 
became evident to many. 

This winter many in the Drontheim land began to 
declare that Olaf was in reality a holy man, and his 
sanctity was confirmed by many miracles. Many 
began to make promises and prayers to King Olaf in 
the matters in which they thought they required help, 
and many found great benefit from these invocations ; 
some in respect of health, others of a journey, or 
other circumstances in which such help seemed need- 
ful. 

Einar Tambarskelver was come home from England 
to his farm, and had the fiefs which King Canute had 
given him when they met in Drontheim, and which 
were almost an earldom. Einar had not been in the 



the class of witnesses in the jurisprudence of the middle ages called 
compurgators^ who testified not the fact, hut their confidence in the 
statements of the accused; and from which^ possibly^ our £nglish bail 
for offenders arose. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 347 

strife against King Olaf, and congratulated himself sagavii. 
upon it. He remembered that King Canute had pro- 
mised him the earldom over Norway, and at the same 
time remembered that King Canute had not kept his 
promise. He was accordingly the first great person 
who looked upon King Olaf as a saint.* 

Finn Ameson remained but a short time at Egge Chapter 
with his brother Kalf ; for he was in the highest degree of the sons 
ill-pleased that Kalf had been in the battle against o^Ame. 
King Olaf, and always made his brother the bitterest 
reproaches on this account. Thorberg Ameson was 
much more temperate in his discourse than Finn; but 
yet he hastened away, and went home to his farm. 
Kalf gave the two brothers a good long-ship, with fiill 
rigging and other necessaries, and a good retinue. 
Therefore they went home to their farms, and sat 
quietly at home. Ame Arneson lay long ill of his 
wounds, but got well at last without injury of any 
limb, and in winter he proceeded south to his farm. 
All the brothers made their peace with King Swend, 
and sat themselves quietly down in their homes. 

The summer after there was much talk about Chaiteii 
King Olaf 's sanctity, and there was a great alteration BidioJ^^' 
in the expressions of all people concerning him. Sigurd's 
There were many who now believed that King Olaf '^ 
must be a saint, even among those who had persecuted 
him with the greatest animosity, and would never in 
their conversation allow truth or justice in his favour. 
People began then to turn their reproaches against 
the men who had principally excited opposition to the 
king; and on this account Bishop Sigurd in parti- 
cular was accused. He got so many enemies, that he 
found it most advisable to go over to England to . 
King Canute. Then the Drontheim people sent men 

* These shrewd sly hits at Saint Olaf 's saintship, and the honesty 
of the great people of the time, are very characteristic of Snorro Sturleson 
— a man far in advance of his age. 



348 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII with a verbal message to the Uplands, to Bishop 
Grimkel, desiring him to come north to Drontheim^ 
King Olaf had sent Bishop Grimkel back to Norway 
when he went east into Russia, and since that time 
Grimkel had been in the Uplands. When the mes- 
sage came to the bishop he made ready to go, and it 
contributed much to this journey that the bishop con- 
sidered it as true what was told of King Olaf 's mira- 
cles and sanctity. 

Chapter BishoD Grimkel wcut to Eiuar Tambarskelver, who 

CCLVIII • 

King Olaf received him joyfully. They talked over many things, 
remahir* and, amoug others, of the important events which 
disinterred, had taken placc in the country; and concerning these 
they were perfectly agreed. Then the bishop pro- 
ceeded to the town (Nidaros), and was well received 
by all the community. He inquired particularly con- 
cerning the miracles of King Olaf that were reported, 
and received satisfactory accounts of them. There- 
upon the bishop sent a verbal message to Stiklestad 
to Thorgils and his son Grim, inviting them to come 
to the town to him. They did not decline the invit- 
ation, but set out on the road immediately, and came 
to the town and to the bishop. They related to him 
all the signs that had presented themselves to them, 
and also where they had deposited the king's body. 
The bishop sent a message to Einar Tambarskelver, 
who came to the town. Then the bishop and Einar 
had an audience of the king and Alfifa, in which they 
asked the king's leave to have King Olaf 's body taken 
up out of the earth. The king gave his permission, 
and told the bishop to do as he pleased in the matter. 
At that time there were a great many people in the 
town. The bishop, Einar, and some men with them, 
went to the place where the king's body was buried, 
and had the place dug; but the coffin had already 
raised itself almost to the surface of the earth. It 
was then the opinion of many that the bishop should 



KINGS OF KORWAY. 349 

proceed to have the king buried in the earth at sagavii. 
Clement's church ; and it was so done. Twelve "^ 
months and three days after King Olaf s death his holy 
remains were dug up, and the coffin had raised itself 
almost entirely to the surface of the earth ; and the 
coffin appeared quite new, as if it had but lately been 
made. When Bishop Grimkel came to King Olaf 's 
opened coffin, there was a delightful and fresh smell. 
Thereupon the bishop uncovered the king's face, and 
his appearance was in no respect altered, and his 
cheeks were as red as if he had but just fallen asleep. 
The men who had seen King Olaf when he fell re- 
marked, also, that his hair and nails had grown as 
much as if he had lived on the earth all the time that 
had passed since his fall. Thereupon King Swend, 
and all the chiefs who were at the place, went out to 
see King Olaf 's body. Then said Alfifa, " People 
buried in sand rot very slowly, and it would not have 
been so if he had been buried in earth." Afterwards 
the bishop took scissars, clipped the king's hair, and 
arranged his beard ; for he had had a long beard, ac- 
cording to the fashion of that time. Then said the 
bishop to the king and Alfifa, " Now the king's hair 
and beard are such as when he gave up the ghost, and 
it has grown as much as ye see has been cut off." 
Alfifa answers, "I will believe in the sanctity of his 
hair, if it will not bum in the fire ; but I have often 
seen men's hair whole and undamaged after lying 
longer in the earth than this man's." Then the bishop 
had live coals put into a pan, blessed it, cast incense 
upon it, and then laid King Olaf 's hair on the fire. 
When all the incense was burnt the bishop took the 
hair out of the fire, and showed the king and the 
other chiefs that it was not consumed. Now Alfifa 
asked that the hair should be laid upon uncon- 
secrated fire ; but Einar Tambarskelver told her to 
be silent, and gave her many severe reproaches for her 



350 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. unbelief. After the bishop's recognition, with the 
king's approbation and the decision of the Thing, it 
was determined that Bang Olaf should be considered a 
man truly holy ; whereupon his body was transported 
into Clement's church, and a place was prepared for it 
near the high altar. The coffin was covered with 
costly cloth, and stood under a gold embroidered tent. 
Many kinds of miracles were soon wrought by King 
Olaf 's holy remains. 
Chaptbr In the sand-hill where King Olaf 's body had lain on 
ot King ' the ground a beautifal spring of water came up, and 
mirldes. ^^^J humau ailmcuts and infirmities were cured by 
its waters. Things were put in order around it, and 
the water ever since has been carefully preserved. 
There was first a chapel built, and an altar conse- 
crated, where the king's body had lain; but now 
Christ's church stands upon the spot. Archbishop 
Eystein* had a high altar raised upon the spot where 
the king's grave had been, when he erected the great 
temple which now stands there ; and it is the same 
spot on which the altar of the old Christ church had 
stood. It is said that Olaf 's church stands on the 
spot on which the empty house had stood in which 
King Olaf !s body had been laid for the night. The 
place over which the holy remains of King Olaf were 
carried up from the vessel is now called Olaf's Road, 
and is now in the middle of the town. The bishop 
adorned King Olaf's holy remains, and cut his nails 
and hair; for both grew as if he had still been alive. 
So says Sigvat the scald: — 

^' I lie not, when I say the king 
Seemed as alive in every thing: 
His nails, his yellow hair still growing. 
And round his ruddy cheek still flowing, 



* Archbishop Eystein, or Augustinus, the second archbishop of 
Drontheim, died 1188. He built the present cathedral of Drontbeim. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 351 

As when^ to please the Russian queen, saga vil 

His yellow locks adorned were seen ; 
Or to the blind he cured he gave 
A tress, their precious sight to save." 

Thorarin Loftunge also composed a song upon 
Swend Alfifason, called the Glelogn* Song, in which 
are these verses : — 

" Swend, king of all. 
In Olaf 's hall 
Now sits on high ; 
And Olaf 's eye 
Looks down from heaven. 
Where it is given 
To him to dwell : 
Or here in cell. 
As heavenly saint, 
To heal men's plaint 
May our gold-giver 
Live here for ever ! 

" King Olaf there 
To hold a share 
On earth prepared. 
Nor labour spared 
A seat to win 
From heaven's great King; 
Which he has won 
Next God's own Son. 

" His holy form. 
Untouched by worm. 
Lies at this day 
Where good men pray. 
And nails and hair 
Grow fresh and fair; 
His cheek is red. 
His flesh not dead. 

" Around his bier. 
Good people hear 
The small bells ring 
Over the king. 
Or great bell toll; 
And living soul 
Not one can tell 
Who tolls the bell. 



* Glelogn means the clear air; but it does not appear why this name 
is applied to this very curious old song. 



352 CHKONICLE OF THE 

* 

SAGA VII. *' Tapers up there, 

(Which Christ holds dear,) 

By day and night 
The altar light : 
Olaf did so. 
And all men know 
In heaven he 
From sin sits free. 

" And crowds do come. 
The deaf and dumh. 
Cripple and hlind. 
Sick of all kind. 
Cured to he 
On hended knee; 
And off the ground 
Rise whole and sound. 

" To Olaf pray 
To eke thy day. 
To save thy land 
From spoiler's hand. 
God's man is he 
To deal to thee 
Good crops and peace; 
Let not prayer cease. 

^* Book-prayers prevail. 
If, nail for nail*, 
Thou tellest on, 
Forgetting none." 

Thorarin Loftunge was himself with King Swend, 
and heard these great testimonials of King Olaf 's holi- 
ness, that people, by the heavenly power, could hear 
a sound over his holy remains as if beUs were ringing, 
and that candles were lighted of themselves upon the 
altar as by a heavenly fire. But when Thorarin says 
that a multitude of lame, and blind, and other sick, 
who came to the holy Olaf, went back cured, he means 
nothing more than that there were a vast many per- 
sons who at the beginning of King Olaf 's miraculous 

* Before the entrance of the temples or churches were posts called 
Aundveigis-sulor, with nails called Reigin-naglar — the gods' nails — 
either for ornament, or, as Schoning suggests, to assist the people in 
reckoning weeks, montlis, festivals, and in reckoning or keeping tale of 
prayers repeated, and to recall them to memory, in the same way as 
beads are used still by the common people in Catholic countries for the 
same purpose. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 353 

working regained their health. King Olaf's first sagajii. 
miracles are clearly written down, although they oc- 
curred somewhat later. 

It is reckoned by those who have kept an exact 9,^/^* 
account, that Olaf the Saint was king of Norway for of King 
fifteen years from the time Earl Swend left the coun- ^a^rei^! 
try; but he had received the title of king from the 
people of the Uplands the winter before. Sigvat the 
scald tells this : — 

^' For fifteen winters o'er the land 
King Olaf held the chief command^ 
Before he fell up in the North : 
His fall made known to us his worth. 
No worthier prince hefore his day 
In our North land e'er held the sway. 
Too short he held it for our good : 
All men wish now that he had stood." 

Saint Olaf was thirty-five years old when he fell, 
according to what Are hinn Frode the priest says, 
and he had been in twenty pitched battles. So says 
Sigvat the scald : — 

'^ Some leaders trust in God — some not; 
Even so their men ; but well I wot 
God-fearing Olaf fought and won 
Twenty pitched battles^ one by one, 
And always placed upon his right 
His Christian men in a hard fight. 
May God be merciful, I pray. 
To him — for he ne'er shunned the fray." 

We have now related a part of King Olaf 's story, 
namely, the events which took place while he ruled 
over Norway ; also his death, and how his holiness was 
manifested. Now shall we not neglect to mention 
what it was that most advanced his honour. This 
was his miracles ; but these will come to be treated of 
afterwards in this book. 

King Swend, the son of Canute the Great, ruled Chapte* 
over Norway for some years ; but was a child both in of the ' 
age and understanding. His mother Alfifa had most i>rontheim 
sway in the country ; and the people of the country 

VOL. u. A A 



354 CHBONICLE OF THE 

BAQAvn. were her great enemies, both then and ever since. 
Danish people had a great superiority given them 
within the country, to the great dissatisfaction of the 
people ; and when conversatioai turned that way, the 
people of the rest of Norway accused the Drontheim 
people of having principally occasioned King Olaf the 
Holy's faU, and also that the men of Norway were 
subject, through them, to the ill government by 
which oppression and slavery had come upon all the 
people, both great and small; indeed upon the whole 
community. They insisted that it was the duty of 
the Drontheim people to attempt Opposition and in- 
surrection, and thus relieve the country from such 
tyranny; and, in the opinion of thfe common people, 
Drontheim was also the chief seat of the strength of 
Norway at that time, both on account of the chiefs 
and of the population of that quarter. When the 
Drontheim people heard these remarks of their coun- 
trymen, they could not deny that there was much 
truth in them, and that in depriving King Olaf of life 
and land they had committed a great crime, and at 
the same time the misdeed had been ill paid. The 
chiefs began to hold consultations and conferences 
with each other, and the leader of these was Einar 
Tambarskelver. It was likewise the case with Kalf 
Ameson, who began to find into what errors he had 
been drawn by King Canute's persuasion. All the 
promises which King Canute had made to Kalf had 
been broken ; for he had promised him the earldom 
and the highest authority in Norway : and although 
Kalf had been the leader in the battle against King 
Olaf, and had deprived him of his life and kingdom, 
Kalf had not got any higher dignity than he had be- 
fore. He felt that he had been deceived, and therefore 
messages passed between the brothers Kalf, Finn, 
Thorberg, and Ame, and they renewed their family 
friendship. 



KBffGS OF NORWAY. S55 

When King Swend had been three years in Norway saga vn. 
the news was received that a force was assembled in CHAraa 
the western countries, under a chief who called him- ofKbg ^* 
setf Tryggve, and gave out that he was a son of Okf Swend*s 
Tryggvesson and Queen Gyda of England. Now when *^' 
King Swend heard that foreign troops had 'Gome to 
the country, he ordered out the people on a levy in 
the north, and the most of the lendermen hastened to 
him ; but Einar Tambarskelver remained at home, and 
would not go out with King Swend. When King 
Swend's order came to Kalf Ameson at Egge, that 
he should go out on a levy with King Swend, he took 
a twenty-benched ship which he owned, went oa board 
with his house-servants, and in all haste proceeded 
out of the fiord, without waiting for King Swend, 
sailed southwards to More, aiid continued his voyage 
south until he came to Gisk^ Island to his brother 
Thorberg. Then all the brothers, the sons of Ame, 
held a meeting, and consulted with each other. After 
this Kalf returned to the north again; but when he 
came to Frekosund, King Swend was lying in the 
sound before him. When Kalf came rowing from the 
south into the sound they hailed each other, and 
the king's men ordered Kalf to bring up with his 
vessel, and follow the king for th« defence of the 
country. Kalf I'eplies, " I have done enough, if not 
too much, when I fought against my own countrymen 
to increase the power of the Canute family." There- 
upon Kalf rowed away to the north until he came 
home to Egge. None of these Amesons appeared at 
this levy to accompany the king. He steered with 
his fleet southwards along the land ; but as he could 
not hear the least news of any fleet having come from 
the west, he steered south to Rogaland, and all the 
way to Agder : for many guessed that Tryggve would 
first make his attempt on Viken, because his fore- 
fathers had been there, and had most of their strength 

A A 2 



356 CHBOHICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. from that quarter, aod he had himself great strength 

by family comiection there. 
Chaitoi When Trvffffve came £rom the west he landed first 
King on the coast of Hordaland, and when he heard King 
Trygg^e Swend had gone south he went the same way to 
lui. ' Rogaland. As soon as Swend got the intelligence 
that Tryggve had come fix)m the west he returned, 
and steered north with his fleet; and both fleets met 
within Bokn in Soknasund, not £ar fix)m the place 
where Einar Skialgsson fell. The battle, which took 
place on a Sunday, was great and severe. People tell 
that Tryggve threw spears with both hands at once. 
" So my father," said he, " taught me to celebrate 
mass." His enemies had s^d that he was the son of 
a priest ; but the praise must be allowed him that he 
showed himself more like a son of King Olaf Tryg- 
gvesson, for this Tryggve was a slaughtering man. In 
this battle King Tryggve fell, and many of his men 
with him ; but some fled, and some received quarter 
and their lives. It is thus related in the baUad of 
Tryggve:— 

*^ Tryggve comes from the northern coast. 
King Swend turns round with all his host ; 
To meet and fight they hoth prepare. 
And where they met grim death was there. 
From the sharp strife I was not far, — 
1 heard the din and the clang of war; 
And the Hordaland men at last gave way. 
And their leader fell, and they lost the day." 

This battle is also told of in the ballad about King 
Swend, thus: — 

'* My girl ! it was a Sunday mom. 
And many a man ne'er saw its eye, 
Though ale and leeks hy old wives home 
The hruised and wounded did relieve. 
*Twas Sunday mom, when Swend calls out, 
' Stem to stem your vessels hind : ' 
The raven a mid-day feast smells out. 
And he comes croaking up the wind." 

After this battle King Swend ruled the country for 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 357 

some time, and there was peace in the land. The saga vn. 
winter after it he passed in the south parts of the 
country. 

Einar Tambarskelver and Kalf Ameson had this Chapter 
winter meetings and consultations between themselves of the 
in the merchant town.* Then there came a messenger ^unseisof 
from King Canute to Kalf Ameson, with a message barskeiver 
to send him three dozen axes, which must he chosen Arn^nf 
and good. Kalf replies, " I will send no axes to King 
Canute. Tell him I will bring his son Swend so many, 
that he shall not think he is in want of any." 

Early in spring Einar Tambarskelver and Kalf Ar- ^"t^y 
neson made themselves ready for a journey, with a of Einar' 
great retinue of the best and most select men that ^Xerind 
could be found in the Drontheim country. They went Kaif Ame- 
in spring eastward over the ridge of the country ^y VutTf 
to Jemteland, from thence to Helsingialand, and came thecouuuy. 
to Sweden, where they procured ships, with which in 
summer they proceeded east to Russia, and came in 
autumn to Ladoga. They sent men up to Novogorod 
to King Jarisleif, with the errand that they offered 
Magnus, the son of King Olaf the Saint, to take him 
with them, follow him to Norway, and give him assist- 
ance to attain his father's heritage and be made king 
over the country. When this message came to King 
Jarisleif he held a consultation with the queen and 
some chiefs, and they all resolved unanimously to send 
a message to the Northmen, and ask them to come to 
King Jarisleif and Magnus ; for which journey safe 
conduct was given them. When they came to Novo- 
gorod it was settled among them that the Northmen 
who had come there should become Magnus's men, 
and be his subjects ; and to this Kalf and the other 
-inen who had been against King Olaf at Stiklestad 

* Nidaros, or Drontheim, is usually called merely the merchant 
town. 

A A 3 



358 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VII. were solemnly bound by oath. On the other hand, 
King Magijus pronused them, under oath, secure peace 
and full reconciliation ; and that he would be true and 
faithful to them all when he got the domiijions aad 
kingdom of Norway. He was to become Kalf Ame- 
son's foster-son ; and Kalf should be bound to do all 
that Magnus might think necessary for extending 
his dominion, ^d making it more independent than 
formerly. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 359 



V All. SAGA VIII. 

SAGA OF MAGNUS THE GOOD.* 

After Yule Magnus Olafsson began his journey from Chapt«r 

the East from Novogorod to Ladoga, where he rigged Magniw 

out his ships as soon as the ice was loosened in spring. P^^' 

Arnor, the earl's scald, tells of this in the poem on from tbe 

Magnus : — " 

" It is no loose report that he^ 
Who will command on land and sea. 
In blood will make his foemen feel 
Olaf 's sword Hneiter's sharp blue steeL 
This generous youth, who scatters gold, 
Norway's brave son, but ten years old. 
Is rigging ships in Russia's lake. 
His crown, with friends' support, to take." 

In spring Magnus sailed from the East to Sweden. 
So says Amor : — 

'^ The young sword-stainer called a Thing, 
Where all his men should meet their king : 
Heroes who find the eagle food 
Before their lord in arms stood. 
And now the curved plank of the bow 
Cleaves the blue sea; the ocean-plough. 
By grey winds driven across the main. 
Reaches Sigtuna's grassy plain." 

Here it is related that when King Magnus and his 
fellow-travellers sailed from the East to Sweden, they 
brought up at Sigtun. Onund Olafsson was then 
king in Sweden. Queen Astrid, who had been mar- 
ried to King Olaf the Saint, was also there. She 
received very gladly and well her stepson King Mag- 
nus, and summoned immediately a numerous Thing 
of Swedes at a place called Hungrar. At the Thing 

* Magnus reigned from about 1035 to about 1047. 
A A 4 



360 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VIII. Queen Astrid spoke these words : — " Here is come 
to us a son of Olaf the Saint, called Magnus, who 
intends to make an expedition to Norway to seek his 
father's heritage. It is my great duty to give him 
aid towards this expedition ; for he is my stepson, as 
is known to all, both Swedes and Norwegians. Nei- 
ther shall he want men or money, in so far as I can 
procure them or have influence, in order that his 
strength may be as great as possible ; and all the men 
who will support this cause of his shall have my fiillest 
friendship ; and I would have it known that I intend 
myself to go with him on this attempt, that all may 
see I will spare nothing that is in my power to help 
him." She spoke long and cleverly in this strain; 
but when she had ended many replied thus : — " The 
Swedes made no honourable progress in Norway when 
they followed King Olaf his father, and now no better 
success is to be expected, as this man is but in years 
of boyhood ; and therefore we have little inclination 
for this expedition." Astrid replies, " All men who 
wish to be thought of true courage must not be de- 
terred by such considerations. If any have lost con- 
nections at the side of King Olaf, or been themselves 
wounded, now is the time to show a man's heart and 
courage, and go to Norway to take vengeance." Astrid 
succeeded so far with words and encouragement that 
many men determined to go with her, and foUow 
King Magnus to Norway. Sigvat the scald speaks 
of this : — 

** Now Astrid, Olaf *s widowed queen, — 
She who so many a change had seen^ — 
Took all the gifts of happier days. 
Jewels and rings, all she could raise. 
And at a Thing at Hungrar, where 
The Swedes were numerous, did declare 
What Olaf *s son proposed to do. 
And hrougfat her gifts — their pay — in view. 

" And with the Swedes no wiser plan. 
To hring out every brave bold man. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 361 

Could have been founds had Magnus been saga viil 

The son himself of the good queen. '^~" 

With help of Christy she hoped to bring 
Magnus to be the land's sole king^ 
As Harald was, who in his day 
Obtained o'er all the upper sway. 

. ' ** And glad are we so well she sped, — 

The people's friend is now their head; 
And good King Magnus always shows 
How much he to Queen Astrid owes. 
Such stepmothers as this good queen 
In truth are very rarely seen ; 
And to this noble woman's praise 
The scald with joy his song will raise." 

Thiodolf the scald also says in his song of Mag- 
nus : — 

" When thy brave ship left the land. 
The bending yard could scarce withstand 
The fury of the whistling gale. 
That split thy many-coloured sail; 
And many a stout ship, tempest-tost, 
Was in that howling storm lost 
That brought thee safe to Sigtun's shore. 
Far from the sound of ocean's roar." 

King Magnus set out on his journey from Sigtun CHAPTEa 
with a great force, which he had gathered in Sweden. Magnus's 
They proceeded through Sweden on foot to Helsingia- ^^q^j^**^" 
land. So says Amor, the earl's scald : — Sweden. 

" And many a dark-red Swedish shield 
Marched with thee from the Swedish field. 
The country people crowded in, 
To help Saint Olaf *s son to win ; 
And chosen men by thee were led^ 
Men who have stained the wolf's tongue red. 
Each milk-white shield and polished spear 
Came to a splendid gathering there." 

Magnus Olafsson went from the East through 
Jemteland over the keel-ridge* of the country, and 

♦ The Kiol, or keel-ridge of the country, is now, as formerly, applied 
to the chain of hills that divides the waters of the peninsula falling to 
the east from those which fall to the west and north, and is taken 
from the figure of a boat turned upside down ; the keel representing the 
dividing ridge of the country so truly, that the figure of speech has been 
used in all ages. 



362 



CHBONICLE OF THE 



sAGAjriiL came down upon the Drontheim district, where all 
men welcomed the king with joy. But no sooner did 
the men of King Swend, the son of AlfifiEi, hear that 
King Magnus Olafsson was come to the country, than 
they fled on all sides and concealed themselves, so 
that no opposition was made to King Magnus; for 
King Swend was in the south part of the country. 
So says Amor, the earFs scald : — 

<' He who the eagle's talons stains 
Rushed from the East on Drontheun's plahs; 
The terror of his plumed helm 
Drove his pale foemen from the realm. 
The lightning of thy eye so near. 
Great king I thy foemen could not hear. 
Scattered they fled — their only care 
If thou their wretched lives wilt spare." 

Magnus Olafsson advanced to the town (Nidaros), 
where he was joyfully received. He then summoned 
the people to the Eyra-thing*; and when the bonders 
met at the Thing, Magnus was taken to be king over 
the whole land, as far as his father Olaf had possessed 
it. Then the king selected a court, and named len- 
dermen, and placed bailiffs and oflicers in all domains 
and offices. Immediately after harvest King ]!4^agnus 
ordered a levy through all Drontheim land, and he 
collected men readily; and thereafter he proceeded 
southwards along the coast. 

King Swend Alfifason was staying in South Horda- 
land when he heard this news of war. He imme- 
diately sent out war-tokens to four different quarters, 
summoned the bonders to him, and made it Imown to 
all that they should join him with men and ships to 
defend the country. All the men who were in the 



Chapter 
III. 
MagDus 
made king. 



Chapter 
IV. 
King 
Swend's 
flight. 



* Eyra or Oyra Thing, held on the ayr of the river Nid, that is, on 
the spit of sand, still called an ayr in the north of Scotland, dividing a 
lake, pond, or river-mouth from the sea. At the Thing held here the 
kings of Norway were chosen and proclaimed. It was held to he the 
proper Thing for settling disputes hetween kings in Norway. 



KINGS OF NOBWAY. 363 

neighbourhood of the king presented themselves ; and sagavih. 
the king formed a Thing, at which in a speech he set 
forth his business, and said he would advance against 
Magnus Olafsson and have a battle with him, if the 
bonders would aid his cause. The king's speech was 
not very long, and was not received with much ap- 
probation by the bonders. Afterwards the Danish 
chiefs who were about the king made long and clever 
speeches; but the bonders then took up the word, 
and answered them; and although many said they 
would foUow Swend, and fight on his side, some 
refiised to do so bluntly, some were altogether silent, 
and some declared they would join King Magnus as 
soon as they had an opportunity. Then King Swend 
says, " Methinks very few of the bonders to whom we 
sent a message have appeared here ; and of those who 
have come, and teU us to our face that they wUl join 
King Magnus as soon as they can, we shall have as 
little benefit as of those who say they will sit at home 
quietly. It is the same with those who say nothing 
at all. But as to those who promise to help us, there 
are not more than every other man ; and that force 
will avail us little against King Magnus. It is my 
counsel, therefore, that we do not trust to these bon- 
ders ; but let us rather go to the land where all the 
people are sure and true to us, and where we will 
obtain forces to conquer this country again." As 
soon as the king had made known this resolution aU 
his men followed it, turned their ships' bows, and 
hoisted sail. King Swend sailed eastward along the 
land, and then set right over to Denmark without 
delay, and Hardacanute received his brother Swend 
very kindly. At their first meeting Hardacanute 
offered King Swend to divide the kingdom of Den- 
mark with him, which offer King Swend accepted. 

In autumn King Magnus proceeded eastward to Chapter 
the end of the country, and was received as king King 

Magnus's 



364 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAOA VIII. 

journey to 
Norway. 

Chapter 
VI. 
Death of 
King Ca- 
nute the 
Great and 
his son 
Swend. 



Chapter 
VII. 
Fealty be- 
tween King 
Harda- 
canute 
and King 
Magnus. 



throughout the whole land, and the country people 
were rejoiced at his arrival. 

King Swend, Canute's son, went to Denmark, as 
before related, and took part in the government with 
his brother Hardacanute. In the same autumn King 
Canute the Great died in England*, the 13th Novem- 
ber, forty years old, and was buried at Winchester. 
He had been king of Denmark for twenty-seven years, 
and over Denmark and England together twenty-four 
years, and also over Norway for seven years. King 
Canute's son Harald was then made king in England. 
The same winter. King Swend, Alfifa's son, died in 
Denmark. Thiodolf the scald made these lines con- 
cerning King Magnus : — 

'* Through Sweden's dirty roads the throng 
Followed the king in spearmen strong. 
Swend Alfi flies, in truth afraid. 
And partly hy his men hetrayed : 
Flying to Denmark o'er the sea, 
He leaves the land quite clear to thee." 

Biom Gulbraascald composed the following lines 
concerning Kalf Arneson : — 

'* By thee the kings got each his own, — 
Magnus by thee got Norway's throne ; 
And Swend in Denmark got a seat. 
When out of Norway he was beat. 
Kalf ! it was you who showed the way 
To our young king, the battle-lover, — 
From Russia to his father's sway 
You showed the way, and brought him over." 

King Magnus ruled over Norway this winter, and 
Hardacanute over Denmark. 

The following spring the kings on both sides ordered 
out a levy, and the news was that they would have a 
battle at the Gotha river ; but when the two armies 
approached each other, the lendermen in the one army 

* In the year 1036, according to the Saxon Chronicle, after reigning 
nearly twenty years over all England. 



KINGS OF NORWAY; 365 

sent messengers to their connections and friends in saga vm. 
the other; and it came to a proposal for a reconciliation 
between the two kings, especially as, from both kings 
being but young and chUdish, some powerful men, 
who had been chosen in each of the countries for that 
purpose, had the rule of the country on their account. 
It thus was brought about that there was a friendly 
meeting between the kings, and in this meeting a 
peace was proposed ; and the peace was to be a bro- 
therly union under oath to keep the peace towards 
each other to the end of their lives ; and if one of 
them should die without leaving a son, the longest 
liver should succeed to the whole land and people. 
Twelve of the principal men in each kingdom swore 
to the kings that this treaty should be observed, so 
long as any one of them was in life. Then the kings 
separated, and each returned home to his kingdom ; 
and the treaty was kept as long as both lived. 

Queen Astrid, who had been married to King Olaf ^y^jT? "^ 
the Saint, came to Norway with King Magnus her of Queen 
stepson, as before related, and was held by him de- ^^*"^' 
servedly in great honour and esteem. Then came 
also Alfhild, King Magnus's mother, to the court, 
and the king received her with the greatest affection, 
and showed her great respect. But it went with 
Alfhild, as it does with many who come to power and 
honour, that pride keeps pace with promotion. She 
was ill pleased that Queen Astrid was treated with 
more respect, had a higher seat, and more attention. 
Alfhild wanted to have a seat next to the king, but 
Astrid called Alfhild her slave-woman, as indeed she 
had formerly been when Astrid was queen of Norway 
and King Olaf ruled the land, and therefore would on 
no account let her have a seat beside her, and they 
could not lodge in the same house. 

Sigvat the scald had got leave from King Olaf to Chaptbr 
go home when the king went to Russia. The summer of sigvat 

the scald. 



366 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VIII. after Sigvat left the country, and went south to Rome, 
where he was at the time of the battle of Stiklestad. 
He made these verses then : — 

" Tired of war, I left my home^ 
And took the saving road to Rome ; 
No more the wild wolf's jaws to fill^ 
No more the hlood of man to spiU. 
The gold-entwined sword I left. 
The hlue steel sword — the king's own gift; 
And with the pilgrim's staff in hand, 
I took my way through many a land." 

In autumn, as Sigvat was on his way back from 
the South, he heard the tidings of King Olaf 's faU, 
which gave him great grief. He then sang these 
lines : — 

" One morning early on a hill. 
The misty towns asleep and still, 
Wandering I thought upon the fields. 
Strewed o'er with broken mail and shields. 
Where our king fell, — our kind good king 
Where now his happy youthful spring ? 
My father too ! — for Thord was then 
One of the good king's chosen men." 

One day Sigvat went through a village, and heard 
a husband lamenting grievously over the loss of his 
wife, striking his breast, tearing his clothes, weeping 
bitterly, and saying he wanted to die; and Sigvat 
sang these lines : — 

^' This poor man mourns a much, loved wife. 
Gladly would he he quit of life. 
Must love he paid for hy our grief? 
The price seems great for joy so brief. 
But the hrave man who knows no fear 
Drops for his king a silent tear. 
And feels, perhaps, his loss as deep 
As those who clamour when they weep.'* 

Sigvat came home to Norway to the Drontheim 
country, where he had a farm and children. He 
came from the South along the coast in a merchant 
vessel, and as they lay in HiUar sound they saw a 
great many ravens flying about. Then Sigvat said, — 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 367 

'^ I see here many a croaking raven saga viii. 

Flying about the well-known haven : 
When Olaf 's ship was floating here^ 
They knew that food for them was near; 
When Olaf 's ship lay here wind-bound. 
Oft screamed the erne o'er Hilla sound. 
Impatient for the expected prey. 
And wont to follow to the fray." 

When Sigvat came north to the town of Drontheim 
King Swend was there before him. He invited Sigvat 
to stay with him, as Sigvat had formerly been with 
his father King Canute the Great ; but Sigvat said he 
would first go home to his farm. One day, as Sigvat 
was walking in the street, he saw the king's men at 
play, and he sang, — 

^^ One day before I passed this way. 
When the king's guards were at iheir play. 
Something there was-— I need not tell — 
That made me pale, and feel unwell. 
Perhaps it was I thought, just then. 
How noble Olaf with his men. 
In former days, I oft have seen 
In manly games upon this green." 

Sigvat then went to his farm ; and as he heard that 
many men upbraided him with having deserted King 
Olaf, he made these verses : — 

'^ May Christ condemn me still to bum 
In quenchless fire, if I did turn. 
And leave King Olaf in his need, — 
My soul is free from such base deed. 
I was at Rome, as men know well 
Who saw me there, and who can tell 
That there in danger I was then : 
The truth I need not hide from men." 

Sigvat was iU at ease in his home. One day he 
went out and sang, — 

'' WhUe Olaf lived, how smiled the land! — 
Mountain and difi^, and pebbly strand. 
All Norway then, so fre^, so gay,^ 
On land or sea, where oft I lay. 
But now to me all seems so dreary. 
All black and dull — of life I'm weary : 
Cheerless to.day, cheerless to-morrow — 
Here in the North we have great sorrow." 



368 



CHBONICLB OF THE 



SAGA VIII. 



Chapter 
X. 

Of King 
Magnuses 
first arrival 
in Sweden. 



Early in winter Sigvat went westward over the 
ridge of the country to Jemteland, and onwards to 
Helsingialand, and came to Sweden. He went imme- 
diately to Queen Astrid, and was with her a long 
time, and was a welcome guest. He was also with 
her brother King Onund, and received from him ten 
marks of proved silver, as is related in the song of 
Canute. Sigvat always inquired of the merchants 
who traded to Novogorod if they could tell him any 
news of Magnus Olafsson. Sigvat composed these 
lines at that time : — 

'^ I ask the merchant oft who driyes 
His trade to Russia^ ^ How he thrives^ 
Our noble prince? How lives he there?' 
And still good news— -his praise — I hear 
To little birds^ which wing their way 
Between the lands^ I fain would say 
How much we long our prince to see ; 
They seem to bear a wish from me." 

Immediately after Magnus Olafsson came to Sweden 
from Russia, Sigvat met him at Queen Astrid's house, 
and glad they all were at meeting. Sigvat then 
sang,— 

" Thou art come here, prince, young and bold I 
Thou art come home ! With joy behold 
Thy land and people. From this hour 
I join myself to thy young power. 
I could not o'er to Russia hie, — 
Thy mother's guardian here was I. 
It was my punishment for giving* 
Magnus his name, while scarcely living." 

Afterwards Sigvat travelled with Queen Astrid, and 
followed Magnus to Norway. Sigvat sang thus : — 

^' To the crowds streaming to the Thing, 
To see and hear Magnus their king. 
Loudly, young king, I'll speak my mind — 
* God to his people has been kind.' 



* Sigvat often refers to the circumstance of his having been the god- 
father of King Magnus, and having given him his name in baptism. 
See Olaf the Saint^s Saga, chapter 131. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 369 

If He^ to whom be all the praise^ saga viii- 

Give us a son in all his ways ""■"" 

Like to his sire^ no folk on earth 
Will bless so much a royal birth." 

Now when Magnus became king of Norway Sigvat 
attended him, and was his dearest friend. Once it 
happened that Queen Astrid and AlfhUd the king's 
mother had exchanged some sharp words with each 
other, and Sigvat said, — 

^^ Alf hilda ! though it was God's will 
To raise thee — yet remember still 
The queen-bom Astrid should not be 
Kept out of due respect by thee." 

King Magnus had a shrine made and mounted with Chapt«r 
gold and silver, and studded with jewels. This shrine Rin« ' 
was made so that in shape and size it was like a coffin. ^^^^ 
Under it was an arched way, and above was a raised 
roof, with a head and a roof ridge. Behind were 
plaited hangings ; and before were gratings with pad- 
locks, which could be locked with a key. In this 
shrine King Magnus had the holy remains of King 
Olaf deposited, and many were the miracles there 
wrought. Of this Sigvat speaks : — 

*^ For him a golden shrine is made^ 
For him whose heart was ne'er afraid 
Of mortal man — the holy king. 
Whom the Lord God to heaven did bring. 
Here many a man shall feel his- way. 
Stone-blind, unconscious of the day. 
And at the shrine where Olaf lies 
Give songs of praise for opened eyes." 

It was also appointed by law that King Olaf 's holy 
day should be held holy over all Norway, and that 
day has been kept ever afterwards as the greatest of 
church days. Sigvat speaks of it : — 

*^ To Olaf, Magnus' father, raise, 
Within my house, the song of praise ! 
With joy, yet grief, we'll keep the day 
Olaf to heaven was called away. 

VOL. II. B B 



370 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



Chaptiii 
XIII. 
Of the 
murder of 
Harek of 
Thiotto. 



SAGA VIII. Well may I keep within my breast 

A day for him in holy rest, — 

My upraised hands a golden ring 

On every branch* bear from that king/* 

Chapter Thorcr Huiid left the country immediately after 
Of Tborer King Olaf s fall. He went all the way to Jerusalem, 
^""^' and many people say he never came back. Thorer 
Hund had a son called Sigurd, father of Ranveig 
who was married to John, a son of Ame Arneson. 
Their children were Vidkun of Biorko, Sigurd Hund, 
Erling, and Jardthrud. 

Harek of Thiotto sat at home in his farm, till 
King Magnus Olafsson came to the country and was 
made king. Then Harek went south to Drontheim to 
King Magnus. At that time Asmund Gankelsson 
was in the king's house. When Harek came to Ni- 
daros, and landed out of the ship, Asmund was stand- 
ing with the king in the gallery outside the loft, and 
both the king and Asmund knew Harek when they 
saw him. " Now," says Asmund to the king, " I will 
pay Harek for my father's murder." He had in his 
hand a little thin hatchet. The king looked at him, 
and said, " Rather take this axe of mine." It was 
thick, and made like a club. " Thou must know, 
Asmund," added he, " that there are hard bones in 
the old fellow." Asmund took the axe, went down, 
and through the house, and when he came down to 
the cross road Harek and his men coming up met 
him. Asmund struck Harek on the head, so that the 
axe penetrated to the brains ; and that was Harek's 
death-wound. Asmund turned back directly to the 
king's house, and the whole edge of the axe was 
turned with the blow. Then said the king, " What 
would thy axe have done, for even this one, I think, 
is spoilt?" King Magnus afterwards gave him a fief 



♦ The fingers, the branches of the hand, bore golden fruits from the 
generosity of the king. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 371 

and office in Halogaland, and many are the tales about saga vm. 
the strife between Asmund and Harek's sons. 

Kalf Ameson had at first, for some time, the great- Chapter 
est share of the government of the country under of Thlr- 
King Magnus ; but afterwards there were people who s^ir Fiek. 
reminded the king of the part Kalf had taken at 
Stiklestad, and then it became difficult for Kalf to 
give the king satisfaction in any thing. Once it hap- 
pened there were many men with the king bringing 
their aflFairs before him ; and Thorgeir Flek from Suul 
in VaBrdal, of whom mention is made before in the 
history of King Olaf the Saint, came to him about 
some needful business. The king paid no attention 
to his words, but was listening to people who stood 
near him. Then Thorgeir said to the king, so loud 
that all who were around him could hear, — 

** Listen, my lord. 
To my plain word. 
I too was there. 
And had to hear 
A hloody head 
From Stiklested: 
For I was then 
With 01af*s men. 
Listen to me : 
Well did I see 
The men you're trusting 
The dead corpse thrusting 
Out of their way. 
As dead it lay ; 
And striding o'er 
Your father's gore." 

There was instantly a great uproar, and some told 
Thorgeir to go out ; but the king called him, and not 
only despatched his business to his satisfaction, but 
promised him favour and friendship. 

Soon after this the king was at a feast at the farm Chapter 
of Haug in Vaerdal, and at the dinner- table Kalf Kaif Ame- 
Arneson sat upon one side of him, and Einar Tam- son flies the 
barskelver on the other. It was already come so far *^^"" '^' 

BB 2 



372 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA viir. that the king took little notice of Kalf, but paid most 
attention to Einar. The king said to Einar, " Let us 
ride to-day to Stiklestad. I should like to see the 
memorials of the things which took place there." Einar 
replies, " I can tell thee nothing about it ; but take 
thy foster-father Kalf with thee : he can give thee in- 
formation about all that took place." When the tables 
were removed, the king made himself ready, and said 
to Kalf, '* Thou must go with me to Stiklestad." 
Kalf replied, *' That is really not my duty." 
Then the king stood up in a passion, and said, " Go 
thou shalt, Kalf! " and thereupon he went out. 

Kalf put on his riding clothes in all haste, and said 
to his foot-boy, '^ Thou must ride directly to Egge, 
and order my house-servants to ship all my property 
on board my ship before sunset." 

King Magnus now rides to Stiklestad, and Kalf 
with him. They alighted from horseback, and went 
to the place where the battle had been. Then said 
the king to Kalf, " Where is the spot at which the 
king feU?" 

Kalf stretched out his spear-shaft, and said, " There 
he lay when he fell." 

The king: "And where wast thou, Kalf?" 
Kalf : " Here where I am now standing." 
The king turned red as blood in the face, and said, 
" Then thy axe could well have reached him." 

Kalf replied, " My axe did not come near him ;" 
and immediately went to his horse, sprang on horse- 
back, and rode away with all his men ; and the king 
rode back to Haug. Kalf did not stop until he got 
home in the evening to Egge. There his ship lay 
ready at the shore side, and all his effects were on 
board, and the vessel manned with his house-servants. 
They set off immediately by night down the fiord, 
and afterwards proceeded day and night, when the 
wind suited. He sailed out into the West sea, and 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 373 

was there a long time plundering in Ireland, Scotland, saga vm, 
and the Hebudes. Biorn Guldbraascald tells of this 
in the song about Kalf : — 

^^ Brother of Thorberg*, who still stood 
Well with the king ! in angry mood 
He is the first to break with thee^ 
Who well deserves esteemed to be : 
He is the first who friendship broke^ 
For envious men the falsehood spoke; 
And he will be the iir&t to rue 
The breach of friendship 'twixt you two/' 

King Magnus added to his property Veggia, which ^^^^^ 
Rut had been owner of, and Quiststad, which had oftiie ' 
belonged to Thorgeir, and also Egge, with all the ^^^^^^f 
goods which Kalf had left behind him ; and thus he sants. 
confiscated to the king's estate many great farms, 
which had belonged to those of the bonder-army who 
had fallen at Stiklestad. In like manner, he laid heavy 
fines upon many of those who made the greatest op- 
position to King Olaf. He drove some out of the 
country, took large sums of money from others, and 
had the cattle of others slaughtered for his use. Then 
the bonders began to murmur, and to say among 
themselves, " Will he go on in the same way as his 
father and other chiefs, whom we made an end of 
when their pride and lawless proceedings became in- 
supportable ? " This discontent spread widely through 
the country. The people of Sogn gathered men, and, 
it was said, were determined to give battle to King 
Magnus, if he came into the Fiord district. King 
Magnus was then in Hordaland, where he had re- 
mained a long time with a numerous retinue, and was 
now come to the resolution to proceed north to Sogn. 
When the king's friends observed this, twelve men 
had a meeting, and resolved to determine by casting 
lots which of them should inform the king of the 

• Tliorberg was a brother of Kalf Arneson. 
J5B 3 



374 CHRONICLE OP THE 

SAGA VIII. discontent of the people; and it so happened that the 

the lot fell upon Sigvat. 
Chaffer Sigvat accordingly composed a poem, which he 
oftheFree- Called the Free-speaking Song, which begins with 
s^r^^a^d ^^y"^S *^® ^ing had delayed too long to pacify the 
of the law people, who were threatening to rise in tumult against 
^"^^' him. He said : — 

" Here in the Souths from Sogn is spread 
The news that strife draws to a head : 
The bonders will the king oppose — 
Kings and their folk should ne'er be foes. 
Let us take arms^ and briskly go 
To battle, if it must be so ; 
Defend our king, — but still deplore 
His land plunged in such strife once more." 

In this song are also these verses : — 

^^ Hakon *, who at Fitia died, — 
Hakon the Good, could not abide 
The viking rule, or robber train, 
And all men*s love he thus did gain. 
The people since have still in mind 
The laws of Hakon, just and kind ; 
And men will never see the day 
When Hakon's laws have passed away. 

** The bonders ask but what is fair : 
The Olafsf and the Earls}:, when there 
Where Magnus sits, confirmed to all v 
Their lands and gear — to great and small. 
Bold Tryggve's son, and Harald*s heir. 
The Olafs, while on earth they were. 
Observed the laws themselves had made. 
And none was for his own afraid. 

" Let not thy counsellors stir thy wrath 
Against the man who speaks the truth: 
Thy honour lies in thy good sword, 
But still more in thy royal word; 



* This song appears to refer to some attempt to introduce the feudal 
system, with its escheats and forfeitures, instead of the udal rights, by 
King Magnus. 

t Olaf Tryygvesson, and Olaf the Saint, Harald's son. 

:{: Earl Hakon the Great, and Earl Swend. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 375 

And, if the people do not lie, , saga viii. 

The new laws turn out not nigh 
So just and mild, as the laws given 
At Ulversound in face of heaven. 

'^ Dread king! who urges thee to hreak 
Thy pledged word, and back to take 
Thy promise given ? Thou warrior bold ! 
With thy own people word to hold. 
Thy promise fully to maintain, 
Is to thyself the greatest gain : 
The battle-storm raiser he 
Must by his own men trusted be. 

*^ Who urges thee, who seek'st renown. 
The bonders' cattle to cut down ? 
No king before e'er took in hand 
Such viking.work in his own land. 
Such rapine men will not long bear. 
And the king's counsellors will but share 
In their ill-will : when once inflamed. 
The king himself for all is blamed. 

^^ Be cautious, with tliis news of treason 
Flying about — give them no reason. 
We hang the thief, but then we use 
Consideration of the excuse. 
I think, great king (who wilt rejoice 
Eagle and wolf with battle voice). 
It would be wise not to oppose 
Thy bonders, and make them thy foes. 

^^ A dangerous sign it is, I fear. 
That old grey-bearded men appear 
In corners whispering at the Thing, 
As if they had bad news to bring. 
The young sit still, — no laugh, or shout, — 
More looks than words passing about ; 
And groups of whispering heads are seen. 
On buttoned breasts, with lowering mien. 

" Among the udalmen, they say 
The king, if he could have his way. 
Would seize the bonders' udal land. 
And free-bom men must this withstand. 
In truth the man whose udal field. 
By any doom that law can yield 
From him adjudged the king would take. 
Could the king's throne and power shake." 

B B 4 



376 



CHKONICLE OF THE 



sAOAviii. This verse is the last : — 

"A. holy bond between us still* 
Makes me wish speedy end to ill: 
The sluggard waits till afternoon, — 
At once, great Magnus ! grant our boon. 
Thee we will serve with heart and hand^ 
With thee we'll fight by sea or land : 
With Olaf *s sword take Olaf *s mind^ 
And to thy bonders be more kind." 

In this song the king was exhorted to observe the 
laws which his father had established. This exhort- 
ation had a good effect on the king, for many others 
held the same language to him. So at last the king 
consulted the most prudent men, who ordered all 
affairs according to law. Thereafter King Magnus 
had the law-book composed in writing which is still 
in use in Drontheim district, and is called The Grey 
Goose.f King Magnus afterwards became very po- 
pular, and was beloved by all the country people, and 
therefore he was called Magnus the Good. 

The king of the English, King Harald, died J five 
years after his father King Canute, and was buried 
beside his father at Winchester. After his death his. 
brother Hardacanute, the second son of the old King 
Canute, was king of England, and was thus king both 



CHAPTEa 

XVIII 

Of the 

English 

kings. 



* The bond of godfather at his baptism^ to which Sigvat often alludes. 

t The Grey Goose^ so called probably from the colour of the parch- 
ment on which it is written, i-s one of the most curious relics of the 
middle ages^ and gives us an unexpected view of the social condition of 
the Northmen in the eleventh century. Law appears to have been so 
far advanced among them that the forms were not merely established^ 
but the slightest breach of the legal forms of proceeding involved the 
loss of the case. The Grey Goose embraces subjects not dealt with 
probably by any other code in Europe at that period. The provision 
for the poor^ the equality of weights and measures, police of markets 
and of sea havens^ provision for illegitimate children of the poor^ inns 
for travellers, wages of servants and support of them in sickness^ protec 
tion of pregnant women and even of domestic animals from injury, roads, 
bridges, vagrants, beggars^ are subjects treated of in this code. — Sec 
Nordisk Tidscrift for Oldkyndighed 1 H. 1 B. 1 832 om Graagaasen ved 
Schlegel. 

J In 1039, according to the Saxon Chronicle. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 377 

of Denmarik and England. He ruled these kingdoms saga vm. 
two years, and then died of sickness in England*, 
leaving no children. He was buried at Winchester 
beside his father. After his death Edward the Good, 
a son of the English king Ethelred, and Emma a 
daughter of Richard earl of Rouen, was chosen king 
in England. King Edward the Good was, on his 
mother's side, a brother of Harald and Hardacanute, 
the sons of Canute the Great ; and the daughter of 
Canute and Queen Emma was Gunhild, who was 
married to the Emperor Henry of Germany, who was 
called Henry the Mild. Gunhild was three years in 
Germany when she fell sick, and she died five years 
after the death of her father King Canute the Great. 

When King Magnus Olafsson heard of Harda- Chapter 
Canute's death, he immediately sent people south to ofKing 
Denmark, with a message to the men who had bound oiafMon 
themselves by oath to the peace and agreement which 
was made between King Magnus and Hardacanute, 
and reminded them of their pledge. He added, as a 
conclusion, that in summer he would come with his 
army to Denmark to take possession of his Danish 
dominions, in terms of the agreement, or to fall in 
the field with his army. So says Arnor, the earl's 
scald : — 

'^ Wise were the words^ exceeding wise. 
Of him who stills the hungriest cries 
Of beasts of prey — the earls' lord ; 
And soon fulfilled will be his word : 
' With his good sword he'll Denmark gain. 
Or fall upon a bloody plain ; 
And rather than give up his cause, 
Will leave his corpse to ravens* claws.* '* 

Thereafter King Magnus gathered together a great Chapter 
army, and summoned to him all lendermen and King^' 
powerful bonders, and collected war-ships. When Magnus's 
the army was assembled it was very handsome, and 

* In 1041, according to the Saxon Chronicle. 



878 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VIII. well fitted out. He had seventy large vessels when he 
sailed from Norway. So says Thiodolf the scald : — 

'^ Brave king ! the terror of the foe. 
With thee will many a long-ship go. 
Full seventy sail are gathered here, 
Eastward with their great king to steer. 
And southward now the bright keel glides ; 
O er the white waves the Bison rides. 
Sails swell, yards crack, the highest mast 
O er the wide sea scarce seen at last." 

Here it is related that King Magnus had the great 
Bison, which his father King Olaf had built. It had 
more than thirty banks of rowers; and forward on the 
bow was a great buffalo head, and aft on the stem- 
post was its tail. Both the head and the tail, and both 
sides of the ship, were gilded over. Of this speaks 
Arnor, the earl's scald : — 

'* The white foam lashing o'er the deck 
Oft made the gilded head to shake: 
The helm down, the vessel's heel 
Oft showed her stem's hright glancing steel. 
Around Stavangar-point careering, 
Through the wild sea's white flames steering. 
Tackle loud singing to the strain. 
The storm-horse flies to Denmark's plain." 

King Magnus set out to sea from Agder, and sailed 
over to Jutland. So says Amor : — 

" I can relate how through the gale 
The gallant Bison carried sail, 
With her lee gunwale in the wave. 
The king on board, Magnus the brave ! 
The iron-clad Thingmen s chief to see 
On Jutland's coast right glad were we, — 
Right glad our men to see a king 
Who in the fight his sword could swing." 



Chapter 
XXI. 

King 
Magnus *! 
comes to 
Denmark. 



When King Magnus came to Denmark he was joy- 
fully received. He appointed a Thing without delay, 
to which he summoned the people of the country, and 
desired they would take him as king, according to the 
agreement which had been entered into. As the 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 379 

highest of the chiefs of the country were bound by oath saga vm. 
to King Magnus, and were desirous of keeping their 
word and oath, they endeavoured zealously to promote 
the cause with the people. It contributed also that 
King Canute the Great, and all his descendants, were 
dead; and a third assistance was, that his father 
King Olaf 's sanctity and miracles were become cele- 
brated in all countries. 

King Magnus afterwards ordered the people to be Chapter 
summoned to Viburg* to a Thing. Both in older Ki^^"' 
and later times, the Danes elected their kings at the ^*f1j"^j„ 
Viburg Thing. At this Thing the Danes chose Mag- of Den- 
nus Olafsson to be king of all the Danish dominions. ™*''^' 
King Magnus remained long in Denmark during the 
summer ; and wherever he came the people received 
him joyfully, and obeyed him willingly. He divided 
the country into baronies and districts, and gave fiefs 
to men of power in the land. Late in autumn he 
returned with his fleet to Norway, but lay for some 
time at the river Gotha. 

There was a man, by name Swend, a son of Earl ^^TtT 
Ulf, and grandson of Thorgils Sprakaleg. Swend's OfSwend 
mother was Astrid, a daughter of King Swein of ^^^*°"- 
England. She was a sister of Canute the Great by 
the father's side, and of the Swedish King Olaf Erics- 
son by the mother's side ; for her mother was Queen 
Sigrid the Haughty, a daughter of Skoglar-Toste. 
Swend Ulfsson had been a long time hving with his 
relation the Swedish king, ever since King Canute 
had ordered his father Ulf to be killed, as is related 
in the saga of old King Canute, — that he had his bro- 
ther-in-law. Earl Ulf, murdered in Roskilda ; and on 
which account Swend had not since been in Den- 
mark. Swend Ulfsson was one of the handsomest 
men that could be seen; he was very stout and strong, 

* Vibjurger, now Viburg, is an ancient little town in North Jutland. 



380 CHBONICLE OF THE 

SA GA vu L and very expert in all exercises, and a well-spoken 
man withal. Every one who knew him said he had 
every quality which became a good chief. Swend 
Ulfsson waited upon King Magnus while he lay in 
the Gotha river, as before mentioned, and the king 
received him kindly, as he was by many advised to 
do ; for Swend was a particularly popular man. He 
could also speak for himself to the king well and 
cleverly ; so that it came at last to Swend's entering 
into King Magnus's service, and becoming his man. 
They often talked together afterwards in private con- 
cerning many affairs. 
x'x7v* ^^^ ^^y» ^ ^^^S Magnus sat in his high seat and 
Swend many people were around him, Swend Ulfsson sat 
w^tedan upon a footstool before the king. The king then 
«"'• made a speech : — "Be it known to you, chiefs, and the 

people in general, that I have taken the following 
resolution. Here is a distinguished man, both for 
family and for his own merits, Swend Ulfsson, who 
has entered into my service, and given me promise of 
fidelity. Now, as ye know, the Danes have this 
summer became my men, so that when I am absent 
from the country it is without a head ; and it is not 
unknown to you how it is ravaged by the people of 
Vendland, Courland, and others from the Baltic, as well 
as by Saxons. Therefore I promised them a chief who 
could defend and rule their land ; and I know no man 
better fitted, in all respects, for this than Swend 
Ulfsson, who is of birth to be chief of the country. I 
will therefore make him my earl, and give him the 
government of my Danish dominions while I am in 
Norway; just as King Canute the Great set his 
father. Earl Ulf, over Denmark while he was in 
England." 

Then Einar Tambarskelver said, " Too great an 
earl — too great an earl, my foster-son!" 

The king replied in a passion, " Ye have a poor 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 381 

opinion of my judgment, I think. Some consider that saga vm. 
ye are too great earls, and others that ye are fit for 
nothing." 

Then the king stood up, took a sword, and girt it 
on the earl's loins, and took a shield and fastened it 
on his shoulders, put a helmet upon his head, and 
gave him the title of earl, with the same fiefs in Den- 
mark which his father Earl Ulf had formerly held. 
Afterwards a shrine was brought forth containing 
holy relics, and Swend laid his hand thereon, and 
swore the oath of fidelity to King Magnus; upon 
which the king led the earl to the high seat by his 
side. So says Thiodolf : — 

'* 'Twas at the Gotha river's shore. 
With hand on shrine Swend Ulfsson swore. 
King Magnus first said o'er the oath. 
With which Swend Ulfsson pledged his troth. 
The vows hy Swend solemnly given, 
On holy hones of saints in heaven. 
To Magnus seemed hoth fair and fast : 
He found they were too fair to last." 

Earl Swend went thereafter to Denmark, and the 
whole nation received him well. He established a 
court about him, and soon became a great man. In 
winter he went much about the country, and made 
friends among the powerful chiefs; and, indeed, he 
was beloved by all the people of the land. 

King Magnus proceeded northward to Norway Chapter 
with his fleet, and wintered there; but when the k^^^' 
spring set in he gathered a large force, with which he ^^^' 
sailed south to Denmark, having heard the news from ^' 
Vendland that the Vendland people in Jomsburg had 
withdrawn from their submission to him. The Danish 
kings had formerly had a very large earldom there, 
and they first founded Jomsburg ; and now the place 
was become a very strong fortress. "When King Mag- 
nus heard of this, he ordered a large fleet and army 
to be levied in Denmark, and sailed in summer to 



nuss 



382 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA via Vendland with all his forces, which made a very large 
army altogether. Arnor, the earFs scald, tells of it 
thus: — 

** Now in this strophe, royal youth ! 
I tell no more than the plain truth. 
Thy armed outfit from the strand 
Left many a keel-trace on the sand, 
And never did a king hefore 
So many ships to any shore 
Lead on, as thou to Vendland's isle : 
The Vendland men in fright recoil." 

Now when King Magnus came to Vendland he 
attacked Jomsburg, and soon took the fortress, killing 
many people, burning and destrojdng both in the 
town and in the country all around, and making the 
greatest havoc. So says Amor, the earl's scald: — 

*' The robbers, hemmed *twixt death and fire. 
Knew not how to escape thy ire; 
O'er Jomsburg castle's highest towers 
Thy wrath the whirlwind-fire pours. 
The heathen on his false gods calls. 
And trembles even in their halls; 
And by the light from its own flame 
The king this viking-hold overcame." 

Many people in Vendland submitted to King Mag- 
nus, but many more got out of the way and fled. 
King Magnus returned to Denmark, and prepared to 
take his winter abode there, and sent away the Danish, 
and also a great many of the Norwegian people, he 
had brought with him. 
Chapter The samc wiutcr in which Swend Ulfsson was 

XXVI. 

Swend re- raiscd to the government of the whole Danish domi- 
tuirof ^^ nions, and had made friends of a great number of the 
king. principal chiefs in Denmark, and obtained the aflfec- 

tions of the people, he assumed, by the advice of 
many of the chiefs, the title of king. But when in 
the spring thereafter he heard that King Magnus had 
come from the north with a great army, Swend went 
over to Scania, from thence up to Gotland, and so on 
to Sweden to his relation King Onund, where he re- 



KllSrOS OF NORWAY. 383 

mained all summer, and sent spies out to Denmark, saga vm. 
to inquire about the king's proceedings and the 
number of his men. Now when Swend heard that 
King Magnus had let a great part of his army go 
away, and also that he was south in Jutland, he rode 
from Sweden with a great body of people which the 
Swedish king had given him. When Swend came to 
Scania the people of that country received him well, 
treated him as their king, and men joined him in 
crowds. He then went on to Sealand, where he was 
also well received, and the whole country joined 
him. He then went to Fyen, and laid all the islands 
under his power ; and as the people also joined him, 
he collected a great army, and many ships of war. 
King Magnus married his sister Ulf hild, Olaf 's daugh- 
ter, to Otto duke of Saxony. They had a son who 
was called Magnus, from whom a great family has 
descended. The dukes who rule over Brunswig 
reckon their descent from King Olaf the Saint. 

King Magnus heard this news, and at the same Chapter 
time that the people of Vendland had a large force on of King ' 
foot. He summoned people therefore to come to him, i^j^""^ ^ 
and drew together a great army in Jutland. Otto force, 
also, the duke of Brunswig, who had married Ulf hild. 
King Olaf the Saint's daughter, and the sister of King 
Magnus, came to him with a great troop. The Danish 
chiefs pressed King Magnus to advance against the 
Vendland army, and not to allow pagans to march 
over and lay waste the country ; so it was resolved 
that the king with his army should proceed south to 
Heidaby.* While King Magnus lay at Skotburg 
river, on Leyrskog's Heath, he got intelligence con- 
cerning the Vendland army, and that it was so nu- 
merous it could not be counted; whereas King Mag- 



* Now Haddeby, at the town of Sleswig. The river Slie divides 
this ancient town site from the^ present town of Sleswig. 



384 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA viiL nus had so few, that there seemed no chance for him 
but to fly. The king, however, determined on fight- 
ing, if there was any possibility of gaining the vic- 
tory ; but the most dissuaded him from venturing on 
an engagement, and all, as one man, said that the Vend- 
land people had undoubtedly a prodigious force. Duke 
Otto, however, pressed much to go to battle. Then 
the king ordered the whole army to be gathered by 
the war trumpets into battle array, and ordered all 
the men to arm, and to lie down for the night under 
their shields ; for he was told the enemy's army had 
come to the neighbourhood. The king was very 
thoughtful ; for he was vexed that he should be 
obliged to fly, which fate he had never experienced 
before. He slept but little all night, and chaunted 
his prayers. 
Chapter The foUowiug day was Michaelmas eve. Towards 
Of King * dawn the king slumbered, and dreamt that his father 
ours mi. King Olaf the Saint appeared to him, and said, "Art 
thou so melancholy and afraid, because the Vendland 
people come against thee with a great army? Be 
not afraid of heathens, although they be many ; for I 
shall be with thee in the battle. Prepare, therefore, to 
give battle to the Vendlanders, when thou hearest my 
trumpet." When the king awoke he told his dream 
to his men, and the day was then dawning. At that 
moment all the people heard a ringing of bells in the 
air ; and those among King Magnus's men who had 
been in Nidaros thought that it was the ringing of the 
beU called Glod, which King Olaf had presented to 
the church of Saint Clement in the town of Nidaros. 
Chapter Thcu King Maguus stood up, and ordered the war 
^^eff trumpets to sound, and at that moment the Vendland 
Leyrskog's armv advauccd from the south across the river 

heEth. *^ 

against him ; on which the whole of the king's army 
stood up, and advanced against the heathens. King 
Magnus threw off from him his coat of ring-mail, and 



KINGS OF NORWAY- 385 

had a red silk shirt outside over his clothes, and had saga vul 
in his hands the battle-axe called Hel * which had be- 
longed to King Olaf. King Magnus ran on before all 
his men to the enemy's army, and instantly hewed 
down with both hands every man who came against 
him. So says Amor, the earl's scald :-^ 

" His armour on the ground he flung^ 
His broad axe round his head he swung; 
And Norway's king strode on in mighty 
Through ringing swords^ to the wild fight. 
His broad axe Hel with both hands wielding, 
Shields, helms^ and sculls before it yielding. 
He seemed with Fate the world to share. 
And life or death to deal out there." 

This battle was not very long ; for the king's men 
were very fiery, and where they came the Vendland 
men fell as thick as tangles heaped up by the waves 
on the strand. They who stood behind betook them- 
selves to flight, and were hewed down hke cattle at a 
slaughter. The king himself drove the fugitives east- 
ward over the heath, and people fell all over the moor. 
So says Thiodolf : — 

'^ And foremost he pursued, 
And the flying foe down hewed ; 
An eagle's feast each stroke. 
As the Vendland helms he broke. 
He drove them o'er the heath. 
And they fly from bloody death; 
But the moor, a mile or more. 
With the dead was studded o'er." 

It is a common saying, that there never was so 
great a slaughter of men in the northern lands, since 
the time of Christianity, as took place among the 
Vendland people on Lyrskog's Heath. On the other 
side, not many of King Magnus's people were killed, 
although many were wounded. It is told in the Bre- 
men Bookf, that the Danes had killed Rettebur, a 

* Hel — Death; the goddess of Death. 

f Historia Ecclesiastica Adami Bremensis, lib. ii. cap. 59. Adam 
of Bremen wrote about 1075, about thirty years only after this battle. 

VOL. n. C C 



386 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAQA viiL a Vendland king ; and that he had eight sons, who 
sought to avenge their father, and laid waste a great 
part of Denmark, as far north as Ribe ; but they all 
fell on Lyrskog's Heath before King Magnus, and 
15,000 men with them. After the battle, the king 
ordered the wounds of his men to be bound; but 
there were not so many doctors in the army as were 
necessary, so the king himself went round, and felt 
the hands of those he thought best suited for the busi- 
ness ; and when he had thus stroked their palms he 
named twelve men, who, he thought, had the softest 
hands, and told them to bind the wounds of the people ; 
and although none of them had ever tried it before, 
they all became afterwards the best of doctors. There 
were two Iceland men among them: the one was Thor- 
kil, a son of Geisel, from Lyngar; the other was Atle, 
father of Bard Swart of Selardal, from whom many 
good doctors are descended. After this battle, the 
report of the miracle which King Olaf the Saint had 
worked was spread widely through the country ; and 
it was the common saying of the people, that no man 
could venture to fight against King Magnus Olafsson, 
for his father Saint Olaf stood so near to him that 
his enemies, on that account, never could do him 
harm. 
Chaftkr King Magnus immediately turned round with his 
B^tk^' army against Swend, whom he called his earl, al- 
at Re. though the Danes called him their king ; and he col- 
lected ships, and a great force, and on both sides a 
great strength was assembled. In Swend's army were 
many chiefs from Scania, Halland, Sealand, and Fyen ; 
while King Magnus, on the other hand, had mostly 
Norway and Jutland men, and with that war-force he 
hastened to meet Swend. They met at Re, on the west 
side of the isle of Rugen; and there was a great 
battle, which ended in King Magnus gaining the vic- 
tory, and Swend taking flight. After losing many 



Aarhuus. 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 387 

people, Swend fled back to Scania, and from thence to sagavhl 
Gotland, which was a safe refuge if he needed it, and 
stood open to him. King Magnus returned to Jut- 
land, where he remained aU winter with many people, 
and had a guard to watch his ships. Arnold, the earl's 
scald, speaks of this: — 

" At Re our battle-loving lord 
In bloody meeting stained his svord^-— 
At Re, upon the western shore. 
In Westland warriors* blood once more/* 

Swend Ulfsson went directly to his ships as soon as ^^™* 
he heard that King Magnus had left his fleet. He Battle at' 
drew to him all the men he could, and went round in 
winter among the islands, Sealand, Fyen, and others. 
Towards Yule he sailed to Jutland, and went into 
Lymfiord, where many people submitted to him. He 
imposed scatt upon some, but some joined King Mag- 
nus. Now when King Magnus heard what Swend 
was doing, he betook himself to his ships with all 
the Northmen then in Denmark, and a part of the 
Danish troops, and steered south along the land. 
Swend was then in Aarhuus with a great force ; and 
when he heard of King Magnus he laid his vessels 
without the town, and prepared for battle. When 
King Magnus heard for certain where Swend was, and 
that the distance between them was but short, he held 
a House-thing, and addressed his people thus : " It is 
reported to me that the earl and his fleet are lying 
not far from us, and that he has many people. Now 
I would let you know that I intend to go out against 
the earl and fight for it, although we have fewer 
people. We wiU, as formerly, put our trust in God, 
and Saint Olaf my father, who has given us victory 
sometimes when we fought, even though we had fewer 
men than the enemy. Now I would have you get 
ready to seek out the enemy, and give battle the mo- 
ment we find him by rowing all to the attack, and 

c c 2 



388 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VIII. being all ready for battle." Thereupon tbe men put 
on their weapons, each man making himself and his 
place ready ; and then they stretched themselves to 
their oars. When they saw the earl's ships they 
rowed towards them, and made ready to attack. 
When Swend's men saw the forces they armed them- 
selves, boimd their ships together, and then began 
one of the sharpest of battles. So says Thiodolf the 
scald: — 

'^ Shield against shield^ the earl and king 
Made shields and swords together ring. 
The gold-decked heroes made a play 
Which Hilda's iron-shirt men say 
They never saw before or since 
On battle-deck : the brave might wince^ 
As spear and arrow whistling flew, 
Point blank, death-bringing, quick and true." 

They fought at the bows, so that the men only on 
the bows could strike; the men on the forecastle 
thrust with spears ; and all who were farther oflF shot 
with light spears or javelins, or war-arrows. Some 
fought with stones, or short stakes ; and those who 
were aft of the mast shot with the bow. So says 
Thiodolf: — 

" Steel-pointed spear, and sharpened stake. 
Made the broad shield on arm shake: 
The eagle, hovering in the air. 
Screamed o'er the prey preparing there. 
And stones and arrows thickly flew. 
And many a warrior bold they slew. 
The bowman never twanged his bow 
And drew his shaft so oft as now ; 
And Drontheim's bowmen on that day 
Were not first tired of this play: 
Arrows and darts so quickly fly. 
You could not follow with the eye." 

Here it appears how hot the battle was with cast- 
ing weapons. King Magnus stood in the beginning 
of the battle within a shield-rampart ; but as it ap- 
peared to him that matters were going on too slowly, 
he leaped over the shields, and rushed forward in the 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 389 

ship, encouraging his men with a loud cheer, and saga vm. 
springing to the bows, where the battle was going on 
hand to hand. When his men saw this they urged 
each other on with mutual cheering, and there was 
one great hurra through all the ships. So says 
Thiodolf: — 

** ' On with our ships ! on to the foe ! ' 
Cry Magnus' men — on, on they go. 
Spears against shields in fury rattle, — 
Was never seen so fierce a battle." 

And now the battle was exceedingly sharp ; and in 
the assault Swend's ship was cleared of all her fore- 
castle men upon and on both sides of the forecastle. 
Then Magnus boarded Swend's ship, followed by his 
men ; and one after the other came up, and made so 
stout an assault that Swend's men gave way, and King 
Magnus first cleared that ship, and then the rest, one 
after the other. Swend fled, with a great part of his 
people ; but many fell, and many got life and peace. 
Thiodolf tells of this:— 

^' Brave Magnus, from the stem springing 
On to the stem, where swords were ringing 
From his sea-raven's beak of gold 
Deals death around — the brave ! the bold ! 
The earl's housemen now begin 
To shrink an^ fall : their ranks grow thin — 
The king's luck thrives — their decks are cleared. 
Of fighting men no more appeared. 
The earl's ships are driven to flight. 
Before the king would stop the fight: 
The gold-distributor first then 
Gave quarters to the vanquished men.** 

This battle was fought on the last Sunday before 
Yule. So says Thiodolf: — 

^* ^Twas on a Sunday morning bright. 
Fell out this great and bloody fight. 
When men were arming, fighting, dying, 
Or on the red decks wounded lying. 
And many a man, foredoomed to die. 
To save his life o'erboard did fly, 
But sank ; for swimming could not save. 
And dead men rolled in every wave." 

CC 3 



390 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VIII. Magnus took seven ships from Swend's people. So 
says Thiodolf : — 

^' Thick Olaf 's son seven vessels cleared, 
And with his fleet the prizes steered. 
The Norway girls will not he sad 
To hear snch news — each from her lad." 

He also sings : — 

*' The captured men will grieve the most 
Swend and their comrades to have lost ; 
For it went ill with those who fled^ 
Their wounded had no easy hed. 
A heavy storm that very night 
O'ertook them flying from ^e fight ; 
And sculls and hones are tumbling rounds 
Under the sea, on sandy ground." 

Swend fled inunediately by night to Sealand, with 
the men who had escaped and were inclined to follow 
him; but King Magnus brought his ships to the 
shore, and sent his men up the country in the night- 
time, and early in the morning they came down to 
the strand with a great booty in cattle. Thiodolf tells 
about it : — 

*' But yesterday with heavy stones 
We crushed their sculls^ and broke their bones^ 
And thinned their ranks; and now to-day 
Up through their land we've ta'en our way. 
And driven their cattle to the shore. 
And filled our ships with food in store. 
To save his land from our quick swords, 
Swend will need something more than words." 

chattbe King Magnus sailed with his fleet from the south 

Swend's ' after Swend to Sealand ; but as soon as the king came 

flight. there Swend fled up the country with his men, and 

Magnus followed them, and pursued the fugitives, 

killing all that were laid hold of. So says Thiodolf: — 

'< The Sealand girl asks with fear, 
* Whose hlood-bespattered shield and spear — 
The earl's or king's — up from the shore 
'Moved on with many a warrior more ? ' 
We scoured through all their muddy lanes, 
Woodlands, and fields, and miry plains. 



KINGS OF NOBWAY. 391 

Their hasty footmarks in the clay saga viii. 

Showed that to Ringsted led their way. 

" Spattered with mud from heel to head, 
Our gallant lord his true men led. 
Will Lund's earl halt his hasty flight. 
And try on land another fight? 
His hanner yesterday was seen. 
The sand-hills and green trees between, 
Through moss and mire to the strand. 
In arrow flighty leaving the land.** 

Then Swend fled over to Fyen Island, and King 
Magnus carried fire and sword through Sealand, and 
burnt all round, because their men had joined Swend's 
l.roop in harvest. So says Thiodolf : — 

" As Swend in winter had destroyed 
The royal house, the king employed 
No little force to guard the land, 
And the earl's forays to withstand. 
An armed hand one morn he found. 
And so heset them round and round, 
That Canute's nephew quickly fled. 
Or he would have been captive led. 

" Our Drontheim king in his just ire 
Laid waste the land with sword and fire. 
Burnt every house, and over all 
Struck terror into great and small. 
To the earl's friends he well repaid 
Their deadly hate— > such wild work made 
On them and theirs, that from his fury^ 
Flying for life, away they hurry." 

As soon as King Magnus heard that Swend with Chmter 
his troops had gone across to Fyen, he sailed after Burning 
them ; and when Swend heard this news he went on ^ ^y^"- 
board ship and sailed to Scania, and from thence to 
Gotland, and at last to the Swedish king. King 
Magnus landed in Fyen, and plundered and burned 
over all ; and aU of Swend's men who came there fled 
far enough. Thiodolf speaks of it thus : — 

'' Fiona Isle^ once green and fair. 
Lies black and reeking through the air: 
The red fog rises, thick and hot. 
From burning farm and smouldering cot. 

C C 4 



392 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VIII. 



CHArrxK 
XXXIV. 

Battle at 
Helganess. 



The gaping thralls in terror gaze 
On the hroad upward spiring hlaze^ 
From thatched roofs and oak-built walls^ 
Their murdered masters* stately halls. 

^' Swend's men, my girl, will not forget 
That thrice they have the Norsemen met, — 
By sea, by land, with steel, with fire. 
Thrice have they felt the Norse king's ire. 
Fiona's maids are slim and fair. 
The lovely prizes, lads, we'll share: 
Some stand to arms in rank and row. 
Some seize, bring off, and fend with blow." 

After this the people of Denmark submitted to 
King Magnus, and during the rest of the winter there 
was peace. King Magnus then appointed some of his 
men to govern Denmark ; and when spring was ad- 
vanced he sailed northwards with his fleet to Norway, 
where he remained a great part of the summer. 

Now when Swend heard that King Magnus had 
gone to Norway he rode straight down, and had many 
people out of Sweden with him. The people of 
Scania received him well, and he again collected an 
army, with which he first crossed over into Sealand, 
and seized upon it and Fyen, and all the other isles. 
When King Magnus heard of this he gathered toge- 
ther men and ships, and sailed to Denmark ; and as 
soon as he knew where Swend was lying with his 
ships. King Magnus sailed to meet him. They met 
at a place called Helganess*, and the battle began 
about the faU of day. King Magnus had fewer men, 
but larger and better equipt vessels. So says Arnor, 
the earl's scald : — 

^^ At Helganess — so goes the tale — 
The brare wolf-feeder, under sail. 
Made many an ocean-elk * his prey. 
Seized many a ship ere break of day. 



* Helganess is eastward of the town Aarhuus, in North Jutland, in 
the parish of Helganess, barony of Mots, 
t Ship. 



KINGS OF NOBWAY. 



393 



When twilight fell he urged the fight, saga viii. 

Close combat — man to man — all night; 
Through a long harvest night's dark hours^ 
Down poured die battle's iron showers.*' 

The battle was very hot, and as night advanced 
the fall of men was great. King Magnus, during the 
whole night, threw hand-spears. Thiodolf speaks of 
this: — 

" And there at Helganess sank down^ 
Sore wounded, men of great renown; 
And Swend's retainers lost all heart. 
Ducking before the flying dart. 
The Norsemen's king let fly his spears, 
His death- wounds adding to their fears; 
For each spear-blade was wet all o'er. 
Up to the shaft in their life-gore." 

To make a short tale, King Magnus won the victory 
in this battle, and Swend fled. His ship was cleared 
of men from stem to stem ; and it went so on board 
many others of his ships. So says Thiodolf: — 

" Earl Swend fled from the empty deck. 
His lonely ship an unmann'd wreck; 
Magnus the Good, the people's friend, 
Pressed to the death on the false Swend. 
Hneiti*, the sword his father bore. 
Was, edge and point, stained red with gore : 
Swords sprinkle blood o'er armour bright. 
When kings for land and power fight." 

And he also says, — 

" The cutters of Biorne's brother t 
Soon changed their owner for another ; 
The king took them and all their gear: 
The crews, however, got off clear." 

A great number of Swend's men fell, and King 
Magnus and his men had a vast booty to divide. So 
says Thiodolf: — 

^' Where the Norsemen the Danish slew, 
A Gotland shield and breast-plate true 

* This was the name of Saint Olaf 's sword, which Magnus had 
recovered. 

f Swend Ulfsson had a brother called Biorn, or by the English 
chroniclers £sbern. 



394 CHKONICLE OF THE 

SAGA viiL Fell to my share of spoil by lot; 

And something more i' the soatii I got : 
(There all the summer swords were ringing:) 
A helm, gay arms, and gear worth bringing. 
Home to my quiet lovely one 
1 sent — with news how we had won." 

Swend fled up to Scania with all the men who 
escaped with him; and King Magnus and his people 
drove the fugitives up through the coimtry, without 
meeting any opposition either firom Swend's men or 
the bonders. So says Thiodolf : — 

" Olaf 's brave son then gave eommand. 
All his ships' crews should quickly land : 
King Magnus, marching at their head, 
A noble band of warriors led. 
A foray through the land he makes; 
Denmark in every quarter shakes. 
Up hill and down the horses scour. 
Carrying the Danes from Norsemen's power." 

King Magnus drove with fire and sword through 
the land. So says Thiodolf: — 

" And now the Norsemen storm along. 
Following their banner in a throng : 
King Magnus' banner flames on high, 
A star to guide our roaming by. 
To Lund, o'er Scania's peaceful field. 
My shoulder bore my useless shield : 
A fairer land, a better road. 
As friend or foe, I never trod." 

They began to bum the habitations aU around, and 
the people fled on every side. So says Thiodolf: — 

" Our ice-cold iron in great store. 
Our arms, beside the king we bore : 
The Scanian rogues fly at the view 
Of men and steel all sharp and true. 
Their timbered houses flame on high. 
Red flashing over half the sky ; 
The blazing town flings forth its light, 
Lighting the cowards on their flight.'' 

And he also sang, — 

" The king o'er all the Danish land 
Roams, with his fire-bringing band: 



KINGS OF NOBWAY. 395 

The house^ the hut^ the farm^ the town^ saga viii. 

All where men dwelt is burned down. ' 

0*er Denmark's plains and corn-fields^ 

Meadows and moors^ are seen our shields : 

Victorious over all^ we chase 

Swend's wounded men from place to place. 

'^ Across Fiona's moor again. 
The paths late trodden by our men 
We tread once more^ until quite near. 
Through morning mist, the foes appear. 
Then up our numerous banners flare 
In the cold early morning air; 
And they from Magnus* power who fly 
Cannot his quick war-work deny." 

Then Swend fled eastwards along Scania, and King 
Magnus returned to his ships, and steered eastwards 
also along the Scanian coast, having got ready with 
the greatest haste to sail. Thiodolf sings thus about 
it: — 

^' No drink but the salt sea 
On board our ships had we. 
When, following our king. 
On board our ships we spring. 
Hard work on the salt sea. 
Off Scania*s coast, had we; 
But we laboured for the king. 
To his foemen death to bring." 

Swend fled to Gotland, and then sought refuge with 
the Swedish king, with whom he remained all winter, 
aind was treated with great respect. 

When King Magnus had subdued Scania he turned ^xxv* 
about, and first went to Falster, where he landed, of King* 
plundered, and killed many people who had before ^^a^g^. 
submitted to Swend. Amor speaks of this : — 

^< A bloody vengeance for their guile 
King Magnus takes on Falster Isle; 
The treacherous Danes his fury feel. 
And fall before his purpled steel. 
The battle-field is covered o'er 
With eagles' prey from shore to shore; 
And the king's courtmen were the first 
To quench with blood the ravens' thirst." 



396 CHRONICLE OF THE 

SAGA VIII. Thereafter Magnus with his fleet proceeded to the 
isle of Fyen, went on land, plundered, and made great 
devastation. So says Amor, the earl's scald : — 

*' To fair Fiona's grassy shore 
His banner now again he bore : 
He who the mail-shirt's linked chains 
Severs, and all its lustre stains, — 
He will be long remembered there^ 
The warrior in his twentieth year, 
Whom their black ravens from afar 
Saluted as he went to war." 

xx^xvi ^^S Magnus remainded in Denmark all that win- 
of King * ter, and sat in peace. He had held many battles, and 
^^T' had gained the victory in aU. So says Odd Kikina- 
scald: — 

'' 'Fore Michaelmas was struck the blow 
That laid the Vendland vikings low; 
And people learned with joy to hear 
The clang of arms, and leaders' cheer. 
Short before Yule feU out the day. 
Southward of Aarhus, where the fray. 
Though not enough the foe to quell. 
Was of the bloodiest men can tell." 

And Amor says : — 

" Olaf 's avenger who can sing? 
The scald cannot o'ertake the king. 
Who makes the war-bird daily drain 
The corpse-blood of his foemen slain. 
Four battles won within a year, — 
' Breaker of shields ! with sword and spear. 

And hand to hand, exalt thy fame 
Above the kings of greatest name." 

King Magnus had three battles with Swend Ulfs- 
son. So says Thiodolf : — 

** To our brave Drontheim sovereign's prais6 
The scald may all his scaldcraft raise; 
For fortune, and for daring deed. 
His song will not the truth exceed. 
After three battles to regain 
What was his own, imjustly ta'en. 
Unjustly kept, and dues denied. 
He levied dues in red-blood dyed." 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 397 

While King Magnus the Good, a son of King Olaf saga vm. 
the Saint, ruled over Norway, as before related, the chapter 
Earl Rognvald Brusesson lived with him. Earl Thor- of^^g^' 
finn Sigurdsson, the uncle of Rognvald, ruled then Magnus, 
over Orkney. King Magnus sent Rognvald west to Ann and " 
Orkney, and ordered that Thorfinn should let him ^^if^ 
have his father's heritage. Thorfinn let Rognvald Orkney. 
have a third part of the land along with him ; for 
so had Bruse, the father of Rognvald, had it at his 
dying day. Earl Thorfinn was married to Ingeborg, 
the earl-mother, who was a daughter of Finn Ame- 
son. Earl Rognvald thought he should have two 
thirds of the land, as Olaf the Saint had promised 
to his father Bruse, and as Bruse had enjoyed as long 
as Olaf lived. This was the origin of a great strife 
between these relations, concerning which wp have a 
long saga. They had a great battle in Pentland Firth, 
in which Kalf Ameson was with Earl Thorfinn. So 
says Biom Gulbraascald : — 

** Thy cutters^ dashing through the tide. 
Brought aid to Earl Thorfinn's side, 
Finn*s son-in-law, and people say 
Thy aid made Bruse's son give way. 
Kalf, thou art fond of warlike toil. 
Gay in the strife and bloody broil; 
But here 'twas hate made thee contend 
Against Earl Rognvald, the king's friend." 

King Magnus ruled then both over Denmark and chapter 
Norway; and when he had got possession of the Danish ofxhS^ 
dominions he sent embassadors over to England to Magnus's 
King Edward, who brought to him King Magnus's 
letter and seal. And in this letter there stood, along 
with a salutation from King Magnus, these words : 
** Ye must have heard of the agreement which I and 
Hardacanute made, — that he of us two who survived 
the other should have all the land and people which 
the deceased had possessed. Now it has so turned 



398 



CHRONICLE OF THE 



SAGA VIIL 



CiiAPTxa 
XXXIX. 

King 
Edward's 
answer to 
to King 
Magnus's 
letter. 



out, as ye have no doubt heard, that I have taken the 
Danish dominions as my heritage after Hardacanute. 
But before he departed this life he had England as 
well as Denmark ; therefore I consider myself now, in 
consequence of my rights by this agreement, to own 
England also. Now I will therefore that thou deliver 
to me the kingdom ; otherwise I will seek to take it 
by arms, both from Denmark and Norway: and let 
him rule the land to whom fate gives the victory," 

Now when King Edward had read this letter, he 
replied thus : " It is known to all men in this country 
that King Ethelred, my father, was udal-bom to this 
kingdom, both after the old and new law of inherit- 
ance. We were four sons after him ; and when he by 
death left the throne, my brother Edmund took the 
government and kingdom ; for he was the oldest of us 
brothers, and I was well satisfied that it was so. And 
after him my stepfather, Canute the Great, took the 
kingdom, and so long as he lived. there was no access 
to it. After him my brother Harald was king as long 
as he lived ; and after him my brother Hardacanute 
took the kingdoms both of Denmark and England; 
for he thought that a just brotherly division that 
he should have both England and Denmark, and 
that I should have no kingdom at all. Now he died, 
and then it was the resolution of all the people of 
the country to take me for king here in England. 
So long as I had no kingly title I served my superiors, 
in all respects, like those who had no claims by birth 
to land or kingdom. Now, however, 1 have received 
the kingly title, and am consecrated king. I have 
established my royal dignity and authority, as my 
father before me ; and while I live I will not renounce 
my title. If King Magnus come here with an army, 
I will gather no army against him ; but he shall only 
get the opportunity of taking England when he has 



KINGS OF NORWAY. 399 

taken my life. Tell him these words of mine." The saga vm. 
embassadors went back to King Magnus, and told him 
the answer to their message. King Magnus reflected 
a while, and answered thus : " I think it wisest, and 
will succeed best, to let King Edward have his king- 
dom in peace for me, and that I keep the kingdoms 
God has put into my hands." 



END OF THE SECOND VOLUME. 



London : 

Printed by A. Spottiswoode. 

Ne wr- Street- Squa^'e. 



*t 



>, 



h